CNC

60/60S Series
64

PROGRAMMING MANUAL
(LATHE TYPE)

BNP-B2181E(ENG)
MELDAS and MELDASMAGIC are registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
Other company and product names that appear in this manual are trademarks or registered
trademarks of the respective company.
 Introduction

This manual is a guide for using the MELDAS 60/60S Series, MELDASMAGIC64.
Programming is described in this manual, so read this manual thoroughly before starting
programming. Thoroughly study the "Precautions for Safety" on the following page to ensure
safe use of this NC unit.

* The "MELDAS60 Series" includes the M64A, M64, M65, M66 and M65V.
* The "MELDAS60S Series" includes the M64AS, M64S, M65S and M66S.

Details described in this manual

CAUTION

For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction manual
issued by the machine maker takes precedence over this manual.
Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added.
Refer to the specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.
Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine maker for details on each machine
tool.
Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and
some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.

General precautions

(1) Refer to the following documents for details on handling

MELDAS 60/60S Series Operation Manual ................................. BNP-B2180

I
 Precautions for Safety
Always read the specifications issued by the machine maker, this manual, related manuals and
attached documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure
correct use.
Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling
DANGER is mistaken.

When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is

WARNING
mistaken.

When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may occur if
CAUTION
handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation.
In any case, important information that must always be observed is described.

DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING
Not applicable in this manual.

CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction
manual issued by the machine maker takes precedence over this manual.
Items not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Refer to the
specifications issued by the machine maker before starting use.
Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by each machine maker for details on each machine
tool.
Some screens and functions may differ depending on the NC system (or its version), and
some functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.

II
 CAUTION
2. Items related to operation
Before starting actual machining, always carry out dry run operation to confirm the
machining program, tool offset amount and workpiece offset amount, etc.
If the workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during single block stop, the
new setting will be valid from the next block.
Turn the mirror image ON and OFF at the mirror image center.
If the tool offset amount is changed during automatic operation (including during single
block stop), it will be validated from the next block or blocks onwards.

3. Items related to programming

The commands with "no value after G" will be handled as "G00" during operation.
";" "EOB" and "%" "EOR" are expressions used for explanation. The actual codes are:
For ISO: "CR, LF", or "LF" and "%".
Programs created on the Edit screen are stored in the NC memory in a "CR, LF" format,
but programs created with external devices such as the FLD or RS-232C may be stored
in an "LF" format.
The actual codes for EIA are: "EOB (End of Block)" and "EOR (End of Record)".
When creating the machining program, select the appropriate machining conditions, and
make sure that the performance, capacity and limits of the machine and NC are not
exceeded. The examples do not consider the machining conditions.
Do not change fixed cycle programs without the prior approval of the machine maker.
When programming the multi-system, take special care to the movements of the
programs for other systems.

III
 CONTENTS
1. Control Axes ...................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Coordinate word and control axis................................................................................ 1
1.2 Coordinate systems and coordinate zero point symbols............................................ 2
2. Input Command Units....................................................................................................... 3
2.1 Input command units ................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Input setting units......................................................................................................... 3
3. Data Formats...................................................................................................................... 4
3.1 Tape codes .................................................................................................................. 4
3.2 Program formats.......................................................................................................... 8
3.3 Program address check function................................................................................. 11
3.4 Tape memory format ................................................................................................... 12
3.5 Optional block skip ("/") ............................................................................................... 12
3.6 Program/sequence/block numbers; O, N.................................................................... 13
3.7 Parity H/V..................................................................................................................... 14
3.8 G code lists .................................................................................................................. 15
3.9 Precautions before starting machining........................................................................ 20
4. Buffer Register................................................................................................................... 21
4.1 Input buffer................................................................................................................... 21
4.2 Pre-read buffers........................................................................................................... 22
5. Position Commands ......................................................................................................... 23
5.1 Incremental/absolute value commands ...................................................................... 23
5.2 Radius/diameter commands ....................................................................................... 24
5.3 Inch/metric conversion; G20, G21............................................................................... 25
5.4 Decimal point input ...................................................................................................... 29
6. Interpolation Functions .................................................................................................... 33
6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00.............................................................................. 33
6.2 Linear interpolation; G01 ............................................................................................. 40
6.3 Circular interpolation; G02, G03.................................................................................. 43
6.4 R specification circular interpolation; G02, G03.......................................................... 47
6.5 Plane selection; G17, G18, G19 ................................................................................. 49
6.6 Thread cutting.............................................................................................................. 51
6.6.1 Constant lead thread cutting; G33....................................................................... 51
6.6.2 Inch thread cutting; G33 ...................................................................................... 55
6.6.3 Continuous thread cutting.................................................................................... 56
6.6.4 Variable lead thread cutting................................................................................. 57
6.6.5 Circular thread cutting; G35, G36........................................................................ 60
6.7 Helical interpolation; G17, G18, G19, and G02, G03 (Only MAGIC64) ....................... 64
6.8 Milling interpolation; G12.1.......................................................................................... 67
6.8.1 Selecting milling mode......................................................................................... 69
6.8.2 Milling interpolation control and command axes ................................................. 70
6.8.3 Selecting a plane during the milling mode .......................................................... 72
6.8.4 Setting milling coordinate system........................................................................ 73
6.8.5 Preparatory functions .......................................................................................... 76
6.8.6 Switching from milling mode to turning mode; G13.1 ......................................... 81
6.8.7 Feed function ....................................................................................................... 81
6.8.8 Program support functions .................................................................................. 81
6.8.9 Miscellaneous functions ...................................................................................... 82
6.8.10 Tool offset functions........................................................................................... 83
6.8.11 Interference check ............................................................................................. 99

i
 6.9 Circular interpolation; G07.1 (6 and 7 only in G code system)................................... 107
6.10 Pole coordinate interpolation; G12.1 (Only 6, 7 in G code system) ......................... 115
6.11 Exponential function interpolation; G02.3, G03.3 ..................................................... 122
7. Feed Functions .................................................................................................................. 128
7.1 Rapid traverse rate ...................................................................................................... 128
7.2 Cutting feedrate ........................................................................................................... 128
7.3 F1-digit feed................................................................................................................. 129
7.4 Synchronous/asynchronous feed; G94, G95.............................................................. 131
7.5 Feedrate designation and effects on control axes ...................................................... 133
7.6 Thread cutting mode.................................................................................................... 137
7.7 Automatic acceleration/deceleration ........................................................................... 138
7.8 Speed clamp................................................................................................................ 138
7.9 Exact stop check; G09 ................................................................................................ 139
7.10 Exact stop check mode; G61 .................................................................................... 142
7.11 Deceleration check .................................................................................................... 143
7.11.1 G1 → G0 deceleration check ............................................................................ 145
7.11.2 G1 → G1 deceleration check ............................................................................ 146
7.12 Automatic corner override; G62 ................................................................................ 147
7.13 Tapping mode; G63................................................................................................... 152
7.14 Cutting mode; G64 .................................................................................................... 152
8. Dwell ................................................................................................................................... 153
8.1 Per-second dwell; G04 ................................................................................................ 153
9. Miscellaneous Functions ................................................................................................. 155
9.1 Miscellaneous functions (M8-digits BCD) ................................................................... 155
9.2 2nd miscellaneous functions (A8-digits, B8-digits or C8-digits) ................................. 157
9.3 Index table indexing..................................................................................................... 158
10. Spindle Functions ........................................................................................................... 160
10.1 Spindle functions (S2-digits BCD) ..... During standard PLC specifications ............ 160
10.2 Spindle functions (S6-digits Analog) ......................................................................... 160
10.3 Spindle functions (S8-digits)...................................................................................... 161
10.4 Constant surface speed control; G96, G97 .............................................................. 162
10.5 Spindle clamp speed setting; G92 ............................................................................ 163
10.6 Spindle/C axis control................................................................................................ 164
10.7 Spindle synchronization control I; G114.1 ................................................................ 167
10.8 Spindle synchronization control II ............................................................................. 173
10.9 Tool-spindle synchronization IA
(spindle-spindle polygon machining); G114.2........................................................... 180
10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining); G51.2
(Only 6 and 7 in G code system)............................................................................. 187
10.11 Tool-spindle synchronization IC (spindle-NC axis polygon machining); G51.2
(Only 6 and 7 in G code system)............................................................................. 195
10.12 Multiple spindle control............................................................................................ 198
10.12.1 Multiple spindle control I (multiple spindle command) .................................... 199
10.12.2 Multiple spindle control I (multiple selection command) ................................. 200
10.12.3 Multiple spindle control II ................................................................................. 203
11. Tool Functions................................................................................................................. 206
11.1 Tool functions (T8-digits BCD) .................................................................................. 206
12. Tool Offset Functions .................................................................................................... 207
12.1 Tool offset ................................................................................................................. 207
12.1.1 Tool offset start .................................................................................................. 208
12.1.2 Expanded method at starting tool offset............................................................ 209
12.2 Tool length offset ...................................................................................................... 211
12.3 Tool nose wear offset ............................................................................................... 213

ii
 12.4 Tool nose radius compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46 ............................................ 214
12.4.1 Tool nose point and compensation directions ................................................. 216
12.4.2 Tool nose radius compensation operations ..................................................... 220
12.4.3 Other operations during tool nose radius compensation ................................. 237
12.4.4 G41/G42 commands and I, J, K designation ................................................... 245
12.4.5 Interrupts during tool nose radius compensation ............................................. 250
12.4.6 General precautions for tool nose radius compensation ................................. 252
12.4.7 Interference check ............................................................................................ 253
12.5 Programmed tool offset input; G10 ........................................................................... 258
12.6 Tool life management II ............................................................................................ 261
12.6.1 Counting the tool life .......................................................................................... 264
13. Program Support Functions ......................................................................................... 266
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning ............................................................................................ 266
13.1.1 Longitudinal cutting cycle; G77 ......................................................................... 267
13.1.2 Thread cutting cycle; G78.................................................................................. 269
13.1.3 Face cutting cycle; G79 ..................................................................................... 272
13.2 Fixed cycle for turning (MELDAS special format)..................................................... 275
13.3 Compound fixed cycles ............................................................................................. 276
13.3.1 Longitudinal rough cutting cycle; G71 ............................................................... 277
13.3.2 Face rough cutting cycle; G72........................................................................... 291
13.3.3 Formed material rough cutting cycle; G73 ........................................................ 293
13.3.4 Finishing cycle; G70 .......................................................................................... 297
13.3.5 Face cut-off cycle; G74...................................................................................... 298
13.3.6 Longitudinal cut-off cycle; G75 .......................................................................... 300
13.3.7 Compound thread cutting cycle; G76................................................................ 302
13.3.8 Precautions for compound fixed cycles ; G70 ~ G76 ....................................... 306
13.4 Compound fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)..................................................... 311
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles; G80 ~ G89 ........................................................................ 314
13.5.1 Face deep hole drilling cycle 1; G83
(Longitudinal deep hole drilling cycle 1; G87) ................................................... 322
13.5.2 Face tapping cycle; G84 (Longitudinal tapping cycle; G88) / Face reverse
tapping cycle; G84.1 (Longitudinal reverse tapping cycle; G88.1) ................... 323
13.5.3 Face boring cycle; G85 (Longitudinal boring cycle; G89)................................. 327
13.5.4 Deep hole drilling cycle 2; G83.2....................................................................... 327
13.5.5 Hole drilling fixed cycle cancel; G80 ................................................................. 330
13.5.6 Precautions when using a hole drilling fixed cycle............................................ 330
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle; G80 ~ G89 (MELDAS special format) ............................... 332
13.6.1 Initial point and R point level return; G98, G99 ................................................. 351
13.6.2 Setting of workpiece coordinates in fixed cycle mode ...................................... 352
13.7 Subprogram control; M98, M99, M198 ..................................................................... 353
13.7.1 Calling subprogram with M98 and M99 commands ......................................... 353
13.7.2 Calling subprogram with M198 commands....................................................... 359
13.8 Variable commands .................................................................................................. 360
13.9 User macro ................................................................................................................ 363
13.9.1 User macro commands; G65, G66, G66.1, G67 .............................................. 363
13.9.2 Macro call instruction ........................................................................................ 364
13.9.3 Variables ............................................................................................................ 372
13.9.4 Types of variables.............................................................................................. 374
13.9.5 Operation commands ........................................................................................ 412
13.9.6 Control commands ............................................................................................ 418
13.9.7 External output commands................................................................................ 421
13.9.8 Precautions ........................................................................................................ 423
13.10 Double-turret mirror image ...................................................................................... 425

iii
 13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I ...................................................................... 435
13.11.1 Corner chamfering ",C" (or "I_", "K_", "C_").................................................... 435
13.11.2 Corner rounding ",R_" (or "R_") ...................................................................... 437
13.11.3 Corner chamfering/corner rounding expansion .............................................. 439
13.11.4 Interrupt during corner chamfering/corner rounding ....................................... 441
13.12 Corner chamfering/corner rounding II ..................................................................... 443
13.12.1 Corner chamfering ",C" (or "I_", "K_", "C_").................................................... 443
13.12.2 Corner rounding ",R_" (or "R_") ...................................................................... 446
13.12.3 Corner chamfering/corner rounding expansion .............................................. 447
13.12.4 Interrupt during corner chamfering/corner rounding ....................................... 447
13.13 Linear angle command ........................................................................................... 448
13.14 Geometric ............................................................................................................... 449
13.14.1 Geometric I ..................................................................................................... 449
13.14.2 Geometric IB ................................................................................................... 452
13.15 Program parameter input; G10, G11 ..................................................................... 466
13.16 Macro interrupt ........................................................................................................ 467
13.17 Tool change position return; G30.1 ~ G30.5 .......................................................... 475
13.18 ASCII code macro ................................................................................................... 478
13.19 Balance cut; G15, G14 ............................................................................................ 483
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems ............................................................ 487
13.20.1 Synchronization standby code (! code)........................................................... 487
13.20.2 Start Point Designation Synchronizing (Type 1); G115 ................................ 490
13.20.3 Start Point Designation Synchronizing (Type 2); G116 ............................... 492
13.20.4 Synchronization function expansion (M code) ................................................ 494
13.21 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle........................................................... 497
13.21.1 Parameter setting command ........................................................................... 497
13.21.2 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle I; G76.1..................................... 498
13.21.3 2-system simultaneous thread cutting cycle II; G76.2 .................................... 500
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions ......................................................................... 503
14.1 Coordinate words and control axes .......................................................................... 503
14.2 Basic machine, workpiece and local coordinate systems ........................................ 504
14.3 Machine zero point and 2nd reference point (Zero point) ........................................ 505
14.4 Automatic coordinate system setting ........................................................................ 506
14.5 Machine coordinate system selection; G53 .............................................................. 507
14.6 Coordinate system setting; G92................................................................................ 508
14.7 Reference point (Zero point) return; G28, G29......................................................... 509
14.8 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point (Zero point) return; G30 ...................................... 513
14.9 Simple zero point return ............................................................................................ 516
14.10 Reference point check; G27.................................................................................... 521
14.11 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset; G54 ~ G59 (G54.1) .................. 522
14.12 Local coordinate system setting; G52..................................................................... 528
14.13 Workpiece coordinate system preset; G92.1.......................................................... 529
15. Protection Function ........................................................................................................ 523
15.1 Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier; G22, G23 ................................................................. 534
15.2 Stored stroke limit...................................................................................................... 537
16. Measurement Support Functions.................................................................................. 541
16.1 Automatic tool length measurement; G37 ................................................................ 541
16.2 Skip function; G31 ..................................................................................................... 545
16.3 Multi-stage skip function; G31.n, G04....................................................................... 551
16.4 Multi-stage skip function 2; G31................................................................................ 553
16.5 Speed change skip ................................................................................................... 556
16.6 Programmable current limitation .............................................................................. 559
Appendix 1. Program Parameter Input N No. Correspondence Table........................... A-1
Appendix 2. Program Error ................................................................................................. A-4

iv
 1. Control Axes
1.1 Coordinate word and control axis

1. Control Axes
1.1 Coordinate word and control axis
Function and purpose

In the case of a lathe, the axis parallel to the spindle is known as the Z axis and its forward direction
is the direction in which the turret moves away from the spindle stock while the axis at right angles
to the Z axis is the X axis and its forward direction is the direction in which it moves away from the
Z axis, as shown in the figure below.

Tailstock

Spindle stock

Tool +Z

+X
+Y Turret

Coordinate axes and polarities

Since coordinates based on the right hand rule are used with a lathe, the forward direction of the Y
axis in the above figure which is at right angles to the X-Z plane is downward. It should be borne in
mind that an arc on the X-Z plane is expressed as clockwise or counterclockwise as seen from the
forward direction of the Y axis. (Refer to the section on circular interpolation.)

Spindle nose
Machine zero point
G54 Workpiece zero points (G54 ~ G59)
G55
G58

G52 G59

Local coordinate system

(Valid in G54 ~ G59)

G30

2nd reference point +Z

G28
+X
Reference point
(+Y)

Relationship between coordinates

1
 1. Control Axes
1.2 Coordinate systems and coordinate zero point symbols

1.2 Coordinate systems and coordinate zero point symbols

Function and purpose

: Reference point

: Machine coordinate zero point

: Workpiece coordinate zero points

(G54 ~ G59)

Upon completion of the reference point return, the parameters are referred to and automatically set
for the basic machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate systems (G54 ~ G59).
The basic machine coordinate system is set so that the first reference point is at the position
designated by the parameter from the basic machine coordinate zero point (machine zero point).

Basic machine
coordinate system Machine zero point
+Z

Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

coordinate coordinate coordinate coordinate
Z2 system system system system6 X3
X2 1 (G54) 5 (G58) (G59) Z 3
2 (G55)

Hypothetical machine
coordinate system Local
(shifted by G92) coordinate
system
X1 (G52)
+X Z1

1st reference point

The local coordinate system (G52) is valid on the coordinate systems designated by the
commands for the workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6.
Using the G92 command, the basic machine coordinate system can be shifted and made the
hypothetical machine coordinate system. At the same time, workpiece coordinate systems 1 to 6
are also shifted.

2
 2. Input Command Units
2.1 Input command units

2. Input Command Units

2.1 Input command units
Function and purpose

These are the units used for the movement amounts in the program. They are expressed in
millimeters, inches or degrees (°).

2.2 Input setting units

Function and purpose

These are the units of setting data which are used, as with the compensation amounts, in common
for all axes.
The input command units can be selected from the following types for each axis with the
parameters. (For further details on settings, refer to the Operation Manual.)
The input setting units can be selected from the following types common to axes.

Linear axis
Input unit Millimeter Inch Rotation
parameters Diameter Radius Diameter Radius axis (°)
command command command command
#1015 cunit = 10000 1.0 1.0 0.1 0.1 1.0
Input = 1000 0.1 0.1 0.01 0.01 0.1
command unit = 100 0.01 0.01 0.001 0.001 0.01
= 10 0.001 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001
#1003 iunit = B 0.0005 0.001 0.00005 0.0001 0.001
Min.
=C 0.00005 0.0001 0.000005 0.00001 0.0001
movement unit
=D 0.000005 0.00001 - - 0.00001
#1003 iunit = B 0.001 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 0.001
Input setting
=C 0.0001 0.0001 0.00001 0.00001 0.0001
unit
=D 0.00001 0.00001 - - 0.00001

(Note 1) Inch/metric conversion is performed in either of 2 ways: conversion from the parameter
screen (#1041 I_inch: valid only when the power is turned ON) and conversion using the
G command (G20 or G21).
However, when a G command is used for the conversion, the conversion applies only to
the input command units and not to the input setting units.
Consequently, the tool offset amounts and other compensation amounts as well as the
variable data should be preset to correspond to inches or millimeters.
(Note 2) The millimeter and inch systems cannot be used together.
(Note 3) During circular interpolation on an axis where the input command units are different, the
center command (I, J, K) and the radius command (R) can be designated by the input
setting units. (Use a decimal point to avoid confusion.)

3
2. Input Command Units
2.2 Input command units

Detailed description

(1) Units of various data

These input setting units determine the parameter setting unit, program command unit and the
external interface unit for the PLC axis, DDB and handle pulse,etc. The following rules show
how the unit of each data changes when the input setting unit is changed. This table applies to
the NC axis and PLC axis.

Input setting unit

Metric
Data Setting value Remarks
/inch B C D
(0.001mm) (0.0001mm) (0.00001mm)
Metric 20000 (mm/min) 20000 200000 20000 (Note 1)
Speed data
Setting range 1 to 999999 1 to 999999 1 to 999999
Example:
Inch 2000 (inch/min) 2000 20000 -
rapid
Setting range 1 to 999999 1 to 999999 -
Position Metric 123.123 (mm) 123.123 123.1230 123.12300
data Setting range ±99999.999 ±9999.9999 ±999.99999
Example: Inch 12.1234 12.1234 12.1234 -
SoftLimit+ Setting range ±9999.9999 ±999.99999 -
Metric 10 (µm) 20 20 20
Interpolation Setting range ±9999 ±9999 ±9999
unit data Inch 0.01 (inch) 20 20 -
Setting range ±9999 ±9999 -

(Note 1) Set the data with a mm/min or inch/min unit for micrometric system (B).
Set a value ten times the micrometer value for sub-micrometric system (C).
Set the data with a mm/min unit for 10 nanometres (D).

(2) Program command

The program command unit follows the above table.
If the data has a decimal point, the number of digits in the integer section will decrease and the
number of digits in the decimal point section will increase as the input setting unit becomes
smaller. If the input setting unit is 10 nanometres, the integer section will have three digits, and
the decimal point section will have five digits.
When setting data with no decimal point, and which is a position command, the data will be
affected by the input setting unit and input command unit.
For the feedrate, as the input setting unit becomes smaller, the number of digits in the integer
section will remain the same, but the number of digits in the decimal point section will increase.

4
 3. Data Formats
3.1 Tape codes

3. Data Formats
3.1 Tape codes
Function and purpose

The tape command codes used for this controller are combinations of alphabet letters (A, B, C, ...
Z), numbers (0, 1, 2, ... 9) and signs (+, −, /, ...). These alphabet letters, numbers and signs are
referred to as characters. Each character is represented by a combination of 8 holes which may, or
may not, be present.
These combinations make up what is called codes.
This controller uses the ISO code (R-840).

(Note 1) If a code not given in the "Table of tape codes" is assigned during operation, a program
error (P32) will result.
(Note 2) For the sake of convenience, a " ; " has been used in the CNC display to indicate the End
of Block (EOB/LF) which separates one block from another. Do not use the " ; " key,
however, in actual programming but use the keys in the following table instead.

CAUTION
" ; " "EOB" and " % " "EOR" are explanatory notations. The actual code is "Line feed" and "%".
(ISO code (R-840)

Detailed description

(1) Use the keys in the following table for programming.

EOB/EOR keys and displays

Code used
ISO Screen display
Key used
End of Block LF or NL ;
End of Record % %

(2) Significant data section (label skip function)

All data up to the first EOB ( ; ), after the power has been turned ON or after operation has
been reset, are ignored during automatic operation based on tape, memory loading operation
or during a search operation. In other words, the significant data section of a tape extends from
the character or number code after the initial EOB ( ; ) code after resetting to the point where
the reset command is issued.

5
3. Data Formats
3.1 Tape codes

(3) Control out, control in

When the ISO code is used, all data between control out "(" and control in ")" (or ";") are
ignored, although these data appear on the setting and display unit. Consequently, the
command tape name, number and other such data not directly related to control can be
inserted in this section.
This information (except (B) in the "Table of tape codes") will also be loaded, however, during
tape loading. The system is set to the "control in" mode when the power is turned ON.

Example of ISO code

LC S L
G0 0 X - 8 5 0 0 0 Y - 6 4 0 0 0 ( CU T T E R RE T URN )
FR P F

• • •• • • •• •• • • • • ••
•• •• • • • • • •• • •
•• •• •• • • ••• •••• ••• • ••
••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••
•• •••• •• • •••••
••••• ••• ••• •••••• ••••• ••• • • •••
••••• ••• •• •••••• ••••••• • • •
• • • • • •••••• •••••• •
• • •• • • • • • •••••••• • • •
Operator information print-out example
Information in this section is ignored and nothing is executed.

(4) EOR (%) code

Generally, the End of Record code is punched at both ends of the tape. It has the following
functions:
(a) Rewind stop when rewinding tape (with tape rewinder)
(b) Rewind start during tape search (with tape rewinder)
(c) Completion of loading during tape loading into memory

(5) Tape preparation for tape operation (with tape rewinder)

% 10cm ; ……… ; ……… ; ………….. ; 10cm %

2m Initial block Last block 2m

If a tape rewinder is not used, there is no need for the 2-meter dummy at both ends of the tape
and for the head EOR (%) code.

6
3. Data Formats
3.1 Tape codes

ISO code (R-840)

Feed holes
87654 321 Channel No.

•• •••• •• • • 1

•••• •• • ••
2

•
3

•••• •• ••• •
4
5

•• ••••• •• •••
6
7

••••• •• •
8
9

•• •
0
•
• •
A

••• ••
B
•
••
C

•• • •
D
•
••• • ••
E

• •••
F

• •• •• •
G

••
H

••• •• •• •••
I
J

••• •• •• •• •
K
L

•••• • •• •• ••
M
•
•••
N
O

••
••• •• •• •••• •
P
• Q
R

••• •• •• •• •
S
T

• •• •• ••
U

•• •••
V

••• ••
W
•

• • •• ••• •• ••••
X
• Y
Z

•• •• •• ••• •
+
-

•• •• •• •• ••••
.
,

• • •• •• • • •
/
%

• ••• •••• •• • •
LF (Line Feed) or NL
• ( (Control Out)
) (Control In)

•• •• • •• ••
:

•
#

••• ••• •• •
*

•• • •• •• •• • ••••
=
• [
]

•• •• • •• •• •
!
• $
SP (Space)

• •• •• •
CR(Carriage Return)
BS (Back Space)

• •• •• ••
HT (Horizontal Tab)

•• •• •••
&

• •••• ••
’ (Apostrophe)
(A)
•
;

• •••• •• •• ••
<

•• • •• •••
>
?

•
@

••••• •• •••
”
DEL (Delete)
(B)
••••• •• •••
NULL
DEL (Delete)

•
Under the ISO code, LF or NL is EOB and % is EOR.

The (A) codes are stored on tape but an error results (except when they are used in the
comment section) during operation.
The (B) codes are non-working codes and are always ignored. (Parity V check is not
executed.)
Table of tape codes

7
 3. Data Formats
3.2 Program formats

3.2 Program formats

Function and purpose

The prescribed arrangement used when assigning control information to the controller is known as
the program format, and the format used with this controller is called the "word address format".

Detailed description

(1) Word and address

A word is a collection of characters arranged in a specific sequence. This entity is used as the
unit for processing data and for causing the machine to execute specific operations. Each
word used for this controller consists of an alphabet letter and a number of several digits
(sometimes with a "–" sign placed at the head of the number).

Word

Numerals

Alphabet (address)

Word configuration

The alphabet letter at the head of the word is the address. It defines the meaning of the
numerical information which follows it.
For details of the types of words and the number of significant digits of words used for this
controller, refer to "Format details".

(2) Blocks
A block is a collection of words. It includes the information which is required for the machine to
execute specific operations. One block unit constitutes a complete command. The end of each
block is marked with an EOB (End of Block) code.

(3) Programs
A program is a collection of several blocks.

8
 3. Data Formats
3.2 Program formats

<Format detail abbreviations>

Rotary axis Rotary axis
Metric command Inch command
(Metric command) (Inch command)
Program number 08 ← ← ←
Sequence number N5 ← ← ←
Preparatory function G3/G21 ← ← ←
0.001(°) mm/
X+53 Z+53 α+53 X+44 Z+44 α+44 X+53 Z+53 α+53 X+53 Z+53 α+53
0.0001 inch
Movement 0.0001(°) mm/
axis X+44 Z+44 α+44 X+35 Z+35 α+35 X+44 Z+44 α+44 X+44 Z+44 α+44
0.00001 inch
0.00001(°) mm/
X+35 Z+35 α+35 – X+35 Z+35 α+35 –
0.000001 inch
0.001(°) mm/ I+44 K+44 R+44
I+53 K+53 R+53 I+44 K+44 R+44 I+53 K+53 R+53
0.0001 inch (Note 5)
Arc and
0.0001(°) mm/ I+35 K+35 R+35
cutter I+44K+44 R+44 I+35 K+35 R+35 I+44 K+44 R+44
0.00001 inch (Note 5)
radius
0.0001(°) mm/
0.00001 inch
I+35 K+35 R+35 – I+35 K+35 R+35 –
0.001(°) mm/
X+53/P+8 ← ← ←
0.0001 inch
0.0001(°) mm/
Dwell X+53/P+8 ← ← ←
0.00001 inch
0.0001(°) mm/
X+53/P+8 – ← –
0.00001 inch
F44(Feed per minute)
0.001(°) mm/ F63(Feed per minute) F44(Feed per minute) F63(Feed per minute)
F34(Feed per revolution)
0.0001 inch F43(Feed per revolution) F34(Feed per revolution) F44(Feed per revolution)
(Note 6)
Feed F35(Feed per minute)
0.0001(°) mm/ F54(Feed per minute) F35(Feed per minute) F54(Feed per minute)
function F25(Feed per revolution)
0.00001 inch F34(Feed per revolution) F25(Feed per revolution) F34(Feed per revolution)
(Note 6)
0.00001(°) mm/ F45(Feed per minute) F45(Feed per minute)
0.000001 inch F25(Feed per revolution) – F25(Feed per revolution) –
Tool offset T1/T2 ← ← ←
Miscellaneous function (M) M8 ← ← ←
Spindle function (S) S8 ← ← ←
Tool function (T) T8 ← ← ←
2nd miscellaneous function A8/B8/C8 ← ← ←
Subprogram P8 H5 L4 ← ← ←
0.001(°) mm/
R+53 Q53 P8 L4 ← ← ←
0.0001 inch
Fixed 0.0001(°) mm/
cycle
R+44 Q44 P8 L4 ← ← ←
0.00001 inch
0.00001(°) mm/
R+35 Q35 P8 L4 ← R+35 Q35 P8 L4 ←
0.000001 inch

(Note 1) α indicates the additional axis address, such as A, B or C.

(Note 2) The No. of digits check for a word is carried out with the maximum number of digits of that
address.
(Note 3) Numerals can be used without the leading zeros.
(Note 4) The meanings of the details are as follows :
Example 1 : 08 : 8-digit program number
Example 2 : G21 : Dimension G is 2 digits to the left of the decimal point, and 1 digit to the
right.
Example 3 : X+53 : Dimension X uses + or - sign and represents 5 digits to the left of the
decimal point and 3 digits to the right.
For example, the case for when the X axis is positioned (G00) to the 45.123 mm position in the
absolute value (G90) mode is as follows :

G00 X45.123 ;
3 digits below the decimal point
5 digits above the decimal point, so it's +00045, but the leading zeros and the
mark (+) have been omitted.
G0 is possible, too.

9
3. Data Formats
3.2 Program formats

(Note 5) If an arc is commanded using a rotary axis and linear axis while inch commands are being used,
the degrees will be converted into 0.1 inches for interpolation.
(Note 6) While inch commands are being used, the rotary axis speed will be in increments of 10 degrees.
Example : With the F1. (per-minute-feed) command, this will become the 10 degrees/minute
command.
(Note 7) The decimal places below the decimal point are ignored when a command, such as an S
command, with an invalid decimal point has been assigned with a decimal point.
(Note 8) This format is the same for the value input from the memory, MDI or setting and display unit.
(Note 9) Command the program No. in an independent block. Command the program NO. in the head
block of the program.

10
 3. Data Formats
3.3 Program address check function

3.3 Program address check function

Function and purpose

The program can be checked in word units when operating machining programs.

Detailed description

(1) Address check

This function enables simple checking of program addresses in word units. If the alphabetic
characters are continuous, the program error (P32) will occur. Availability of this function is
selected by the parameter "#1227 aux11/bit4".
Note that an error will not occur for the following:
• Reserved words
• Comment statements

(2) Word range check

When the operation expression is used for the word data, check whether one word data is
enclosed in brackets "[ ]" or not.
If it is not enclosed, the program error (P33) will occur.
Availability of this function is selected by the parameter "#1274 ext10/bit7".

Example of program

(1) Example of program for address check

(Example 1) When there are no numbers following an alphabetic character.
G28 X ; → An error will occur. Change to "G28 X0;", etc.

(Example 2) When a character string is illegal.

TEST ; → An error will occur. Change to "(TEST);", etc.

(2) Example of program for word range check

X-100.-#24 → An error will occur. Change as shown below.
Z+#500*TAN[#1] X-[100.+#24]
Y-SIN[60.] Z+[#500*TAN[#1]]
Y-SIN[60.]
The numbers of brackets that can be used for one word data are maximum five.
If six brackets or more are commanded, the program error (P280) will occur.

11
 3. Data Formats
3.4 Tape memory format

3.4 Tape memory format

Function and purpose

(1) Storage tape and significant sections (ISO, EIA automatic judgment)
Both ISO and EIA tape codes can be stored in the memory in the same way as tape operation.
After resetting, ISO/EIA is automatically judged by the EOB code at the head.
The interval to be stored in the memory is from the next character after the head EOB to the
EOR code after resetting.
The significant codes listed in the "Table of tape code" in Section 3.1 "Tape codes", in the
above significant section are actually stored into the memory. All other codes are ignored and
are not stored.
The data between control out "(" and control in ")" are stored into the memory.

3.5 Optional block skip; /

Function and purpose

This function selectively ignores specific blocks in a machining program which starts with the "/"
(slash) code.

Detailed description

(1) Provided that the optional block skip switch is ON, blocks starting with the "/" code are ignored.
They are executed if the switch is OFF.
Parity check is valid regardless of whether the optional block skip switch is ON or OFF.
When, for instance, all blocks are to be executed for one workpiece but specific block are not
to be executed for another workpiece, the same command tape can be used to machine
different parts by inserting the "/" code at the head of those specific blocks.

Precautions for using optional block skip

(1) Put the "/" code for optional block skip at the beginning of a block. If it is placed inside the block,
it is assumed as a user macro, a division instruction.

(Example) N20 G1 X25. /Z25. ; .......... NG (User macro, a division instruction;

a program error results.)
/N20 G1 X25. Z25. ; .......... OK

(2) Parity checks (H and V) are conducted regardless of the optional block skip switch position.

(3) The optional block skip is processed immediately before the pre-read buffer.
Consequently, it is not possible to skip up to the block which has been read into the pre-read
buffer.

(4) This function is valid even during a sequence number search.

(5) All blocks with the "/" code are also input and output during tape storing and tape output,
regardless of the position of the optional block skip switch.

12
 3. Data Formats
3.6 Program/sequence/block numbers; O, N

3.6 Program/sequence/block numbers; O, N

Function and purpose

These numbers are used for monitoring the execution of the machining programs and for calling
both machining programs and specific stages in machining programs.
(1) Program numbers are classified by workpiece correspondence or by subprogram units, and
they are designated by the address "O" followed by a number with up to 8 digits.
(2) Sequence numbers are attached where appropriate to command blocks which configure
machining programs, and they are designated by the address "N" followed by a number with up
to 5 digits.
(3) Block numbers are automatically provided internally. They are preset to zero every time a
program number or sequence number is read, and they are counted up one at a time unless
program numbers or sequence numbers are commanded in blocks which are subsequently
read.
Consequently, all the blocks of the machining programs given in the table below can be
determined without further consideration by combinations of program numbers, sequence
numbers and block numbers.

Monitor display
Machining program
Program No. Sequence No. Block No.
O12345678 (DEMO, PROG) ; 12345678 0 0
N100 G00 G90 X120. Z100. ; 12345678 100 0
G94 S1000 ; 12345678 100 1
N102 G71 P210 Q220 I0.2 K0.2 D0.5 F600 ; 12345678 102 0
N200 G94 S1200 F300 ; 12345678 200 0
N210 G01 X0 Z95. ; 12345678 210 0
G01 X20. ; 12345678 210 1
G03 X50. Z80. K–15. ; 12345678 210 2
G01 Z55. ; 12345678 210 3
G02 X80. Z40. I15. ; 12345678 210 4
G01 X100. ; 12345678 210 5
G01 Z30. ; 12345678 210 6
G02 Z10. K–15. ; 12345678 210 7
N220 G01 Z0 ; 12345678 220 0
N230 G00 X120. Z150. ; 12345678 230 0
N240 M02 ; 12345678 240 0
% 12345678 240 0

13
 3. Data Formats
3.7 Parity H/V

3.7 Parity H/V

Function and purpose

Parity check provides a mean of checking whether the tape has been correctly perforated or not.
This involves checking for perforated code errors or, in other words, for perforation errors. There
are two types of parity check: Parity H and Parity V.

(1) Parity H
Parity H checks the number of holes configuring a character and it is done during tape
operation, tape input and sequence number search.
A parity H error is caused in the following cases.

(a) ISO code

When a code with an odd number of holes in a significant data section has been detected.
(Example 1) Parity H error example (For ISO codes)

• ••••• ••• •• •• ••• ••• •••• • •••••• •• ••••

• • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • ••
• • •• • • ••• •• • •• •• ••
••••• ••••••• • ••••••••••••• • ••••••• ••••••••• ••• ••••
••• •••••••••• •••• •••••••••• ••••• ••••••••••• • •
•
•••
•
This character causes a parity H error.

When a parity H error occurs, the tape stops following the alarm code.

(2) Parity V
A parity V check is done during tape operation, tape input and sequence number search when
the I/O PARA #9n15 (n is the unit No.1 to 5) parity V check function is set to "1". It is not done
during memory operation.
A parity V error occurs in the following case: when the number of codes from the first
significant code to the EOB (;) in the significant data section in the vertical direction of the tape
is an odd number, that is, when the number of characters in one block is odd.
When a parity V error is detected, the tape stops at the code following the EOB (;).

(Note 1) Among the tape codes, there are codes which are counted as characters for parity
and codes which are not counted as such. For details, refer to the "Table of tape
code" in Section 3.1 "Tape codes".
(Note 2) Any space codes which may appear within the section from the initial EOB code to
the address code or "/" code are counted for parity V check.

14
 3. Data Formats
3.8 G code lists

3.8 G code lists

Function and purpose

G codes include the six G code lists 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7. One list is selected by setting in parameter
"#1037 cmdtyp".
cmdtyp G code list
3 List 2
4 List 3
5 List 4
6 List 5
7 List 6
8 List 7
G functions are explained using the G code list 3.
(Note 1) A program error (P34) will result if a G code that is not in the Table of G code lists is
commanded.
(Note 2) An alarm will result if a G code without additional specifications is commanded.
Table of G code lists
G code list
Group Function
2 3 4 5 6 7
∆G00 ∆G00 ∆G00 ∆G00 ∆G00 ∆G00 01 Positioning
∆G01 ∆G01 ∆G01 ∆G01 ∆G01 ∆G01 01 Linear interpolation
G02 G02 G02 G02 G02 G02 01 Circular interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 G03 G03 G03 01 Circular interpolation CCW
G02.3 G02.3 G02.3 G02.3 G02.3 G02.3 01 Exponential function interpolation CW
G03.3 G03.3 G03.3 G03.3 G03.3 G03.3 01 Exponential function interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 G04 G04 G04 00 Dwell
G07.1 G07.1 Cylindrical interpolation
19
G107 G107

G09 G09 G09 G09 G09 G09 00 Exact stop check

G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 G10 00 Program parameter/Compensation input
G11 G11 G11 G11 G11 G11 00 Program parameter input mode cancel
G12.1 G12.1 Pole coordinate interpolation ON
19
G112 G112
G13.1 G13.1 Pole coordinate interpolation cancel
19
G113 G113
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1 G12.1 19 Milling interpolation ON
*G13.1 *G13.1 *G13.1 *G13.1 19 Milling interpolation cancel
*G14 *G14 *G14 *G14 *G14 *G14 18 • Balance cut OFF
G15 G15 G15 G15 G15 G15 18 • Balance cut ON
Milling interpolation plane selection Y-Z cylindrical
G16 G16 G16 G16 02
plane
∆G17 ∆G17 ∆G17 ∆G17 ∆G17 ∆G17 02 Plane selection X-Y
∆G18 ∆G18 ∆G18 ∆G18 ∆G18 ∆G18 02 Plane selection Z-X
∆G19 ∆G19 ∆G19 ∆G19 ∆G19 ∆G19 02 Plane selection Y-Z
∆G20 ∆G20 ∆G20 ∆G20 ∆G20 ∆G20 06 Inch command

15
 3. Data Formats
3.8 G code lists

G code list
Group Function
2 3 4 5 6 7
∆G21 ∆G21 ∆G21 ∆G21 ∆G21 ∆G21 06 Metric command
G22 G22 G22 G22 04 Barrier check ON
*G23 *G23 *G23 *G23 04 Barrier check OFF
G22 G22 00 Soft limit ON
G23 G23 00 Soft limit OFF

G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 G27 00 Reference point return check
G28 G28 G28 G28 G28 G28 00 Automatic reference point return
G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 G29 00 Return from reference point
G30 G30 G30 G30 G30 G30 00 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference point return
G30.1 G30.1 G30.1 G30.1 G30.1 G30.1 00 Tool change position return 1
G30.2 G30.2 00 Tool change position return 2
G30.3 G30.3 00 Tool change position return 3
G30.4 G30.4 00 Tool change position return 4
G30.5 G30.5 00 Tool change position return 5

G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 G31 00 Skip function

G31.1 G31.1 G31.1 G31.1 G31.1 G31.1 00 Multi-step skip function 1
G31.2 G31.2 G31.2 G31.2 G31.2 G31.2 00 Multi-step skip function 2
G31.3 G31.3 G31.3 G31.3 G31.3 G31.3 00 Multi-step skip function 3
G32 G33 G32 G33 G32 G33 01 Thread cutting
G34 G34 G34 G34 G34 G34 01 Variable lead thread cutting
G35 G35 01 Circular thread cutting CW
G36 G36 01 Circular thread cutting CCW

G37 G37 G36/G37 G36/G37 G36/G37 G36/G37 00 Automatic tool length measurement

*G40 *G40 *G40 *G40 *G40 *G40 07 Tool nose R compensation cancel
G41 G41 G41 G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose R compensation left
G42 G42 G42 G42 G42 G42 07 Tool nose R compensation right
Tool nose R compensation (direction automatically
G46 G46 G46 G46 G46 G46 07
selected) ON

G43.1 G43.1 G43.1 G43.1 G43.1 G43.1 20 1st spindle control mode
G44.1 G44.1 G44.1 G44.1 G44.1 G44.1 20 2nd spindle control mode
G47.1 G47.1 G47.1 G47.1 G47.1 G47.1 20 2-spindle synchronous control mode

Coordinate system setting/Spindle clamp speed

G50 G92 G50 G92 G50 G92 00
setting
*G50.2 *G50.2 *G50.2 *G50.2 11 Scaling cancel
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2 G51.2 11 Scaling ON
G50.2 G50.2 Polygon machining mode cancel
00
G250 G250 (spindle-tool axis synchronization)
G51.2 G51.2 Polygon machining mode ON
00
G251 G251 (spindle-tool axis synchronization)
G52 G52 G52 G52 G52 G52 00 Local coordinate system setting

16
 3. Data Formats
3.8 G code lists

G code list
Group Function
2 3 4 5 6 7
G53 G53 G53 G53 G53 G53 00 Machine coordinate system selection
*G54 *G54 *G54 *G54 *G54 *G54 12 Workpiece coordinate system selection 1
G55 G55 G55 G55 G55 G55 12 Workpiece coordinate system selection 2
G56 G56 G56 G56 G56 G56 12 Workpiece coordinate system selection 3
G57 G57 G57 G57 G57 G57 12 Workpiece coordinate system selection 4
G58 G58 G58 G58 G58 G58 12 Workpiece coordinate system selection 5
G59 G59 G59 G59 G59 G59 12 Workpiece coordinate system selection 6
G54.1 G54.1 G54.1 G54.1 G54.1 G54.1 12 Workpiece coordinate system 48 sets expanded
G61 G61 G61 G61 G61 G61 13 Exact stop check mode

G62 G62 G62 G62 G62 G62 13 Automatic corner override

G63 G63 G63 G63 G63 G63 13 Tapping mode
*G64 *G64 *G64 *G64 *G64 *G64 13 Cutting mode
G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 G65 00 User macro call
G66 G66 G66 G66 G66 G66 14 User macro modal call A
G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 G66.1 14 User macro modal call B
*G67 *G67 *G67 *G67 *G67 *G67 14 User macro modal call cancel
G68 G68 G68 G68 15 Facing turret mirror image ON
G69 G69 G69 G69 15 Facing turret mirror image OFF
Facing turret mirror image ON or balance cut mode
G68 G68 15
ON
Facing turret mirror image OFF or balance cut mode
*G69 *G69 15
cancel

G70 G70 G70 G70 G70 G70 09 Finishing cycle

G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 G71 09 Longitudinal rough cutting cycle
G72 G72 G72 G72 G72 G72 09 Face rough cutting cycle
G73 G73 G73 G73 G73 G73 09 Formed material rough cutting cycle
G74 G74 G74 G74 G74 G74 09 Face cut-off cycle
G75 G75 G75 G75 G75 G75 09 Longitudinal cut-off cycle
G76 G76 G76 G76 G76 G76 09 Compound thread cutting cycle
G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 G76.1 09 • 2-systems simultaneous thread-cutting cycle (1)
G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 G76.2 09 • 2-systems simultaneous thread-cutting cycle (2)

G90 G77 G90 G77 G90 G77 09 Longitudinal cutting fixed cycle
G92 G78 G92 G78 G92 G78 09 Thread cutting fixed cycle
G94 G79 G94 G79 G94 G79 09 Face cutting fixed cycle

*G80 *G80 *G80 *G80 *G80 *G80 09 Hole drilling fixed cycle cancel
G79 G83.2 G79 G83.2 G79 G83.2 09 Deep hole drilling cycle 2
G83 G83 G83 G83 G83 G83 09 Deep hole drilling cycle (Z axis)
G84 G84 G84 G84 G84 G84 09 Tap cycle (Z axis)
G85 G85 G85 G85 G85 G85 09 Boring cycle (Z axis)

G87 G87 G87 G87 G87 G87 09 Deep hole drilling cycle (X axis)
G88 G88 G88 G88 G88 G88 09 Tap cycle (X axis)

17
 3. Data Formats
3.8 G code lists

G code list
Group Function
2 3 4 5 6 7
G89 G89 G89 G89 G89 G89 09 Boring cycle (X axis)
G84.1 G84.1 G84.1 G84.1 09 Reverse tap cycle (Z axis)
G88.1 G88.1 G88.1 G88.1 09 Reverse tap cycle (X axis)

G50.3 G92.1 G50.3 G92.1 G50.3 G92.1 00 Workpiece coordinate preset

∆G96 ∆G96 ∆G96 ∆G96 ∆G96 ∆G96 17 Constant surface speed control ON
∆G97 ∆G97 ∆G97 ∆G97 ∆G97 ∆G97 17 Constant surface speed control OFF
∆G98 ∆G94 ∆G98 ∆G94 ∆G98 ∆G94 05 Asynchronous feed (Feed per minute)
∆G99 ∆G95 ∆G99 ∆G95 ∆G99 ∆G95 05 Synchronous feed (Feed per rotation)
− ∆G90 − ∆G90 − ∆G90 03 Absolute value command
− ∆G91 − ∆G91 − ∆G91 03 Incremental value command
− ∗G98 − ∗G98 − ∗G98 10 Fixed cycle initial return
− G99 − G99 − G99 10 Fixed cycle R point return

G113 G113 G113 G113 00 Polygon machining mode cancel

(spindle/spindle synchronization)
G114.1 G114.1 G114.1 G114.1 00 Spindle synchronization control
Polygon machining mode ON
G114.2 G114.2 G114.2 G114.2 00
(spindle/spindle synchronization)

G115 G115 G115 G115 G115 G115 00 • Start point designation synchronizing Type 1
G116 G116 G116 G116 G116 G116 00 • Start point designation synchronizing Type 2
• Miscellaneous function output during axis
G117 G117 G117 G117 G117 G117 00
movement

(Note 1) A (∗) symbol indicates the G code to be selected in each group when the power is turned
ON or when a reset is executed to initialize the modal.
(Note 2) A (∆) symbol indicates the G code for which parameters selection is possible as an
initialization status when the power is turned ON or when a reset is executed to initialize
the modal. Note that inch/metric changeover can only be selected when the power is
turned ON.
(Note 3) A (•) symbol indicates a function dedicated for multi-system.
(Note 4) If two or more G codes from the same group are commanded, the last G code will be
valid.
(Note 5) This G code list is a list of conventional G codes. Depending on the machine, movements
that differ from the conventional G commands may be included when called by the G code
macro. Refer to the Instruction Manual issued by the machine maker.
(Note 6) Whether the modal is initialized differs for each reset input.

(1) "Reset 1"

The modal is initialized when the reset initialization parameter (#1151 rstinit) is ON.
(2) "Reset 2 "and "Reset and Rewind"
The modal is initialized when the signal is input.
(3) Reset at emergency stop release
Conforms to "Reset 1".
(4) When an automatic reset is carried out at the start of individual functions, such as
reference point return.
Conforms to "Reset and Rewind".

18
3. Data Formats
3.8 G code lists

(Note 7) Precautions for 6 and 7 in G code lists

(1) G68 and G69

When both the facing turret mirror image option and balance cut option are valid, G68
and G69 will be handled as the command to turn the facing turret mirror image ON and
OFF.
(The facing turret mirror image has the priority.)

(2) G36
G36 is used for the two functions, automatic tool length measurement and circular
thread cutting (CCW). The applied function follows the parameter "#1238 set10/bit0"
(circular thread cutting) setting.

When "#1238 set10/bit0" is set to 0

G code Function
G35 Circular thread cutting clockwise rotation (CW)
G36 Automatic tool length measurement X
G37 Automatic tool length measurement Z

When "#1238 set10/bit0" is set to 1

G code Function
G35 Circular thread cutting clockwise rotation (CW)
G36 Circular thread cutting counterclockwise rotation (CCW)
G37 Automatic tool length measurement Z

CAUTION
The commands with "no value after G" will be handled as "G00".

19
 3. Data Formats
3.9 Precautions before starting machining

3.9 Precautions before starting machining

Precautions before machining

CAUTION
When creating the machining program, select the appropriate machining conditions, and make
sure that the performance, capacity and limits of the machine and NC are not exceeded. The
examples do not consider the machining conditions.
Before starting actual machining, always carry out dry run operation to confirm the machining
program, tool offset amount and workpiece offset amount, etc.

20
 4. Buffer Register
4.1 Input buffer

4. Buffer Register
4.1 Input buffer
Function and purpose

When the pre-read buffer is empty during a tape operation or RS-232C operation, the contents of
the input buffer are immediately transferred to the pre-read buffers, and provided that the data
stored in the input buffer do not exceed 250 × 4 characters, the following data (Max. 250
characters) are read and loaded into the input buffer.
This buffer is designed to eliminate the operational delay originating in the readout time of the tape
reader and to smooth out the block joints.
The pre-reading effects are lost, however, when the block execution time is shorter than the tape
readout time of the following block.

Analysis processing
(Buffer size: 250 × 5 characters)
Max. 5 execution blocks
Input buffer Pre-read
Tape buffer 5
Buffer 4
Memory Mode Buffer 3
switching Buffer 2
Arithmetic
Keyboard Buffer 1 processing
MDI data
(Note) Data equivalent to 1 block are
stored in 1 pre-read buffer.

The input buffer has a memory capacity of 250 × 5 characters (including the EOB code).

(1) The contents of the input buffer register are updated in 250-character units.
(2) Only the significant codes in the significant data section are read into the input buffer.
(3) When codes (including "(" and ")") are sandwiched in the control in or control out mode and the
optional block skip function is ON, the data extending from the "/" (slash) code up to the EOB
code are read into the input buffer.
(4) The input buffer contents are cleared with resetting.

(Note 1) The input buffer size (250 characters) differs according to the model.

21
 4. Buffer Register
4.2 Pre-read buffers

4.2 Pre-read buffers

Function and purpose

During automatic processing, the contents of 1 block are normally pre-read so that program
analysis processing is conducted smoothly. However, during nose R compensation, a maximum of
5 blocks are pre-read for the intersection point calculation including interference check.
The specifications of the data in 1 block are as follows:

(1) The data of 1 block are stored in this buffer.

(2) Only the significant codes in the significant data section are read into the pre-read buffer.
(3) When codes are sandwiched in the control in and control out, and the optional block skip
function is ON, the data extending from the "/" (slash) code up to the EOB code are not read
into the pre-read buffer.
(4) The pre-read buffer contents are cleared with resetting.
(5) When the single block function is ON during continuous operation, the pre-read buffer stores
the following block data and then stops operation.

Other precautions

(1) Depending on whether the program is executed continuously or by single blocks, the timing of
the valid/invalid for the external control signals for the optional block skip and others will differ.
(2) If the external control signal such as optional block skip is turned ON/OFF with the M command,
the external control operation will not be effective on the program pre-read with the buffer
register.
(3) According to the M command that operates the external controls, it prohibits pre-reading, and
the recalculation is as follows:
The M command that commands the external controls is distinguished at the PLC, and the
"recalculation request" for PLC → NC interface table is turned ON.
(When the "recalculation request" is ON, the program that has been pre-read is reprocessed.)

22
 5. Position Commands
5.1 Incremental/absolute value commands

5. Position Commands
5.1 Incremental/absolute value commands
Function and purpose

There are 2 methods of issuing tool movement amount commands: the incremental value method
and the absolute value method.
The incremental value method applies for coordinates of a point which is to be moved and it issues
a command using the distance from the present point; on the other hand, the absolute value
system issues a command using the distance from the coordinate zero point. The following figure
shows what happens when the tool is moved from point P1 to point P2.

X axis

Z W P1
U
2

Spindle P2
X
Z axis

Workpiece coordinate zero point

Incremental and absolute value commands

Incremental value commands and absolute value commands for the X axis and Z axis are identified
by address when parameter "#1076 AbsInc" is set to 1, and identified by G code (G90/
G91) when set to 0. Similarly, even with additional axes (C axis or Y axis), they are differentiated by
addresses, or G code.
Command system Remarks
Absolute value X axis Address X • Set correspondence between
Z axis Address Z addresses and axes into "#1013
C/Y axis Address C/Y axname" and "#1014 incax".
Incremental value X axis Address U • Absolute and incremental values can
be used together in the same block.
Z axis Address W
C/Y axis Address H/V

(Example)
X_____ W _____ ;
Incremental value command for Z axis
Absolute value command for X axis

(Note 1) When parameter "#1076 AbsInc" is 1, and H is used for the incremental command
address, address H of blocks in M98, G114.2, and G10 L50 modal will be handled as the
parameter of each command, and the axis will not be moved.

23
 5. Position Commands
5.2 Radius/diameter commands

5.2 Radius/diameter commands

Function and purpose

The cross sections of workpieces machined on a lathe are circular, and the diameter or radius
value of those circles can be used for movement commands in the X-axis direction. A radius
command will move the tool by the commanded amount only, but a diameter command will move
the tool both in the X-axis direction by an amount equivalent to one-half the commanded amount
only and in the Z-axis direction by the commanded amount only.
This system permits radius or diameter commands to be issued, depending on the parameter
(#1019 dia) setting. The figure below shows the command procedure when the tool is to be moved
from point P1 to point P2.

X axis

P1
r2

Spindle
P2 r1
Z axis

Workpiece coordinate zero point

X command U command Remarks

Radius Diameter Radius Diameter Even when a diameter command
has been selected, only the U
command can be made a radius
X = r1 X = 2r1 U = r2 U = 2r2 command by parameter "#1077
radius".
Radius and diameter commands

Precautions and Restrictions

(1) In the above example, the tool moves from P1 to P2 in the minus direction of the X axis and so
when an incremental value is issued, the minus sign is given to the numerical value being
commanded.
(2) In this manual, diameter commands are used in descriptions of both the X and U axes for the
sake of convenience.

24
 5. Position Commands
5.3 Inch/metric conversion

5.3 Inch/metric conversion; G20, G21

Function and purpose

The commands can be changed between inch and metric with the G20/G21 command.

Command format

G20/G21;
G20 Inch command
G21 Metric command

Detailed description

The G20 and G21 commands merely select the command units. They do not select the Input units.
G20 and G21 selection is meaningful only for linear axes and it is meaningless for rotation axes.

(Example) Relationship between input command units and G20/G21 commands (with decimal
point input type I)
Input command Command mm output (#1016 iout=0) inch output (#1016 iout=1)
Axis
cunit example G21 G20 G21 G20
X 10 X100 ; 0.100mm 0.254mm 0.0039inch 0.0100inch
Z 10 Z100 ; 0.100mm 0.254mm 0.0039inch 0.0100inch
X 1 X100 ; 0.0100mm 0.0254mm 0.00039inch 0.00100inch
Z 1 Z100 ; 0.0100mm 0.0254mm 0.00039inch 0.00100inch

25
 5. Position Commands
5.3 Inch/metric conversion

Output unit, command unit and setting unit

Select whether to issue the counter or parameter setting and display unit as a command unit
determined by the G20/G21 command modal, or as the internal unit determined by parameter
"#1041 I_inch". If the command unit setting display is selected when initial metric (internal unit
metric) is set with the base specification parameter "#1226 aux10/bit6", the counter and
parameters will be displayed as metric units during the G21 command mode. The internal unit
metric data will be converted into an inch unit and displayed during the G20 command mode. The
command unit for when the power is turned ON and reset can be selected regardless of the internal
unit by setting the base specification parameter "#1152 I_G20".

NC axis
Initial inch OFF (metric internal unit) Initial inch ON (inch internal unit)
#1041 I_inch=0 #1041 I_inch=1
Item #1226 aux10/bit6=0 #1226 aux10/bit6=1 #1226 aux10/bit6=0 #1226 aux10/bit6=1
Follows internal unit Follows command unit Follows internal unit Follows internal unit
G21 G20 G21 G20 G21 G20 G21 G20
Movement/
Metric Inch Metric Inch Metric Inch
speed command
Counter display Metric Metric Metric Inch Inch Inch
Speed display Metric Metric Metric Inch Inch Inch The "#1226 aux10/bit6"
parameter is invalid
User parameter
Metric Metric Metric Inch Inch Inch when initial inch is ON.
setting/display
Even if 1 is set, the
Workpiece/ setting and display will
tool offset Metric Metric Metric Inch Inch Inch follow the internal unit in
setting/display the same manner as
Handle feed when 0 is set.
Metric Metric Metric Inch Inch Inch
command
Setup parameter
Follows "#1040 M_inch"
setting/display

PLC axis
#1042 pcinch=0 #1042 pcinch=1
Item
(metric) (inch)
Movement/
Metric Inch
speed command
Counter display Metric Inch
User parameter
Metric Inch
setting/display
Setup parameter
Follows "#1040 M_inch"
setting/display

When using both the NC axis and PLC axis as rotation axes, three digits below the decimal point
will be displayed for the coordinate data, etc., even for the inch command.

26
5. Position Commands
5.3 Inch/metric conversion

Usage examples

The screen display will change in the following manner according to the parameter settings.
Parameter #1041 I_inch 0 Initial metric #1041 I_inch 0 Initial metric
setting #1152 I_G20 0 G21 (metric) mode at #1152 I_G20 0 G21 (metric) mode at
reset reset
Program #1226 Setting and display #1226 Setting and display
command/ unit is internal unit unit is command unit
aux10/bit6 0 aux10/bit6 1
screen operation

[POSITION] [POSITION]
X 0.000 X 0.000
Y 0.000 Y 0.000
Z 0.000 Z 0.000
mm. mm.

[TOOL OFFSET] [TOOL OFFSET]

# #
1 0.100 11 0.000 1 0.100 11 0.000
2 0.200 12 0.000 2 0.200 12 0.000
3 0.300 13 0.000 3 0.300 13 0.000
mm. mm.

Inch command Display unit is also inch following the

G20 G0 X1. Y2. Z3. ; command unit
Internal data Internal data
[POSITION] [POSITION]
X 25.400 25.4(mm) X 1.0000 25.4(mm)
Y 50.800 50.8(mm) Y 2.0000 50.8(mm)
Z 76.200 76.2(mm) Z 3.0000 76.2(mm)
in. in.

Internal data
[TOOL OFFSET] [TOOL OFFSET]
# # #10.1(mm)
1 0.100 11 0.000 1 0.0039 11 0.0000
2 0.200 12 0.000 2 0.0078 12 0.0000
3 0.300 13 0.000 3 0.0118 13 0.0000
in. in.

#(1)( 1) Set with inch unit

Input Internal data Internal data
[TOOL OFFSET] [TOOL OFFSET]
# 1.0(mm) # 25.4(mm)
1 1.000 11 0.000 1 1.0000 11 0.0000
. .
. .
. .
in. in.

27
5. Position Commands
5.3 Inch/metric conversion

Parameter #1041 I_inch 0 Initial metric #1041 I_inch 0 Initial metric

setting #1152 I_G20 0 G21 (metric) mode at #1152 I_G20 0 G21 (metric) mode at
reset reset
Program #1226 Setting and display #1226 Setting and display
command/ unit is internal unit unit is command unit
aux10/bit6 0 aux10/bit6 1
screen operation
Reset Display unit is also metric following the
command unit

[POSITION] [POSITION]
X 25.400 X 25.400
Y 50.800 Y 50.800
Z 76.200 Z 76.200
mm. mm.

[TOOL OFFSET] [TOOL OFFSET]

# #
1 1.000 11 0.000 1 25.400 11 0.000
2 0.200 12 0.000 2 0.200 12 0.000
3 0.300 13 0.000 3 0.300 13 0.000
mm. mm.

Precautions

(1) If the tool and workpiece offset data are added with an inch command unit and metric internal
unit, an error may occur.
(2) The internal unit is a unit that follows #1041 I_inch.
Internal unit when #1041 I_inch=0 : mm
Internal unit when #1041 I_inch=1 : inch
(3) The parameters are input and output with an internal unit.
(4) If the tool data input/output unit selection (#1220 aux04/bit4:1) is valid, the tool data will be
input and output with the "#1152 I_G20" setting unit. However, in all other cases, the data will
be input/output with the internal unit.

28
 5. Position Commands
5.4 Decimal point input

5.4 Decimal point input

Function and purpose

This function enables the decimal point to be input. It assigns the decimal point in millimeter or inch
units for the machining program input information that defines the tool paths, distances and
speeds.
A parameter "#1078 Decpt2" selects whether minimum input command unit (type I) or zero point
(type II) is to apply for the least significant digit of data without a decimal point.

Command format

. Metric system
. Inch system

Detailed description

(1) The decimal point command is valid for the distances, angles, times and speeds in machining
programs.
(2) Refer to the table rising the "Addresses used and valid/invalid decimal point commands" for
details on the valid addresses for the decimal point commands.
(3) The number of significant digits in a decimal point command is shown below (for input
command unit cunit=10).
Movement command Movement command
Feedrate Dwell (X)
(linear) (rotation)
Decimal Decimal Decimal
Integer Integer Integer Decimal part Integer
part part part
0 ~ 60000. .000 ~ .999
MM (millimeter) 0 ~ 99999. .000 ~ .999 0 ~ 99999. .000 ~ .999 0 ~ 99999. .000 ~ .999
0 ~ 999. .0000 ~ .9999
0 ~ 2362. .0000 ~ .9999
INCH (inch) 0 ~ 9999. .0000 ~ .9999 99999. (359.) .0 ~ .999 .000000 0 ~ 99. .000 ~ .999
0 ~ 99.
~ .999999

(Note) The top row gives the feedrate as a per-minute rate and the bottom row as a per-
rotation rate.

(4) The decimal point command is valid even for commands defining the variable data used in
subprograms.
(5) Decimal point commands for decimal point invalid addresses are processed as integer data
only and everything below the decimal point is ignored. Addresses which are invalid for the
decimal point are D, H, L, M, N, O, P, S and T.
All variable commands, however, are treated as data with decimal points.

Precautions

(1) If an arithmetic operator is inserted, the data will be handled as data with a decimal point.
(Example1) G00 X123+0 ;
This is the X axis command 123mm command. It will not be 123µm.

29
5. Position Commands
5.4 Decimal point input

Example of program

(1) Example of program for decimal point valid address

Specification division Decimal point command 1 Decimal point
command 2
Program example When 1 = 1µm When 1 = 10µm When 1 = 1mm
G0 X123.45
X123.450mm X123.450mm X123.450mm
(decimal points are all mm points)
X12.345mm
G0 X12345 (last digit is 1µm X123.450mm X12345.000mm
unit)
#111 = 123, #112 = 5.55 X123.000mm, X123.000mm, X123.000mm,
X#111 Z#112 Z5.550mm Z5.550mm Z5.550mm
#113 = #111 + #112
#113 = 128.550 #113 = 128.550 #113 = 128.550
(addition)
#114 = #111 − #112
#114 = 117.450 #114 = 117.450 #114 = 117.450
(subtraction)
#115 = #111 ∗ #112
#115 = 682.650 #115 = 682.650 #115 = 682.650
(multiplication)
#116 = #111/#112
#116 = 22.162, #116 = 22.162, #116 = 22.162,
#117 = #112/#111
#117 = 0.045 #117 = 0.045 #117 = 0.045
(division)

Decimal point input I, II and decimal point command validity

In the table on the next page, decimal point input I and II result in the following for commands in
which a decimal point is not used in an address where a decimal point command is valid.
Both decimal point input I and II become the same for commands using a decimal point.

(1) Decimal point input I

The lowest order digit of command data matches the command unit.
(Example) When "X1" is commanded in 1µm system, the same result occurs as for an
"X0.001" command.
(2) Decimal point input II
The lowest order digit of command data matches the command unit.
(Example) When "X1" is commanded in 1µm system, the same result occurs as for an "X1."
command.

30
 5. Position Commands
5.4 Decimal point input

Addresses used and valid/invalid decimal point commands

Decimal Decimal
Address point Application Remarks Address point Application Remarks
command command
A Valid Coordinate position data K Valid Circular center coordinates
Invalid 2nd miscellaneous function Valid Nose R compensation/tool
code radius compensation
Valid Angle data vector components
Invalid MRC program number Invalid Hole machining cycle
Number of repetitions
Invalid Program parameter input,
axis No. Valid Deep hole drilling cycle (2)
Second and subsequent
Valid Deep hole drilling cycle (2) cut amounts
Safety distance
Valid Thread lead increase/
B Valid Coordinate position data decrease amount (variable
Invalid 2nd miscellaneous function lead thread cutting)
code L Invalid Subprogram
C Valid Coordinate position data Number of repetitions
Invalid 2nd miscellaneous function Invalid Program tool L2
code compensation input type L10
Valid Corner chamfering amount ,C selection L11
Valid Program tool offset input Invalid Program parameter input, L50
Nose R compensation selection
amount (incremental) Invalid Program parameter input, 4 bytes
Valid Chamfering width (slitting two-word type data
cycle) Invalid Synchronization
D Valid Automatic tool length M Invalid Miscellaneous function
measurement, codes
deceleration range d N Invalid Sequence numbers
Invalid Program parameter input, Invalid Program parameter input,
byte type data data No.
E Valid Inch threads O Invalid Program numbers
Precision thread lead
P Invalid Dwell time
Valid Corner cutting feedrate
Invalid Subprogram call program
F Valid Feedrate numbers
Valid Thread lead Invalid 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference
G Valid Preparatory function code point number
H Valid Coordinate position data Invalid Constant surface speed
control, axis number
Invalid Sequence numbers in
subprograms Invalid MRC finishing shape start
sequence number
Invalid Program parameter input,
bit type data Valid Cut-off cycle
Invalid Selection of linear - arc shift amount/cut amount
intersection (geometric) Invalid Compound thread cutting
I Valid Circular center coordinates cycle, number of cutting
passes, chamfering, tool
Valid Nose R compensation/ tool nose angle
radius compensation vector
components Valid Compound thread cutting
cycle
Valid Deep hole drilling (2) Thread height
First cut amount
Invalid Program tool compensation
Valid G0/G1 in-position width ,I input compensation No.
Hole drilling cycle G0
in-position width Invalid Program parameter input,
section No.
J Valid Circular center coordinates
Invalid Return sequence number
Valid Nose R compensation/ tool from subprogram
radius compensation vector
components Valid Coordinate position data
Invalid Deep hole drilling (2) Invalid Skip signal command
Dwell at return point Valid Arc center coordinates
Invalid Hole drilling cycle G1 ,J (absolute value)
in-position width (geometric)
Invalid Subprogram return
(Note 1) Decimal points are all valid in user destination sequence No.
macro arguments.

31
 5. Position Commands
5.4 Decimal point input

Decimal Decimal
Address point Application Remarks Address point Application Remarks
command command
Q Invalid Minimum spindle clamp S Invalid Spindle function codes
rotation speed Invalid Maximum spindle clamp
Invalid MRC finishing shape end rotation speed
sequence number Invalid Constant surface speed
Valid Cut-off cycle control, surface speed
Cut amount/shift amount Invalid Program parameter input, 2 bytes
Valid Compound thread cutting word type data
cycle T Invalid Tool function codes
Minimum cut amount
U Valid Coordinate position data
Valid Compound thread cutting
cycle Valid Program tool compensation
First cut amount input
Valid Deep hole drilling cycle 1 Valid Rough cutting cycle
Cut amount of each pass (longitudinal) cutting
amount
Invalid Program tool compensation
input V Valid Coordinate position data
Hypothetical tool nose point Valid Program tool compensation
number input
Invalid Deep hole drilling cycle (2) W Valid Coordinate position data
Dwell at cut point Valid Program tool compensation
Valid Arc center coordinates input
(absolute value) (geometric) Valid Rough cutting cycle (face)
Valid Thread cutting start shift cutting amount
angle X Valid Coordinate position data
R Valid R-designated arc radius Valid Dwell
Valid Corner rounding circular ,R Valid Program tool compensation
radius input
Valid Automatic tool length Y Valid Coordinate position data
measurement, deceleration
range r Valid Program tool compensation
input
Valid MRC longitudinal/face
escape amount Z Valid Coordinate position data
Invalid MRC shaping division Valid Program tool compensation
number input
Valid Cut-off cycle, return amount
Valid Cut-off cycle, escape amount
Valid Compound thread cutting
cycle, finishing allowance
Valid Compound thread cutting
cycle/turning cycle, taper
difference
Valid Hole drilling cycle/deep hole
drilling cycle (2), distance to
reference point
Valid Program tool compensation
input/nose R compensation
amount
Valid Coordinate position data
Valid Rough cutting cycle
(longitudinal) (face) pull
amount
Valid Synchronous tap/ ,R
asynchronous tap
changeover

32
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

6. Interpolation Functions
6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00
Function and purpose

This command is accompanied by coordinate words. It positions the tool along a linear or
non-linear path from the present point as the start point to the end point which is specified by the
coordinate words.

Command format

G00 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww ;

x, u, z, w Coordinate values
The command addresses are valid for all additional axes.

Detailed description

(1) Once this command has been issued, the G00 mode is retained until it is changed by another
G function or until the G01, G02, G03, G33 or G34 command in the 01 group is issued. If the
next command is G00, all that is required is simply that the coordinate words be specified.
(2) In the G00 mode, the tool is always accelerated at the start point of the block and decelerated at
the end point. Refer to (Note 4) of "Example program" .
(3) Any G command (G83 ~ G89) in the 09 group is cancelled (G80) by the G00 command.
(4) Whether the tool moves along a linear or non-linear path is determined by parameter, but the
positioning time does not change.
(a) Linear path................. This is the same as linear interpolation (G01), and the speed is
limited by the rapid traverse rate of each axis.
(b) Non-linear path .......... The tool is positioned at the rapid traverse rate independently for
each axis.
(5) When no number following the G address, this is treated as G00.

CAUTION
The commands with "no value after G" will be handled as "G00".

33
6. Interpolation Functions
6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

Example of program

+X Turret

Start point
(+180, +300)
End point (+100, +150)

Workpiece +Z

(Unit : mm)
Chuck

G00 X100000 Z150000 ; Absolute value command

G00 U-80000 W-150000 ; Incremental value command
(With an input setting unit of 0.001mm)

Precautions

(Note 1) When the parameter "#1086 G0Intp" is 0, the path along which the tool is positioned is
the shortest path connecting the start and end points. The positioning speed is
automatically calculated so that the shortest distribution time is obtained in order that the
commanded speeds for each axis do not exceed the rapid traverse rate.
When, for instance, the X-axis and Z-axis rapid traverse rates are both 9600mm/min, the
tool will follow the path in the figure below if the following is programmed:
G00 Z–300000 X400000 ; (With an input setting unit of 0.001mm)

End point Actual X axis rate:

6400 mm/min

X
400

fx
Z
Start
300 point

fz (Unit : mm)

Actual Z axis rate: 9600 mm/min

34
6. Interpolation Functions
6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

(Note 2) When parameter "#1086 G0Intp" is 1, the tool will move along the path from the start
point to the end point at the rapid traverse rate of each axis.
When, for instance, the X-axis and Z-axis rapid traverse rates are both 9600 mm/min, the
tool will follow the path in the figure below if the following is programmed:
G00 Z − 300000 X400000 ; (With an input setting unit of 0.001mm)

Actual X axis rate:

End point 9600 mm/min

400
fx
Z
Start
300 point

fz (Unit : mm)

Actual Z axis rate: 9600 mm/min

35
6. Interpolation Functions
6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

(Note 3) The rapid traverse rate for each axis with the G00 command differs according to the
individual machine and so reference should be made to the machine specifications
manual.
(Note 4) Rapid traverse (G00) deceleration check
There are two methods for the deceleration check at rapid traverse; commanded
deceleration method and in-position check method. Select a method with the parameter
“#1193 inpos”.

■ When “inpos” = “1”

Upon completion of the rapid traverse (G00), the next block will be executed after
confirming that the remaining distances for each axis are below the fixed amounts. (Refer
to following drawing.)
The confirmation of the remaining distance should be done with the imposition width, LR .
L R is the setting value for the servo parameter "#2224 sv024".
The purpose of checking the rapid feedrate is to minimize the time it takes for positioning.
The bigger the setting value for the servo parameter "#2224 sv024", the longer the
reduced time is, but the remaining distance of the previous block at the starting time of
the next block also becomes larger, and this could become an obstacle in the actual
processing work. The check for the remaining distance is done at set intervals.
Accordingly, it may not be possible to get the actual amount of time reduction for
positioning with the setting value sv024.

■ When “inpos” = “0”

Upon completion of the rapid traverse (G00), the next block will be executed after the
deceleration check time (Td) has elapsed. The deceleration check time (Td) is as follows,
depending on the acceleration/deceleration type.

(1) Linear acceleration/linear deceleration ........................ Td = Ts + α

Previous block Next block

Ts : Acceleration/deceleration
Ts time constant
Td : Deceleration check time
Td Td = Ts + (0 ~ 14ms)

(2) Exponential acceleration/linear deceleration................ Td = 2 × Ts + α

Previous block Next block

2 × Ts

Td Ts
Ts : Acceleration/deceleration
time constant
Td : Deceleration check time
Td = 2 × Ts + (0 ~ 14ms)

36
6. Interpolation Functions
6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

(3) Exponential acceleration/exponential deceleration...... Td = 2 × Ts + α

Previous block Next block

Ts : Acceleration/deceleration
Ts time constant
Td : Deceleration check time
Td Td = 2 × Ts + (0 ~ 14ms)

Where Ts is the acceleration time constant, α = 0 to 14ms

The time required for the deceleration check during rapid traverse is the longest among the
rapid traverse deceleration check times of each axis determined by the rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration time constants and by the rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration mode of the axes commanded simultaneously.

37
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

Programmable in-position width command for positioning

This command commands the in-position width for the positioning command from the machining
program.

G00 X__ Z__ ,I__ ;

In-position width
Positioning coordinate value of each axis

Operation during in-position check

Execution of the next block starts after confirming that the position error amount of the positioning
(rapid traverse: G00) command block and the block that carries out deceleration check with the
linear interpolation (G01) command is less than the in-position width issued in this command.
The in-position width in this command is valid only in the command block, so the deceleration
check method set in base specification parameter "#1193 inpos" is used for blocks that do not have
the in-position width command.
When there are several movement axes, the system confirms that the position error amount of
each movement axis in each system is less than the in-position width issued in this command
before executing the next block.
The differences of when the in-position check is validated with the parameter (base specification
parameter "#1193 inpos" set to 1; refer to next page for in-position width) and when validated with
this command are shown in Fig. 2.

Fig. 2 The differences of In-position check with parameter

In-position check with ",I" address command In-position check with parameter
After starting deceleration of the command system, After starting deceleration of the command system,
the position error amount and commanded the servo system's position error amount and the
in-position width are compared. parameter setting value (in-position width) are
compared.

Servo Command Servo Command

In-position width In-position width
(Error amount of (Servo system position
command end point error amount)
and machine position) Block being
Block being
executed executed

Ts Ts

Td Td Start of in-position
check with parameter
Start of in-position check
with ",I" address command

Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant

Td : Deceleration check time
Td = Ts + (0 to 14ms)

38
6. Interpolation Functions
6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse)

G0/G1 in-position width setting

When the setting value of the servo parameter "#2224 SV024" is smaller than the setting value of
the G0 in-position width "#2077 G0inps" and the G1 in-position width "#2078 G1inps", the
in-position check is carried out with the G0 in-position width and the G1 in-position width.
In-position check using the "G0inps"
value Command to motor

Outline of motor movement

G0 in-position
SV024

A stop is judged here.

In-position check using the "G1inps"

value Command to motor

Outline of motor movement

G1 in-position
SV024

A stop is judged here.

When the SV024 value is larger, the in-position check is completed when the motor position
becomes within the specified with SV024.
The in-position check method depends on the method set in the deceleration check parameter.

(Note 1) When the in-position width check is carried out, the in-position width commanded in the
program takes place the in-position width set with the parameters such as SV024, G0inps,
or G1inps.
(Note 2) When the SV024 setting value is larger than the G0 in-position width/G1 in-position width,
the in-position check is carried out with the SV024 value.

39
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.2 Linear interpolation

6.2 Linear interpolation; G01

Function and purpose

This command is accompanied by coordinate words and a feedrate command. It makes the tool
move (interpolate) linearly from its present position to the end point specified by the coordinate
words at the speed specified by address F. In this case, the feedrate specified by address F always
acts as a linear speed in the tool nose center advance direction.

Command format

G01 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww αα Ff ,Ii; ("α" is an additional axis)

x, u, z, w, α Coordinate values
f Feedrate (mm/min or °/min)
i In-position width. A program error occurs if a decimal point command is
issued. This is valid only in the commanded block. A block that does not
contain this address will follow the parameter "#1193 inpos" settings. 1 to
999999 (mm)

X axis
Z W
Command point

U
/
2 Present position
Z axis
X

Detailed description

(1) Once this command is issued, the mode is maintained until another G function (G00, G02,
G03, G33, G34) in the 01 group which changes the G01 mode is issued. Therefore, if the next
command is also G01 and if the feedrate is the same all that is required to be done is to specify
the coordinate words. If no F command is given in the first G01 command block, program error
(P62) results.
(2) The feedrate for a rotation axis is commanded by °/min (decimal point position unit). (F300 =
300°/min)
(3) The G functions (G70 ~ G89) in the 09 group are cancelled (G80) by the G01 command.

40
6. Interpolation Functions
6.2 Linear interpolation

Example of program

(Example 1)

X axis

20.0

Present position

Z axis

50.0

(Unit: mm)

G01 X50.0 Z20.0 F300 ;

(Example 2) Cutting in the sequence of P1 → P2 → P3 → P4 at 300mm/min feedrate

P0 → P1 , P4 → P0 is for tool positioning.

Turret
+X

240
P1 P0
200
+Z
140
P3 P4
100
P2
Input setting unit : 0.001mm

40 90 160 220 230 (Unit: mm)

G00 X200000 Z40000 ; P0 → P1

G01 X100000 Z90000 F300 ; P1 → P2
Z160000 ; P2 → P3
X140000 Z220000 ; P3 → P4
G00 X240000 Z230000 ; P4 → P0

41
6. Interpolation Functions
6.2 Linear interpolation

Programmable in-position width command for linear interpolation

This command commands the in-position width for the linear interpolation command from the
machining program.
The commanded in-position width is valid in the linear interpolation command only when carrying
out deceleration check.

• When the error detect switch is ON.

• When G09 (exact stop check) is commanded in the same block.
• When G61 (exact stop check mode) is selected.

G01 X__ Z__ F__ ,I__ ;

In-position width
Feedrate
Linear interpolation coordinate value of each axis

(Note 1) Refer to section "6.1 Positioning (Rapid Traverse); G00" for details on the in-position
check operation.

42
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.3 Circular Interpolation

6.3 Circular Interpolation; G02, G03

Function and purpose

These commands serve to move the tool along a circular.

Command format

G02 (G03) Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ii Kk Ff ;

G02 Clockwise (CW)
G03 Counterclockwise (CCW)
Xx/Uu Circular end point coordinates, X axis (absolute value of workpiece
coordinate system for X, incremental value from present position for U)
Zz/Ww Circular end point coordinates, Z axis (absolute value of workpiece
coordinate system for Z, incremental value from present position for W)
Ii Circular center, X axis (for I, incremental value of X coordinate at center as
seen from start point. Command as “radius command”.)
Kk Circular center, Z axis (for K, incremental value of Z coordinate at center as
seen from start point)
Ff Feedrate

The circular center coordinate value is commanded with an input setting unit. Caution is required
for the arc command of an axis for witch the input command unit differs. Command with a decimal
point to avoid confusion.

X axis
Center

End point
I

U/2
Start
X point

Z W K

Z axis

43
6. Interpolation Functions
6.3 Circular Interpolation

Detailed description

(1) G02 (or G03) is retained until another G command (G00, G01 or G33) in the 01 group that
changes its mode is issued.
The direction of the circular rotation is differentiated by G02 and G03:
G02 : Clockwise (CW)
G03 : Counterclockwise (CCW)

Turret
+X
Chuck
CCW(G03)
+X

CW(G02) +Z

+Z
Work-
piece CW(G02)
+Z
+X
CCW(G03)
+X Turret

(2) An arc which extends for more than one quadrant can be executed with a single block
command.
(3) The following information is needed for circular interpolation.
(a) Rotation direction :Clockwise (G02) or counterclockwise (G03)
(b) Circular end point coordinates:Given by addresses X, Z, U, W
(c) Circular center coordinates :Given by addresses I, K (incremental value commands)
(d) Feedrate :Given by address F
(4) A program error results when I, K or R is not commanded.
Consideration must be given to the sign for I and K since I is the distance in the X-axis direction
to the arc center as seen from the start point and K is the distance in the Z-axis direction.
(5) No T commands can be issued in the G2/G3 modal status.
A program error (P151) results if a T command is issued in the G2/G3 modal status.

44
6. Interpolation Functions
6.3 Circular Interpolation

Example of program

X axis

50.0

Workpiece
coordinate 120.0
zero point
20.0
Z axis

70.0 50.0
(Unit: mm)

G2 X120.0 Z70.0 I50.0 F200 ; Absolute value command

G2 U100.0 W-50.0 I50.0 F200 ; Incremental value command

45
6. Interpolation Functions
6.3 Circular Interpolation

Cautions for circular interpolation

(1) The terms "clockwise" (G02) and "counterclockwise" (G03) used for circular operations are
defined as a case where in a right-hand coordinate system, the negative direction is viewed
from the positive direction of the coordinate axis which is at right angles to the plane in
question.
(2) If all the end point coordinates are omitted or the end point is at the same position as the start
point, commanding the center using I and K is the same as commanding a 360° arc (perfect
circle).
(3) The following occurs when the start and end point radii do not match in a circular command:
(a) Program error (P70) results at the circular start point when error ∆R is greater than the
parameter "#1084 RadErr".

G02Z80.K50. ;

X
Alarm stop

Center End point

Start
point Start point radius End point
radius ∆R
Z

(b) Spiral interpolation in the direction of the commanded end point results when error ∆R is
less than the parameter value.

G02Z90.K50. ; Spiral interpolation

End
Center point
Start
point Start point radius End point
Z radius ∆R

46
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.4 R specification circular interpolation

6.4 R specification circular interpolation; G02, G03

Function and purpose

Along with the conventional circular interpolation commands based on the circular center
coordinate (I, K) designation, these commands can also be issued by directly designating the
circular radius R.

Command format

G02 (G03) Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Rr Ff;

x/u X-axis end point coordinate
z/w Z-axis end point coordinate
r Circular radius
f Feedrate

Detailed description

The circular center is on the bisector line which is perpendicular to the line connecting the start and
end paints of the circular. The point, where the circular with the specified radius whose start point is
the center intersects the perpendicular bisector line, serves as the center coordinates of the
circular command.
If the R sign of the commanded program is plus, the circular is smaller than a semicircular; if it is
minus, the circular is larger than a semicircular.

Circular path when R sign is minus

O2 End point
Center
point
Circular path when R sign is plus

L Center point

Start point r O1

The following condition must be met with an R specification circular interpolation command:
L
≤1
2×r
When L/2 - r > (parameter : #1084 RadErr), an alarm will occur.
Where L is the line from the start point to end point.
If an R specification and I, K specification are given at the same time in the same block, the circular
command with the R specification takes precedence.
In the case of a full-circle command (where the start and end points coincide), an R specification
circular command will be completed immediately even if it is issued and no operation will be
executed. An I, K specification circular command should therefore be used in such a case.

47
6. Interpolation Functions
6.4 R specification circular interpolation

Example of program

(Example 1)
G03 Zz1 Xx1 Rr1 Ff1 ; R specification circular on Z-X plane

(Example 2)
G02 Xx1 Zz1 Ii1 Kk1 Rr1 Ff1 ; R specification circular on X-Z plane
(When the R specification and I, K specification are
contained in the same block, the R specification has
priority in processing.)

48
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.5 Plane selection

6.5 Plane selection; G17, G18, G19

Function and purpose

These commands are used to select the control plane and the plane on which the circular exists.
If the 3 basic axes and the parallel axes corresponding to these basic axes are entered as
parameters, the commands can select the plane composed of any 2 axes which are not parallel
axes. If a rotation axis is entered as a parallel axis, the commands can select the plane containing
the rotation axis.
These commands are used to select:
• The plane for circular interpolation
• The plane for nose R compensation

Command format

G17; (I-J plane selection)

G18; (K-I plane selection)
G19; (J-K plane selection)
I, J and K indicate each basic axis or parallel axis.
When the power is turned ON or when the system is reset, the plane set by the parameters "#1025
I_plane" is selected.

I K J

G03 G03 G03

G02 G02 G02

J I K

G17 (I-J) plane G18 (K-I) plane G19 (J-K) plane

49
6. Interpolation Functions
6.5 Plane selection

Parameter entry

#1026~1028 #1029~1031
Basic axes and parallel axes can be entered in
base_I, J, K aux_I, J, K
the parameters. The same axis name can be
I X Y entered in duplication, but when it is assigned in
J Y duplication, the plane is determined by plane
K Z selection system (4).
It is not possible to set axes, which have not
Fig. 1 Examples of plane selection been entered, as control axes.
parameter entry

Plane selection system

This section describes the plane selection for the parameter entry samples shown in Fig. 1.

(1) Axis addresses assigned in the same block as the plane selection (G17, G18, G19) command
determine which of the basic axes or parallel axes are to be in the actual plane selected.
(Example)

Y G17XY; X G18XZ; Z G19YZ;

G03 G03 G03

G02 G02 G02

X Z Y

(2) Plane selection is not performed with blocks in which the plane selection G code (G17, G18,
G19) is not assigned.
G18 X_ Z_ ; Z-X plane
Y_ Z_ ; Z-X plane (no plane change)
(3) When the axis addresses are omitted in the block containing the plane selection G codes (G17,
G18, G19), it is assumed that the axis addresses of the 3 basic axes have been assigned.
G18 ; (Z-X plane = G18 XZ ;)
(4) When the basic axes or their parallel axes are duplicated and assigned in the same block as
the plane selection G code (G17, G18, G19), the plane is determined in the order of basic axes,
and then parallel axes.
G18 XYZ ; The Z-X plane is selected.
Therefore, the Y movement is unrelated to the selected plane.

(Note 1) When the "2" in the parameter "#1025 I_plane" is kept ON, the G18 plane is selected
when the power is turned ON or when the system is reset.

50
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

6.6 Thread cutting

6.6.1 Constant lead thread cutting; G33

Function and purpose

The G33 command exercises feed control over the tool which is synchronized with the spindle
rotation and so this makes it possible to conduct constant-lead straight thread-cutting, tapered
thread-cutting, and continuous thread-cutting.

F/E

F/E F/E
Straight thread Scrolled thread Continuous thread

Command format

G33 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu Ff Qq ; (Normal lead thread cutting commands)

Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu Thread end point addresses and coordinates
Ff Lead of long axis (axis which moves most) direction
Qq Thread cutting start shift angle, 0.001 to 360.000°

G33 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu Ee Qq ; (Precision lead thread cutting commands)

Zz, Ww, Xx, Uu Thread end point addresses and coordinates
Ee Lead of long axis (axis which moves most) direction
Qq Thread cutting start shift angle, 0.001 to 360.000°

X axis W
End
point

U/2 α
Start point
δ1
Z δ2
Z axis

51
6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

Detailed description

(1) The E command is also used for the number of ridges in inch thread cutting, and whether the
ridge number or precision lead is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting.
(Parameter "#1229 set 01/bit" is set to "1" for precision lead designation.)
(2) The lead in the long axis direction is commanded for the taper thread lead.

X Tapered thread section

U/2
a°

When a < 45°, Lead is in Z-axis direction.

When a > 45°, Lead is in X-axis direction.
When a = 45°, Lead can be in either Z or X-axis direction.

Thread cutting metric input

Input unit
B (0.001mm) C (0.0001mm)
system
Command
F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch) F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Minimum 1 (= 0.0001), 1 (= 0.00001), 1 (= 1), 1 (= 0.00001), 1(=0.000001), 1 (= 1),
command
unit (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.000)

Command 0.0001 0.00001 0.03 0.00001 0.000001 0.255

range ~ 999.9999 ~ 999.99999 ~ 999.99 ~ 99.99999 ~ 99.999999 ~9999.999

Input unit
D (0.00001mm)
system
Command
F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Minimum 1 (= 0.000001), 1 (= 0.0000001),
command
unit (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000)

Command 0.000001 0.0000001

range ~ 99.999999 ~ 99.9999999

Thread cutting inch input

Input unit
B (0.0001inch) C (0.00001inch)
system
Command
F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch) F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Minimum 1(=0.000001), 1(=0.0000001), 1 (= 1), 1(=0.0000001), 1(=0.00000001), 1(=1),
command
unit (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.00000000) (1.=1.00000)

Command 0.000001 0.000010 0.0101 0.0000001 0.00000001 0.10001

range ~ 99.999999 ~ 9.9999999 ~ 9999.9999 ~ 9.9999999 ~ 0.99999999 ~999.99999

(Note 1) It is not possible to assign a lead where the feedrate as converted into per-minute feed
exceeds the maximum cutting feedrate.

52
6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

(3) The constant surface speed control function should not be used for taper thread cutting
commands or scrolled thread cutting commands.
(4) The spindle rotation speed should be kept constant throughout from the rough cutting until the
finishing.
(5) If the feed hold function is employed during thread cutting to stop the feed, the thread ridges
will lose their shape. For this reason, feed hold does not function during thread cutting.
Note that this is valid from the time the thread cutting command is executed to the time the axis
moves.
If the feed hold switch is pressed during thread cutting, block stop will result at the end point of
the block following the block in which thread cutting is completed (no longer G33 mode).
(6) The converted cutting feedrate is compared with the cutting feed clamp rate when thread
cutting starts, and if it is found to exceed the clamp rate, an operation error will result.
(7) In order to protect the lead during thread cutting, a cutting feedrate which has been converted
may sometimes exceed the cutting feed clamp rate.
(8) An illegal lead is normally produced at the start of the thread and at the end of the cutting
because of servo system delay and other such factors.
Therefore, it is necessary to command a thread length which is determined by adding the
illegal lead lengths δ1 and δ2 to the required thread length.
(9) The spindle rotation speed is subject to the following restriction:
Maximum feedrate
1≤R≤
Thread lead
Where R ≤ Tolerable speed of encoder (r/min)
R = Spindle rotation speed (r/min)
Thread lead = mm or inches
Maximum feedrate = mm/min or inch/mm
(this is subject to the restrictions imposed by the machine specifications).
(10) Dry run is valid for thread cutting but the feedrate based on dry run is not synchronized with the
spindle rotation.
The dry run signal is checked at the start of thread cutting and any switching during thread
cutting is ignored.
(11) Synchronous feed applies for the thread cutting commands even with an asynchronous feed
command (G94).
(12) Spindle override is invalid and 100% fixed during thread cutting.
(13) When a thread cutting command is programmed during nose R compensation, the
compensation is temporarily canceled and the thread cutting is executed.
(14) When the mode is switched to another automatic mode while G33 is executed, the following
block which does not contain a thread cutting command is first executed and then the
automatic operation stops.
(15) When the mode is switched to the manual mode while G33 is executed, the following block
which does not contain a thread cutting command is first executed and then the automatic
operation stops. In the case of a single block, the following block which does not contain a
thread cutting command (When G33 mode is cancelled) is first executed and then the
automatic operation stops. Note that automatic operation is stopped until the G33 command
axis starts moving.
(16) The thread cutting command waits for the single rotation sync signal of the rotary encoder and
starts movement.
Note that when using two systems, if one system issues a thread cutting command during
ongoing thread cutting by another system, the movement will start without waiting for the
rotary encoder single rotation sync signal. Therefore, carry out synchronization between
systems before issuing a thread cutting command with multiple systems.
(17) The thread cutting start shift angle is not a modal. If there is no Q command with G33, this will
be handled as "Q0".

53
6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

(18) If a value exceeding 360.000 is commanded with G33 Q, this will be handled as "Q360.000".
(19) G33 cuts one row with one cycle. To cut two rows, change the Q value, and issue the same
command.

Example of program

X axis

20.0
Z axis

90.0

40.0 50.0
(Unit: mm)

G33 X90.0 Z40.0 E12.34567 ; Absolute value command

G33 U70.0 W-50.0 E12.34567 ; Incremental value command

54
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

6.6.2 Inch thread cutting; G33

Function and purpose

If the number of ridges per inch in the long axis direction is assigned in the G33 command, the feed
of the tool synchronized with the spindle rotation will be controlled, which means that constant-lead
straight thread-cutting, tapered thread-cutting, and continuous thread-cutting can be performed.

Command format

G33 Zz/Ww Xx/Uu Ee Qq;

Zz,Ww,Xx,Uu Thread end point addresses and coordinates
Ee Number of ridges per inch in direction of long axis (axis which moves
most) (decimal point command can also be assigned)
Qq Thread cutting start shift angle, 0.001 to 360.000°

X axis W
End
point

U/2 X α
Start point
δ1
Z δ2
Z axis

Detailed description

(1) The number of ridges in the long axis direction is assigned as the number of ridges per inch.
(2) The E code is also used to assign the precision lead length, and whether the ridge number or
precision lead length is to be designated can be selected by parameter setting. (The number of
ridges is designated by setting parameter "#1229 set 01/bit 1" to "0".)
(3) The E command value should be set within the lead value range when the lead is converted.
(4) See Section "6.6.1 Constant lead thread cutting" for other details.

55
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

Example of program

X axis

20.0
Z axis

90.0

40.0 50.0
(Unit: mm)

G33 X90.0 Z40.0 E12.0 ; Absolute value command

G33 U70.0 W-50.0 E12.0 ; Incremental value command

6.6.3 Continuous thread cutting

Function and purpose

Continuous thread cutting is possible by assigning thread cutting commands continuously.

In this way, it is possible to cut special threads whose lead or shape changes.

G33 G33
G33

56
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

6.6.4 Variable lead thread cutting; G34

Function and purpose

Variable lead thread cutting is enabled by a command specifying a lead increment or decrement
amount per turn of the screw.

Command format

G34 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ff/Ee Kk ;

Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Thread end point addresses and coordinates
Ff/Ee Standard screw lead
Kk Lead increment or decrement amount per turn of the screw

Non-lead axis

Lead axis

F+3.5K F+2.5K F+1.5K F+0.5K

Lead speed F+3K F+2K F+K F

F+4K

57
6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

Detailed description

(1) The command range is as shown below.

Thread cutting metric input

Input unit
B (0.001mm) C (0.0001mm) D (0.00001mm) B/C/D
system
Command
F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev)
address K (n ∗ mm/rev)
Minimum n: Number of
1 (=0.0001) 1 (=0.00001) 1 (=0.00001) 1 (=0.000001) 1 (=0.000001) 1 (=0.0000001)
command pitches
(1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000)
unit Same as F or E
Command 0.0001 to 0.00001 to 0.00001 to 0.000001 to 0.000001 to 0.0000001 to (signed)
range 999.9999 999.99999 99.99999 99.999999 99.999999 99.9999999

Thread cutting inch input

Input unit
B (0.0001inch) C (0.00001inch) B/C
system
Command
F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev)
address K (n ∗ inch/rev)
Minimum n: Number of
1 (=0.000001) 1 (=0.0000001) 1 (=0.0000001) 1 (=0.00000001) pitches
command
(1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.00000000)
unit Same as F or E
Command 0.000001 to 0.0000001 to 0.0000001 to 0.00000001 to (signed)
range 99.999999 9.9999999 9.9999999 0.99999999

(2) A positive value of K indicates incremental pitches.

Movement amount of one block (n pitches) = (F + K) + (F + 2K) + (F + 3K) + · · + (F + nK)
(3) A negative value of K indicates decremental pitches.
Movement amount of one block (n pitches) = (F – K) + (F – 2K) + (F – 3K) + · · + (F – nK)
(4) A program error will occur if the thread lead is not set correctly.

Error number Meaning Remedy

P93 Illegal pitch value Specify valid values for F/E and
1) An invalid value is specified for F/E or K.
K in a thread cutting command. (Reference 1)
2) The last lead goes outside of the F/E
command range.
2
Reference 1) Last lead = (F +2KZ)
Number of pitches = (–F + last lead)/K
Z: Length of lead axis

(5) The other matters are the same as G33.

Refer to section "6.6.1 Constant lead thread cutting; G33".

58
6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

Precautions

The maximum thread length in the variable lead thread cutting function follows the program format.
The following table shows the maximum thread lengths. A program error (P60) will occur if these
values are exceeded.

Command unit Metric command Inch command

(mm) (mm) (inch)
0.001 10737.377 10737.377
0.0001 1073.7377 1073.7377
0.00001 107.37377 -

59
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

6.6.5 Circular thread cutting; G35, G36

Function and purpose

Circular thread cutting making the longitudinal direction the lead is possible.

Command format

Ii Kk
G35(G36) Xx/Uu Zz/Ww { } Ff/Ee Qq ;
Rr
G35 Clockwise (CW)
G36 Counterclockwise (CCW)
Xx/Uu Circular end point coordinate, X axis (absolute value of workpiece
coordinate system for X, incremental value from present position for U)
Zz/Ww Circular end point coordinate, Z axis (absolute value of workpiece
coordinate system for Z, incremental value from present position for W)
Ii Circular center, X axis (incremental value of circular center looking
from start point)
Kk Circular center, Z axis (incremental value of circular center looking
from start point)
Rr Arc radius
Ff/Ee Longitudinal (axis with largest movement amount) direction lead
(Ff.. normal lead thread cutting/Ee .. precision lead thread, inch
thread)
Qq Thread cutting start shift angle, 0.000 to 360.000°

X axis
Z W
End point

U/2
Start point

X Z axis
R l

Center
K

F/E
C ircular thread

60
6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

Detailed description

(1) A program error (P33) will occur if the start point and end point match or if the arc center angle
is more than 180°.
(2) The following will occur if the start point radius and end point radius do not match.
• A program error (P70) will occur if the error ∆R is more than parameter "#1084 RadErr" (arc
error).
• Interpolation will start from the arc center where the start point radius and end point radius
match if the error ∆R is less than parameter "#1084 RadErr".

Start point
C enter radius ∆R
End point radius

End point Start point

Obtained center

(3) A program error (P33) will occur if the R_ sign is negative.

(4) A program error (P33) will occur if there is no I_K_ command and R_ command.
(5) The R_ command will have the priority if the I_K_ command and R_ command are issued in
the same block.
(6) If the arc center is (0,0), the arc command can be issued for two successive quadrants. A
program error (P33) will occur if an arc with more than three quadrants is issued.

When Z axis is long axis

1st and 4th quadrant 2nd and 3rd quadrant

X X

Start point End point

Center Z Center Z

Start point End point

61
6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

(7) When the movement amount is equal, the horizontal direction in the selected plane will be the
long axis.
Plane selection Long axis when movement amount is equal
G17 (XY plane) I axis
G18 (ZX plane) K axis
G19 (YZ plane) J axis

(8) G36 is used to command two functions, automatic tool length measurement and circular
thread cutting (CCW). Which function is selected follows parameter "#1238 set10/bit0" (Arc
thread cutting).
When #1238 set10/bit0 is set to 0
G code Function
G35 Circular thread cutting clockwise (CW)
G36 Automatic tool length measurement X

When #1238 set10/bit0 is set to 1

G code Function
G35 Circular thread cutting clockwise (CW)
G36 Circular thread cutting counterclockwise (CCW)
G37 Automatic tool length measurement Z
G37.1 Automatic tool length measurement X
G37.2 Automatic tool length measurement Z

(9) If the lead axis and non-lead axis cutting feedrate is faster than the clamp speed when thread
cutting is started, the "M01 operation error 107" will occur, and thread cutting will not start.
(10) During thread cutting, the cutting feedrate may exceed the clamp speed to guarantee the lead.
In this case, the error "M01 operation error 107" will appear, but thread cutting will continue.
However, if the "cutting feedrate > clamp speed" is established during circular thread cutting
commanded in the second or following block of continuous thread cutting, automatic operation
will be stopped just before the circular thread cutting command in the 2nd block, and the error
"M01 operation error 107" will appear.
(11) Continuous thread cutting is possible by commanding the thread cutting command in
succession. This allows special threads in which the leads or shapes change midway to be cut.
The continuous thread cutting command can be issued in the order of arc → arc, arc →
constant lead, and constant lead → arc.
(12) Normally, an illegal lead will be cut at the start and end of the threads, due to a delay in the
servo system.
Thus, command the required thread length with the illegal thread length added to the start and
end.
As another method, command the required thread length as a circular thread (G35/G36), and
then command the illegal lead length before and after that command (start and end of thread
cutting) as a constant lead thread (G33). (Continuous thread cutting in order of constant lead
→ arc → constant lead.)

62
6. Interpolation Functions
6.6 Thread cutting

Relation with other functions

(1) A program error (P113) will occur if the G35/G36 command is issued to an axis not within the
selected plane.
(2) The thread cutting speed is not synchronized with the spindle rotation when dry run is valid.
(The thread pitch is not guaranteed.)
(3) If the dry run switch is turned ON during thread cutting, the dry run signal will be ignored.
(4) If the FEEDHOLD switch is pressed during thread cutting, the block will stop at the end point of
the block following that in which thread cutting is completed (when the thread cutting mode is
exited).
(5) Circular thread cutting will function normally even during mirror image.
(6) A program error (P201) will occur if the G35/G36 circular thread cutting command is issued in
the finish shape program of the fixed cycle for compound lathes.
(7) A program error (P385) will occur if thread cutting corner rounding or corner chamfering is
commanded during circular thread cutting or the next block.
(8) Geometric and circular thread cutting cannot be commanded simultaneously. If commanded
simultaneously, a program error (P395) or program error (P70) will occur.
(9) If thread cutting is commanded during nose R compensation, nose R compensation will be
temporarily canceled, and thread cutting will be executed.

Precautions

(1) Do not issue the circular thread cutting command during constant surface speed control. The
thread will not be cut correctly because the spindle rotation speed will change during thread
cutting.
(2) Spindle override does not function during thread cutting.
(3) A program error (P39) will occur if G35/G36 is commanded when the additional specifications
are not provided.

63
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.7 Helical interpolation

6.7 Helical interpolation; G17, G18, G19, and G02, G03 (Only MAGIC64)
Function and purpose

This function moves the tool in a helical shape by linearly interpolating another linear axis
simultaneously with the circular interpolation.

Z Command program path

Y

Linear interpolation element

Circular interpolation element

Command format

G17 G02 (G03) Xx/Uu Yy/Vv Zz/Ww Ii Jj Ff ;

G17 G02 (G03) Xx/Uu Yy/Vv Zz/Ww Rr Ff ;
G17 Arc plane (G17: X-Y plane, G18: Z-X plane, G19: Y-Z plane)
G02 (G03) Arc rotation direction (G02: clockwise, G03: counterclockwise)
Xx/Uu, Yy/Vv Arc end point coordinates
Zz/Ww Linear axis end point coordinates
Ii, Jj Arc center coordinates
Rr Arc radius
Ff Feedrate

(Note 1) In this manual, the following setting descriptions are used: I axis: X, J axis: Y, K axis: Z

64
6. Interpolation Functions
6.7 Helical interpolation

Detailed description

The following type of movement will take place when the following type of command is issued.
G17 G02 Xx Yy Zz Ii Jj Ff ;

Z Command program path

Y

Linear interpolation element

Y

End point

Circular interpolation element

X

X j
i
Start point

X-Y plane path (projected path)

The left drawing shows the process as an exploded view, and the right drawing shows the arc
plane from directly above.

65
6. Interpolation Functions
6.7 Helical interpolation

Example of program

(Example)
G17 G02 X100. Y100. Z100. I-100. J100. F120 ;

Z Command program path

Y

Linear interpolation element

Y

End point

Circular interpolation element

X

X J100.
I-100.
Start point

X-Y plane path (projected path)

(Unit: mm)

The left drawing shows the process as an exploded view, and the right drawing shows the arc
plane from directly above.
At the start of the block, the axis centers at the point –100mm in the X axis direction and
100mm in the Y axis direction from the workpiece coordinates (start point), and starts cutting at
the feedrate 120mm/min while rotating.

Precautions and restrictions

(1) When executing helical interpolation, command another linear axis (several axis can be
commanded) that does not contain the circular interpolation command and arc axis.
(2) Up to four axes can be commanded simultaneously. (Up to two linear axis can be commanded
simultaneously in addition to the arc axis.)
(3) A command exceeding one rotation cannot be issued. (The circular interpolation command
specifications are followed.)
(4) Command the feedrate as the composite speed for each axis.
(5) With helical interpolation, the axis that configures the plane is the circular interpolation axis,
and the other axes are the linear interpolation axes.
(6) Drawing with the graphic check function is not possible.

66
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

6.8 Milling interpolation; G12.1

Function and purpose

Milling interpolation is used to perform contouring control by converting commands programmed in

an orthogonal coordinate system into movements of a linear axis and rotation axis (workpiece
rotation).

Y (Hypothetical axis)

A G12.1 command is issued to perform milling and a G13.1 command is issued to cancel milling
and returns to normal turning.

Command format

G12.1 Dd E=e; Milling mode ON

Dd Selection of milling hypothetical axis name
Ee Designation of milling interpolation rotation axis

G13.1; Milling mode OFF (Turning mode)

67
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Command range
Address Meaning of address Remarks
(unit)
D Selection of milling 0: Y axis • If there is no D command, the
hypothetical axis 1: Rotation axis milling hypothetical axis name
name name will follow parameter (#1517
mill_C).
• If only the D command is issued,
it will be handled as D0.
• A program error (P35) will occur
if a value other than 0 or 1 is
issued as the numerical
command after the D command.
E Designation of G12.1 command • If there is no E command, the
constant surface system rotation axis constant surface speed control
speed control axis command address axis will follow parameter (#1516
mill_ax).
• A program error (P33) will occur
if only an E command is issued.
• A program error (P33) will occur
if an axis address is not
commanded after "E=".
• A program error (P300) will occur
if an axis that does not exist in
the command system is
designated as the rotation axis
name.
• A program error (P32) will occur
if a value is commanded for the
rotation axis name.
• To issue a program command
after the "E= rotation axis name",
delimit the "E= rotation axis
name" and the other command
with a comma (,). A program
error (P33) will occur if there is
no comma.

The following G codes are used to select milling and set the conditions.
G code Function Remarks
G12.1 Milling mode ON Default is G13.1.
G13.1 Milling mode OFF
G16 Selection of Y-Z cylindrical plane One of G17, G16, and G19 can be
G17 Selection of X-Y plane defined as the default (when G12.1
is issued) by the parameter.
G19 Selection of Y-Z plane
G41 Tool radius compensation left Default is G40.
G42 Tool radius compensation right

68
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Machining mode

G13.1 (Turning mode) G12.1 (Milling mode)

G17 G18 G19 G16 G17 G19

(X-Y plane) (Z-X plane) (Y-Z plane) Y-Z (X-Y plane) (Y-Z plane)
cylindrical
plane

G46, G41, G42/G40 (Nose R compensation) G41, G42/G40 (Tool compensation)

6.8.1 Selecting milling mode

Detailed description

(1) The G12.1 and G13.1 commands are used to switch between the turning (G13.1) and milling
(G12.1) modes.
(2) These commands are modal and the initial mode effective at power ON is the turning mode.
(3) The following requirements must be satisfied before a G12.1 command is issued. Otherwise, a
program error (P485) results.
(a) Nose R compensation has been canceled.
(b) Constant surface speed control has been canceled.
(4) If one of the command axes in the milling mode has not completed reference point return, a
program error (P484) results.
(5) The G12.1 command automatically cancels an asynchronous mode F command. Therefore,
specify an F value in milling mode.

(Note1) If G12.1 is executed, while no movement command has been given, after nose R
compensation is canceled by an independent G40 command, nose R compensation is
canceled in the G12.1 block.
(Note2) If the milling interpolation command is issued during the mirror image, a program error
(P486) results.
(Note3) When the G12.1 command is issued, the deceleration check is executed.
(Note 4) If a command other than a plane section is issued during the G12.1 command, a program
error (P33) will occur.

69
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

6.8.2 Milling interpolation control and command axes

Detailed description

(1) The two orthogonal linear axes (X axis and Z axis) and a rotation axis are used as control axes
for milling interpolation. The rotation axis is selected with the E command. The axis designated
with the parameter will be selected if there is no E command.
(2) Three orthogonal linear axes are used as the command axes for milling interpolation. They are
the X, Z, and a hypothetical axis.
The hypothetical axis is a hypothetical axis for interpolation which intersects the X and Z axes
at right angles. The hypothetical axis name is the control rotation axis name selected with Y or
in (1) with the D command. The axis name designated with the parameter will be selected if
there is no D command.

(Hypothetical axis)

(3) Command axis X for milling is not just the interpolated one of control axis X. It is handled as X
in the milling coordinate system when a G12. 1 command is issued.

(4) Whether the position in the milling coordinate system is a diameter command or radius
command is selected with the following parameter.
Parameter Details
0: Radius command for all axes
#8111 Milling Radius
1: Follows parameter (#1019 dia) for each axis

(Example 1)

When C axis is used for rotation axis, and

X "Y" is used for hypothetical axis name

(Program 1)
:
20 :
:
N1 G0 X40 ;
N2 G12.1 ;
N3
(or G12.1 E=C, D0 ;)
10 N3 G1 X10. Y10. F10. ;
:
:
:

Hypothetical axis 10 0

(Unit: mm)

70
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

N3 of program 1 is executed as follows:

X = Mill _ X X
Mill _ X
(a) (b)
Program path
Program path

Hypothetical
axis
Hypothetical
axis

X X
(d) (c)
Hypothetical Program path
axis Mill _ X

Mill _ X
Program path

Hypothetical
10 10 axis

(Unit: mm)

Current values
X 28.284 (diameter value display)
C 45.000
(5) Milling interpolation is also available for a two-control-axis system consisting of one linear axis
and one rotation axis. The X axis must be used as the linear axis. The rotation and milling
hypothetical axes are selected as shown above. In milling mode, the G17 plane must be
selected.
(6) The table below lists the incremental axis names of the hypothetical axis used in milling mode.
These axis commands handle radius commands only.
Selected hypothetical
Absolute axis name Incremental axis name
axis
Y axis Y V
Rotation axis (C) Rotation axis name (C) Rotation axis incremental name (H)
(The following description uses Y for the hypothetical axis name and C for the rotation axis
name.)

71
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

6.8.3 Selecting a plane during the milling mode

Function and purpose

A plane selection command decides the plane on which the tool moves for circular interpolation or
tool radius compensation in milling mode.

Command format

G17/G19 ;
G16 C_ ;
G16 Y-Z cylindrical plane
C_ Cylindrical radius value
G17 X-Y plane
G19 Y-Z plane
(1) These G commands for plane selection are modal. The G17 plane is automatically selected as
the default each time the turning mode is switched to the milling mode by a G12.1 command.
When the milling mode is switched back to the turning mode by a G13.1 command, the plane
that was selected before the milling mode is entered is restored.
(2) G16 or G19 can also be defined as the default effective when a G12.1 command is issued. A
parameter is used for this.
(3) The three planes selected are explained below.
(a) G16
G16 indicates the plane obtained by developing a cylinder with its bottom radius X. This is
useful to process the side face of a workpiece.

Y-Z cylindrical plane

72
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(b) G17
G17 is an X-Y plane in an XYZ orthogonal coordinate system. This is useful to process the
end face of a workpiece.

X-Y plane

(c) G19
G19 is a Y-Z plane in an XYZ orthogonal coordinate system.

Z
Center of workpiece

Y-Z plane

73
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

6.8.4 Setting milling coordinate system

Function and purpose

The coordinate system for the milling mode is set according to the selected plane each time the
turning mode (G13.1) is switched to the milling mode by a G12.1 command.

G17 and G19 planes

(1) For the X and Z axes, the current positions are set as radius value on the coordinate value.
(2) The Y axis is decided as the axis which intersects the X and Z axes at right angles. Y=0 is
defined in a G12.1 command.

X
Tool

During the milling mode on the G17 plane, the X axis is operated in the area (positive or
negative side) that has existed before issuing the G12.1 command. When you want to control
the X axis in the positive side during the milling mode, moving the X axis to the positive area
(including 0) is required before issuing the G12.1 command. When you want to control the X
axis in the negative side during the milling mode, moving the X axis to the negative area (not
including 0) is required before issuing the G12.1 command.

G16 plane

(1) To select a G16 plane, the radius value of a cylinder is specified by "G16 C_ ;". If no radius
value is specified, the current X axis value is used as the radius value to define a cylinder. If no
radius value can be defined, a program error (P485) occurs.
(2) As in normal turning mode, the X axis indicates the distance from the center line of the
workpiece.
(3) G16 (Y-Z cylindrical plane) is actually the side of a cylinder.
(4) The X axis indicates the distance from the center line of the workpiece. The Y axis indicates
the circumference with the radius value of the bottom of a cylinder defined by a G16 command.

74
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(5) The zero point of the Y axis is the position where a G12.1 command is issued.
(Example)
: : : :
: : : :
G12.1 G16 C50. ; G12.1 ; G12.1 E=e,Dd ; G12.1 E=e,Dd ;
or or or
: G16 C50. ; G16 C50. ; G16 C50. ;
: : : :
: : : :

Z
r

75
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

6.8.5 Preparatory functions

Valid G codes in milling mode

Classifi- Classifi-
G code Function G code Function
cation cation
∗ G00 Positioning G65 Macro call
∗ G01 Linear interpolation G66 Macro modal call A
∗ G02 Circular interpolation (CW) G66.1 Macro modal call B
∗ G03 Circular interpolation (CCW) G67 Macro modal call cancel

G04 Dwell
G09 Exact stop check G80 Hole drilling cycle cancel
G83 Deep hole drilling cycle (Z axis)
G13.1 Turning mode G84 Tap cycle (Z axis)
G85 Boring cycle (Z axis)
G87 Deep hole drilling cycle (X axis)
G16 Y-Z cylindrical plane selection G88 Tap cycle (X axis)
G17 X-Y plane selection G89 Boring cycle (X axis)
G90 Absolute value command
G19 Y-Z plane selection G91 Incremental value command

G22 Barrier check ON G94 Asynchronous feed

G23 Barrier check OFF
G98 Hole drilling cycle initial point
return
G99 Hole drilling cycle reference point
return

G61 Exact stop mode

G40 Tool radius compensation
cancel
G41 Tool radius compensation left G64 Turning mode
G42 Tool radius compensation right

∗ : Milling interpolation command

: G code effective only in milling mode

(1) If an invalid G code is issued in milling mode, a program error (P481) occurs.
If the milling interpolation is commanded in milling mode, a program error (P481) occurs.
(2) In milling mode, all movement commands are commanded with the coordinate system
determined by the selected machining plane. The rotation axis thus cannot be moved by a
direct command in milling mode. To perform milling at a specific position of a workpiece,
therefore, positioning must have been made in turning mode.
(Example)
:
:
G0 X100. C180.; ⇒ Positioning before milling
G12.1; (or G12.1 E=C,D0;)
G0 X50.;
:
:
(3) If a command for an axis other than X, Z, and Y (rotation axis) is issued in milling mode, a
program error (P481) occurs.

76
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(4) The G84, G88 synchronous tapping cycles cannot be used during the milling mode.
(5) In milling mode, the Y axis can be specified by only four G codes: G00, G01, G02, and G03.
These are called the milling interpolation commands.

Positioning (G00)

If a G00 command is issued in milling mode, positioning is made to the specified point on the
selected plane at a rapid traverse rate.
G00 X/U__ Y/V__ Z/W__ ;

Linear interpolation (G01)

If a G01 command is issued in milling mode, linear interpolation is made to the specified point on
the selected plane at the speed specified by an F speed.

(1) G16 mode

Program format
G01 Y/V__ Z/W__ X/U__ F__ ;

S z

y Z
X
Y E

Development

S z

77
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(2) G17 mode

Program format
G01 X/U__ Y/V__ Z/W__ F__ ;

E
A x
z
S E
y
Z

(3) G19 mode

Program format
G01 Y/V__ Z/W__ X/U__ F__ ;

S z
y Z
A

Y E

78
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Circular interpolation (G02/G03)

If a G02 or G03 command is issued in milling mode, circular interpolation is performed at the
specified speed on the selected plane.

(1) G16 mode

G02/G03 Y/V__ Z/W__ J__ K__ F__ ;
or
G02/G03 Y/V__ Z/W__ R__ F__ ;
G02 Circular interpolation (clockwise)
G03 Circular interpolation (counterclockwise)
Y/V Circular end point coordinate, Y axis (Y: absolute value, V:
incremental value)
Z/W Circular end point coordinate, Z axis (Z: absolute value, W:
incremental value)
J/K Circular center incremental value (radius command
incremental value from the start point to the center)
R Circular radius
F Feedrate

(A, Q)
E X
S
X

Development

(A, Q) k
E
j
S

79
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(2) G17 mode

G02/G03 X/U__ Y/V__ I__ J__ F__ ;
or
G02/G03 X/U__ Y/V__ R__ F__ ;
X/U Circular end point coordinate, X axis (X: absolute value, U:
incremental value)
Y/V Circular end point coordinate, Y axis (Y: absolute value, V:
incremental value)
I/J Circular center incremental value (incremental value from the
start point to the center)
R Circular radius
F Feedrate

(A, Q) Q

i
S
j

E Z
A

(3) G19 mode

G02/G03 Y/V__ Z/W__ J__ K__ F__ ;
or
G02/G03 Y/V__ Z/W__ R__ F__ ;
Y/V Circular end point coordinate, Y axis (Y: absolute value, V:
incremental value)
Z/W Circular end point coordinate, Z axis (Z: absolute value, W:
incremental value)
J/K Circular center incremental value (incremental value from the
start point to the center)
R Circular radius
F Feedrate

Q
Z
A
j E

Y k S

80
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

6.8.6 Switching from milling mode to turning mode; G13.1

Detailed description

(1) A G13.1 command is used to cancel the milling mode and return to the turning mode.
(2) The G13.1 command is effective if the following requirement is met. If not, a program error
(P485) occurs.
(a) Tool radius compensation has been canceled.
(3) The G13.1 command restores the plane selected before the preceding G12.1 command was
issued.
(4) The G13.1 command restores the mode (synchronous or asynchronous) and the F value (if in
asynchronous mode) selected before the preceding G12.1 command was issued.

(Note 1) If G13.1 is executed, while no movement command has been given, after cancellation by
an independent G40 command, tool radius compensation is canceled in the G13.1 block.
(Note 2) When G13.1 command is issued, the deceleration check is executed.
(Note 3) If another command is issued during the G13.1 command, a program error will occur.

6.8.7 Feed function

Asynchronous cutting feed

An asynchronous feed mode (G94 command) can use F6.3 digits to specify the feedrate per
minute in units of 0.001mm/min. The specifiable range is 0.001 to 999999.999mm/min. If the
effective speed exceeds the cutting feed clamp speed, it is clamped by that clamp speed.

(Note 1) Whenever the turning mode is switched to the milling mode by a G12.1 command, the F
command modal value is canceled. After mode change, therefore, the feedrate must be
set by an F command.
(Note 2) A G12.1 command forces the mode to shift to the asynchronous mode.
(Note 3) When the milling mode is canceled by a G13.1 command, both the feed mode and F
command modal value return to the original state before the preceding G12.1 command
was issued.

6.8.8 Program support functions

Relation with other functions

The following program support functions are effective in milling mode:

(1) Linear angle command
(2) Variable command
(3) Automatic corner chamfering/corner rounding
(4) Geometric function
(5) Hole drilling cycle
(6) Subprogram function
(7) User macro

81
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

6.8.9 Miscellaneous functions

Relation with other functions

(1) M and B commands can be issued in milling mode.

(2) In milling mode, an S command specifies not the spindle rotation speed but the rotary tool
speed.
(3) If a T command is issued in milling mode, a program error (P485) occurs. Before a G12.1
command is issued, therefore, tool selection must be done.
:
T1212 ; ⇒ Specify a T command before a G12.1 command.
G0 X100. Z0. ;
G12.1 ; (or G12.1 E=C,DO ;)
:
T1200 ; ⇒ In milling mode, a T command causes a program error
(P485).
:
G13.1 ;

82
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

6.8.10 Tool offset functions

Tool length offset

(1) In milling mode, tool compensation is performed by adding the tool length offset amount
specified on the cutting coordinates converted from the milling coordinate system.

X : Tool position

Tool position

X
Tool length offset X
Y

Y
Milling coordinate system
Actual tool position

Movement on the milling

coordinate system

83
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(2) As in (1) on previous page, if the offset amount is different from the actual one, the shape is not
corrected normally.
(a) If the offset amount is larger than tool length:
Example: The actual tool length is 15.0 when tool length X = 20.0

Milling command
Actual shape

Tool movement

84
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(b) If the offset amount is smaller than tool length:

Example: The actual tool length is 25.0 when tool length X = 20.0

Actual
shape

Milling command
Tool movement

Tool radius compensation

The workpiece shape can be compensated in the direction of the vector by the radius amount of the
tool specified by a G command (G40 to G42) and selected compensation number.

Command format
G40 Xx Yy ; Tool radius compensation cancel
G41 Xx Yy ; Tool radius compensation (left)
G42 Xx Yy ; Tool radius compensation (right)

(1) A tool radius compensation command must be issued after the milling mode is entered.
The tool radius compensation command must be canceled before the turning mode is
restored.
(2) A tool compensation number must be specified before the milling mode is entered (before a
G12. 1 command is issued).
A T command in milling mode causes a program error (P485).
(3) Tool radius compensation is performed on the selected plane.
G17 plane ... XY axes
G19 plane
G16 plane YZ axes

85
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Tool radius compensation cancel mode

Tool radius compensation is canceled under either of the following conditions:

(1) While a G12.1 command is effective

(2) After a compensation cancel command (G40) is issued

In the compensation cancel mode, the offset vector is 0 and the tool center path matches the
programmed path. A program that contains tool radius compensation must end after the
compensation is canceled.

Starting tool radius compensation (startup)

Tool radius compensation starts if all the following requirements are met in compensation cancel
mode:

(1) A G41 or G42 command is issued.

(2) The tool radius compensation number is greater than 0 and equal to or less than the maximum
compensation number.
(3) The movement command is not a circular command.

Whether in continuous or single block operation, compensation always starts after reading three
movement command blocks, or if three movement command blocks are not found, up to five
continuous blocks.
Similarly, in compensation mode, up to five blocks are pre-read for compensation operation.

Control state diagram

Machining program T___; S___; G00___; G41___; G01___; G02___;

Starting to pre-read
five blocks
G01_; G02_;

Pre-read buffer T_; S_; G00_; G41_; G01_; G02_;

Executed block T_; S_; G00_; G41_; G01_; G02_;

There are two ways of starting tool radius compensation: type A and type B.
The type depends on selection of the control parameter "#1229 set01/bit2".
This type is used in common with the compensation cancel type.
In the following explanatory figure, "S" denotes the single block stop point.

86
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Start operation for tool radius compensation

(1) Machining an inside corner

Linear → Linear Linear → Circular

θ Program path
θ

r = Compensation amount
r
Program path
Tool center path
s s

G42
G42
Tool center
path

Start point Start point

Center of circular

(2) Machining an outside corner (obtuse angle) (Type A or B can be selected by parameter)
[90° ≤ θ < 180°]

Linear → Linear (Type A) Linear → Circular (Type A)

s s
Tool center path
r = Compensation amount r Tool center path
G41
G41
Program path

θ θ

Start point Start point Program path

Center of circular

Linear → Linear (Type B) Linear → Circular (Type B)

Intersection Intersection
s
s
Tool center path
r
r r
r Tool center path

Program path
G41
G41 θ θ

Start point
Start point Program path
Center of circular

87
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(3) Machining an outside corner (acute angle) (Type A or B can be selected by parameter)
[θ < 90°]

Linear → Linear (Type A) Linear → Circular (Type A)

Center of
s circular
Tool center path Tool center path
r
s
Program path
θ Program path
r
G41
θ
G41

Start point

Start point

Linear → Linear (Type B) Linear → Circular (Type B)

s Center of
circular
Tool center path
r
Tool center path
s
θ Program path Program path
r r

θ
r
G41

Start point
G41

Start point

88
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Operations in compensation mode

Compensation is valid both for positioning and for interpolation commands such as circular and
linear interpolation.
Even if the same compensation command (G41 or G42) is specified in the compensation mode,
the command will be ignored.
If four or more blocks not accompanying movement are assigned continuously in the compensation
mode, over-cutting or under-cutting will result.

(1) Machining an outside corner

Linear → Linear (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Linear → Linear (0° < θ < 90°)

Tool center path

r
θ s
Program path
θ
r
Program path

s Tool center path

Intersection

Linear → Circular (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Linear → Circular (0° < θ < 90°)

Tool center path

θ r
s

r Program path θ Program path

r r

s Tool center path

Center of circular

Center of circular

Circular→ Linear (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Circular → Linear (0° < θ < 90°)

Center of circular

Program path
Program path

θ
θ
r
r
r r Center of circular
Tool center path Tool center path
s
Intersection

89
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Circular → Circular (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Circular → Circular (0° < θ < 90°)
Center of circular

Program path
θ Program path

r θ
r
r
Center of circular Tool center path r
s
Intersection

Center of circular Center of circular

s

(2) Machining an inside corner

Linear → Linear (Obtuse angle) Linear → Linear (Obtuse angle)

θ
θ
Program path Program path
r
r s s
Tool center path r Tool center path
Intersection

Linear → Circular (Obtuse angle) Linear → Circular (Obtuse angle)

θ θ

Program path Center of circular

Program path
r
Tool center path s Tool center path s
Inter-
section Intersection r
r

Center of circular

Circular → Linear (Obtuse angle) Circular → Linear (Obtuse angle)

θ
θ Center of circular
Program path
Program path
s
s
Tool center path Inter-
r Inter- section
section Tool center path
r
Center of circular

90
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Circular → Circular (Obtuse angle) Circular → Circular (Acute angle)

Intersection θ Center of circular
Tool center path
s

r
θ
Center of circular
Program path
s
Tool center path
Center of circular Center of circular
Inter-
section

Program path

(3) When the arc end point is not on the circular

With a spiral circular command: the area from the arc start point to the end point is interpolated
as a spiral arc.
With a normal circular command: if the error after compensation is within the parameter value,
it is interpolated as a spiral arc.

Hypothetical circle
Tool center path

Program path End point of circular

s
r
R

Center of circular

(4) When the inside intersection does not exist

In an instance such as that shown in the figure below, the intersection of arcs A and B may
cease to exist due to the compensation amount.
In such cases, program error (P152) appears, and the tool stops at the end point of the
preceding block.

Program error stop

Tool center path

r Center of circular A

r
Program path
A B

Linear intersecting circulars A and B

91
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Tool radius compensation cancel

If either of the following conditions is met in the tool radius compensation mode, the compensation
will be canceled. However, the movement command must be a command other than a circular
command. If an attempt is made to cancel the compensation by a circular command, program error
(P151) results.

(1) A G40 command has been executed.

The cancel mode is established once the compensation cancel command has been read, the
5-block pre-read process is suspended, and 1-block pre-read applies instead.

Tool radius compensation cancel operation

(1) Machining an inside corner

Linear → Linear Circular → Linear

θ θ
Program path

r = Compensation amount r
Tool center path
s s Program path

G40 Tool center

G40
path

End point End point

Center of circular

92
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(2) Machining an outside corner (obtuse angle) (Type A or B can be selected by parameter)
[90° ≤ θ < 180°]

Linear → Linear (Type A) Circular → Linear (Type A)

s s
Tool center path
r = Compensation amount r
Tool center path
G40 G40
Program path

θ θ

End point End point

Center of circular Program path

Linear → Linear (Type B) Circular → Linear (Type B)

Intersection
Intersection
s
s
Tool center path
r
r r Tool center path
r
Program path
G40
G40 θ
θ

End point
End point Center of circular Program path

93
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(3) Machining an outside corner (acute angle) (Type A or B elm be selected by parameter)
[θ < 90°]

Linear → Linear (Type A) Circular → Linear (Type A)

Center of
circular
s
Tool center path
Tool center path
r
s Program path
θ Program path
r
G40
θ
G40

End point

End point

Linear → Linear (Type B) Circular → Linear (Type B)

Center of
circular
Tool center path
r Tool center path

s
θ Program path
r Program path
r
s
θ
G40 r

End point
G40

End point

94
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Changing the compensation direction during tool radius compensation

The compensation direction can be changed by changing the compensation command in the
compensation mode without the compensation having to be first canceled.
However, no change is possible in the compensation start block and the following block.

Linear → Linear

Tool center path

r
Intersection
Program path r

G41 G41 G42 If there is no

intersection when the
compensation
direction is changed:
r

Linear ↔ Circular

r
r

G41 G41 G41 G42

G42

Program path

r r

Tool center path

95
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Circular → Circular

Tool center path

Center of circular

r
Program path G41 G42

G41

Center of circular
G41 G41 G42

Linear return

G41
Tool center path
G42
r
Program path

G0 block

If there is a block containing a G0 command, the preceding block does not perform intersection
operation, the tool comes to the position vertical to the end point, and the G0 block temporarily
loses the offset vector. Compensation is not canceled, but instead the tool moves from the
intersection vector directly to a point without vector, that is, to the point specified by the program.
The offset vector is regenerated by a block containing a G1 command.

:
:
N10 G12.1; N13
N11 G42; N12
N12 G1 Y100..F100; N14 N17
N13 X–100.;
N14 G0 Y–100.; X
N15 G1 X100.; N16
N15
N16 Y0.;
N17 G40 G0 X200.;
:
:
(Unit: mm)

96
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Blocks without movement and M commands inhibiting pre-read

The following blocks are known as blocks without movement;

a. M03 ; ............................................ M command
b. S12 ;............................................. S command
c. G04 X500 ; ................................... Dwell
d. G10 P01 R50 ; ............................. Compensation amount setting No movement
e. (G17) Z40 ;................................... Movement but not on compensation plane
f. G90 ; ............................................ G code only
g. G91 X0 ; ....................................... Movement amount 0
M00, M01, M02, and M30 are treated as M codes inhibiting pre-read. ................... Zero
movement
amount
(1) Blocks without movement commands specified at compensation start
If four or more blocks without movement continue or if M command inhibiting pre-read is
issued, offset vectors are not generated.

N1 X30. Y60.; N2, 3, 4, 5, 6

N2 G41;
N3 G4 X1000; N7
Block without
N4 F100;
movement
N5 S500; (Intersection)
N6 M3; N1
N8
N7 X20. Y–50.;
N8 X50. Y–20.;

(2) Blocks without movement commands specified in compensation mode

If four or more blocks without movement do not continue in compensation mode and if no M
command inhibiting pre-read is issued, intersection vectors are generated as usual.

N6 G91 X100. Y200.; N7 N8

N7 G04 X P1000; ....... Block without
N8 X200.; movement

N6 N8

Block N7 is
N6 executed here.

If four or more blocks without movement continue or if M command inhibiting pre-read is

issued, offset vectors are generated perpendicularly at the end point of the preceding block.

N6 X100. Y200.; N11

N7 G4 X1000;
N8 F100;
N9 S500; Block without
N6 N11
N10 M4; movement
N7 to 10
N11 X100.;

This may cause cutting. N6

97
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(3) Compensation cancel alone

(a) G1 precedes the block containing (b) G0 precedes the block containing
G40: G40:

: N10 : N20
N10 G1 X__ Y__; N20 G1 X__ Y__;
N11 G40; N11 N21 G0 X__ Y__; N21
N12 G0 X__ Y__; N22 G40;
N12 N22
Compensation is canceled by a G0
Compensation is canceled by a movement command before G40.
command following G40.
(Note) In program (a), if G13.1 is commanded after G40 without a movement command,
cancellation is done at block G13.1.

Corner movement

When a multiple number of offset vectors are created at the joints between movement command
blocks, the tool will move in a straight line between those vectors. This action is called corner
movement.
When the vectors do not match, the tool moves in order to turn the corner although this movement
belongs to the next block. Consequently, operation in the single block mode will execute the
previous block + corner movement as a single block and the remaining joining movement + next
block will be executed as a single block in the following operation.

N1
Program path

N2
θ
r
Tool center path
r Center of circular
This movement and feedrate
are under block N2.

Stop point in single block mode

98
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

6.8.11 Interference check

Function and purpose

A tool, whose tool radius has been compensated under the tool radius compensation function by
the usual 2-block pre-reading, may sometimes cut into the workpiece. This is known as
interference. An interference check is the function which prevents such interference from
occurring.
The types of interference check are indicated below, and each can be selected for use by
parameter.
Function Parameter Operation
Interference check Rad compen intrf byp : OFF Operation stops with a program error
alarm function Interference check invalid signal before execution of the block causing
OFF cutting.
Interference check Rad compen intrf byp : ON The tool path is changed to prevent
avoiding function Interference check invalid signal cutting from occurring.
OFF

(Example)

(G41) Avoided path

N1 G90 G1 X50. Y-100. ;

Tool outside diameter
N2 X70. Y-100. ;

N3 X120. Y0 ;

N1 N3

N2

Cutting by N2
Cutting by N2

(1) With alarm function

An alarm is given before N1 is executed. The buffer correction function can thus be used to
change N1 to the following, enabling machining to continue:
N1 G1 X20. Y-40.;

(2) With avoidance function

The intersection of N1 and N3 is calculated to create interference avoidance vectors.

99
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(2) (3)’ (4)’

(1) (2)’ (3)’ N3

(4) (1)’
N1

N2

Examples of interference check:

Vector (1) (4)’ check → No interference
↓
Vector (2) (3)’ check → No interference
↓
Vector (3) (2)’ check → Interference → Vectors (3) (2)’ deleted
↓
Vectors (4) (1)’ deleted

As a result of the above processing, vectors (1) (2) (3)’ , and (4)’ remain as valid, and operation
is done with the path connecting these vectors as the interference avoidance path.

100
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Detailed description

(1) Conditions regarded as interference

With three blocks containing movement commands of five pre-read blocks, interference is
regarded as occurring if the compensation calculation vectors, which have been created at
contact of movement commands, intersect each other.

Tool center path

r Program path

N1 N3
Vectors intersect here.

N2

(2) Interference check is not available when:

(a) Three blocks containing movement commands cannot be pre-read (three or more blocks
of five pre-read blocks do not contain movement commands).
(b) Interference occurs in the fourth or subsequent block containing movement commands.

Tool center path

Program path

N6
N1
N5
N2 No interference check available

N3
N4

(3) Operation during interference avoidance

If the interference avoidance function is available, the tool moves as follows.

Tool center path

Program path

N1 N3

N2

101
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

Solid line : Interference avoidance path

Broken lines : Interference check invalid
Tool center path when interference is avoided

Tool center path when interference check is invalid

Program path

N2 N3

N1

Tool center path when interference is avoided

Linear movement Tool center path when interference check is invalid

r

Program path

N2 N3

N1 r Center of circular

Avoidance
N3 vector

N2

Tool center path

If all interference
avoidance line vectors N1 Avoidance vector
have been deleted, new Program path
avoidance vectors are
created to avoid
interference as shown in
the figure at right.
N4
r2
r1
N3

Avoidance vector 1
Tool center path 2 Avoidance vector 2 N2

Tool center path 1 r2 r1

N1
Program path

102
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

In the figure below, the groove is left uncut.

Interference avoidance path

Nose R center path

Program path

Solid line : Interference avoidance path

Broken lines : Interference check invalid path

In the figure below, the tool moves in the opposite direction at N2. After N1 is executed,
program error (P153) occurs.

1234

N1 N4

N2 N3

Interference check alarm

An interference check alarm occurs under the following conditions.

(1) With the interference check alarm function selected

(a) All vectors are deleted at the end point of the current block.
As shown in the figure, if vectors 1 to 4 are all deleted at the end point of the N1 block,
program error (P153) results prior to N1 execution.

N1

1
N2

23
N3
4

103
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(2) With the interference check avoidance function selected

(a) There are valid vectors at the end point of the following block though all vectors at the end
point of the current block were deleted.
(i) In the figure, if N2 interference check is conducted, the N2 end point vectors are all
deleted but the N3 end point vectors are regarded as valid.
This causes program error (P153) at the N1 end point.

N4

3 4
N3
Alarm stop

2 N2
1

N1

(ii) In the figure, the tool moves in the opposite direction at N2.
This causes program error (P153) after N1 execution.

1234

N1 N4

N2 N3

104
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(b) The avoidance vectors cannot be created.

As shown in the figure, even when the conditions for creating avoidance vectors are met, it
may still be impossible to create avoidance vectors or the avoidance vectors may interfere
with N3. Program error (P153) thus occurs at the N1 end point if the vectors intersect at an
angle of 90° or more.

Alarm stop

N1

N2

N4

N3

Alarm stop

N1

N2
N4

N3
Angle of intersection

105
6. Interpolation Functions
6.8 Milling interpolation

(c) The program advance direction and the advance direction after compensation are
reversed.
An interference may be assumed when no interference occurs actually if grooves running
in parallel with narrower width between the two than the tool diameter or a
bottom-widened groove is programmed.

Program path Tool center path

Stop

Stop

106
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.9 Circular interpolation

6.9 Circular interpolation; G07.1 (6 and 7 only in G code system)

Function and purpose

This function develops a shape with a cylindrical side (shape in cylindrical coordinate system) into
a plane. When the developed shape is programmed as the plane coordinates, that is converted into
the linear axis and rotation axis movement in the cylindrical coordinates and the contour is
controlled during machining.

Hypothetical C
X

r
C

As programming can be carried out with a shape with which the side on the cylinder is developed,
this is effective for machining cylindrical cams, etc. When programmed with the rotation axis and its
orthogonal axis, slits, etc., can be machined on the cylinder side.

0°

Develop-
ment 2πr

360°

107
6. Interpolation Functions
6.9 Circular interpolation

Command format

G07.1 Cc ; (Cylindrical interpolation mode start/cancel)

Cc Cylinder radius value
• Radius value ≠ 0: Cylindrical interpolation mode start
• Radius value = 0: Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel

(Note) The above format applies when the name of the rotation axis is "C". If the name is not "C",
command the name of the rotation axis being used instead of "C".

(1) The coordinates commanded in the interval from the start to cancellation of the cylindrical
interpolation mode will be the cylindrical coordinate system.
G07.1 C Cylinder radius value; Cylindrical interpolation mode start
: (Cylindrical interpolation will start)
: (The coordinate commands in this interval will be
: the cylindrical coordinate system)
G07.1 C0 ; Cylindrical interpolation mode cancel
(Cylindrical interpolation will be canceled)
(2) G107 can be used instead of G07.1.
(3) Command G07.1 in an independent block. A program error (P33) will occur if this command is
issued in the same block as another G code.
(4) Program the rotation axis with an angle degree.
(5) Linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be commanded during the cylindrical
interpolation mode. Note that the plane selection command must be issued just before the
G07.1 block.
(6) The coordinates can be commanded with either an absolute command or incremental
command.
(7) Tool radius compensation can be applied on the program command. Cylindrical interpolation will
be executed on the path after tool radius compensation.
(8) Command the segment feed in the cylinder development with F. The F unit is mm/min or
inch/min.

Detailed description

(1) Cylindrical interpolation accuracy

In the cylindrical interpolation mode, the movement amount of the rotation axis commanded
with an angle is converted on the circle periphery, and after operating the linear and circular
interpolation between the other axes, the amount is converted into an angle again.
Thus, the actual movement amount may differ from the commanded value such as when the
cylinder radius is small.
Note that the error generated at this time is not cumulated.

108
6. Interpolation Functions
6.9 Circular interpolation

(2) Related parameters

Setting
# Item Details
range
1516 mill_ax Milling axis Set the name of the rotation axis for milling interpolation A to Z
name (pole coordinate interpolation, cylindrical interpolation).
Only one of the rotation axes can be set.
8111 Milling Radius Select the diameter and radius of the linear axis for milling 0 to
interpolation (pole coordinate interpolation, cylindrical FFFFFFFF
interpolation).
0: Radius command for all axes
1: Each axis setting (follows #1019 dia diameter
designation axis)
1267 ext03 G code type The type of high-speed high-accuracy G code is changed. 0/1
(PR) (bit0) 0: G61.1 type
1: G8 type
1270 ext06 Handle C Specify whether the rotary axis coordinate before the 0/1
(PR) (bit7) axis cylindrical interpolation start command is issued is kept
coordinate during the cylindrical interpolation or not.
during 0: Do not keep
cylindrical 1: keep
interpolation

(3) Plane selection

The axis used for cylindrical interpolation must be set with the plane selection command.
(Note)
The correspondence of the rotation axis to an axis' parallel axis is set with the parameters
(#1029, #1030, #1031).
The circular interpolation and tool radius compensation, etc., can be designated on that plane.
The plane selection command is set immediately before or after the G07.1 command. If not set
and a movement command is issued, a program error (P485) will occur.

109
6. Interpolation Functions
6.9 Circular interpolation

(Example) G19 Z0. C0. ;

G07.1 C100. ;
:
G07.1 C0 ;

Y X Z

Basic
coordinate G17 G18 G19
system
X, Y, Z X Z Y
Y C

Cylindrical
coordinate system
C, Y, Z
G17 G18
(Rotation axis is X
axis' parallel axis)
#1029 C Z
C Z

Cylindrical
coordinate system
X, C, Z G17 G19
(Rotation axis is Y
axis' parallel axis) X C
#1030
X C
Cylindrical
coordinate system
X, Y, C
(Rotation axis is Z G18 G19
axis' parallel axis)
#1031 C Y

(Note) Depending on the model or version, the Z-C plane (Y-Z cylinder plane) will be automatically
selected with G07.1 and G19.
The circular interpolation and tool radius compensation, etc., can be designated on that
plane.

G17 G18 G19

Y X Z
Basic coordinate
system
X,Y,Z
X Z Y

Cylindrical G19
coordinate system

110
6. Interpolation Functions
6.9 Circular interpolation

Relation with other functions

(1) Circular interpolation

(a) Circular interpolation between the rotation axis and linear axis is possible during the
cylindrical interpolation mode.
(b) An R specification command can be issued with circular interpolation. (I, J and K cannot
be designated.)

(2) Tool radius compensation

The tool radius can be compensated during the cylindrical interpolation mode.
(a) Command the plane selection in the same manner as circular interpolation.
When using tool radius compensation, start up and cancel the compensation within the
cylindrical interpolation mode.
(b) A program error (P485) will occur if G07.1 is commanded during tool radius
compensation.
(c) If the G07.1 command is issued with no movement command given after the tool radius
compensation is canceled, the position of the axis in the G07.1 command block is
interpreted as the position applied after the tool radius compensation is canceled and the
following operations are performed.

(3) Cutting asynchronous feed

(a) The asynchronous mode is forcibly set when the cylindrical interpolation mode is started.
(b) When the cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled, the synchronization mode will return
to the state before the cylindrical interpolation mode was started.
(c) A program error (P485) will occur if G07.1 is commanded in the constant surface speed
control mode (G96).

(4) Miscellaneous functions

(a) The miscellaneous function (M) and 2nd miscellaneous function can be issued even in the
cylindrical interpolation mode.
(b) The S command in the cylindrical interpolation mode issues the rotary tool's rotation
speed instead of the spindle rotation speed.
(c) Issue the T command before cylindrical interpolation is started. A program error (P485)
will occur if the T command is issued in the cylindrical interpolation mode.
:
:
T1212 ; ... T command before cylindrical interpolation → Valid
T0 X100. Z0 ;
G19 Z C ;
G07.1 C100. ;
:
T1200 ; ... T command in cylindrical interpolation mode →Program error
:
G07.1 C0 ;
(d) When the tool offset is executed by the axis command after the T command, the tool offset
by the T command may be uncompleted. In this case, execute the tool offset by the axis
command during the cylindrical interpolation mode.
Note that a program error (P482) will occur if the cylindrical interpolation command is
issued with the tool offset cancel uncompleted.

111
6. Interpolation Functions
6.9 Circular interpolation

(5) F command during cylindrical interpolation

As for the F command in the cylindrical interpolation mode, whether the previous F command
is used or not depends on that the mode just before G07.1 is the feed per minute command
(G94) or feed per rotation command (G95).
(a) When G94 is commanded just before G07.1
If there is no F command in the cylindrical interpolation, the previous F command feedrate
will be used.
The feedrate after the cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled will remain the F
command feedrate issued when the cylindrical interpolation mode was started or the final
F command feedrate set during cylindrical interpolation.
(b) When G95 is commanded just before G07.1
The previous F command feedrate cannot be used during cylindrical interpolation, thus a
new F command must be issued.
The feedrate after the cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled will return to that applied
before the cylindrical interpolation mode was started.
When there is no F command in G07.1
Previous mode No F command After G07.1 is canceled
G94 Previous F is used ←
G95 Program error (P62) F just before G07.1 is used

When F is commanded in G07.1

Previous mode No F command After G07.1 is canceled
G94 Commanded F is used ←
G95 Commanded F is used *1 F just before G07.1 is used
*1) Moves with the feed per minute command during G07.1.

112
6. Interpolation Functions
6.9 Circular interpolation

Restrictions and precautions

(1) The following G code commands can be used during the cylindrical interpolation mode.
G code Details
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation
G02 Circular interpolation (CW)
G03 Circular interpolation (CWW)
G04 Dwell
G09 Exact stop check
G22/23 Chuck barrier ON/OFF
G40-42 Tool nose R compensation
G61 Exact stop check mode
G64 Cutting mode
G65 Macro call (simple call)
G66 Macro modal call A (modal call)
G66.1 Macro modal call B (block call per macro)
G67 Macro modal call cancel (modal call cancel)
G80-89 Hole drilling fixed cycle
G90/91 Absolute/incremental value command
G94 Asynchronous feed
G98 Hole drilling cycle initial return
G99 Hole drilling cycle R point return
A program error (P481) may occur if a G code other than those listed above is commanded
during cylindrical interpolation.
(2) The cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled when the power is turned ON or reset.
(3) A program error (P484) will occur if any axis commanded for cylindrical interpolation has not
completed zero point return.
(4) Tool radius compensation must be canceled before the cylindrical interpolation mode can be
canceled.
(5) When the cylindrical interpolation mode is canceled, the mode will change to the cutting mode,
and the plane will return to that selected before cylindrical interpolation.
(6) The program of the block during the cylindrical interpolation cannot be restarted (program
restart).
(7) A program error (P486) will occur if the cylindrical interpolation command is issued during the
mirror image.
(8) When the cylindrical interpolation mode is started or canceled, the deceleration check is
performed.
(9) A program error (P481) will occur if the cylindrical interpolation or the pole coordinate
interpolation is commanded during the cylindrical interpolation mode.

113
6. Interpolation Functions
6.9 Circular interpolation

Example of program

<Program>
<Parameter>
N01 G28XZC; #1029 aux_I
N02 T0202; #1030 aux_J C
N03 G97S100M23; #1031 aux_K
N04 G00X50.Z0.;
N05 G94G01X40.F100.;
N06 G19C0Z0; Command of plane selection for cylindrical interpolation
and command of two interpolation axes
N07 G07.1C20.;
Cylindrical interpolation start
N08 G41;
N09 G01Z-10.C80.F150;
N10 Z-25.C90.;
N11 Z-80.C225;
N12 G03Z-75.C270.R55.;
N13 G01Z-25;
N14 G02Z-20.C280.R80.;
N15 G01C360.
N16 G40;
N17 G07.1C0;
Cylindrical interpolation cancel
N18 G01X50.;
N19 G0X100.Z100.;
-80 -60 -40 -20 (Unit: mm)
N20 M25;
Z
N21 M30;
50
N10
N09
100

150

200
N11
250
N13
N12 N14
300
350°
N15

114
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.10 Pole coordinate interpolation

6.10 Pole coordinate interpolation; G12.1 (Only 6, 7 in G code system)

Function and purpose

This function converts the commands programmed with the orthogonal coordinate axis into linear
axis movement (tool movement) and rotation axis movement (workpiece rotation), and controls the
contour.
The plane that uses the linear axis as the plane's 1st orthogonal axis, and the intersecting
hypothetical axis as the plane's 2nd axis (hereafter "pole coordinate interpolation plane") is
selected. Pole coordinate interpolation is carried out on this plane. The workpiece coordinate
system zero point is used as the coordinate system zero point during pole coordinate interpolation.

Linear axis

X axis

C axis

Z axis

Rotation axis
(hypothetical axis)
Pole coordinate interpolation plane (G17 plane)

This is effective for cutting a notch section on a linear section of the workpiece diameter, and for
cutting cam shafts, etc.

115
6. Interpolation Functions
6.10 Pole coordinate interpolation

Command format

G12.1 ; Pole coordinate interpolation mode start

G13.1 ; Pole coordinate interpolation mode cancel

(1) The coordinates commanded in the interval from the start to cancellation of the pole
coordinate interpolation mode will be the pole coordinate interpolation.
G12.1 ; Pole coordinate interpolation mode start
: (Pole coordinate interpolation will start)
: (The coordinate commands in this interval will be the pole coordinate
: interpolation)
G13.1 ; Pole coordinate interpolation mode cancel
(Pole coordinate interpolation is canceled)
(2) G112 and G113 can be used instead of G12.1 and G13.1.
(3) Command G12.1 and G13.1 in an independent block. A program error (P33) will occur if this
command is issued in the same block as another G code.
(4) Linear interpolation or circular interpolation can be commanded during the pole coordinate
interpolation mode.
(5) The coordinates can be commanded with either an absolute command or incremental
command.
(6) Tool radius compensation can be applied on the program command. Pole coordinate
interpolation will be executed on the path after tool radius compensation.
(7) Command the segment feed in the pole coordinate interpolation plane (orthogonal coordinate
system) with F. The F unit is mm/min or inch/min.
(8) When the G12.1 and G13.1 commands are issued, the deceleration check is executed.

Detailed description

(1) Plane selection

The linear axis and rotation axis used for pole coordinate interpolation must be set beforehand
with the parameters.
(a) Determine the deemed plane for carrying out pole coordinate interpolation with the
parameter (#1533) for the linear axis used for pole coordinate interpolation.
#1533 setting value Deemed plane
X G17 (XY plane)
Y G19 (YZ plane)
Z G18 (ZX plane)
Blank (no setting) G17 (XY plane)
(b) A program error (P485) will occur if the plane selection command (G16 to G19) is issued
during the pole coordinate interpolation mode.
(Note) Depending on the model or version, parameter (#1533) may not be provided. In this case,
the operation will be the same as if the parameter (#1533) is blank (no setting).

116
6. Interpolation Functions
6.10 Pole coordinate interpolation

(2) Related parameters

Setting
# Item Details
range
1516 mill_ax Milling axis Set the name of the rotation axis for milling interpolation A to Z
name (pole coordinate interpolation, cylindrical interpolation).
Only one of the rotation axes can be set.
1517 mill_c Milling Select the hypothetical axis command name for milling 0/1
interpolation interpolation (pole coordinate interpolation, cylindrical
hypothetical interpolation).
axis name 0: Y axis command
1: Command rotation axis name
8111 Milling Radius Select the diameter and radius of the linear axis for 0/1
milling interpolation.
0: Radius command for all axes
1: Each axis setting (follows #1019 dia diameter
designation axis)

Relation with other functions

(1) Program commands during pole coordinate interpolation

(a) The program commands in the pole coordinate interpolation mode are commanded with
the orthogonal coordinate value of the linear axis and rotation axis (hypothetical axis) on
the pole coordinate interpolation plane.
The axis address of the rotation axis (C) is commanded as the axis address for the plane's
2nd axis (hypothetical axis) command.
The command unit is not deg (degree), and instead is the same unit (mm or inch) as the
command issued with the axis address for the plane's 1st axis (linear axis).
(b) The hypothetical axis coordinate value will be set to "0" when G12.1 is commanded. In
other words, the position where G12.1 is commanded will be interpreted as angle = 0, and
the pole coordinate interpolation will start.

(2) Circular interpolation on pole coordinate plane

The arc radius address for carrying out circular interpolation during the pole coordinate
interpolation mode is determined with the linear axis parameter (#1533).
#1533 setting value Center designation command
X I, J (pole coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)
Y J, K (pole coordinate plane is interpreted as YZ plane)
Z K, I (pole coordinate plane is interpreted as ZX plane)
Blank (no setting) I, J (pole coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)
The arc radius can also be designated with the R command.
(Note) Depending on the model or version, parameter (#1533) may not be provided. In this case,
the operation will be the same as if the parameter (#1533) is blank (no setting).

(3) Tool radius compensation

The tool radius can be compensated during the pole coordinate interpolation mode.
(a) Command the plane selection in the same manner as pole coordinate interpolation.
When using tool radius compensation, it must be started up and canceled within the pole
coordinate interpolation mode.
(b) A program error (P485) will occur if pole coordinate interpolation is executed during tool
radius compensation.
(c) If the G12.1 and G13.1 commands are issued with no movement command given after the
tool radius compensation is canceled, the position of the axis in the G12.1 and G13.1
commands block is interpreted as the position applied after the tool radius compensation
is canceled and the following operations are performed.

117
6. Interpolation Functions
6.10 Pole coordinate interpolation

(4) Cutting asynchronous feed

(a) The asynchronous mode is forcibly set when the pole coordinate interpolation mode is
started.
(b) When the pole coordinate interpolation mode is canceled, the synchronization mode will
return to the state before the pole coordinate interpolation mode was started.
(c) A program error (P485) will occur if G12.1 is commanded in the constant surface speed
control mode (G96).

(5) Miscellaneous functions

(a) The miscellaneous function (M) and 2nd miscellaneous function can be issued even in the
pole coordinate interpolation mode.
(b) The S command in the pole coordinate interpolation mode issues the rotary tool's rotation
speed instead of the spindle rotation speed.
(c) Issue the T command before pole coordinate interpolation is started. A program error
(P485) will occur if the T command is issued in the pole coordinate interpolation mode.
:
:
T1212 ; ... T command before pole coordinate interpolation → Valid
G0 X100. Z0 ;
G12.1 ;
:
T1200 ; ... T command in pole coordinate interpolation mode → Program error
:
G13.1 ;
(d) When the tool offset is executed by the axis command after the T command, the tool offset
by the T command may be uncompleted. In this case, execute the tool offset by the axis
command during the pole coordinate interpolation mode.
If a command is issued to even one axis of two hypothetical axes, which forms the pole
coordinate plane, by the axis command during the pole coordinate interpolation mode, it is
changed into the command for two actual axes.
Note that a program error (P482) will occur if the pole coordinate interpolation command is
issued with the tool offset cancel uncompleted.

118
6. Interpolation Functions
6.10 Pole coordinate interpolation

(6) F command during pole coordinate interpolation

As for the F command in the pole coordinate interpolation mode, whether the previous F
command is used or not depends on that the mode just before G12.1 is the feed per minute
command (G94) or feed per rotation command (G95).
(a) When G94 is commanded just before G12.1
If there is no F command in the pole coordinate interpolation, the previous F command
feedrate will be used.
The feedrate after the pole coordinate interpolation mode is canceled will remain the F
command feedrate issued when the pole coordinate interpolation mode was started or the
final F command feedrate set during pole coordinate interpolation.
The previous F command feedrate cannot be used during pole coordinate interpolation.
(b) When G95 is commanded just before G12.1
The previous F command feedrate cannot be used during pole coordinate interpolation. A
new F command must be issued.
The feedrate after the pole coordinate interpolation mode is canceled will return to that
applied before the pole coordinate interpolation mode was started.

When there is no F command in G12.1

Previous mode No F command After G13.1 is canceled
G94 Previous F is used ←
G95 Program error (P62) F just before G12.1 is used

When F is commanded in G12.1

Previous mode No F command After G07.1 is canceled
G94 Commanded F is used ←
G95 Commanded F is used *1 F just before G12.1 is used
*1) Moves with the feed per minute command during G12.1.

(7) Hole drilling axis in the hole drilling fixed cycle command during the pole coordinate
interpolation
Hole drilling axis in the hole drilling fixed cycle command during the pole coordinate
interpolation is determined with the linear axis parameter (# 1533).
#1533 setting value Hole drilling axis
X Z (pole coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)
Y X (pole coordinate plane is interpreted as YZ plane)
Z Y (pole coordinate plane is interpreted as ZX plane)
Blank (no setting) Z (pole coordinate plane is interpreted as XY plane)

119
6. Interpolation Functions
6.10 Pole coordinate interpolation

Restrictions and precautions

(1) The following G code commands can be used during the pole coordinate interpolation mode.
G code Details
G00 Positioning
G01 Linear interpolation
G02 Circular interpolation (CW)
G03 Circular interpolation (CWW)
G04 Dwell
G09 Exact stop check
G22/23 Chuck barrier ON/OFF
G40-42 Tool nose R compensation
G61 Exact stop check mode
G64 Cutting mode
G65 Macro call (simple call)
G66 Macro modal call A (modal call)
G66.1 Macro modal call B (block call per macro)
G67 Macro modal call cancel (modal call cancel)
G80-89 Hole drilling fixed cycle
G90/91 Absolute/incremental value command
G94 Asynchronous feed
G98 Hole drilling cycle initial return
G99 Hole drilling cycle R point return
A program error (P481) may occur if a G code other than those listed above is commanded
during pole coordinate interpolation.
(2) The program cannot be restarted (resumed) for a block in pole coordinate interpolation.
(3) Before commanding pole coordinate interpolation, set the workpiece coordinate system so
that the center of the rotation axis is at the coordinate system zero point. Do not change the
coordinate system during the pole coordinate interpolation mode. (G50, G52, G53, relative
coordinate reset, G54 to G59, etc.)
(4) The feedrate during pole coordinate interpolation will be the interpolation speed on the pole
coordinate interpolation plane (orthogonal coordinate system).
(The relative speed with the tool will be converted with pole coordinate conversion.)
When passing near the center of the rotation axis on the pole coordinate interpolation plane
(orthogonal coordinate system), the rotation axis side feedrate after pole coordinate
interpolation will be very high.
(5) The axis movement command outside of the plane during pole coordinate interpolation will
move unrelated to the pole coordinate interpolation.
(6) The current position displays during pole coordinate interpolation will all indicate the actual
coordinate value. However, the "remaining movement amount" will be the movement amount
on the pole coordinate input plane.
(7) The pole coordinate interpolation mode will be canceled when the power is turned ON or reset.
(8) A program error (P484) will occur if any axis commanded for pole coordinate interpolation has
not completed zero point return.
(9) Tool radius compensation must be canceled before the pole coordinate interpolation mode
can be canceled.
(10) When the pole coordinate interpolation mode is canceled, the mode will change to the cutting
mode, and the plane will return to that selected before pole coordinate interpolation.
(11) A program error (P486) will occur if the pole coordinate interpolation command is issued during
the mirror image.
(12) A program error (P481) will occur if the cylindrical interpolation or the pole coordinate
interpolation is commanded during the pole coordinate interpolation mode.

120
6. Interpolation Functions
6.10 Pole coordinate interpolation

Example of program

Hypothetical C axis

X axis
C axis

Z axis

Hypothetical C axis

C axis

N06 N05 Tool

N04
N01
N03 N02
X axis
N10 N11
N07

N08 N09

Path after tool radius compensation

Program path

<Program>
:
:
N00 T0101;
:
:
N01 G17 G90 G0 X40.0 C0 Z0; Setting of start position
N02 G12.1; Pole coordinate interpolation mode: Start
N03 G1 G42 X20.0 F2000; Actual machining start
N04 C10.0;
N05 G3 X10.0 C20.0 R10.0;
N06 G1 X-20.0; Shape program
N07 C-10.0;
N08 G3 X-10.0 C-20.0 I10.0 J0; (Follows orthogonal coordinate values on X-C
N09 G1 X20.0; hypothetical axis plane.)
N10 C0;
N11 G40 X40.0;
N12 G13.1; Pole coordinate interpolation mode: Cancel
:
:
M30 ;

121
 6. Interpolation Functions
6.11 Exponential function interpolation

6.11 Exponential function interpolation; G02.3, G03.3

Function and purpose

Exponential function interpolation changes the rotation axis into an exponential function shape in
respect to the linear axis movement.
At this time, the other axes carry out linear interpolation between the linear axis.
This allows a machining of a taper groove with constant torsion angle (helix angle) (uniform helix
machining of taper shape).
This function can be used for slotting or grinding a tool for use in an end mill, etc.

• Uniform helix machining of taper shape

Z axis (G00)

(G01)
(G01)
(G02.3/G03.3)

A axis
(Rotation axis)
J1 J2 J3
X axis

(Linear axis)

Torsion angle: J1=J2=J3

• Relation of linear axis and rotation axis

"Relation of linear axis and rotation axis"

X=B (eCA-1)
X axis
{B, C... constant}
(Linear axis)

A axis
(Rotation axis)

122
6. Interpolation Functions
6.11 Exponential function interpolation

Command format

G02.3/G03.3 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Ii1 Jj1 Rr1 Ff1 Qq1 ;

G02.3 Forward rotation interpolation
G03.3 Negative rotation interpolation
X X axis end point (Note 1)
Y Y axis end point (Note 1)
Z Z axis end point (Note 1)
I Angle i1 (Note 2)
J Angle j1 (Note 2)
R Constant value r1 (Note 3)
F Initial feedrate (Note 4)
Q Feedrate at end point (Note 5)
(Note 1) Designate the end point of the linear axis designated with parameter (#1514 expLinax)
and the axis that carries out linear interpolation between that axis.
If the end point on of the rotation axis designated with parameter (#1515 expRotax) is
designated, linear interpolation without exponential function interpolation will take place.

(Note 2) The command unit is as follows.

Setting unit #1003 = B #1003 = C #1003 = D
(Unit = °) 0.001 0.0001 0.00001
The command range is –89 to +89°.
A program error (P33) will occur if there is no address I or J command.
A program error (P35) will occur if the address I or J command value is 0.

(Note 3) The command unit is as follows.

Setting unit #1003 = B #1003 = C #1003 = D Unit
Metric system 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 mm
Inch system 0.0001 0.00001 - inch
The command range is a positive value that does not include 0.
A program error (P33) will occur if there is no address R command.
A program error (P35) will occur if the address R command value is 0.

(Note 4) The command unit and command range is the same as the normal F code. (Command
as a per minute feed.)
Command the composite feedrate that includes the rotation axis.
The normal F modal value will not change by the address F command.
A program error (P33) will occur if there is no address F command.
A program error (P35) will occur if the address F command value is 0.

(Note 5) The command unit is as follows.

Setting unit #1003 = B #1003 = C #1003 = D Unit
Metric system 0.001 0.0001 0.00001 mm
Inch system 0.0001 0.00001 - inch
The command unit and command range is the same as the normal F code.
Command the composite feedrate that includes the rotation axis.
The normal F modal value will not change by the address Q command.
The axis will interpolate between the initial speed (F) and end speed (Q) in the CNC
according to the linear axis.
If there is no address Q command, interpolation will take place with the same value as
the initial feedrate (address F command). (The start point and end point feedrates will be
the same.)
A program error (P35) will occur if the address Q command value is 0.

123
6. Interpolation Functions
6.11 Exponential function interpolation

• Example of uniform helix machining of taper shape

Z axis Z axis

i1

r1 A axis

x0 j1 x1

Linear axis ... X axis, rotation axis ... A axis, linear axis (X axis) start point ... x0

Relational expression of exponential function

The exponential function relational expression of the linear axis (X) and rotation axis (A) in the
G02.3/G03.3 command is defined in the following manner.

X (θ) = r1 ∗ (eθ/D– 1) / tan (i1) (linear axis (X) movement (1))

A (θ) = (–1)ω ∗ 360 ∗ θ / (2π) (rotation axis (A) movement)

D = tan (j1) / tan (i1)

ω = 0 during forward rotation (G02.3), and ω = 1 during reverse rotation (G03.3)
θ is the rotation angle (radian) from the rotation axis' start point
The rotation axis' rotation angle (θ) is as follows according to expression (1).
θ = D ∗ 1n { (X ∗ tan (i1) / r1) + 1 }

124
6. Interpolation Functions
6.11 Exponential function interpolation

Machining example

• Example of uniform helix machining of taper shape

Z axis

i1
z1
z2 p1
z0 A axis
X axis

x0 x2 j1 x1
r2 r1

<Relational expression of exponential function in machining example>

Z (θ) = r1 ∗ (eθ/D–1) ∗ tan (p1) / tan (i1) + z0 ... (1)
X (θ) = r1 ∗ (eθ/D–1) / tan (i1) ... (2)
A (θ) = (–1) ω ∗ 360 ∗ θ / (2π)

D = tan (j1) / tan (i1)

Z (θ) Absolute value from zero point of Z axis (axis that linearly interpolates between interval
with linear axis (X axis))
X (θ) Absolute value from X axis (linear axis) start point
A (θ) Absolute value from A axis (rotation axis) start point
r1 Exponential function interpolation constant value (address R command)
r2 Workpiece left edge radius
x2 X axis (linear axis) position at workpiece left edge
x1 X axis (linear axis) end point (address X command)
x0 X axis (linear axis) start point (Set as "x0 ≤ x1" so that workpiece does not interfere with
tool)
z1 End point of Z axis (axis that linearly interpolates between interval with linear axis (X
axis)) (address Z command)
z0 Start point of Z axis (axis that linearly interpolates between interval with linear axis (X
axis))
i1 Taper gradient angle (address I command)
p1 Slot base gradient angle
j1 Torsion angle (helix angle) (address J command)
ω Torsion direction (0: Forward rotation, 1: reverse direction)
θ Workpiece rotation angle (radian)
f1 Initial feedrate (address F command)
q1 Feedrate at end point (address Q command)
k1 Insignificant data (address K command)

According to expressions (1) and (2):

Z (θ) = X (θ) ∗ tan (p1) + z0 ... (3)
According to expression (3), the slot base gradient angle (p1) is determined from the X axis and Z
axis end point positions (x1, z1).
The Z axis movement amount is determined by the slot base gradient angle (p1) and X axis
position.
In the above diagram, the exponential function interpolation's constant value (r1) is determined with
the following expression using the workpiece left edge radius (r2), X axis start point (x0), X axis
position at workpiece left edge (x2) and taper gradient angle (i1).
r1 = r2 – { (x2 – x0) ∗ tan (i1) }

125
6. Interpolation Functions
6.11 Exponential function interpolation

The taper gradient angle (i1) and torsion angle (j1) are each issued with the command address I
and J.
Note that if the shape is a reverse taper shape, the taper gradient angle (i1) is issued as a negative
value.
The torsion direction (ω) is changed with the G code. (Forward rotation when G02.3 is commanded,
negative rotation when G03.3 is commanded)
The above settings allow uniform helix machining of a taper shape (or reverse taper shape).

Command and operation

G2.3(Equivalent to G3.3 if j1<0)

X movement direction > 0 X movement direction < 0
i1>0 i1<0 i1>0 i1<0
+ + Z
i1 i1 i1 Z i1
Z Z -
-
End Start
Command

point Start End

Start End point
Start point End point
j1 j1 j1 point point j1
point point

r1 r1 X r1 X r1
X X

A A A A
Operation

X X X X

N10 G28XYZC; N10 G28XYZC; N10 G28XYZC; N10 G28XYZC;

program example

N20 G91G0 X100. Z100.; N20 G91G0 X100. Z200.; N20 G91G0 X-100. Z100.; N20 G91G0 X-100. Z200.;
Machining

N30 G2.3 X100. Z100. N30 G2.3 X100. Z-100. N30 G2.3 X-100. Z100. N30 G2.3 X-100. Z-100.
I50. J80. R105. F500.; I-50. J80. R105. F500.; I50. J80. R105. F500.; I-50. J80. R105. F500.;
N40 M30; N40 M30; N40 M30; N40 M30;

G3.3(Equivalent to G2.3 if j1<0)

X movement direction > 0 X movement direction < 0
i1>0 i1<0 i1>0 i1<0
+ + Z
i1 Z i1
Z Z i1
- -
End
End Start Start
Command

point
point point point
Start End Start End
point j1 j1 point j1 point point j1

r1 r1 r1 X r1
X X X

A A A A
Operation

X X X X

N10 G28XYZC; N10 G28XYZC; N10 G28XYZC; N10 G28XYZC;

program example

N20 G91G0 X100. Z100.; N20 G91G0 X100. Z200.; N20 G91G0 X-100. Z100.; N20 G91G0 X-100. Z200.;
Machining

N30 G3.3 X100. Z100. N30 G3.3 X100. Z-100. N30 G3.3 X-100. Z100. N30 G3.3 X-100. Z-100.
I50. J80. R105. F500.; I-50. J80. R105. F500.; I50. J80. R105. F500.; I-50. J80. R105. F500.;
N40 M30; N40 M30; N40 M30; N40 M30;

126
6. Interpolation Functions
6.11 Exponential function interpolation

Precautions for programming

(1) When G02.3/G03.3 is commanded, interpolation takes place with the exponential function
relational expression using the start position of the linear axis and rotation axis as 0.
(2) Linear interpolation will take place in the following cases, even if in the G02.3/G03.3 mode.
The feedrate for linear interpolation will be the F command in that block. (Note that the normal
F modal is not updated.)
• The linear axis designated with the parameter (#1514 expLinax) is not commanded, or the
movement amount for that axis is 0.
• The rotation axis designated with the parameter (#1515 expRotax) is commanded.
(3) Tool length offset and tool radius compensation cannot be used during the G02.3/G03.3 mode.
Note that the tool length offset started before interpolation is started before the G02.3/G03.3
mode will normally continue.
(4) A program error will occur if commands are issued during the pole coordinate interpolation,
cylindrical interpolation or milling interpolation modes.
(5) G02.3/G03.3 will function with asynchronous feed even during the synchronous feed mode.
(6) If the parameter "#1515 expRota" setting is the same axis name as the initial C axis, the axis
selected with the C axis selection signal will interpolate as the rotation axis.

127
 7. Feed Functions
7.1 Rapid traverse rate

7. Feed Functions
7.1 Rapid traverse rate
Function and purpose

The rapid traverse rate can be set independently for each axis. The speed range that can be set is
1mm/min to 1,000,000mm/min when the input setting unit is 1µm. Note that the upper limit speed is
limited by the machine specification.
Refer to the specifications manual of the machine for the rapid traverse rate settings.

Two paths are available during positioning: the interpolation type where the area from the start
point to the end point is linearly interpolated or the non-interpolation type where movement
proceeds at the maximum speed of each axis. The type is selected by parameter "#1086 G0Intp".
The positioning time is the same in each case.

(Note) Rapid traverse override

Override can be applied by an external input signal for both manual and automatic rapid
traverse. There are 2 types which are determined by the PLC specifications.
Type 1: Override in 4 steps: 1%, 25%, 50% and 100%
Type 2: Override in 1% steps from 0% to 100%.

7.2 Cutting feedrate

Function and purpose

The cutting feedrate is assigned with address F and 8 digits.

The F8 digits are assigned with a decimal point for a 5-digit integer and a 3-digit fraction. The
cutting feedrate is valid for the G01, G02, G03, G33 and G34 commands.

Examples (asynchronous feed)

Feedrate
G1 X100. Z100. F200 ; 200.0mm/min F200. or F200.000 gives the same rate.
F1 X100. Z100. F123.4 ; 123.4mm/min
F1 X100. Z100. F56.789 ; 56.789mm/min

Speed range that can be commanded (when input setting unit is 1µm or 10µm)
Command mode F command range Feed rate command range Remarks
0.001 ~
mm/min 0.001 ~ 1000000.000 mm/min
1000000.000
0.0001 ~
inch/min 0.0001 ~ 39370.0787inch/min
39370.0787
0.001 ~
°/min 0.001 ~ 1000000.000°/min
1000000.000

(Note 1) A program error (P62) results when there is no F command in the first cutting command
(G01, G02, G03, G33, G34) after the power has been turned ON.
(Note 2) Depending on the model, the speed range may be 0.001 to 240000.000mm/min, 0.0001
to 9448.8188inch/min or 0.001 to 240000.000°/min.

128
 7. Feed Functions
7.3 F1-digit feed

7.3 F1-digit feed

Function and purpose

By setting the F1-digit feed parameter, the feedrate which has been set to correspond to the 1-digit
number following the F address serves as the command value.
When F0 is assigned, the rapid traverse rate is established and the speed is the same as for G00.
(G modal does not change.)
When F1 to F5 is assigned, the feedrate set to correspond to the command serves as the
command value.
The command greater than F6 is considered to be the normal cutting feedrate.
The F1-digit command is valid in a G01, G02, G03, G02.1 or G03.1 modal.
The F1-digit command can also be used for fixed cycle.

Detailed description

The override function of the feedrate which is set in accordance to the F1-digit is performed by
using the manual handle.
The amount by which the feedrate can be increased or reduced is determined by the following
formula.

FM
±∆F = × (±number of manual handle pulse generator pulses)
K
Where "+" means increase, and "–" means reduction.
K : Operation constant (This is the number of FM divisions, and is the calculated constant of
the increment/decrement speed per scale of the manual handle pulse generator.)
This is set with the base specification parameter "#1507 F1_K".
FM : This is the clamp speed of F1 to F5
This is set with the base specification parameter "#1506 F1_FM".
Set the corresponding speed of F1 to F5 with the base specification parameters "#1185 spd_F1" to
"#1189 spd_F5" respectively.
The increase/reduction range is from "0" to the set value of the parameter "#1506 F1_FM".
Operation alarm "104" will occur when the feedrate is 0.

(1) Operation method

(a) Make the F1-digit command valid. (Set the base specification parameter "#1079 F1digt" to
1.)
(b) Set FM and K.
Setting range
K : 1 to 32767 (Base specification parameter "#1507 F1_K")
FM : 0 to Fmax (mm/min) (Base specification parameter "#1506 F1_FM")

(c) Set F1 to F5. (Base specification parameter "1185 spd_F1" to "#1189 spd_F5")

129
7. Feed Functions
7.3 F1-digit feed

(2) Special notes

(a) Use of both the F1-digit command and normal cutting feedrate command is possible when
the F1-digit is valid.
(Example 1)
F0 Rapid traverse rate
F1 to F5 F1-digit
F6 or more Normal cutting feedrate command
(b) F1 to F5 are invalid in the G00 mode and the rapid traverse rate is established instead.
(c) If F0 is used in the G02 or G03 mode, a program error (P121) will result.
(d) When F1. to F5. (with decimal point) are assigned, the 1mm/min to 5mm/min direct
commands are established instead of the F1-digit command.
(e) When the commands are used with the millimeter or degree units, the feedrate set to
correspond to F1 to F5 serves as the assigned speed mm (°)/min.
(f) When the commands are used with inch units, one-tenth of the feedrate set correspond to
F1 to F5 serves at the assigned speed inch/min.
(g) The number of manual handle pulses is 1 pulse per scale unit regardless of the scaling
factor.
(h) During a F1-digit command, the F1-digit number and F1-digit command signal are output
as the PLC signals.

(3) F1-digit and G commands

(a) 01 group G command in same block as F1-digit commands

Executed feedrate Modal display rate G modal
G0F0
Rapid traverse rate 0 G0
F0G0
G0F1
Rapid traverse rate 1 G0
F1G0
G1F0
Rapid traverse rate 0 G1
F0G1
G1F1
F1 contents 1 G1
F1G1

(b) F1-digit and unmodal commands may be assigned in the same block. In this case, the
unmodal command is executed and at the same time the F1-digit modal command is
updated.

(4) Example of arithmetic constant K setting

When the handle scale unit is to be made ±10mm/min.
FM is made 15000 mm/min:
15000
∆F = 10 =
K
Therefore, K is 1500.
The feed rate is made F (1 to 5) ±10 (mm/min) by rotating the handle through one scale
unit.

(5) Valid manual handle conditions

The manual handle is valid during cutting feed (F1 to F5), automatic start, F1-digit valid and
manual handle valid switch ON at the machine side as well as in the MDI mode, tape mode or
memory mode provided that the machine lock (machine lock rapid traverse) or dry run status
has not been established.
The function cannot be used when the handle specifications have not been provided.

130
 7. Feed Functions
7.4 Synchronous/asynchronous feed

7.4 Synchronous/asynchronous feed; G94, G95

Function and purpose

Using the G95 command, it is possible to assign the feed amount per rotation with an F code.
When this command is used, the rotary encoder must be attached to the spindle.

Command format

G94;
G95;
G94 Per-minute feed (mm/min) (asynchronous feed)
G95 Per-rotation feed (mm/rev) (synchronous feed)
The G95 command is a modal command and so it is valid until the G94 command (per-minute feed)
is next assigned.

(1) The F code command range is as follows.

The movement amount per spindle rotation with synchronous feed (per-rotation feed) is
assigned by the F code and the command range is as shown in the table below.

Metric input
Input
command unit B (0.001mm) C (0.0001mm)
system
Command
Per-minute feed Per-rotation feed Per-minute feed Per-rotation feed
mode
Command
F (mm/min) F (mm/rev) F (mm/min) F (mm/rev)
address
Minimum 1 (= 1.000), 1 (= 0.0001), 1 (= 1.0000), 1 (= 0.00001),
command unit (1. = 1.000) (1. = 1.0000) (1. = 1.0000) (1. = 1.00000)
Command 0.001 0.0001 0.0001 0.00001
range ~1000000.000 ~999.9999 ~100000.0000 ~99.99999

Input
command unit D (0.00001mm)
system
Command
Per-minute feed Per-rotation feed
mode
Command
F (mm/min) F (mm/rev)
address
Minimum 1 (= 1.00000), 1 (= 0.000001),
command unit (1. = 1.00000) (1. = 1.000000)
Command 0.0001 0.000001
range ~100000.00000 ~99.999999

Inch input
Input
command unit B (0.0001inch) C (0.00001inch)
system
Command
Per-minute feed Per-rotation feed Feed per minute Per-rotation feed
mode
Command
F (inch/min) E (inch/rev) F (inch/min) E (inch/rev)
address
Minimum 1 (= 0.01), 1 (= 0.000001), 1 (= 0.01), 1 (= 0.0000001),
command unit (1. = 1.0000) (1. = 1.000000) (1. = 1.00000) (1. = 1.0000000)
Command 0.0001 0.000001 0.00001 0.0000001
range ~ 39370.0787 ~ 99.999999 ~ 3937.00787 ~ 9.9999999

131
7. Feed Functions
7.4 Synchronous/asynchronous feed

(2) The effective speed (actual movement speed of machine) under per-rotation feed conditions is
given in the following formula (Formula 1).
FC = F × N × OVR ........... (Formula 1)

Where FC = Effective rate (mm/min, inch/min)

F = Commanded speed (mm/rev, inch/rev)
N = Spindle rotation speed (r/min)
OVR = Cutting feed override

When a multiple number of axes have been commanded at the same time, the effective rate
FC in formula 1 applies in the vector direction of the command.

(Note 1) The effective rate (mm/min or inch/min), which is produced by converting the
commanded speed, the spindle rotation speed and the cutting feed override into the
per-minute speed, appears as the FC on the monitor 1. screen of the setting and display
unit.
(Note 2) When the above effective rate exceeds the cutting feed clamp rate, it is clamped at that
clamp rate.
(Note 3) If the spindle rotation speed is zero when synchronous feed is executed, operation alarm
"105" results.
(Note 4) During machine lock processing, the rate will be 1,000,000 mm/min (or 39,370 inch/min,
1,000,000 °/min) regardless of the commanded speed and spindle rotation speed.
(Note 5) Under dry run conditions, asynchronous speed applies and movement results at the
externally set speed (mm/min or inch/min).
(Note 6) Whether asynchronous feed (G94) or synchronous feed (G95) is to be established when
the power is turned ON or when M02 or M30 is executed can be selected by setting
parameter "#1074 I_Sync".

132
 7. Feed Functions
7.5 Feedrate designation and effects on control axes

7.5 Feedrate designation and effects on control axes

Function and purpose

It has already been mentioned that a machine has a number of control axes. These control axes
can be divided into linear axes which control linear movement and rotation axes which control
rotary movement. The feedrate is designed to assign the displacement speed of these axes, and
the effect exerted on the tool movement speed which poses problems during cutting differs
according to when control is exercised over the linear axes or when it is exercised over the rotation
axes.
The displacement amount for each axis is assigned separately for each axis by a value
corresponding to the respective axis. The feedrate is not assigned for each axis but assigned as a
single value. Therefore, when two or more axes are to be controlled simultaneously, it is necessary
to understand how this will work for each of the axes involved.
The assignment of the feedrate is described with the following related items.

When controlling linear axes

Even when only one machine axis is to be controlled or there are two or more axes to be controlled
simultaneously, the feedrate which is assigned by the F code functions as a linear speed in the tool
advance direction.
(Example) When the feedrate is designated as "f" and linear axes (X and Z) are to be controlled

P2 (Tool end point) X

Feedrate for X axis = f ×
x 2
x +z
2

Z
Feedrate for Z axis = f ×
2 2
Speed in this direction is "f" x +z

P1 (Tool start point) z Z

When only linear axes are to be controlled, it is sufficient to designate the cutting feed in the
program. The feedrate for each axis is such that the designated rate is broken down into the
components corresponding to the movement amounts.

133
7. Feed Functions
7.5 Feedrate designation and effects on control axes

(Note) When the circular interpolation function is used and the tool is moved along the
circumference of an arc by the linear control axis, the rate in the tool advance direction, or in
other words the tangential direction, will be the feedrate designated in the program.

P2
x
Linear speed is "f"

P1
z i Z

(Example) When the feedrate is designated as "f" and the linear axes (X and Z) are to be
controlled using the circular interpolation function
In this case, the feedrate of the X and Z axes will change along with the tool movement.
However, the combined speed will always be maintained at the constant value "f".

When controlling rotation axes

When rotation axes are to be controlled, the designated feedrate functions as the rotation speed of
the rotation axes or, in other words, as an angular speed.
Consequently, the cutting feed in the tool advance direction, or in other words the linear speed,
varies according to the distance between the center of rotation and the tool. This distance must be
borne in mind when designating the feedrate in the program.

(Example) When the feedrate is designated as "f" and rotation axis (C) is to be controlled ("f" units
= °/min)

P2 (Tool end point)

Angular speed is "f"

Linear speed is : π•r•f

c 180
P1 (Tool start point)
Rotation center
r

In this case, in order to make the cutting feed (linear speed) in the tool advance direction "fc":
π•r
fc = f ×
180
Therefore, the feedrate to be designated in the program must be:
180
f = fc ×
π•r

134
7. Feed Functions
7.5 Feedrate designation and effects on control axes

When linear and rotation axes are to be controlled at the same time

The NC unit proceeds in exactly the same way whether linear or rotation axes are to be controlled.
When a rotation axis is to be controlled, the numerical value assigned by the coordinate words (C, H)
is the angle and the numerical values assignees by the feedrate (F) are all handled as linear speeds.
In other words, 1° of the rotation axis is treated as being equivalent to 1mm of the linear axis.
Consequently, when both linear and rotation axes are to be controlled simultaneously, the
components for each axis of the numerical values assigned by F will be the same as for section (1)
above (applying when linear axes are to be controlled). However, although in this case both the
size and direction of the speed components based on linear axis control do not vary, the direction
of the speed components based on rotation axis control will change along with the tool movement
(their size will not change). This means, as a result, that the combined tool advance direction
feedrate with vary along with the tool movement.

(Example) When the feedrate is designated as "f" and linear (X) and rotation (C) axes are to be
controlled simultaneously
If the X-axis incremental command value is "x" and the C-axis incremental command
value is "c":

ft Size and direction are fixed for fx.

fc
Size is fixed for fc but direction varies.
P2 fx Both size and direction vary for ft.
fc
r θ
ft
P1
c fx
x
θ
Rotation center

135
7. Feed Functions
7.5 Feedrate designation and effects on control axes

X-axis feedrate (linear speed) "fx" and C-axis feedrate (angular speed) "ω" are expressed as:
x c
fx = f × ........ (1) ω=f× ........ (2)
2
x +c 2
x + c2
2

Linear speed "fc" based on C-axis control is expressed as:

π×r
fc = ω × ........ (3)
180

If the speed in the tool advance direction at start point P1 is "ft" and the component speeds in the
X-axis and Y-axis directions are "ftx" and "fty" respectively. Then these can be expressed as:
π π
ftx = −rsin ( θ)× ω + fx ........ (4)
180 180

π π
fty = −rcos ( θ)× ω................... (5)
180 180
Where r is the distance between center of rotation and tool (in mm units), and
θ is the angle between the P1 point and the X axis at the center of rotation (in units °).
The combined speed "ft" according to formulae (1), (2), (3), (4) and (5) is:

ft = ftx2 + fty2
π π π×r×c 2
x2 − x × c × rsin ( θ) +( )
=f× 180 90 180
x2 + c2
........... (6)
Consequently, feedrate "f" designated by the program must be as follows:

x2 + c2
f = ft ×
π π
x2 − x × c × rsin ( θ) + ( π × r × c )2 ........... (7)
180 90 180

"ft" in formula (6) is the speed at the P1 point and the value of θ changes as the C axis rotates,
which means that the value of "ft" will also change. Consequently, in order to keep the cutting feed
"ft" as constant as possible, the angle of rotation which is designated in one block must be reduced
to as low as possible and the extent of the change in the θ value must be minimized.

136
 7. Feed Functions
7.6 Thread cutting mode

7.6 Thread cutting mode

Function and purpose

F7-digit or E8-digit commands for thread leads can be issued for the thread cutting mode (G33,
G34, G76, G78 commands).
The thread Iead command range is 0.0001 to 999.9999mm/rev (F7 digits) or 0.0001 to 999.99999
mm/rev (E8 digits) (with input unit of µm).

Thread cutting metric input

Input unit
B (0.001mm) C (0.0001mm)
system
Command
F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch) F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Minimum 1 (= 0.0001), 1 (= 0.00001), 1 (= 1), 1 (= 0.00001), 1(=0.000001), 1 (= 1),
command unit (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.00) (1.=1.00000) (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.000)
0.0001 0.00001 0.03 0.00001 0.000001 0.255
Command range
~ 999.9999 ~ 999.99999 ~ 999.99 ~ 99.99999 ~ 99.999999 ~9999.999

Input unit
D (0.00001mm)
system
Command
F (mm/rev) E (mm/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Minimum 1 (= 0.000001), 1 (= 0.0000001),
command unit (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000)
0.000001 0.0000001
Command range
~ 99.999999 ~ 99.9999999

Thread cutting inch input

Input unit
B (0.0001inch) C (0.00001inch)
system
Command
F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch) F (inch/rev) E (inch/rev) E (ridges/inch)
address
Minimum 1(=0.000001), 1(=0.0000001), 1 (= 1.0000), 1(=0.0000001), 1(=0.00000001), 1(=1.00000),
command unit (1.=1.000000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.0000) (1.=1.0000000) (1.=1.00000000) (1.=1.00000)
0.000001 0.000010 0.0101 0.0000001 0.0000010 0.10001
Command range
~ 99.999999 ~ 9.9999999 ~ 9999.9999 ~ 9.9999999 ~ 0.99999999 ~999.99999

137
 7. Feed Functions
7.7 Automatic acceleration/deceleration

7.7 Automatic acceleration/deceleration

Function and purpose

The rapid traverse and manual feed acceleration/deceleration pattern is linear acceleration and
linear deceleration.
Time constant TR can be set independently for each axis using parameters in 1ms steps from 1 to
500ms.
The cutting feed (not manual feed) acceleration/deceleration pattern is exponential acceleration/
deceleration. Time constant Tc can be set independently for each axis using parameters in 1ms
steps across a range from 1 to 500ms. (Normally, the same time constant is set for all axes.)

f f
With continuous commands
With continuous
commands

t t
TR TR TC TC
Td

Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration

Pattern pattern
(TR = Rapid traverse time constant) (Tc = Cutting feed time constant)
(Td = Deceleration check time)

With rapid traverse and manual feed, the following block is executed after the command pulse of
the present block has become "0" and the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration circuit has
become "0". However, with cutting feed, the following block is executed as soon as the command
pulse of the present block becomes "0" although an external signal (error detect) can detect that
the tracking error of the acceleration/deceleration circuit has reached "0" and the following block
can be executed. When the in-position check has been made valid (selected by parameter "#1193
inpos") during the deceleration check, it is first confirmed that the tracking error of the
acceleration/deceleration circuit has reached "0", then it is checked that the position deviation is
less than the parameter setting value "#2204 SV024", and finally the following block is executed. It
depends on the machine as to whether the error detect function can be activated by a switch or M
function and so reference should be made to the instructions issued by the machine maker.

7.8 Speed clamp

Function and purpose

This function exercises control over the actual cutting feedrate in which override has been applied
to the cutting feedrate command so that the speed clamp value which has been preset
independently for each axis is not exceeded.

(Note) Speed clamping is not applied to synchronous feed and thread cutting.

138
 7. Feed Functions
7.9 Exact stop check

7.9 Exact stop check; G09

Function and purpose

In order for roundness to be prevented during corner cutting and for machine shock to be alleviated
when the tool feedrate changes suddenly, there are times when it is desirable to start the commands
in the following block once the in-position state after the machine has decelerated and stopped or the
elapsing of the deceleration check time has been checked. The exact stop check function is designed
to accomplish this purpose.
The parameter "#1193 inpos" among the base specifications parameters enables control to be
exercised either by the deceleration check time or in-position state. The in-position state is valid
when "#1193 inpos" is set to 1.
The in-position width is set into parameter "#2224 SV024" on the servo parameter screen by the
machine maker.

Command format

G09 G01 (G02, G03) ;

The exact stop check command G09 has an effect only with the cutting command (G01 ~ G03) in
its particular block.

Example of program

N001 G09 G01 X100.000 F150 ; The commands in the following block are started
once the deceleration check time or in-position
state has been checked after the machine has
decelerated and stopped.
N002 Z100.000 ;

Tool

f (Commanded speed) With

G09

N001
X
axis N001
Without N002
G09
Time
Z
axis
N002
Solid line indicates speed pattern with G09 command.
Broken line indicates speed pattern without G09 command.

Fig. 1 Exact stop check result

139
7. Feed Functions
7.9 Exact stop check

Detailed description

(1) With continuous cutting feed

Next block
Previous block

Ts

Fig. 2 Continuous cutting feed command

(2) With cutting feed in-position check

Previous block Next block

Lc (in-position width)

Ts Ts

Fig. 3 Block joint with cutting feed in-position check

In Figs. 2 and 3:
Ts = Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant
Lc = In-position width

As shown in Fig. 3, the in-position width "Lc" can be set into the servo parameter "#2224
SV024" as the remaining distance (shaded area in Fig. 3) of the previous block when the next
block is started.
The setting unit for the servo parameter "#2224 SV024" is 0.0005mm or 0.00005inch.
The in-position width is designed to reduce the roundness at the workpiece corners to below
the constant value.

Lc Next block

Previous block

To eliminate corner roundness, set the servo parameter "#2224 SV024" to zero and perform
an in-position check or assign the dwell command (G04) between blocks.

140
7. Feed Functions
7.9 Exact stop check

(3) With deceleration check

(a) With linear acceleration/deceleration

Previous block Next block

Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant

Ts Td : Deceleration check time
Td = Ts + ( 0 ~ 14ms)
Td

(b) With exponential acceleration/deceleration

Previous block Next block

Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant

Ts Td : Deceleration check time
Td = 2 × Ts + ( 0 ~ 14ms)
Td

(c) With exponential acceleration/linear deceleration

Previous block Next block

2 x Ts

Td Ts
Ts : Acceleration/deceleration time constant
Td : Deceleration check time
Td = 2 × Ts + ( 0 ~ 14ms)

The time required for the deceleration check during cutting feed is the longest among the
cutting feed deceleration check times of each axis determined by the cutting feed
acceleration/deceleration time constants and by the cutting feed acceleration/
deceleration mode of the axes commanded simultaneously.

(Note 1) To execute exact stop check in a fixed cycle cutting block, insert command G09
into the fixed cycle subprogram.

141
 7. Feed Functions
7.10 Exact stop check mode

7.10 Exact stop check mode ; G61

Function and purpose

Whereas the G09 exact stop check command checks the in-position status only for the block in
which the command has been assigned, the G61 command functions as a modal. This means that
deceleration will apply at the end points of each block to all the cutting commands (G01 to G03)
subsequent to G61 and that the in-position status will be checked. G61 is released by automatic
corner override (G62), tapping mode (G63), or cutting mode (G64).

Command format

G61 ;
In-position check is executed in the G61 block, and thereafter, the in-position check is executed at
the end of the cutting command block is executed until the check mode is canceled.

142
 7. Feed Functions
7.11 Deceleration check

7.11 Deceleration check

Function and purpose

The deceleration check is a function that determines the method of the check at the completion of
the axis movement block's movement.
The deceleration check includes the in-position check and commanded speed check method.
The G0 and G1 deceleration check method combination can be selected.
(Refer to section "Deceleration check combination".)
With this function, the deceleration check in the reverse direction of G1 → G0 or G1 → G1 can be
changed by changing the parameter setting.

(1) Types of deceleration check

Commanded speed check
With the commanded Command to motor
speed check, the
completion of deceleration Movement of motor
is judged when the
command to the motor is
completed.

Deceleration Judges the stop here

start point
In-position check
With the in-position check,
the completion of
deceleration is judged
when the motor moves to
the in-position width G0/G1 in-position width
designated with the
parameter.

Deceleration Judges the stop here

start point

143
7. Feed Functions
7.11 Deceleration check

(2) Designating deceleration check

The deceleration check by designating a parameter includes "deceleration check
specification type 1" and "deceleration check specification type 2". The setting is selected with
the parameter "#1306 InpsTyp".
(a) Deceleration check specification type 1 ("#1306 InpsTyp" = 0)
The G0 and G1 deceleration check method can be selected with the base specification
parameter deceleration check method 1 (#1193 inpos) and "deceleration check method 2"
(#1223 aux07/bit1).
Rapid traverse Other than rapid traverse command
Parameter Parameter
command (G1 : other than G0 command)
Inpos G0→XX AUX07/BIT-1
G1+G9→XX G0→XX
(#1193) (G0+G9→XX) (#1223/BIT-1)
Command Command
0 0
deceleration check deceleration check No deceleration
In-position In-position check
1 1
check check

(Note 1) XX expresses all commands.

(Note 2) "#1223 aux07" is the system common parameter.

(b) Deceleration check specification type 2 ("#1306 InpsTyp" = 1)

Rapid traverse and cutting in-position are designated with the "inpos" parameter.
Parameter Command block
#1193 Inpos G0 G1+G9 G1
Command Command No deceleration
0
deceleration check deceleration check check
In-position In-position No deceleration
1
check check check

(Note 1) "#1193 inpos" is the parameter per system.

(Note 2) "G0" means the rapid traverse, and "G1" means the cutting feed.

144
 7. Feed Functions
7.11 Deceleration check

7.11.1 G1 → G0 deceleration check

Detailed description

(1) In G1 → G0 continuous blocks, the parameter "#1502 G0Ipfg" can be changed to change the
deceleration check in the reverse direction.
Same direction Reverse direction
The acceleration
rate is excessive
due to the
composite speed
of G1 and G0.

G0Ipfg: 0 G1 G0

G1 G0

G0Ipfg: 1 G1 G0

G1 G0

Command deceleration

Example of program

When there is a deceleration check in the movement of several axes:

(1) G91 G1 X100. Z100. F4000 ; A deceleration check is carried out, because the X axis
G0 X-100. Z120. ; moves in the reverse direction in the program above.

(2) G91 G1 X100. Z-100. F4000 ; A deceleration check is carried out, because the Z axis
G0 X80. Z100. ; moves in the reverse direction in the program above.

(3) G90 G1 X100. Z100. F4000 ; (When the program start position is X0 Z0)
G0 X80. Z120. ; A deceleration check is carried out, because the X axis
moves in the reverse direction in the program above.

(4) G91 G1 X100. Z100. F4000 ; A deceleration check is not carried out, because both
G0 X100. Z100. ; the X axis and the Z axis move in the same direction in
the program above.

(5) G91 G1 X100. Z80. F4000 ; A deceleration check is not carried out, because the X
G0 X80. ; axis moves in the same direction, and there is no Z
axis movement command in the program above.

145
 7. Feed Functions
7.11 Deceleration check

7.11.2 G1 → G1 deceleration check

Detailed description

(1) In G1 → G1 continuous blocks, the parameter "#1503 G1Ipfg" can be changed to change the
deceleration check of the reverse direction.
Same direction Reverse direction

G1Ipfg: 0
G1 G1 G1 G1

G1Ipfg: 1
G1 G1 G1 G1

Command deceleration

Example of program

When there is a deceleration check in the movement of several axes:

(1) G91 G1 X100. Z100. F4000 ; A deceleration check is carried out, because the X
G1 X-100. Z120. ; axis moves in the reverse direction in the program
above.

(2) G91 G1 X100. Z-100. F4000 ; A deceleration check is carried out, because the Z
G1 X80. Z100. ; axis moves in the reverse direction in the program
above.

(3) G90 G1 X100. Z100. F4000 ; (When the program start position is X0 Z0)
G1 X80. Z120. ; A deceleration check is carried out, because the X
axis moves in the reverse direction in the program
above.

(4) G91 G1 X100. Z100. F4000 ; A deceleration check is not carried out, because both
G1 X100. Z100. ; the X axis and the Z axis move in the same direction
in the program above.

(5) G91 G1 X100. Z80. F4000 ; A deceleration check is not carried out, because the
G1 X80. ; X axis moves in the same direction, and there is no Z
axis movement command in the program above.

146
 7. Feed Functions
7.12 Automatic corner override

7.12 Automatic corner override ; G62

Function and purpose

With this command, when cutting with tool radius compensation, an override is automatically
applied to the feedrate to reduce the load during inside corner cutting or during inside cutting of
automatic corner R.
Automatic corner override is valid until the nose R compensation cancel (G40), exact stop check
mode (G61), tapping mode (G63), or cutting mode (G64) command is issued.

Command format

G62 ;

Machining inside corners

When cutting an inside corner as in Fig. 1, the machining allowance amount increases and a
greater load is applied to the tool. To remedy this, override is applied automatically within the
corner set range, the feedrate is reduced, the increase in the load is reduced and cutting is
performed effectively.
However, this function is valid only when finished shapes are programmed.

workpiece Programmed path

Machining allowance (finished shape)
θ
S
Workpiece surface shape
(3)
(2)
(1)
Nose R center path
Machining
allowance

Deceleration
range
Ci

Tool

θ : Max. angle at inside corner

Ci : Deceleration range (IN)

Fig. 1

147
7. Feed Functions
7.12 Automatic corner override

(1) Operation
(a) When automatic corner override is not to be applied :
When the tool moves in the order of (1) → (2) → (3) in Fig. 1, the machining allowance at
(3) increases by an amount equivalent to the area of shaded section S and so the tool load
increases.

(b) When automatic corner override is to be applied :

When the inside corner angle θ in Fig. 1 is less than the angle set in the parameter, the
override set into the parameter is automatically applied in the deceleration range Ci.

(2) Parameter setting

The following parameters are set into the machining parameters :
# Parameter Parameter setting
#8007 OVERRIDE 0 to 100%
#8008 MAX. ANGLE 0 to 180°
#8009 DSC. ZONE 0 to 99999.999mm or 0 to 3937.000 inches
Refer to the Operation Manual for details on the setting method.

Automatic corner R
surface shape
Programmed

center path
Workpiece

Nose R
path Machining
allowance

Corner R center

Workpiece Corner
R section
Ci

Machining
allowance

(1) The override set in the parameter is automatically applied at the deceleration range Ci and
corner R section for inside offset with automatic corner R. (There is no angle check.)

148
7. Feed Functions
7.12 Automatic corner override

Application example

(1) Linear − linear corner

Program
θ
Nose R center

Ci

Tool

The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci.

(2) Linear − arc (outside offset) corner

Program Nose R center

Ci

Tool

The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci.

(3) Arc (inside offset) − linear corner

Program θ

Ci
Nose R center
Tool
Tool

The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci.

(Note) The deceleration range Ci where the override is applied is the length of the arc with an
arc command.

149
7. Feed Functions
7.12 Automatic corner override

(4) Arc (inside offset) − arc (outside offset) corner

N1 θ
N2
Program
Ci

Nose R center

The override set in the parameter is applied at Ci.

Relation with other functions

Function Override at corner

Cutting feed override Automatic corner override is applied after cutting feed override
has been applied.
Override cancel Automatic corner override is not canceled by override cancel.
Speed clamp Valid after automatic corner override
Dry run Automatic corner override is invalid.
Synchronous feed Automatic corner override is applied to the synchronous feedrate.
Thread cutting Automatic corner override is invalid.
G31 skip Program error results with G31 command during nose R
compensation.
Machine lock Valid
Machine lock high speed Automatic corner override is invalid.
G00 Invalid
G01 Valid
G02, G03 Valid

Precautions

(1) Automatic corner override is valid only in the G01, G02, and G03 modes; it is not effective in
the G00 mode. When switching from the G00 mode to the G01 (or G02 or G03) mode at a
corner (or vice versa), automatic corner override will not be applied at that corner in the G00
block.
(2) Even if the automatic corner override mode is entered, the automatic corner override will not
be applied until the nose R compensation mode is entered.
(3) Automatic corner override will not be applied on a corner where the nose R compensation is
started or canceled.
(4) Automatic corner override will not be applied on a corner where the nose R compensation I, K
vector command is issued.

150
7. Feed Functions
7.12 Automatic corner override

(5) Automatic corner override will not be applied when intersection calculation cannot be
executed.
Intersection calculation cannot be executed in the following case.
(a) When the movement command block does not continue for four or more times.
(6) The deceleration range with an arc command is the length of the arc.
(7) The inside corner angle, as set by parameter, is the angle on the programmed path.
(8) Automatic corner override will not be applied when the maximum angle in the parameter is set
to 0 or 180.
(9) Automatic corner override will not be applied when the override in the parameter is set to 0 or
100.

151
 7. Feed Functions
7.13 Tapping mode

7.13 Tapping mode ; G63

Function and purpose

The G63 command allows the control mode best suited for tapping to be entered, as indicated
below :

1. Cutting override is fixed at 100%.

2. Deceleration commands at joints between blocks are invalid.
3. Feed hold is invalid.
4. Single block is invalid.
5. In-tapping mode signal is output.

G63 is released by the exact stop check mode (G61), automatic corner override (G62), or cutting
mode (G64) command.

Command format

G63 ;

7.14 Cutting mode ; G64

Function and purpose

The G64 command allows the cutting mode in which smooth cutting surfaces are obtained to be
established. Unlike the exact stop check mode (G61), the next block is executed continuously with
the machine not decelerating and stopping between cutting feed blocks in this mode.

G64 is released by the exact stop check mode (G61), high-accuracy control mode (G61.1),
automatic corner override (G62), or tapping mode (G63) command.

This cutting mode is established in the initialized status.

Command format

G64 ;

152
 8. Dwell
8.1 Per-second dwell

8. Dwell
The G04 command can delay the start of the next block.

8.1 Per-second dwell ; G04

Function and purpose

The machine movement is temporarily stopped by the program command to make the waiting time
state. Therefore, the start of the next block can be delayed. The waiting time state can be canceled
by inputting the skip signal.

Command format

G04 X/U__ ; or G04 P__ ;

X, P, U Dwell time
The input command unit for the dwell time depends on the parameter.
In addition to the address P and X, the address U (actually, the address corresponding to the
X-axis designated with the #1014 incax) can be used. Note that this is invalid when the #1076
AbsInc is set to 0.

Detailed description

(1) When designating the dwell time with X or U, the decimal point command is valid.
(2) When designating the dwell time with P, the availability of the decimal point command can be
selected with the parameter (#8112). When the decimal point command is invalid in the
parameter setting, the command below the decimal point issued with P is ignored.
(3) When the decimal point command is valid or invalid, the dwell time command range is as
follows.
Command range when the decimal point Command range when the decimal point
command is valid command is invalid
0.001 ~ 99999.999 (s) 1 ~ 99999999 (ms)
(4) The dwell time setting unit applied when there is no decimal point can be made 1s by setting 1
in the parameter #1078 Decpt2. This is effect only for X, U and P for which the decimal
command is valid.
(5) When a cutting command is in the previous block, the dwell command starts calculating the
dwell time after the machine has decelerated and stopped. When it is commanded in the same
block as an M, S, T or B command, the calculation starts simultaneously.
(6) The dwell is valid during the interlock.
(7) The dwell is valid even for the machine lock.
(8) The dwell can be canceled by setting the parameter #1173 dwlskp beforehand. If the set skip
signal is input during the dwell time, the remaining time is discarded, and the following block
will be executed.

153
8. Dwell
8.1 Per-second dwell

Previous block
cutting command

Next block

Dwell command

Dwell time

Example of program

Dwell time (s)

#1078 Decpt2 = 0 #1078 Decpt2 = 1
Command
DECIMAL DECIMAL DECIMAL DECIMAL
PNT-N PNT-P PNT-N PNT-P
G04 X500 ; 0.5 500
G04 X5000 ; 5 5000
G04 X5. ; 5 5
G04 X#100 ; 1000 1000
G04 U500 ; 0.5 500
G04 U5000 ; 5 5000
G04 U5. ; 5 5
G04 U#100 ; 1000 1000
G04 P5000 ; 5 5 5000
G04 P12.345 ; 0.012 12.345 0.012 12.345
G04 P#100 ; 1 1000 1 1000

(Note 1) The above examples are the results under the following conditions.
• Input setting unit 0.001mm or 0.0001inch
• #100 = 1000 ;

(Note 2) "DECIMAL PNT-P" is a control parameter (#8112).

(Note 3) If the input setting unit is 0.0001inch, the X before G04 will be multiplied by 10. For
example for "X5. G04 ;", the dwell time will be 50 seconds.

Precautions and restrictions

(1) When using this function, command X or U after G04 in order to make sure that the dwell is
based on X or U.

154
 9. Miscellaneous Functions
9.1 Miscellaneous functions (M8-digits BCD)

9. Miscellaneous Functions
9.1 Miscellaneous functions (M8-digits BCD)
Function and purpose

The miscellaneous (M) functions are also known as M functions, and they include such numerically
controlled machine functions as spindle forward and reverse rotation, operation stop and coolant
ON/OFF. These functions are designated by an 8-digit number (0 to 99999999) following the
address M with this controller, and up to 4 groups can be commanded in a single block.
(Example) G00 Xx Mm1 Mm2 Mm3 Mm4 ;
When five or more commands are issued, only the last four will be valid.
The output signal is an 8-digit BCD code and start signal.
The eight commands of M00, M01, M02, M30, M96, M97, M98 and M99 are used as auxiliary
commands for specific objectives and so they cannot be used as general auxiliary commands.
This therefore leaves 92 miscellaneous functions which are usable as such commands.
Reference should be made to the instructions issued by the machine maker for the actual
correspondence between the functions and numerical values.
When the M00, M01, M02, and M30 functions are used, the next block is not read into the
pre-read buffer due to pre-read inhibiting.
If the M function is designated in the same block as a movement command, the commands
may be executed in either of the following two orders. The machine specifications determine
which sequence applies.
(1) The M function is executed after the movement command.
(2) The M function is executed at the same time as the movement command.
Which of these sequences actually applies depends on the machine specifications.
Processing and completion sequences are required in each case for all M commands except M96,
M97, M98 and M99. The 8 M functions used for specific purposes will now be described.

Program stop : M00

When the tape reader has read this function, it stops reading the next block. As far as the NC
system's functions are concerned, only the tape reading is stopped. Whether such machine
functions as the spindle rotation and coolant supply are stopped or not differs according to the
machine in question.
Re-start is enabled by pressing the automatic start button on the machine operation board.
Whether resetting can be initiated by M00 depends on the machine specifications.

155
9. Miscellaneous Functions
9.1 Miscellaneous functions (M8-digits BCD)

Optional stop : M01

If the tape reader reads the M01 command when the optional stop switch on the machine operation
board is ON, it will stop and the same effect as with the M00 function will apply.
If the optional stop switch is OFF, the M01 command is ignored.
(Example)

~
N10 G00 X1000 ;
Optional stop switch command is ignored.
Stops at N11 when switch is ON
N11 M01 ; Next command (N12) is executed without
stopping at N11 when switch is OFF
N12 G01 X2000 Z3000 F600 ;
~

Program end : M02 or M30

This command is normally used in the final block for completing the machining, and so it is primarily
used for tape rewinding. Whether the tape is actually rewound or not depends on the machine
specifications. Depending on the machine specifications, the system is reset by the M02 or M30
command upon completion of tape rewinding and any other commands issued in the same block.
(Although the contents of the command position display counter are not cleared by this reset action,
the modal commands and compensation amounts are canceled.)
The next operation stops when the rewinding operation is completed (the in-automatic operation
lamp goes off). To restart the unit, the automatic start button must be pressed or similar steps must
be taken.
(Note 1) Independent signals are also output respectively for the M00, M01, M02 and M30
commands and these outputs are each reset by pressing the reset key.
(Note 2) M02 or M30 can be assigned by manual data input (MDI). At this time, commands can be
issued simultaneously with other commands just as with the tape.

Macro interrupt : M96, M97

M96 and M97 are M codes for user macro interrupt control.
The M code for user macro interrupt control is processed internally, and is not output externally.
To use M96 and M97 as a miscellaneous function, change the setting to another M code with the
parameter (#1109 subs_M and #1110 M96_M, #1111 M97_M).

Subprogram call/completion : M98, M99

These commands are used as the return instructions from branch destination subprograms and
branches to subprograms.
M98 and M99 are processed internally and so M code signals and strobe signals are not output.

Internal processing with M00/M01/M02/M30 commands

Internal processing suspends pre-reading when the M00, M01, M02 or M30 command has been
read. Other tape rewinding operations and the initialization of modals by resetting differ according
the machine specifications.

156
 9. Miscellaneous Functions
9.2 2nd miscellaneous functions (A8-digits, B8-digits or C8-digits)

9.2 2nd miscellaneous functions (A8-digits, B8-digits or C8-digits)

Function and purpose

These serve to assign the indexing table positioning and other such functions. In this controller,
they are assigned by an 8-digit number from 0 to 99999999 following address A, B or C. The
machine maker determines which codes correspond to which positions.
If the A, B or C function is designated in the same block as a movement command, the commands
may be executed in either of the following two orders. The machine specifications determine which
sequence applies.
(1) The A, B or C function is executed after the movement command.
(2) The A, B or C function is executed simultaneously with the movement command.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all 2nd miscellaneous functions.
The table below given the various address combinations. It is not possible to use an address which
is the same for the axis name of an additional axis and 2nd miscellaneous function.

Additional axis name

A B C
2nd miscellaneous function
A ×
B ×
C ×
(Note) When "A" has been assigned as the 2nd miscellaneous function address, the following
commands cannot be used. (,A can be used.)
(1) Linear angle commands
(2) Geometric I commands
(3) Deep hole drilling cycle 2 commands

157
 9. Miscellaneous Functions
9.3 Index table indexing

9.3 Index table indexing

Function and purpose

Index table indexing can be carried out by setting the index axis. The indexing command only
issues the indexing angle to the axis set for indexing. It is not necessary to command special M
codes for table clamping and unclamping, thus simplifying the program.

Detailed description

The index table index function carries out operations as follows.

(Example) G00 B90 ;

The axis that was designated as the index axis with parameter "#2076
index x".

(1) Set the "index_x" parameter (#2076) for the axis in which index table indexing will be carried
out to "1".
(2) The movement command (either absolute or incremental) for the selected axis is executed
with the program command.
(3) An unclamp process are carried out before the axis movement.
(4) The commanded axis movement starts after the unclamp process completes.
(5) The clamp process is carried out after the movement is completed.
(6) The next block is processed after the unclamp process completes.
<Operation time chart>

Program command G0 B90. ;

Unclamp
command
Unclamp
completed

B axis movement

T10 FIN WAIT 0800 T10 FIN WAIT 0800

158
9. Miscellaneous Functions
9.3 Index table indexing

Precautions

(1) Several axes can be set as index table indexing axes.

(2) The movement speed of index table indexing axes follows the feedrate of the modal (G0/G1)
at that time.
(3) The unclamp process for the indexing axes is also issued when the index table indexing axes
are commanded in the same block as other axes. Thus, the movement of other axes
commanded in the same block is not carried out until the unclamp process completes.
Note that the movement of other axes commanded in the same block is carried out for
non-interpolation commands.
(4) Index table indexing axes are used as normal rotation axes, but this function performs an
unclamp process even for linear axes.
(5) If some error that makes unclamp command OFF occurs during indexing axis movement in
automatic operation, the unclamp state will be remained, and the indexing axis will execute a
deceleration stop.
Other axes commanded in the same block will also execute a deceleration stop, except for
non-interpolation commands.
(6) If the axis movement is interrupted by an interlock, etc., during indexing axis movement, the
unclamp state will be remained.
(7) The clamp and unclamp process are not executed when the movement commands of the
index table indexing axis are continuous.
Note that the clamp and unclamp process are executed even when the movement commands
are continued during single block operation.
(8) Make sure that the command position is at a position where clamping is possible.

159
 10. Spindle Functions
10.1 Spindle functions (S2-digits BCD)

10. Spindle Functions

10.1 Spindle functions (S2-digits BCD) ..... During standard PLC specifications
Function and purpose

The spindle functions are also known simply as S functions and they assign the spindle rotation
speed. In this controller, they are assigned with a 2-digit number following the address S ranging
from 0 to 99, and 100 commands can be specified. Note that how many of these 100 types can be
used, and which value corresponds to the actual rotation speed differs for each machine. Refer to
the Instruction Manual issued by the machine maker for more details. When a number exceeding 2
digits is assigned, the last 2 digits will be valid.
If the S function is designated in the same block as a movement command, the commands may be
executed in either of the following two orders. The machine specifications determine which
sequence applies.
(1) The S function is executed after the movement command.
(2) The S function is executed simultaneously with the movement command.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all S commands from S00 to S99.

10.2 Spindle functions (S6-digits Analog)

Function and purpose

When the S6-digits function is added, a 6-digit value (0 to 999999) can be designated after the S
code. Other commands conform to the S2-digits function. Always select S command binary output
when using this function.
In this function, the appropriate gear signal, voltage corresponding to the commanded spindle
rotation speed, and start signal are output by the numeric command of the six digits following the S
code.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all S commands.
The analog signal specifications are given below.
(1) Output voltage................. 0 to 10V
(2) Resolution......................... 1/4096 (2–12)
(3) Load conditions…………. 10kΩ
(4) Output impedance………. 220Ω

If the parameters for up to 4 gear stages are set in advance, the gear stage corresponding to the S
command will be selected and the gear signal will be output. The analog voltage is calculated in
accordance with the input gear signal.
(1) Parameters corresponding to individual gears………… Limit rotation speed, maximum
rotation speed, shift rotation speed
and tapping rotation speed
(2) Parameters corresponding to all gears………………. Orientation rotation speed, minimum
rotation speed

160
 10. Spindle Functions
10.3 Spindle functions (S8-digits)

10.3 Spindle functions (S8-digits)

Function and purpose

These functions are assigned with an 8-digit (0 ~ 99999999) number following the address S, and
one group can be assigned in one block.
The output signal is a 32-bit binary data with sign and start signal. Processing and completion
sequences are required for all S commands.

161
 10. Spindle Functions
10.4 Constant surface speed control

10.4 Constant surface speed control; G96, G97

Function and purpose

These commands automatically control the spindle rotation speed in line with the changes in the
radius coordinate values as cutting proceeds in the diametrical direction, and they serve to keep
the cutting point speed constant during the cutting.

Command format

G96 Ss Pp; Constant surface speed ON

Ss Surface speed
Pp Designation of constant surface speed control axis

G97; Constant surface speed cancel

Detailed description

(1) The constant surface speed control axis is set by parameter (#1181 G96_ax).
0 : Fixed at 1st axis (P command invalid)
1 : 1st axis
2 : 2nd axis
3 : 3rd axis
(2) When the above-mentioned parameter is not zero, the constant surface speed control axis can
be designated by address P.
(Example) When G96_ax = 1
Program Constant surface speed control axis
G96 S100 ; 1st axis
G96 S100 P3 ; 3rd axis

(3) Example of selection program and operation

G90 G96 G01 X50. Z100. S200 ;

The spindle rotation speed is controlled so that
the surface speed is 200m/min.
~

G97 G01 X50. Z100. F300 S500 ;

The spindle rotation speed is controlled to 500
~

r/min.

M02 ; The modal returns to the initial value.

162
 10. Spindle Functions
10.5 Spindle clamp speed setting

10.5 Spindle clamp speed setting; G92

Function and purpose

The maximum clamp rotation speed of the spindle can be assigned by address S following G92
and the minimum clamp rotation speed by address Q.

Command format

G92 Ss Qq ;
Ss Maximum clamp rotation speed
Qq Minimum clamp rotation speed

Detailed description

Besides this command, parameters can be used to set the rotation speed range up to 4 stages in 1
r/min units to accommodate gear selection between the spindle and spindle motor.
The lowest upper limit and highest lower limit are valid among the rotation speed ranges based on
the parameters and based on "G92 Ss Qq ;".

Set in the parameter (#1146 Sclamp, #1227 aux11/bit5) whether to carry out rotation speed clamp
only in the constant surface speed mode or even when the constant surface speed is canceled.

(Note) G92S command and rotation speed clamp operation

Sclamp = 0 Sclamp = 1
aux11/bit5 = 0 aux11/bit5 = 1 aux11/bit5 = 0 aux11/bit5 = 1
ROTATION ROTATION
ROTATION SPEED CLAMP
In G96 SPEED CLAMP SPEED CLAMP
COMMAND
COMMAND COMMAND
Command
ROTATION ROTATION
SPINDLE ROTATION SPEED
In G97 SPEED CLAMP SPEED CLAMP
COMMAND
COMMAND COMMAND
ROTATION ROTATION
ROTATION SPEED CLAMP
In G96 SPEED CLAMP SPEED CLAMP
EXECUTION
EXECUTION EXECUTION
Operation
ROTATION
NO ROTATION
In G97 NO ROTATION SPEED CLAMP SPEED CLAMP
SPEED CLAMP
EXECUTION

163
 10. Spindle Functions
10.6 Spindle/C axis control

10.6 Spindle/C axis control

Function and purpose

This function enables one spindle (MDS-A-SP and later) to also be used as a C axis (rotation axis)
by an external signal.

Detailed description

(1) Spindle/C axis changeover

Changeover between the spindle and C axis is done by the C axis SERVO ON signal.

Spindle C axis Spindle

Servo ON

At servo OFF ................. Spindle (C axis control not possible)

The C axis is in a reference point return incomplete state.
At servo ON................... C axis (spindle control not possible)
The C axis is in a reference point return incomplete state.
A reference point return (orientation) is carried out at the rising edge
of the SERVO ON signal by the parameter setting.

(2) Changeover timing chart example

Spindle
forward run Orientation Orientation
C axis
Motor speed movement

Reference point return complete Reference point

Spindle
return complete
reverse run

Servo ON

Servo READY

Spindle forward run/

reverse run start Forward Reverse
run run
C axis command
(automatic operation)
Reference point return
complete status
Spindle forward run Servo ON Servo OFF Spindle reverse run Servo ON
Blocks being executed C axis command
∗1 ∗2
Recalculation request
C axis
Blocks being calculated command

∗1 Servo OFF ∗2
Servo ON Servo ON
C axis command C axis command Program error
recalculation Spindle (P430 AXIS NOT
Program error because the reverse
reference point return is Reference point return run RET.)
incomplete at this calculation. complete at recalculation

164
10. Spindle Functions
10.6 Spindle/C axis control

(Note) For axis commands, the reference point return complete is checked at calculation.
Thus, when the C axis servo ON command and C axis command are continuous, the
program error (P430) will occur as shown above in ∗2.
In response to this kind of situation, the following two processes must be carried out on
user PC, as shown above in ∗1.
• Input the recalculation request signal with a servo ON command.
• Wait for the completion of the servo ON command until the C axis enters a servo
READY state.

(3) C axis gain

The C axis gain is changed over (the optimum gain is selected) by the C axis cutting condition.
During C axis cutting feed, cutting gain is applied. During other axis' cutting feed (C axis face
turning), non-cutting stop gain is applied. Non-cutting gain is applied in all other cases.

Non-cutting gain

Selected gain Non-cutting gain Cutting gain Cutting stop gain Non-cutting gain

C axis command G0 G1 G0
X axis command
(C axis part system) G0 G1
Z axis command
(other part system) G1 G0 G1

(Note 1) The cutting feed of other systems does not affect the C axis gain selection.
(Note 2) There are 1st to 3rd cutting gains, which are selected with the ladder.

(4) Deceleration check in movement including spindle/C-axis

The deceleration check in a movement command including the spindle/C-axis is as the table
described below when the following condition is fulfilled.
When the different values are set for the position loop gain in non-cutting mode (spindle
parameter #3203 PGCO) and the position loop gain in cutting mode (spindle parameter
#3330 PGC1 to #3333 PGC4).
That is because a vibration and so on occurs in the machine when the gain is changed during
the axis movement.
Rapid traverse Other than rapid traverse command
Parameter Parameter
command (G1 : other than G0 command)
Inpos G0→XX AUX07/BIT-1 G1+G9→XX
G1→ G1
(#1193) (G0+G9→XX) (#1223/BIT-1) (G1+G9→XX)
Command In-position
0 0
deceleration check check No deceleration
In-position (Applicable only to check
1 1
check SV024)

(Note 1) When G1 command is issued, the in-position check is performed regardless of the
deceleration check parameter.
(Note 2) XX expresses all commands.

165
10. Spindle Functions
10.6 Spindle/C axis control

Precautions and Restrictions

(1) A reference point return cannot be executed by the orientation when there is no Z phase in the
detector (PLG, ENC, other).
Replace the detector with one having a Z phase, or if using the detector as it is, set the position
control changeover to "After deceleration stop" in the parameters (Spindle parameters "#3329
SP129 bitE: 1"), and set the axis to "Axis without zero point" (Zero point return parameters
"#2031 noref: 1").
(2) The program error (P430) will occur if a C axis command is issued during servo OFF or during
orientation.
(3) Do not execute a servo OFF during a C axis command.
The remaining C axis commands will be cleared at servo ON.
(If servo OFF is executed during C axis control, the feed will stop and spindle control will
occur.)
(4) If servo ON is executed during spindle rotation, the rotation will stop and C axis control will
occur.
(5) Dog-type reference point return is not possible for the C axis.
Set the reference point return to the orientation method in the parameters (Spindle parameters
"#3329 SP129 bitE: 0"), or set the axis to "Axis without zero point" (Zero point return
parameters "#2031 noref: 1").

166
 10. Spindle Functions
10.7 Spindle synchronization control I

10.7 Spindle synchronization control I; G114.1

Function and purpose

In a machine having two or more spindles, this function controls the rotation speed and phase of
one spindle in synchronization with the rotation of the other spindle.
The function is used when the rotation speed of the two spindles must be matched, for example, if
a workpiece grasped by the 1st spindle is to be grasped by a 2nd spindle, or if the spindle rotation
speed has to be changed when one workpiece is grasped by both the 1st and 2nd spindles.

Command format

(1) Spindle synchronization control ON (G114.1)

This command designates the basic spindle and synchronous spindle, and synchronizes the
two designated spindles. By commanding the synchronous spindle phase shift amount, the
phases of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle can be aligned.
G114.1 H_ D_ R_ A_ ;
H_ Basic spindle selection
D_ Synchronous spindle selection
R_ Synchronous spindle phase shift amount
A_ Spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant

(2) Spindle synchronization control cancel (G113)

This command cancels the synchronous state of the two spindles rotating in synchronization
with the spindle synchronization command.
G113 ;

Add- Meaning of Command

Remarks
ress address range (unit)
H Basic spindle 1 to 4 • A program error (P35) will occur if a
selection value exceeding the command range
1: 1st spindle is commanded.
Select the No. of the 2: 2nd spindle • A program error (P33) will occur if
spindle to be used 3: 3rd spindle there is no command.
as the basic spindle 4: 4th spindle • A program error (P700) will occur if a
from the two spindle not serially connected is
spindles. commanded.
D Synchronous 1 to 4 or –1 to –4 • A program error (P35) will occur if a
spindle selection value exceeding the command range
1: 1st spindle is commanded.
Select the No. of the 2: 2nd spindle • A program error (P33) will occur if
spindle to be 3: 3rd spindle there is no command.
synchronized with 4: 4th spindle • A program error (P33) will occur if the
the basic spindle same spindle as that commanded for
from the two the basic spindle selection is
spindles. designated.
• The rotation direction of the
synchronous spindle in respect to the
basic spindle is commanded with the
D sign.
• A program error (P700) will occur if a
spindle not serially connected is
commanded.

167
10. Spindle Functions
10.7 Spindle synchronization control I

Add- Meaning of address Command range Remarks

ress (unit)
R Synchronous spindle 0 to 359.999 (° ) • A program error (P35) will occur if a
phase shift amount or value exceeding the command range
0 to 35999 is commanded.
Command the shift (° × 10–3) • The commanded shift amount is
amount from the effective in the clockwise direction of
reference point (one the basic spindle.
rotation signal) of the • The commanded shift amount's
synchronous spindle. minimum resolution is as follows:
For semi-closed
(Only gear ratio 1:1)
360/4096 (° )
For full closed
(360/4096) ∗ K (° )
K: Spindle and encoder gear ratio
• If there is no R command, the phases
will not be aligned.
A Spindle 0.001 to 9.999 (s) • A program error (P35) will occur if a
synchronization or value exceeding the command range
acceleration/decele- 1 to 9999 (ms) is commanded.
ration time constant • If the commanded value is smaller
than the acceleration/deceleration
Command the time constant set with the parameters,
acceleration/decele- the value set in the parameters will be
ration time constant applied.
for when the spindle
synchronization
command rotation
speed changes.
(Command this to
accelerate or
decelerate at a speed
slower than the time
constant set in the
parameters.)

Rotation and rotation direction

(1) The rotation speed and rotation direction of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle during
spindle synchronization control are the rotation speed and rotation direction commanded for
the basic spindle. Note that the rotation direction of the synchronous spindle can be reversed
from the basic spindle through the program.
(2) The basic spindle's rotation speed and rotation direction can be changed during spindle
synchronization control.
(3) The synchronous spindle's rotation command is also valid during spindle synchronization
control.
When spindle synchronization control is commanded, if neither a forward run command nor
reverse run command is commanded for the synchronous spindle, the synchronization
standby state will be entered without starting the synchronous spindle's rotation. If the forward
run command or reverse run command is input in this state, the synchronous spindle will start
rotation. The synchronous spindle's rotation direction will follow the direction commanded in
the program.
If spindle stop is commanded for the synchronous spindle during spindle synchronization
control (when both the forward run and reverse run commands are turned OFF), the
synchronous spindle rotation will stop.
(4) The rotation speed command (S command) and constant surface speed control are invalid for
the synchronous spindle during spindle synchronization control. Note that the modal is
updated, so these will be validated when the spindle synchronization is canceled.
(5) The constant surface speed can be controlled by issuing a command to the basic spindle even
during spindle synchronization control.

168
10. Spindle Functions
10.7 Spindle synchronization control I

Rotation synchronization

(1) When rotation synchronization control (command with no R address) is commanded with the
G114.1 command, the synchronous spindle rotating at a random rotation speed will accelerate
or decelerate to the rotation speed commanded beforehand for the basic spindle, and will
enter the rotation synchronization state.
(2) If the basic spindle's commanded rotation speed is changed during the rotation
synchronization state, acceleration/deceleration will be carried out while maintaining the
synchronization state following the spindle acceleration/deceleration time constants set in the
parameters, and the commanded rotation speed will be achieved.
(3) In the rotation synchronization state, the basic spindle can be controlled to the constant
surface speed even when two spindles are grasping one workpiece.
(4) Operation will take place in the following manner.

M23 S2=750 ; ... Forward rotate 2nd spindle (synchronous spindle) at 750
: r/min (speed command)
M03 S1=1000 ; ... Forward rotate 1st spindle (basic spindle) at 1000 r/min
: (speed command)
G114.1 H1 D-2 ; ... Synchronize 2nd spindle (synchronous spindle) to 1st
: spindle (basic spindle) with reverse run
S1=500 ; ... Change 1st spindle (basic spindle) rotation speed to 500
: r/min
G113 ; ... Cancel spindle synchronization

<Operation>

Basic spindle
Synchronous spindle

1000

750

500
Forward
run

0
Reverse
run

–500

–750

–1000

2nd spindle (synchronous spindle) Spindle synchronization cancel

reverse run synchronization

1st spindle (basic spindle) forward run 1st spindle (basic spindle) rotation speed change

2nd spindle (synchronous spindle) forward run

169
10. Spindle Functions
10.7 Spindle synchronization control I

Phase synchronization

(1) When phase synchronization (command with R address) is commanded with the G114.1
command, the synchronous spindle rotating at a random rotation speed will accelerate or
decelerate to the rotation speed commanded beforehand for the basic spindle, and will enter
the rotation synchronization state.
Then, the phase is aligned so that the rotation phase commanded with the R address is
reached, and the phase synchronization state is entered.
(2) If the basic spindle's commanded rotation speed is changed during the phase synchronization
state, acceleration/deceleration will be carried out while maintaining the synchronization state
following the spindle acceleration/deceleration time constants set in the parameters, and the
commanded rotation speed will be achieved.
(3) In the phase synchronization state, the basic spindle can be controlled to the constant surface
speed even when two spindles are grasping one workpiece.
(4) Operation will take place in the following manner.

M23 S2=750 ; ... Forward rotate 2nd spindle (synchronous spindle) at 750
: r/min (speed command)
M03 S1=1000 ; ... Forward rotate 1st spindle (basic spindle) at 1000 r/min
: (speed command)
G114.1 H1 D-2 Rxx ; ... Synchronize 2nd spindle (synchronous spindle) to 1st
: spindle (basic spindle) with reverse run
: Shift phase of synchronous spindle by R command value
S1=500 ; ... Change 1st spindle (basic spindle) rotation speed to 500
: r/min
G113 ; ... Cancel spindle synchronization

<Operation>

Basic spindle
Synchronous spindle

1000

750

500
Forward
run

0
Reverse
run

–500

–750

–1000
Phase alignment
2nd spindle (synchronous spindle) Spindle synchronization cancel
reverse run synchronization

1st spindle (basic spindle) forward run 1st spindle (basic spindle) rotation speed change

2nd spindle (synchronous spindle) forward run

170
10. Spindle Functions
10.7 Spindle synchronization control I

Cautions on programming

(1) To enter the rotation synchronization mode while the basic spindle and synchronous spindle
are chucking the same workpiece, turn the basic spindle/synchronous spindle rotation
commands ON before turning the spindle synchronization control mode ON.

$1 $2
: :
M6 ; 1st spindle chuck close :
: M25 S2=0 ; 2nd spindle stops at S=0
: :
!2 ; !1 ; Synchronizing
M5 S1=0 ; 1st spindle stops at S=0 M15 ; 2nd spindle chuck close
: M24 ; 2nd spindle rotation
command ON
M3 ; 1st spindle rotation :
command ON
!2 ; !1 ; Synchronizing
: G114.1 H1 D-2 ; Rotation synchronization
: : Mode ON
S1=1500 ; Synchronous rotation at :
S=1500
: :

(2) To chuck the same workpiece with the basic spindle and synchronous spindle in the phase
synchronization mode, align the phases before chucking.

$1 $2
: :
M6 ; 1st spindle chuck close :
: :
M3 S1=1500 ; 1st spindle rotation :
command ON
: S=1500 G114.1 H1 D-2 R0 ; Phase synchronization
: : Mode ON
: M24 ; 2nd spindle rotation
command ON
: :
: M15 ; 2nd spindle chuck close
(*)
: :

(*) Close the chuck after confirming that the spindle phase synchronization complete signal
(X30A) has turned ON (phase alignment complete).

(3) When in the spindle synchronization control mode, do not turn the synchronous spindle side's
rotation command OFF when the basic spindle and synchronous spindle have chucked the
same workpiece. This is hazardous as the synchronous spindle will stop.

171
10. Spindle Functions
10.7 Spindle synchronization control I

Precautions and restrictions

(1) The spindle rotating with spindle synchronization control will stop when emergency stop is
applied.
(2) The rotation speed clamp during spindle synchronization control will follow the smaller clamp
value set for the basic spindle or synchronous spindle.
(3) Orientation of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is not possible during the spindle
synchronization control mode. To carry out orientation, cancel the spindle synchronization
control mode first.
(4) The rotation speed command (S command) is invalid for the synchronous spindle during the
spindle synchronization control mode. Note that the modal will be updated, so this will be
validated when spindle synchronization control is canceled.
(5) The constant surface speed control is invalid for the synchronous spindle during the spindle
synchronization control mode. Note that the modal will be updated, so this will be validated
when spindle synchronization is canceled.
(6) The rotation speed command (S command) and constant surface speed control for the
synchronous spindle will be validated when spindle synchronization control is canceled. Thus,
the synchronous spindle may carry out different operations when this control is canceled.
(7) If the phase synchronization command (command with R address) is issued while the phase
shift calculation request signal is ON, an operation error (1106) will occur.
(8) If the phase shift calculation request signal is ON and the basic spindle or synchronous spindle
is rotation while rotation synchronization is commanded, an operation error (1106) will occur.
(9) If the phase synchronization command R0 (<Ex.> G114.2 H1 D-2 R0) is commanded while the
phase offset request signal is ON, the basic spindle and synchronous spindle phases will be
aligned to the phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle saved in the NC
memory.
(10) If a value other than the phase synchronization command R0 (<Ex.> G114.1 H1 D-2 R000) is
commanded while the phase offset request signal is ON, the phase error obtained by adding
the value commanded with the R address command to the phase difference of the basic
spindle and synchronous spindle saved in the NC memory will be used to align the basic
spindle and synchronous spindle.
(11) The phase offset request signal will be ignored when the phase shift calculation request signal
is ON.
(12) The phase error of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle saved in the NC is valid only
when the phase shift calculation signal is ON and for the combination of the basic spindle
selection (H_) and synchronous spindle (D_) commanded with the rotation synchronization
command (no R address).
For example, if the basic spindle and synchronous spindle phase error is saved as "G114.1 H1
D-2 ;", the saved phase error will be valid only when the phase offset request signal is ON and
"G114.1 H1 D_2 R∗∗∗ ;" is commanded. If "G114.1 H2 D-1 R∗∗∗ ;" is commanded in this case,
the phase shift amount will not be calculated correctly.
(13) When the spindle synchronization commands are being issued with the PLC I/F method
(#1300 ext36/bit7 OFF), a program error (P610) will occur if the spindle synchronization
control is commanded with G114.1/G113.

172
 10. Spindle Functions
10.8 Spindle synchronization control II

10.8 Spindle synchronization control II

Function and purpose

In a machine having two or more spindles, this function controls the rotation speed and phase of
one spindle (synchronous spindle) in synchronization with the rotation of the other spindle (basic
spindle).
The function is used if a workpiece grasped by the basic spindle is to be grasped by a synchronous
spindle, or if the spindle rotation speed has to be changed when one workpiece is grasped by both
spindles.
Selection of the synchronized spindle and synchronization start, etc., are all designated from the
PLC.

Basic spindle and synchronous spindle selection

Select the basic spindle and synchronous spindle for synchronization control from the PLC.
Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation
R446 Basic spindle – Select a serially connected spindle to be
selection controlled as the basic spindle.
(0: 1st spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3:
3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle
(Note 1) Spindle synchronization control will
not take place if a spindle not
connected in serial is selected.
(Note 2) If "0" is designated, the 1st spindle will
be controlled as the basic spindle.
R447 Synchronous – Select a serially connected spindle to be
spindle controlled as the synchronous spindle.
selection (0: 2nd spindle), 1: 1st spindle, 2: 2nd spindle, 3:
3rd spindle, 4: 4th spindle
(Note 3) Spindle synchronization control will
not take place if a spindle not
connected in serial is selected or if the
same spindle as the basic spindle is
selected.
(Note 4) If "0" is designated, the 2nd spindle
will be controlled as the synchronous
spindle.

173
10. Spindle Functions
10.8 Spindle synchronization control II

Starting spindle synchronization

The spindle synchronization control mode is entered by inputting the spindle synchronization
control signal (SPSYC). The synchronous spindle will be controlled in synchronization with the
rotation speed commanded for the basic spindle during the spindle synchronization control mode.
When the difference of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle rotation speeds reaches the
spindle synchronization rotation speed reach level setting value (#3050 sprlv), the spindle rotation
speed synchronization complete signal (FSPRV) will be output.
The synchronous spindle's rotation direction is designated with the spindle synchronization rotation
direction designation as the same as the basic spindle or the reverse direction.

Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation

Y398 Spindle SPSYC The spindle synchronization control mode is
synchronization entered when this signal turns ON.
control signal
X308 In spindle SPSYN1 This notifies that the mode is the spindle
synchronization synchronization control.
control
X309 Spindle rotation FSPRV This turns ON when the difference of the basic
speed spindle and synchronous spindle rotation
synchronization speeds reaches the spindle rotation speed
complete signal reach level setting value during the spindle
synchronization control mode.
This signal turns OFF when the spindle
synchronization control mode is canceled, or
when an error exceeding the spindle rotation
speed reach level setting value occurs during
the spindle synchronization control mode.
Y39A Spindle – Designate the basic spindle and synchronous
synchronization spindle rotation directions for spindle
rotation synchronization control.
direction 0: The synchronous spindle rotates in the
designation same direction as the basic spindle.
1: The synchronous spindle rotates in the
reverse direction of the basic spindle.

174
10. Spindle Functions
10.8 Spindle synchronization control II

Spindle phase alignment

Spindle phase synchronization starts when the spindle phase synchronization control signal
(SPPHS) is input during the spindle synchronization control mode. The spindle phase
synchronization complete signal is output when the spindle synchronization phase reach level
setting value (#3051 spplv) is reached.
The synchronous spindle's phase shift amount can also be designated from the PLC.
Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation
Y399 Spindle phase SPPHS Spindle phase synchronization starts when this
synchronization signal is turned ON during the spindle
control signal synchronization control mode.
(Note 1) If this signal is turned ON in a mode
other than the spindle synchronization
control mode, it will be ignored.
X30A Spindle phase FSPPH This signal is output when the spindle
synchronization synchronization phase reach level is reached
complete signal after starting spindle phase synchronization.
R448 Phase shift – Designate the synchronous spindle's phase shift
amount setting amount.
Unit: 360°/4096

Spindle synchronization
control signal (Y398)

In spindle synchronization
control signal (X308)
(Note 2)
Spindle synchronization
complete signal (X309)

Spindle phase synchronization

control signal (Y399)

Spindle phase synchronization

complete signal (X30A)

Spindle phase
synchronization complete ON
Spindle phase Spindle synchronization
synchronization control ON control OFF
Spindle synchronization
complete ON
Spindle synchronization Spindle synchronization
control ON control OFF

(Note 2) Turns OFF temporarily to change the rotation speed during phase synchronization.

175
10. Spindle Functions
10.8 Spindle synchronization control II
Calculating the spindle synchronization phase shift amount and requesting phase offset

The spindle phase shift amount calculation function obtains and saves the phase difference of the
basic spindle and synchronous spindle by turning the PLC signal ON during spindle
synchronization. When calculating the spindle phase shift, the synchronous spindle can be rotated
with the handle, so the relation of the phases between the spindles can also be adjusted visually.
If the spindle phase synchronization control signal is input while the phase offset request signal
(SSPHF) is ON, the phases will be aligned using the position shifted by the saved phase shift
amount as a reference.
This makes aligning of the phases easier when re-grasping profile materials.
Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation
Y39B Phase shift SSPHM If spindle synchronization is carried out while
calculation this signal is ON, the phase difference of the
request basic spindle and synchronous spindle will be
obtained and saved.
Y39C Phase offset SSPHF If spindle phase synchronization is carried out
request while this signal is ON, the phases will be
aligned using the position shifted by the saved
phase shift amount as a basic position.
R474 Phase – The delay of the synchronous spindle in
difference respect to the basic spindle is output.
output Unit: 360°/4096
(Note 1) If either the basic spindle or
synchronous spindle has not
passed through the Z phase, etc.,
and the phase cannot be calculated,
–1 will be output.
(Note 2) This data is output only while
calculating the phase shift or during
spindle phase synchronization.
R490 Phase offset – The phase difference saved with phase shift
data calculation is output.
Unit: 360°/4096
(Note 3) This data is output only during
spindle synchronization control.

Phase shift calculation

request (Y39B)

Spindle synchronization
control signal (Y398)

In spindle synchronization
control signal (X308)

Spindle synchronization
complete signal (X309)

The phase difference in this interval is

saved.
(The synchronous spindle can be
controlled with the handle.)
Spindle synchronization Spindle synchronization
control ON control OFF
Phase shift calculation Phase shift calculation
request ON request OFF

(Note 4) The phases cannot be aligned while calculating the phase shift.
(Note 5) The synchronous spindle cannot be rotated with the handle when the manual operation
mode is set to the handle mode.

176
10. Spindle Functions
10.8 Spindle synchronization control II

Chuck close signal

The synchronous spindle side carries out droop compensation while the chuck is opened, and
aligns itself with the basic spindle. However, when the chuck is closed, the droop compensation is
added, and the synchronization error with the base increases. Droop compensation is prevented
with the chuck close signal and the position where the chuck is grasped is maintained with position
compensation.
Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation
Y2E9 Chuck close – This turns ON when the chuck is closed. When
signal this signal turns ON, the compensation
between the basic spindle and synchronous
spindle will change from droop compensation
to position compensation.
X30E Chuck close – This turns ON when the chuck close signal is
confirmation received during the spindle synchronization
signal control mode.

Chuck open
Basic spindle chuck Chuck close Chuck close confirmation Chuck open
Chuck close
Synchronous spindle chuck Chuck open confirmation Chuck close Chuck close

Spindle synchronization
control signal (Y398)

In spindle synchronization
control signal (X308)

Spindle synchronization
complete signal (X309)

Chuck close (Y2E9)

Error temporary cancel

(Y39D)
Error canceled

(Note 1) Use the error temporary cancel only when there is still an error between the spindle and
synchronization with the chuck close signal.

Error temporary cancel function

When spindle synchronization is carried out while grasping the workpiece with the basic spindle
and rotating, if the chuck is closed to grasp the workpiece with the synchronous spindle, the speed
will fluctuate due to external factors and an error will occur. If spindle synchronization is continued
without compensating this error, the workpiece will twist.
This torsion can be prevented by temporarily canceling this error.
Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation
Y39D Error temporary SPDRP0 The error is canceled when this signal is ON.
cancel signal

177
10. Spindle Functions
10.8 Spindle synchronization control II

Phase error monitor

The phase error can be monitored during spindle phase synchronization.

Device No. Signal name Abbrev. Explanation
R477 Phase error – The phase error during spindle phase
monitor synchronization control is output as a pulse
unit.
R478 Phase error – The lower limit value of the phase error during
monitor (lower spindle phase synchronization control is
limit value) output as a pulse unit.
R479 Phase error – The upper limit value of the phase error during
monitor (upper spindle phase synchronization control is
limit value) output as a pulse unit.

Multi-speed acceleration/deceleration

Up to eight steps of acceleration/deceleration time constants for spindle synchronization can be

selected according to the spindle rotation speed.

Rotation speed

Sptc3
(1) Time required from stopped state to sptc1 setting rotation
speed
spt ∗ (sptc1/maximum rotation speed)
Sptc2 (2) Time required from sptc1 to sptc2 setting rotation speed
spt ∗ ((sptc2–sptc1)/maximum rotation speed) ∗ spdiv1
(3) Time required from sptc2 to sptc3 setting rotation speed
spt ∗ ((sptc3–sptc2)/maximum rotation speed) ∗ spdiv2

Sptc1

Time

(1) (2) (3)

178
10. Spindle Functions
10.8 Spindle synchronization control II

Precautions and restrictions

(1) When carrying out spindle synchronization, a rotation command must be issued to both the
basic spindle and synchronous spindle. The synchronous spindle's rotation direction will follow
the basic spindle rotation direction and spindle synchronization rotation direction designation
regardless of whether a forward or reverse run command is issued.
(2) The spindle synchronization control mode will be entered even if the spindle synchronization
control signal is turned ON while the spindle rotation speed command is ON. However,
synchronous control will not actually take place. Synchronous control will start after the rotation
command has been issued to the basic spindle, and then the spindle synchronization complete
signal will be output.
(3) The spindle rotating with spindle synchronization control will stop when emergency stop is
applied.
(4) An operation error will occur if the spindle synchronization control signal is turned ON while the
basic spindle and synchronous spindle designations are illegal.
(5) The rotation speed clamp during spindle synchronization control will follow the smaller clamp
value set for the basic spindle or synchronous spindle.
(6) Orientation of the basic spindle and synchronous spindle is not possible during the spindle
synchronization. To carry out orientation, turn the spindle synchronization control signal OFF
first.
(7) The rotation speed command is invalid for the synchronous spindle during the spindle
synchronization. The commanded rotation speed will be validated after spindle
synchronization is canceled.
(8) The constant surface speed control is invalid for the synchronous spindle during the spindle
synchronization.
(9) If the phase offset request signal is turned ON before the phase shift is calculated and then
spindle phase synchronization is executed, the shift amount will not be calculated.
(10) The spindle Z-phase encoder position parameters are invalid when phase offset is carried out.
(11) If spindle phase synchronization is started while the phase shift calculation request signal is
ON, the error "M01 operation error 1106" will occur.
(12) Turn the phase shift calculation request signal ON when the basic spindle and synchronous
spindle are both stopped. If the phase shift calculation request signal is ON while either of the
spindles is rotating, the error "M01 operation error 1106" will occur.
(13) The phase shift amount saved in the NC is held until the next phase shift is calculated. (This
value is saved even when the power is turned OFF.)

179
 10. Spindle Functions
10.9 Tool-spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

10.9 Tool-spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle polygon machining); G114.2

Function and purpose

In a machine having a rotary tool controlled with a serial connection and having a spindle controlled
with a serial connection as the workpiece axis, polygon machining can be carried out by controlling
the workpiece axis rotation in synchronized with the rotation of the rotary tool axis.

The serial connection control of spindle and rotary tool axis can be carried out with MDS-∗-SP or
MDS-∗-SPJ2.

Command format

(1) Tool-spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle polygon machining) ON (G114.2)

This command sets the polygon machining mode that rotates the two axes in synchronized
with differing speeds by designating the rotary tool axis and workpiece axes and the rotation
ratio (No. of rotary tool gear teeth and No. of workpiece corners) of the two designated axes
(spindle and spindle).
G114.2 H_ D_ E_ L_ R_ ;
H_ Rotary tool axis
D_ Workpiece axis
E_ Rotary tool axis rotation ratio
L_ Workpiece axis rotation ratio
R_ Synchronous spindle phase shift amount

(2) Spindle synchronization cancel (G113)

This command cancels the synchronization state of rotating two spindles by the spindle
synchronization command.
G113 ;

Address Meaning of address Command range (unit) Remarks

H Rotary tool axis 1 to 2 • If a value other than 1 or 2 is commanded,
a program error (P35) will occur.
Of the two spindles, the 1: 1st spindle • If there is no command, a program error
spindle No. of the select 2: 2nd spindle (P33) will occur.
rotation axis. • If the same value as the D command is
commanded, a program error (P33) will
occur.
• If a spindle that is not serially connected is
selected, a program error (P33) will occur.

180
10. Spindle Functions
10.9 Tool-spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Address Meaning of address Command range (unit) Remarks

D Workpiece axis 1 to 2 • A program error (P35) will occur if a value
or −1 to −2 exceeding the command range is
Of the two spindles, 1: 1st spindle commanded.
select the spindle No. of 2: 2nd spindle • If there is no command, a program error
the workpiece axis. (P33) will occur.
• The rotation direction of the workpiece
axis in respect to the rotary tool axis is
commanded with the D sign.
• If the same value as the H command is
commanded, a program error (P33) will
occur.
• If a spindle that is not serially connected is
selected, a program error (P33) will occur.
E Rotary tool axis rotation 1 to 10 • A program error (P35) will occur if a value
ratio exceeding the command range is
Set the rotation ratio commanded.
(No. of rotary tool gear • If there is no command, the rotation ratio
teeth) of the rotary tool will be interpreted as 1.
axis.
L Workpiece axis rotation 1 to 999 • A program error (P35) will occur if a value
ratio exceeding the command range is
Set the rotation ratio commanded.
(No. of workpiece • If there is no command, the rotation ratio
corners) of the will be interpreted as 1.
workpiece axis.
R Synchronized spindle 0 to 359.999 (°) • A program error (P35) will occur if a value
phase shift amount exceeding the command range is
Set the shift amount commanded.
from the synchronized • The commanded shift amount is applied in
spindle's reference the clockwise direction of the spindle.
point (one rotation • The minimum resolution of the
signal). commanded shift amount is as follows.
For semi-closed
360/4096 (°)
For full closed
(360/4096) ∗ K (°)
K: Spindle and encoder gear ratio
• If there is no R command, phase
alignment will not be carried out.

181
10. Spindle Functions
10.9 Tool-spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Rotation axis and rotation direction

The rotary tool axis and workpiece axis rotation speed and rotation direction during spindle
synchronization IA (polygon machining) are as follows.

(1) The rotation speed and rotation direction of the rotary tool axis are the rotation speed
commanded with the S command and the rotation direction commanded with the M command,
etc., for the spindle selected as the rotary tool axis.
(2) The workpiece axis rotation speed is determined by the No. of rotary tool gear teeth and No. of
workpiece corners commanded with G114.2.
L
Sw = Sh ∗ E

Sw : Workpiece axis rotation speed (r/min)

Sh : Rotary tool axis rotation speed (r/min)
L : Rotary tool axis rotation ratio (No. of rotary tool gear teeth)
E : Workpiece axis rotation ratio (No. of workpiece corners)

(3) The workpiece axis rotation direction is determined by the sign of the address D commanded
with G114.2.
In other words, when the D sign is "+", the workpiece axis rotates in the same direction as the
rotary tool axis, and when "−", the workpiece axis rotates in the reverse direction of the rotary
tool axis.
(4) After spindle synchronization IA (polygon machining) is commanded, the relation of the rotary
tool axis and workpiece axis is held in all operation modes of automatic or manual modes until
spindle synchronization cancel (G113) is commanded or until the spindle synchronization
cancel signal is input.
Even during feed hold, the rotary tool axis and workpiece axis synchronization state is held.

Polygon machining when workpiece axis is spindle

When using the 1st or 2nd spindle as the workpiece axis, the workpiece axis will be controlled in
the following manner.

(1) When the spindle synchronization IA (polygon machining) mode is commanded, if neither a
forward run command nor a reverse run command is input for the workpiece axis, the
workpiece axis will not start rotating even if the polygon axis is rotating, and instead will wait for
synchronization.
If a forward run command or reverse run command is input for the workpiece axis in this state,
the workpiece axis will start rotation.
(2) If spindle stop is commanded (both forward run command and reverse run command are
turned OFF) in respect to the workpiece axis during the spindle synchronization IA (polygon
machining) mode, the workpiece axis rotation will stop even when the rotary tool axis is
rotating.
(3) The rotation command (S command) and constant surface speed control are invalid in respect
to the workpiece axis during the spindle synchronization IA (polygon machining) mode. Note
that the modal will be updated, so these will be effective after the spindle synchronization is
canceled.
(4) If a rotary tool axis rotation speed that exceeds the workpiece axis maximum rotation speed is
commanded, the rotary tool axis rotation speed will be clamped so that the workpiece axis
rotation speed does not exceed the workpiece axis maximum rotation speed.

182
10. Spindle Functions
10.9 Tool-spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Acceleration/deceleration control

(1) The rotary tool axis will accelerate or decelerate linearly with the spindle synchronization
acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt) of the spindle selected as the rotary tool axis.

Phase alignment control

(1) If the spindle synchronization control II (with R designation) is commanded with the G114.2
command, the synchronous spindle rotating at a random rotation speed will accelerate or
decelerate to the rotation speed following the basic spindle and synchronous spindle rotation
ratio command, and the spindle synchronization control state will be entered. After that, the
phase will be aligned to match the rotation phase commanded with the R address.
(2) The spindle synchronization phase shift amount is commanded as the shift amount from the
synchronous spindle's reference point (one rotation signal). There is no shift amount in respect
to the basic spindle.
(3) If the basic spindle's commanded rotation speed is changed during the spindle synchronization
control state, acceleration/deceleration will be carried out following the spindle acceleration/
deceleration set in the parameters while maintaining the synchronization state, and will reach the
commanded rotation speed.
(4) The following type of operation will take place.

M03 S1=0 ; ……Carries out forward run (speed command) 1st spindle
• (synchronous spindle)
Txx00 ; ……Rotary tool selection
M83 S2=500 ; ……Carries out forward run (speed command) 2nd spindle
• (basic spindle)
G114.2 H2 D1 E1 L5 ……Carries out forward run 1st spindle (synchronous spindle)
Rxx ; and synchronizes with 2nd spindle (basic spindle).
• Shifts synchronous spindle phase by amount of R command
• value.
G113 ; ……Cancels spindle synchronization

183
10. Spindle Functions
10.9 Tool-spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

<Operation>
Rotation
speed Basic spindle
Synchronous spindle
600

500

400

300

200

100 Phase
alignment

No. 1 spindle (synchronous spindle)

forward run synchronization Time
No. 2 spindle (basic spindle) forward run
Cancels Spindle
No. 1 spindle (synchronous spindle) forward run synchronization

184
10. Spindle Functions
10.9 Tool-spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Example of program

•
•
•
M03 S1=0 ; 1st spindle forward run
Txx00 ; Rotary tool selection
M83 S2=500 ; 2nd spindle forward run
G00 X40.Z-5. ;

G114.2 H2 D1 E1 L10 R0 ; Spindle synchronization II (polygon machining

mode) ON
Rotary tool axis : 2nd spindle
Workpiece axis : 1st spindle
No. of rotary tool gear teeth : 1
Rotation ratio : No. of workpiece corners as 10
Synchronous spindle phase shift amount : 0°
At S1 forward run, rotation in synchronized with
S2 starts.
The phase is aligned with shift amount 0°.
The S1 rotation speed is 50 r/min (S2:S1 = 10:1).

G99 ; Synchronous feed mode selection

G00 X18. ;
G01 Z20. F0.1 ; 1st cut in
G00 X40. ; Z axis feedrate is 0.1mm per workpiece axis rotation
Z-5. ;
•
•
•

G00 X14. ;
G01 Z20. F0.1 ; Final cut in
G00 X40. ; Z axis feedrate is 0.1mm per workpiece axis rotation
Z-5. ;

G113 ; Spindle synchronization cancel

M85 ; 2nd spindle stop
M05 ; 1st spindle stop
•
•
•

185
10. Spindle Functions
10.9 Tool-spindle synchronization IA (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Precautions for programming

(1) The axis address (X, Z, C) command in the same block as G114.2 will be ignored.
ex. G114.2 X_ ;
Ignored.
(2) If a modal is commanded in the same block as G114.2, the modal will be updated.
ex. G114.2 G01 ;
The group 01 modal is set to G01.
(3) If a miscellaneous command (M, S, T) is commanded in the same block as G114.2, the
miscellaneous command will be executed simultaneously with the change to the rotary tool
machining mode.
ex. G114.2 M03 ;
M03 is executed simultaneously with G114.2.
(4) If there is a group 00 G code command in the same block as G114.2, the G code commanded
last in the block will have the priority.
ex. G114.2 G4 P30 ;
G4 P30. is executed.

Precautions and Restrictions

(1) Restrictions regarding phase alignment control

(a) Make sure that the rotation ratio of spindle (and rotary tool spindle) actual rotation speed
and encoder rotation speed has the following relation.

Spindle rotation speed/encoder rotation speed = n ("n" is an integer of 1 or more)

If this relation is not established, the encoder reference point will not stay at a constant
position of the spindle, and thus the phase (position) will deviate with each phase
alignment command.
Note that even in this case, if the No. of rotary tool gear teeth (No. of workpiece corners) is
equivalent to the rotation ratio, the blade and workpiece phase (position) will not deviate.
(Following relation)

(Rotary tool spindle rotation speed ∗ No. of rotary tool gear teeth) /
encoder rotation speed = n ("n" is an integer of 1 or more)

(b) During phase alignment control, phase alignment is carried out following each spindle
encoder's reference point, so if the positional relation of the workpiece and reference point
(rotary tool and reference point) deviates when the power is turned OFF/ON or when the
tool is changed, etc., the phase will deviate.

(2) If S is commanded in the same block as G114.2, the synchronization speed will be created at
the previous S command until the S command ends, so the spindle speed may fluctuate
momentarily. Thus, do not command S in the same block if possible.

186
 10. Spindle Functions
10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining); G51.2

(Only 6 and 7 in G code system)
Function and purpose

In machines having a serial connection-controlled workpiece axis, and furthermore having a serial
connection-controlled spindle as a rotary tool axis, spindle-spindle polygon machining can be
carried out by controlling the rotation of the rotary tool axis rotation in synchronization with the
workpiece axis.
If parameter #1501 is set to a value other than 0, polygon machining takes place, and if set to 0,
spindle-spindle polygon machining takes place.
The workpiece axis and rotary tool axis can be serially connected and controlled with MDS-∗-SP or
MDS-∗-SPJ2.

Command format

(1) Polygon machining mode command

This command designates the rotary tool axis and workpiece axis, and enters the polygon
machining mode that enables synchronized rotation of two axes at differing speeds. It does
this by designating the rotation ratio (number of rotary tool teeth and workpiece corners) of the
two designated axes (spindle and spindle).
G51.2 H_ D_ P_ Q_ R_ ; Tool-spindle synchronization IB
(spindle-spindle polygon machining mode) ON
H Rotary tool axis selection
D Workpiece axis selection
P Rotary tool axis rotation ratio designation
Q Workpiece axis rotation ratio designation
R Synchronous spindle phase shift amount

(2) Polygon machining mode cancel command

The synchronous state of the two spindles rotating in synchronization with the tool-spindle
synchronization command is canceled.
G50.2 ; Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining
mode) OFF

The spindle-spindle polygon machining mode is also canceled in the following cases.
• Power OFF
• Emergency stop
• Reset (reset 1, reset 2, reset & rewind)
(only when #1239 set11/bit3 = 1)
• Spindle-spindle polygon machining cancel signal

187
 10. Spindle Functions
10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Address Meaning of address Command range (unit) Remarks

H Workpiece axis selection 1 to number of spindles • A program error (P35) will occur if a
Command the spindle value exceeding the command range is
number of the workpiece commanded.
axis. • A program error (P33) will occur if the
same value as the D command is
commanded.
• A program error (P33) will occur if a
spindle not serially connected is
commanded.
• The spindle number set in the
parameters will be applied if omitted.
D Rotary tool axis selection 1 to number of spindles • A program error (P35) will occur if a
Command the spindle value exceeding the command range is
number of the rotary tool commanded.
axis. • A program error (P33) will occur if the
same value as the H command is
commanded.
• A program error (P33) will occur if a
spindle not serially connected is
commanded.
• The spindle number set in the
parameters will be applied if omitted.
P Workpiece axis rotation 1 to 999 • A program error (P35) will occur if a
ratio designation value exceeding the command range is
Command the workpiece commanded.
axis rotation ratio
(number of workpiece
corners).
Q Rotary tool axis rotation 1 to 999 • A program error (P35) will occur if a
ratio designation –1 to –999 value exceeding the command range is
Command the rotary tool commanded.
axis rotation ratio • If a negative sign is commanded, the
(number of tool teeth). rotary tool axis will rotate in the direction
opposite the workpiece axis.
R Synchronous spindle 0 to 359.999 • A program error (P35) will occur if a
phase shift amount (° ) value exceeding the command range is
designation commanded.
Command the shift • The commanded shift amount will be
amount from the applied in the clockwise direction in
reference point (one respect to the spindle.
rotation signal) of the • The commanded shift amount's
rotary tool axis spindle. minimum resolution is as follows:
For semi-closed
360/4096 (° )
For full closed
(360/4096) ∗ K (° )
K: Spindle and encoder gear ratio
• If there is no R command, the phase will
be handled as R0.
(#1239 set11/bit4=0)

188
10. Spindle Functions
10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Rotation and rotation direction

The workpiece axis and rotary tool axis rotation speed and rotation direction during spindle-
spindle polygon machining are as follows.

(1) The workpiece axis rotation speed and rotation direction are rotation speed commanded with
the S command and the rotation direction commanded with the M command, etc., for the
spindle selected as the workpiece axis.
(2) The rotary tool axis rotation speed is determined by the number of rotary tool teeth and number
of workpiece corners commanded with G51.2.

Sw = Sh ∗ Q
P
Sw : Rotary tool axis rotation speed (r/min)
Sh : Workpiece axis rotation speed (r/min)
P : Workpiece axis rotation ratio (number of workpiece corners)
Q : Rotary tool axis rotation ratio (number of rotary tool teeth)
(3) The rotary tool axis rotation direction is determined by the sign of the rotary tool axis selection
Q commanded with G51.2.
If the Q sign is "+", the rotary tool axis will rotate in the same direction as the workpiece axis. If
the Q sign is "–", the rotary tool axis will rotate in the direction opposite the workpiece axis.
(4) After spindle-spindle polygon machining is commanded, the relation of the workpiece axis and
rotary tool axis rotation is held until spindle-spindle polygon machining cancel (G50.2) is
commanded, the spindle-spindle polygon machining cancel signal is input, or until the reset or
emergency stop signal is input.
The workpiece axis and rotary tool axis synchronization states are held even at feed hold.

Polygon machining with rotary tool axis

(1) When the spindle-spindle polygon machining mode is commanded, even if neither the forward
run nor reverse run command is input for the rotary tool axis, the rotary tool axis will start
rotating.
(2) If spindle stop is commanded to a rotary tool axis during the spindle-spindle polygon
machining mode (when the spindle stop signal is ON), the rotary tool axis will stop rotating
even if the workpiece axis is rotating.
(3) The rotation speed command (S command) and constant surface speed control are invalid for
the rotary tool axis during the spindle-spindle polygon machining mode. Note that the modal is
updated, so these will be validated when the spindle-spindle polygon machining is canceled.
(4) If a workpiece axis rotation speed that exceeds the rotary tool axis's maximum rotation speed
is commanded, the workpiece axis rotation speed will be clamped so that the rotary tool axis
rotation does not exceed the rotary tool axis's maximum rotation speed.

189
10. Spindle Functions
10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Acceleration/deceleration control

(1) Acceleration/deceleration of the workpiece axis will be carried out linearly according to the
spindle synchronization acceleration/deceleration time constant (spt) of the spindle selected as
the workpiece axis.
(2) By setting the spindle synchronization multi-speed acceleration/deceleration time constant
changeover speed (spdct1 to 7) and the scale for the time constant changeover speed (spddiv
1 to 7), the acceleration/deceleration time can be changed in up to eight steps.
(3) If the workpiece axis command rotation speed is changed during the spindle synchronization
control state, the commanded speed will be reached by accelerating or decelerating according
to the spindle acceleration/deceleration set in the parameters while maintaining the
synchronized state.

Phase alignment control

(1) If the spindle-spindle polygon command (R=0 with no R command) is commanded with G51.2,
the synchronous spindle rotating at a random rotation speed will accelerate/
decelerate to the rotation speed following the rotation ratio command of the workpiece axis
spindle and rotary tool spindle. The spindles will then enter the spindle synchronous control
state. After that, the phases will be aligned to realize the rotation phase commanded with the R
address.
(2) The spindle synchronization phase shift amount commands the shift amount from the rotary
tool axis spindle's reference point (one rotation signal). This is not the shift amount for the
workpiece axis.

190
10. Spindle Functions
10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

(3) Operation takes place in the following manner.

<Program example 1> With phase error (#1239 set11/bit4=0)

.
Txx00 ; Select rotary tool
M03 S100 ; Forward rotate 1st spindle (workpiece axis) (speed command)
.
G51.2 H1 D3 P1 Q5 Rxx ; Spindle-spindle polygon command, synchronize 3rd spindle
. (rotary tool axis) to 1st spindle (workpiece axis spindle) with
. forward run. Shift synchronous spindle's phase by R command
value.
.
G50.2 ;
Cancel spindle-spindle polygon mode

<Operation>

Rotation speed
Workpiece axis
Rotary tool axis
600

Phase alignment Spindle synchronization

500 cancel

400
Synchronization complete

300
3rd spindle (rotary tool axis) forward run
synchronization

200

100

1st axis (workpiece axis) forward run synchronization

Time
G51.2 command spindle-spindle polygon machining start
3rd spindle (rotary tool axis) forward run

1st spindle (workpiece axis) forward run

191
10. Spindle Functions
10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

<Program example 2> No phase error (#1239 set11/bit4=1)

.
Txx00 ; Select rotary tool
M03 S100 ; Forward rotate 1st spindle (workpiece axis) (speed command)
.
G51.2 H1 D3 P1 Q5 ; Spindle-spindle polygon command, synchronize 3rd spindle
. (rotary tool axis) to 1st spindle (workpiece axis spindle) with
. forward run.
.
G50.2 ; Cancel spindle-spindle polygon mode

<Operation>

Rotation speed
Workpiece axis
Rotary tool axis
600

Synchronization complete Spindle synchronization

500 cancel

400

300
3rd spindle (rotary tool axis) forward run
synchronization

200

100

1st spindle (workpiece axis) forward run synchronization

Time
G51.2 command spindle-spindle polygon machining start
3rd spindle (rotary tool axis) forward run

1st spindle (workpiece axis) forward run

192
10. Spindle Functions
10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Example of program

.
.
.
Txx00 ; .......................................Select rotary tool
M03 S500 ; .................................1st spindle forward run
G00 X40. Z-5. ;

G51.2 H1 D3 P1 Q3 R0 ; ............Spindle-spindle polygon machining mode ON

Select 1st spindle as workpiece axis and 3rd spindle as rotary
tool axis
Designate rotation ratio as one workpiece corner and three rotary
tool teeth
Designate rotary tool axis spindle phase shift amount as 0°.
Start synchronous rotation of S3 to S1 with forward run.
Align phases with 0° shift amount.
S3 rotation speed is 1500 r/min (S1:S3=1:3)

G99 ; ........................................Select synchronous feed mode

G00 X18. ;
G01 Z20. F0.1 ; ......................If synchronization is not completed, wait to start cutting feed
G00 X40. ; 1st cut
Z-5. ;
.
.
.
.
G00 X14. ;
G01 Z20.F0.1 ; .......................Final cut
G00 X40. ;
Z-5. ;

G50.2 ; ........................................Cancel spindle-spindle polygon machining

Stop 3rd spindle

M05 ; ........................................Stop 1st spindle

.
.
.

193
10. Spindle Functions
10.10 Tool-spindle synchronization IB (spindle-spindle polygon machining)

Cautions for programming

(1) Always command G51.2 and G50.2 in independent blocks.

(2) The R command can be omitted when entering the spindle-spindle polygon mode, but the P
and Q commands must always be issued. Failure to do so will cause a program error (P33).
(3) To change the P, Q or R modal value while in the spindle-spindle polygon mode, command
G51.2 again. In this case, R can be commanded independently. However, if either P or Q is
also changed, always command P and Q again.
(4) Commands can be issued to each system, but two systems cannot be used simultaneously.
The system commanded first will be valid, and the operation error 1005 will occur for that
commanded last.
(5) The spindle number designated in the parameters will be used if D_H_ is omitted from the
G51.2 command.
(6) A program error (P610) will occur if the workpiece axis number (#1518) and rotary tool axis
number (#1519) are the same as the value set in the parameters. Program error (P33) will
occur if the spindle is not serially connected.
(7) The cutting feed block will not start until synchronization is established after the G51.2
command. (Operation will stop with the operation error 1033.)

Precautions and restrictions

(1) Limits to phase alignment control

(a) Make sure that the spindle (and workpiece spindle) actual rotation speed and encoder
rotation speed's rotation ratio has the following relation.
Spindle rotation speed/encoder rotation speed = n (n is an integer higher than 1)
If this relation is not established, the encoder's reference point will not be set at a set
spindle position. Thus, the phase (position) will deviate each time the phase alignment
command is executed.
Note that even in this case, if the number of workpiece corners (number of rotary tool
teeth) corresponds to the rotation ratio, the phase (position) of the blade and workpiece
will not deviate. (Following relation)
(Workpiece spindle rotation speed ∗ number of workpiece teeth)/
encoder rotation speed = n (n is an integer higher than 1)
(b) During phase alignment control, the phases are aligned to the reference point of each
spindle's encoder. Thus, if the positional relation of the workpiece and reference point
(workpiece and reference point) deviates when the power is turned ON/OFF or the tool is
replaced, etc., the phase will deviate.

194
 10. Spindle Functions
10.11 Tool-spindle synchronization IC (spindle-NC axis polygon machining)

10.11 Tool-spindle synchronization IC (spindle-NC axis polygon machining);

G51.2 (Only 6 and 7 in G code system)
Function and purpose

This function carries out polygon machining by controlling the workpiece (spindle) and tool axis
(NC servo axis) to rotate in synchronization at the commanded ratio.

Command format

(1) Polygon machining mode ON

G51.2 P_Q_ ; Spindle synchronization start (Start of polygon machining mode)
P,Q Spindle and rotary tool axis rotation ratio (P_:Q_)
P : Spindle
Q : Rotary tool axis
Command range : Integer value between 1 and 9, –1 and –9

The rotation direction is designated with a sign.

(+) : Forward rotation
(–) : Reverse rotation

(2) Polygon machining mode OFF

G50.2 ; Spindle synchronization cancel (Polygon machining mode cancel)

Explanation of operation

Program Operation
S1000 ; The spindle rotation speed (workpiece rotation speed) is commanded
G51.2 P1 Q2 ; The polygon machining mode is entered with the G51.2 command.
The spindle and rotary tool axis start rotating, and control is applied so
that the spindle rotation speed and tool axis rotation speed are the
commanded ratio
(P:Q).
Cutting into
workpiece

G50.2 ; The polygon machining mode between the spindle and rotary tool axis is
canceled by the G50.2 command, and the spindle and rotary tool axis
rotation stop.
The rotary tool axis is designated with the base specifications parameters "#1501 polyax".

Canceling the polygon machining mode

The polygon machining mode is canceled in the following cases.

• G50.2 command
• Power OFF
• Emergency stop
• Reset (Reset 1, Reset 2, Reset & Rewind)

195
10. Spindle Functions
10.11 Tool-spindle synchronization IC (spindle-NC axis polygon machining)

Rotation direction

(1) The spindle rotation direction during the polygon machining mode is determined by the P
command sign and the spindle parameter "#3393 SP193(SPECT)/bit 4 :command polarity".
P command sign #3393 SP193/bit 4 Rotation direction
(+) 0 CW
(+) 1 CCW
(–) 0 CCW
(–) 1 CW

(2) The rotation direction of the rotary tool axis during the polygon machining mode is determined by
the Q command sign and the base specifications parameters "#1018 CCW".
Q command sign #1018 CCW Rotation direction
(+) 0 CW
(+) 1 CCW
(–) 0 CCW
(–) 1 CW

Example of program

An example of the program is shown below.

N10 G00 X100. Z20. ; Positioning
N20 S1000 ; Spindle (workpiece) rotation speed command
N30 G51.2 P1 Q2 ; Spindle/tool axis rotation start
(Spindle rotation speed 1000 [r/min], tool axis rotation speed 2000
[r/min])
N40 G01 X80. F10. ; X axis cut in
N50 G04 X2. ; Dwell
N60 G00 X100. ; X axis retract
N70 G50.2 ; Spindle/tool axis rotation stop
(Note) Always command G51.2 and G50.2 in independent blocks.

196
10. Spindle Functions
10.11 Tool-spindle synchronization IC (spindle-NC axis polygon machining)

Precautions

(1) The "spindle synchronization (polygon machining)" specifications must be provided to use this
function.
If G51.2 or G50.2 is commanded without the specifications, the program error (P39) will occur.
(2) Always command G51.2 and G50.2 in independent blocks.
• If the G51.2 (G50.2) command and group 0 G code are commanded in the same block, the
G code commanded last in the block will have the priority.
• If the G51.2 (G50.2) command and G code other than a group 0 code are commanded in
the same block, the program error (P33) will occur.
(3) While in the polygon machining mode, a movement command cannot be issued in the
machining program for a servo axis set as the rotary tool axis.
If a movement command is issued to the rotary tool axis during the polygon machining mode,
the program error (P32) will occur.
(4) The servo axis set as the rotary tool axis can be used as a feed axis in modes other than the
polygon machining mode.
(5) The following functions are invalid for the rotary tool axis during the polygon machining mode.
• Override
• Feed hold
• Stored stroke limit
(6) The spindle rotation speed can be changed with the S command even during the polygon
machining mode.
The spindle override and spindle rotation speed clamp are also valid.
If the spindle rotation speed is changed, the rotary tool axis rotation speed will also change so
that the spindle and rotary tool axis establish the P:Q ratio.
(7) The forward run/reverse run commands are invalid for the spindle during the polygon
machining mode.
(8) If the feedrate for the rotary tool axis exceeds the rapid traverse rate (axis specifications
parameters "#2001 rapid") during the polygon machining mode, the speed will be clamped at
the rapid traverse rate. If the rotary tool axis is clamped at the rapid traverse rate, the spindle
speed will also be set to lower than the command speed so that the spindle and rotary tool axis
establish the P:Q ratio.
(9) The position loop gain for the rotary tool axis will be the value set in the axis specifications
parameters "#2017 tap_g" during the polygon machining mode. The position loop gain for the
spindle will be the spindle parameters "#3209 PGT" setting value.
(10) The following functions cannot be used simultaneously with polygon machining.
• Synchronous tap
• Thread cutting
(11) If an axis other than the rotary tool axis reaches the stroke end during the polygon machining
mode, the axis other than the rotary tool axis will stop moving, but the rotary tool axis and
spindle rotation will not stop.
(12) If the rotary tool axis reaches the stroke end during the polygon machining mode, the rotary
tool axis and spindle rotation will stop, and the movement of axes other than the rotary tool axis
will also stop.
(13) By setting the spindle parameters "#3393 SP193(SPECT)/bitE: Position control switch type" to
"0", the polygon machining will start after the spindle returns to the zero point.

197
 10. Spindle Functions
10.12 Multiple spindle control

10.12 Multiple spindle control

Function and purpose

Multiple spindle control is a function used to control the sub-spindle in a machine tool that has a
main spindle (1st spindle) and a sub-spindle (2nd spindle to 4th spindle).
The spindle control method differs between multiple spindle control I and multiple spindle control II.
Whether to use multiple spindle control I or multiple spindle control II depends on the parameter
(#1300 ext36/bit0) setting.

Multiple spindle control I: Control following the spindle selection

(ext36/bit0 = 0) command (G43.1, etc.) and spindle control
command ([S∗∗∗∗∗ ;] or [S =∗∗∗∗∗ ;]), etc.
Multiple spindle control II: Control following the external signal (spindle
(ext36/bit0 = 1) command selection signal, spindle selection
signal) and spindle control command
([S∗∗∗∗∗ ;] only), etc.
The spindle selection command [S =∗∗∗∗∗ ;]
cannot be used.

Tool spindle
(3rd spindle)

2nd spindle
1st spindle

Turret
1

198
 10. Spindle Functions
10.12 Multiple spindle control

10.12.1 Multiple spindle control I (multiple spindle command)

Function and purpose

In addition to the S∗∗∗∗∗ command, the 1st to 4th spindles can be identified and commanded with
the S =∗∗∗∗∗ command.

Command format

S =∗∗∗∗∗ ;
Designate the spindle number with one numeric character (1: 1st
spindle/2: 2nd spindle/3: 3rd spindle/4: 4th spindle). A variable can be
designated.
∗∗∗∗∗ Rotation speed or constant surface speed command. A variable can be
designated.
(Note 1) A program error (P35) will occur if the value is not 1 to 4.
(Note 2) A program error (P33) will occur if G47.1 is issued in a modal.

Detailed description

(1) Each spindle command is delimited by the details of .

(Example)
S1 = 3500 ; 1st spindle 3500(r/min) command
S2 = 1500 : 2nd spindle 1500(r/min) command
(2) Multiple spindles can be commanded in one block.
(3) If two or more commands are issued to the same spindle in a block, the command issued last
will be valid.
(Example) S1 = 3500 S1 = 3600 S1 = 3700 ; S1 = 3700 will be valid.
(4) The S∗∗∗∗∗ command and S =∗∗∗∗∗ command can be used together.
The spindle targeted for the S∗∗∗∗∗ command is delimited by the spindle selection command.

When G44.1 spindle No. is 2

1st spindle 2nd spindle
control mode control mode
System 1
Execution program S1=200 S2=400 G43.1 S300 S2=100 S=100 G44.1 S300 S1=500

1st spindle

Rotation speed 200r/min 300r/min 100r/min 500r/min

2nd spindle
400r/min 100r/min 300r/min
Rotation speed

(5) The commands for each spindle can be commanded from the machining program for either
system 1 or system 2.

199
 10. Spindle Functions
10.12 Multiple spindle control

10.12.2 Multiple spindle control I (spindle selection command)

Function and purpose

The following S commands (S∗∗∗∗) can be changed for the 1st spindle to 4th spindle by issuing the
spindle selection command (G43.1, etc. [G group 20]).

Command format

G43.1; 1st spindle control mode ON

G44.1; Selected spindle control mode ON (Selected spindle No. is set with
SnG44.1)
G47.1; All spindles simultaneous control mode ON

Detailed description

(1) The selected spindle No. is set with the parameter (#1534 SnG44.1).
(2) The spindle selection commands are modal G codes.
(3) A program error (P33) will occur if the spindle selection command is issued while the multiple
spindle control II mode is valid.
(4) The spindle control mode entered when the power is turned ON or reset can be set with the
parameters for each system. The state when the power is turned ON or reset is as follows.
G group 20 modal state Set with setup parameter "#1199 Sselect".
0:G43.1
1:G44.1
2:G47.1
G44.1 spindle No. Set with setup parameter "#1534 SnG44.1".
0:2nd spindle
1:1st spindle
2:2nd spindle
3:3rd spindle
4:4th spindle

(5) If the S command is issued in the same block as the spindle selection command, it will be valid
for the spindle switched to with the spindle selection command.
Example)
G43.1 S100 ; → Command 100 rotations for 1st spindle
S200 G44.1 S300 ; → After commanding 200 rotations for 1st spindle, command
(SnG44.1=2) 300 rotations for 2nd spindle

(6) If a spindle that does not exist is set, the 2nd spindle will be used. Note that if there is only one
spindle, the 1st spindle will be used.

200
10. Spindle Functions
10.12 Multiple spindle control

(7) Commands can be issued from either system 1 or system 2.

When G44.1 spindle No. is 2

In G43.1 mode
System 1 Execution G97 S1000 S2000 G44.1 S500 G43.1 S3000 S2=3000
program

1st spindle control 2nd spindle 1st spindle control 2nd spindle
control control
In G43.1 mode
System 2 Execution G96 S200 S100 G44.1 S300 S1=1000
program

1st spindle control 2nd spindle 1st spindle

control control

1st spindle Rotation

speed 1000r/min 2000r/min 200m/min 100m/min 3000r/min 1000r/min

Rotation 500r/min 300m/min 3000r/min

2nd spindle
speed

Relation with other functions

The following functions change after the spindle selection command.

(1) S command (S∗∗∗∗∗)
The S command in G97 (rotation speed command)/G96 (constant surface speed command) will
be the command for the spindle designated with the spindle selection command.
(2) Spindle clamp speed command
The spindle clamp speed command issued with G92 S_Q_ will also follow the spindle
selection command mode.
(3) Per rotation command (synchronous feed)
Even if F is commanded in the G95 mode, the per rotation feedrate for the spindle designated
with the spindle selection command will be applied.
(4) Constant surface speed control spindle changeover
The constant surface speed control will also follow the spindle selection command mode.

If spindle other than the current mode is commanded with S =∗∗∗∗∗, the spindle rotation
speed command designated with will have the priority.
(Example)
S2=∗∗∗∗ in G43 system mode .......................................2nd spindle rotation speed
command
S1=∗∗∗∗ in G44 system 2nd spindle selection mode ....1st spindle rotation speed
command
Note that the constant surface speed command in the constant surface speed control (G96)
will be modal information independent from the rotation speed command.
When G44.1 spindle No. is 2
System 1
Execution S1=200 S2=300 G43.1 G90 G0 X100. G96 S300 G01 X50. F200 G97 G44.1 G96 S300 G01 X20. F200 G97
program

1st spindle
Rotation speed 200r/min 300m/min 300×1000/(50×3.14)r/min

2nd spindle
Rotation speed 300r/min 300m/min 300×1000/(20×3.14)r/min

201
10. Spindle Functions
10.12 Multiple spindle control

Spindle control rights

If the constant surface speed control, S command and spindle related M command are
commanded randomly from each system to one spindle, the spindle may not operate correctly. For
example, if S is commanded (per minute feed) during constant surface speed control with system 1,
the rotation speed will not change from the system 1 side, and the actual rotation speed will relay
on system 2 from which S was commanded last. These commands must be commanded from only
one system, or commanded simultaneously while using standby, etc.

After this, system 1 will machine

S200 even if it appears to be S100

System 1 Execution ...

program G43.1 G0 X50. S100 G01 X10.

1st spindle 0r/min 100r/min 200r/min

rotation speed

1st spindle System 1 System 2

control rights

System 2 Execution G43.1 G0 X50. G01 X30. S200 G01 X10. ...
program

[Spindle control rights transfer conditions] When G44.1 spindle No. is 2

(1) The system that commanded the S command last has the spindle control rights.

System 1 Execution G43.1 G97 S1000 G44.1 S500 G43.1 S3000 S2=3000
program

System 2 Execution G43.1 G0 X50. G96 S200 S100 G44.1 S300 S1=1000
program

1st spindle System 1 System 2 System System 2

control rights 1

2nd spindle System 1 System 2 System 1

control rights

(2) If different S commands are executed simultaneously in both systems, system 2 will have the
priority. In addition, system 2 will have the control rights.

System 1 Execution G43.1 S300 S100 ...

program

1st spindle
rotation speed 200r/min 300r/min 200r/min

1st spindle System 1 System 2 System 1 System 2

control rights

System 2 Execution G43.1 S200 ... S200 ...

program

202
 10. Spindle Functions
10.12 Multiple spindle control

10.12.3 Multiple spindle control II

Function and purpose

Multiple spindle control II is a function that designates which spindle to select with the signals from
PLC. The command is issued to the spindle with one S command.

Detailed description

(1) Spindle command selection, spindle selection

The S command to the spindle is output as the rotation speed command to the selected
spindle when the spindle selection signal (SWS) from the PLC turns ON. The selected spindle
rotates at the output rotation speed. The spindle whose selection is canceled when the spindle
selection signal (SWS) turns OFF maintains the speed at which it was rotating at before being
canceled. This allows each axis to be simultaneously rotated at differing rotation speeds. The
spindle command selection signal is used to determine which system each spindle receives
the S command from.

PLC side Spindle enable

Spindle command Spindle
selection selection Spindle X2C8
Spindle rotation Spindle rotation stop 1st spindle
R110 Y350 speed input speed output
Y294
R8/9 R108/109
SWS
PLC side U148
R310 2nd spindle
W1D0
W114
R208/209 R308/309
SWS
S command $1 PLC side I300
S command $2 3rd spindle
R4606 J600
S02C
R4500/450 R4600/460
SWS
PLC side I310
R4626 J610
4th spindle
S06C
R4520/452 R4620/462
SWS

Encoder selection
R124

Encoder input $1

Encoder input $2

R324

(Note) Refer to the PLC Interface Manual for details on each signal.

203
10. Spindle Functions
10.12 Multiple spindle control

Relation with other functions

(1) Spindle clamp speed setting (G92)

This is valid only on the spindle selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS).
The spindle not selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS) maintains the speed at which
it was rotating at before being canceled.
(The spindle clamp speed is maintained with the G92 command.)
(2) Constant surface speed control
Constant surface speed control can be applied on all spindles.
The spindle rotation speed is automatically controlled during constant surface speed control, so
when machining with constant surface speed, the spindle selection signal (SWS) for that spindle
must be left ON.
The spindle not selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS) maintains the speed at which
it was rotating at before being canceled.
(3) Thread cutting/synchronous feed
The threads are cut with the spindle selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS). The
encoder feedback selected with the encoder selection signal is used.
(4) Polygon machining (servo-spindle)
The polygon machining spindle is selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS). Do not
select the polygon machining spindle multiple times, and do not change the polygon
machining spindle selection signal during the polygon machining mode.
If a C axis mode command is issued to the polygon machining spindle, the "M01 operation
error 1026" will occur. When the C axis command is canceled, the error will be canceled and
machining will resume.
If synchronous tap is commanded during polygon machining, a program error (P34) will occur.
(5) Synchronous tap
The synchronous tap spindle is selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS).
Select the synchronous tap spindle before issuing the synchronous tap command. Do not
change the synchronous tap spindle selection signal during the synchronous tapping mode.
If a C axis mode command is issued to the synchronous tap spindle, the "M01 operation error
1026" will occur. When the C axis command is canceled, the error will be canceled and
machining will resume.
If a polygon machining command is issued to the synchronous tap spindle, the "M01 operation
error 1026" will occur. When the polygon machining command is canceled, the error will be
canceled and machining will resume.
(6) Asynchronous tap
The asynchronous tap spindle is selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS).
Select the asynchronous tap spindle before issuing the tap command. Input a calculation
request to change the asynchronous tap spindle selection. Do not change the asynchronous tap
spindle selection signal during the asynchronous tapping mode.
(7) Tap return
The tap return spindle is selected with the spindle selection signal (SWS).
Select the spindle for which the tap cycle execution in stopped before turning the tap return
signal ON.
If tap return is executed when a different spindle is selected, the "M01 operation error 1032"
will occur. Do not change the spindle selection signal during tap return.

204
10. Spindle Functions
10.12 Multiple spindle control

Restrictions

(1) The S manual value command is invalid when multiple spindle control II is valid.
(2) Setup parameter "#1199 Sselect" is invalid when multiple spindle control II is valid.
(3) The spindle control mode changeover G code cannot be used when multiple spindle control II
is valid. A program error (P34) will occur.
(4) The "S1=∗∗∗" and "S2=∗∗∗" commands are invalid when multiple spindle control II is valid. A
program error (P33) will occur.
(5) The spindle gear shift command output signal (GR1/GR2) is not output when multiple spindle
control II is valid.

205
 11. Tool Functions
11.1 Tool functions (T8-digits BCD)

11. Tool Functions

11.1 Tool functions (T8-digits BCD)
Function and purpose

Tool functions are also known as T functions, and are used to designate the tool Nos. and tool
compensation Nos. The designations are made by the 8 digits (0 to 99999999) following the
address T. These commands are used with the higher-order six or seven digits indicating the tool
No., and the lower-order one or two digits indicating the compensation No.
Which is to be used is determined by setting in the parameter "#1098 TLno.". The usable T
commands differ according to each machine, so refer to the instruction manual issued by the
machine maker. One set of T commands can be issued in one block.

Command format

T ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗ ;
Tool compensation number
Tool number

T ∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗ ;
Tool compensation number
Tool number
Reference should be made to the instructions issued by the machine maker for the
correspondence between the actual tools and the tool numbers commanded in the program.
BCD codes and start signals are output.
If the T function is designated in the same block as a movement command, the commands may be
executed in either of the following two orders. The machine specifications determine which
sequence applies.
(a) The T function is executed after the movement command.
(b) The T function is executed simultaneously with the movement command.
Processing and completion sequences are required for all T commands.

206
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.1 Tool offset

12. Tool Offset Functions

12.1 Tool offset
Function and purpose

Tool offset is performed by the T functions which are commanded with the 3-, 4- or 8-digit number
following address T. There are two types of tool offset: tool length offset and tool nose wear offset.
There are two ways to issue the commands: the tool length offset and tool nose wear offset are
designated by the last 1 or 2 digits of the T command or the tool nose wear offset is assigned by the
last 1 or 2 digits of the T command and the tool length offset by the tool number. Parameter "#1098
TLno." is used to switch between them. Parameter "#1097 T1digt" is also used to select the last 1
or 2 digits for the offset.
One group of T command can be assigned in a block.

Command format

(1) When designating the tool length and tool nose wear offset number using the last 1 or 2 digits
of the T command.

T ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗ ;
Tool length offset + tool nose wear offset
Tool number

T ∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗ ;
Tool length offset + tool nose wear offset
Tool number

(2) When differentiating between the tool length offset number and tool nose wear offset number

T ∗∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗ ;
Tool nose wear offset
Tool number + tool length offset

T ∗∗∗∗∗∗ ∗∗ ;
Tool nose wear offset
Tool number + tool length offset

The lower two digits of the tool No. are the tool length offset No.

(Note 1) For multiple systems

There are cases when each system has tool data and when the systems share common
tool data. This can be selected with parameter (#1501 MemTol).
Parameter #1501 MemTol 0: Tool data provided for each system
1: Tool data shared by systems
When the tool data is shared by the systems, the offset amount for the system 1 tool
command and system 2 tool command will be the same (when the same tool offset No. is
commanded).

207
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.1 Tool offset

12.1.1 Tool offset start

Detailed description

There are two ways to execute tool offset and these can be selected by parameter: executing offset
when the T command is executed and executing offset in the block with a movement command
without performing offset when the T command is executed.

(1) Offset with T command execution

N2
Tool path after offset N1 T0101 ;
Offset amount
N1 N2 X100. Z200. ;
Programmed machining path

Tool length offset and tool nose wear offset are conducted simultaneously.
(Note 1) The movement applying to offset with the T command execution is rapid traverse in a
G00 modal and cutting feed with other modals.
(Note 2) When performing offset with T command execution, the path is offset as a linear
movement in a circular modal.
(Note 3) When performing offset with T command execution, offset will not function until the arrival
of any G command except those listed below when the T command has been assigned in
the same block as the G commands listed below.

G04 : Dwell
G10 : Program tool offset input/program parameter input
G11 : Program parameter input mode cancel
G65 : User macro simple call
G92 : Coordinate system setting

(2) Offset with movement command

Tool path after offset

N1 T0101 ;
N2 Offset amount N2 X100. Z200. ;

Programmed machining path

N1

Tool length offset and tool nose wear offset are conducted simultaneously.
(Note 1) When performing offset with a movement command, offset is applied if the offset amount
is lower than the parameter "#1084 RadErr" when offset is performed for the first time
with a circular command. If the amount is higher, the program error (P70) results. (This
also applies when the arc command and T command are in the same block for offsetting
with T command execution.)

208
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.1 Tool offset

12.1.2 Expanded method at starting tool offset

Function and purpose

By setting the parameter "#1100 Tmove", the offset operation when T is commanded is selected
whether that is carried out when the T command is executed or carried out with superimposed on
the movement command.
In addition to these two methods, a type to compensate only the wear amount when the T
command is executed and to compensate the tool length superimposed on the movement
command can be selected with the parameter.

Detailed description

To select the type to compensate only the wear amount when the T command is executed and to
compensate the tool length superimposed on the movement command, set the "#1100 Tmove" to
2.
When 2 is set, the length offset will follow setting 1 (superimposed on movement command), and
the wear offset will follow setting 0 (move when T is commanded).
The offset operation for each "#1100 Tmove" setting is as shown below.

When Length offset amount: 7.000mm Wear offset amount: 0.500mm

Machining program
Machine value
example
#1100 Tmove = 0 #1100 Tmove = 1 #1100 Tmove = 2
G28 X. ; 0.000 0.000 0.000
G0 T116. ; 7.500 0.000 0.500
G0 X100. ; 107.500 107.500 107.500
:
(Note 1) If the following G commands are issued in the same block as the T command, the wear
will not be compensated in that block.
Same block compensation standby: G04, G10, G11, G65, G92
The wear amount will be compensated in a block where other G commands are issued.
(All axes)
(Note 2) After the offset amount is temporarily canceled, the offset amount will return for each
movement command axis. The movement at this time will follow parameter "#1101
Tabsmv" for both length offset and wear offset.
G command involving temporary cancel: G28, G30, G53

(1) Relation with "#1101 Tabsmv" (tool offset amount superimposition during absolute
command)
When "#1100 Tmove" is set to 2, the offset operation will follow the "#1101 Tabsmv" setting.

209
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.1 Tool offset

(2) Parameters
Setting
# Items Details
range
1100 Tmove Designate the timing to perform tool length offset and wear 0 to 2
offset.
0: Compensates when T command is executed.
1: Superimposes and compensates with the movement
command in the block where the T command is located.
If there is no movement command in the same block‚
compensation will be executed after the movement
command is superimposed in the next movement
command block.
2: Compensates wear amount when the T command is
executed.
Superimposes and compensates a tool length offset
amount with the movement command in the same
block.
If there is no movement command in the same block,
compensation will be executed after the movement
command is superimposed in the next movement
command block.
1101 Tabsmv Designate the type of movement command superimposed 0,1
when #1100 Tmove is set to 1 or 2.
0: Compensates regardless of the movement command
type.
1: Compensates only at the movement command in the
absolute value command.

210
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.2 Tool length offset

12.2 Tool length offset

Tool length offset amount setting

This function offsets the tool length with respect to the programmed basic position. This position
may generally be set to either the center position of the turret or the tool nose position of the basic
tool.

(1) Center position of turret

Basic position
(basic point)
X-axis tool length
offset amount
X
Z-axis tool length
offset amount Z

(2) Tool nose position of basic tool

Basic tool
Basic point

Tool used for machining

X-axis tool length
offset amount
X
Z-axis tool length
offset amount Z

Tool length offset number change

When tool numbers are changed, the tool length offset corresponding to the new tool numbers are
added to the movement amounts in the machining program.

Offset tool path

N4
N1 T0100 ;
N3 N2 G1 X10.0 Z10.0 F100 ;
N2
Offset amount N3 G1 X13.0 Z15.0 F20.0 ;
(new) N4 T0200 ;
Offset amount N5 N5 G1 X13.0 Z20.0 F25.0 ;
(old)
Programmed machining path

In this example, the tool length is offset with the tool number and offset is performed in the block
with the movement command.

211
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.2 Tool length offset

Tool length offset cancel

(1) When an offset number of 0 has been assigned

Offset is canceled when 0 has been assigned as the tool length offset number by the T
command.

Tool offset path N1 X10.0 Z10.0 F10 ;

N2 N2 T0000 ;
N1 N3 N3 G1 X10.0 Z20.0 ;

In this case, offset is performed

by the block with the movement
Offset amount
command.
Programmed machining path

(2) When the assigned offset amount is 0

Offset is canceled when the offset amount in the tool length offset number assigned by the T
command is 0.

Tool offset path N1 G1 X10.0 Z10.0 F10 ;

N2 N2 T0100 ;
N1 N3 N3 G1 X10.0 Z20.0 ;

In this case, offset is performed

Offset amount by the block with the movement
command.
Programmed machining path

(Note 1) When G28, G29 or G30 is commanded, the offset is temporarily canceled. Therefore,
the machine moves to the position where the offset was canceled and the offset
amount is stored in the memory. This means that with the next movement command
the machine will move to the offset position.
(Note 2) When G28, G29 or G30 and the offset cancel are commanded in the same block, the
machine is moved to the position where the offset was canceled, however the offset
amount remains stored in the memory. This means that the display coordinate may
be displayed including the offset amount. Issue these command in the separate block
so that the offset amount should not be stored in the memory.
(Note 3) Even if the offset amount of the offset number currently selected by MDI is changed
during automatic operation, the changed offset amount will not be valid unless a T
command with the same number is executed again.
(Note 4) The tool length offset and tool nose wear offset amounts are cleared by resetting and
by emergency stop. They can be retained by parameter "#1099 Treset".

212
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.3 Tool nose wear offset

12.3 Tool nose wear offset

Tool nose wear offset amount setting

The wear sustained by the tool being used can be offset.

Tool nose

X-axis tool nose

wear offset amount
Z

Z-axis tool nose wear offset amount

Tool nose wear offset cancel

Tool nose wear offset is canceled when 0 has been assigned as the offset number.
N1 G1 X10.0 Z10.0 F10 ;
Tool offset path N2 T0100 ;
N2 N3 G1 X10.0 Z20.0 ;
N1 N3
In this case, offset is performed
in the block with the movement
command.
Offset amount
Programmed machining path

(Note 1) When G28, G29 or G30 is commanded, the offset is temporarily canceled. Therefore, the
machine moves to the position where the offset was canceled and the offset amount is
stored in the memory. This means that with the next movement command the machine
will move to the offset position.
(Note 2) When G28, G29 or G30 and the offset cancel are commanded in the same block, the
machine is moved to the position where the offset was canceled, however the offset
amount remains stored in the memory. This means that the display coordinate may be
displayed including the offset amount. Issue these command in the separate block so that
the offset amount should not be stored in the memory.
(Note 3) Even if the offset amount of the offset number currently selected by MDI is changed
during automatic operation, the changed offset amount will not be valid unless a T
command with the same number is executed again.
(Note 4) The tool length offset and tool nose wear offset amounts are cleared by resetting and by
emergency stop. They can be retained by parameter "#1099 Treset".

213
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

12.4 Tool nose radius compensation; G40, G41, G42, G46

Function and purpose

The tool nose is generally rounded and so a hypothetical tool nose point is treated as the tool nose
for programming purposes. When this is done, an error caused by the tool nose rounding arises
during taper cutting or circular cutting between the actually programmed shape and the cutting
shape. Tool nose radius compensation is a function for automatically calculating and offsetting this
error by setting the tool nose radius value.
The command codes enable the offset direction to be fixed or automatically identified.

Tool nose center path at programmed

machining shape

Tool nose center

Actual machining shape

R
Machining shape
commanded in program
Hypothetical tool nose point

Functions and command formats

Code Function Command format

G40 Tool nose radius compensation mode cancel G40 (Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ii Kk) ;
G41 Tool nose radius compensation left mode ON G41 (Xx/Uu Zz/Ww) ;
G42 Tool nose radius compensation right mode ON G42 (Xx/Uu Zz/Ww) ;
G46 Tool nose radius compensation automatic
G46 (Xx/Uu Zz/Ww) ;
direction identification mode ON

(Note 1) By means of the preset hypothetical tool nose point and movement commands in the
machining program, the G46 tool nose radius compensation function automatically
identifies the compensation direction and provides tool nose radius compensation.
(Note 2) G40 serves to cancel the tool nose radius compensation mode.

214
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

X axis
Automatic identification in
G46 mode

Left compensation
Left compen-
sation fixed in
G41 mode Right compensation

Right compensation
fixed in G42 mode

Z axis

(Note 3) Tool nose radius compensation pre-reads the data in the following two movement
command blocks (up to 5 blocks when there are no movement commands) and controls
the tool nose radius center path by the intersection point calculation method so that it is
offset from the programmed path by an amount equivalent to the nose radius.

N3

r
Prior to the N1 block execution, the
next movement command block is
pre-read and the coordinates at the
intersection point are calculated.
N2 block

N1 block

(Note 4) In the above figure, "r" is the tool nose radius compensation amount (nose radius).
(Note 5) The tool nose radius compensation amount corresponds to the tool length number and it
is preset along with the tool nose point.
(Note 6) If there are 4 or more blocks without movement amounts among 5 continuous blocks,
overcutting or undercutting will result.
Blocks in which optional block skip is valid are ignored.
(Note 7) Tool nose radius compensation is also valid for fixed cycles (G77 ~ G79) and for rough
cutting cycles (G70, G71, G72, G73).
However, in the rough cutting cycles, the finished shape with the tool nose radius
compensation applied will be cut with the compensation canceled and, upon completion of
the cutting, operation will automatically return to the compensation mode.
(Note 8) With thread cutting commands, compensation is temporarily canceled 1 block before.
(Note 9) A tool nose radius compensation (G41 or G42) command can be assigned during tool nose
radius compensation (G46). Compensation does not need to be canceled with G40 at this
time.
(Note 10)The compensation plane, movement axes and next advance direction vector follow the
plane selection command designated by G17, G18 or G19.
G17 X-Y plane X, Y, I, J
G18 Z-X plane Z, X, K, I
G19 Y-Z plane Y, Z, J, K

215
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

12.4.1 Tool nose point and compensation directions

Tool nose point

Since the tool nose is generally rounded, the programmed tool nose position is aligned with point P
shown in the examples of the figures below.
With tool nose radius compensation, one point among those in the figures below indicating the
position relationship is selected for each tool length number and preset.
(Selection from points 1 to 8 in the G46 mode and 0 to 9 in the G41/G42 mode.)

2 6 1
4 3 8
+X
0,9 P 5 7
7 5
P
1 2 6
Tool nose point
3 4 0 or 9
8
Correspondence between hypothetical tool
+Z nose numbers and tool nose points

Tool nose point and compensation operation

(1) When the nose R center has been aligned with the machining start position

Machining completion position

+X
G40
Nose R center path with tool
nose radius compensation
Machining start
position
G42
r

Programmed path or
Machining shape with no tool machining shape with tool
nose radius compensation +Z
nose radius compensation

216
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(2) When the tool nose point has been aligned with the machining start position

+X
Machining completion position
G40
Machining shape with no tool
nose radius compensation Machining start
position

r G42 or G46

Programmed path or
Nose R tool nose point path with machining shape with tool
tool nose radius compensation nose radius compensation +Z

Compensation directions

(1) The compensation direction of the G41/G42 commands is determined by the G41/G42 codes.
The direction in a G46 command is automatically determined in accordance with the following
table from the relationship between the tool nose points and the commanded movement
vectors.
(2) When tool nose radius compensation has been started and the initial movement vector
(including G0) corresponds to an "×" mark in the table, the compensation direction cannot be
specified and so it is determined by the next movement vector. When the direction cannot be
determined even after reading 5 blocks ahead, program error (P156) results.
(3) When an attempt is made to reverse the compensation direction during tool nose radius
compensation, program error (P157) results except when the reversal is done in the G00 block.
Even if the directions differ before and after the G28, G30 or G53 block, an error will not result
since compensation is temporarily canceled. Using a parameter (#8106 G46 reverse axis error
evade), the tool can also be moved unchanged in the same compensation direction.

217
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(4) When the compensation direction during tool nose radius compensation coincides with an "×"
in the table below, the direction complied with the previous compensation direction.
Determining the compensation direction by the movement vectors and tool nose point in
command G46
Compensation Compensation
direction of Tool nose points direction of
tool nose tool nose

Direction of Direction
tool nose 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 of tool nose
advance advance

Right Right Left Left Right Left

Right Left Left Right Right Left

Left Right Right Left Left Right

Left Right Left Left Right Right

Move- Move-
ment ment
vector vector
(tool nose Left Left Right Right Left Right (tool nose
points points
1 to 4) 5 to 8)

Left Right Right Left Left Right

Right Left Left Right Right Left

Left Left Right Right Left Left

(Note 1) An "×" mark in the tables indicates that the compensation direction is not determined from
the movement vector (tool nose points).
(Note 2) The " " mark denotes a movement vector in the 45° direction. (The other movement
vectors are based on this.)
(Note 3) The " " mark denotes a movement vector with a range larger than 45° and smaller than
135°. (The other movement vectors are based on this.)

218
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(Example) With tool nose point 3, movement vector in the Z axis (−) direction
(with ← movement vector)

As shown in the figure on the

left, the workpiece is on the X
axis (–) side from the tool nose
X axis Tool nose position and tool movement
point P direction. Consequently, the
Tool movement direction right side compensation of the
workpiece in the direction of
Z axis the tool’s advance serves as
the compensation direction.

219
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

12.4.2 Tool nose radius compensation operations

Tool nose radius compensation cancel mode

The tool nose radius compensation cancel mode is established by any of the following conditions.
(1) After the power has been turned ON
(2) After the reset button on the setting and display unit has been pressed
(3) After the M02 or M30 command with reset function has been executed
(4) After the compensation cancel command (G40) has been executed
(5) After tool number 0 has been selected (T00 has been executed)
The offset vectors are zero in the compensation cancel mode, and the tool nose point path
coincides with the program path.
Programs including tool nose radius compensation must be terminated in the compensation cancel
mode.

Tool nose radius compensation start (start-up)

Tool nose radius compensation starts when all the following conditions are met in the
compensation cancel mode.
(1) The movement command is issued after G41, G42 or G46.
(2) The movement command is any command except a circular command.
At the start of compensation, the operation is executed after at least 2 to 5 blocks have been read
continuously for intersection point calculation regardless of single block operation (Two flocks are
pre-read if movement commands are present; up to 5 blocks are pre-read if such commands are
not present.)
During compensation mode, up to 5 blocks are pre-read and the compensation is arithmetically
processed.

Control mode transition diagram

Machining
T____; S____; G00____; G41____; G01____; G02____;
program
Starting to pre-read
2∼5 blocks ahead
G01_; G02_;

Pre-read buffer T__; S__; G00_; G41_; G01_; G02_;

Execution block T__; S__; G00_; G41_; G01_; G02_;

There are two ways of starting the compensation operation: type A and type B.
The type to be used is selected by setting bit2 of parameter "#1229 set 01/bit2".
This type is used in common with the compensation cancel type.
In the following explanatory figure, "S" denotes the single block stop point.

220
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Start operation for tool nose radius compensation

With a G41, G42 or G46 command alone, the tool does not moves as much as the specified amount of
tool nose radius compensation. It does not start tool nose radius compensation with a G00 command. It
starts tool nose radius compensation normally with a G01, G02 or G03 command.
Note that even if there is an axis command, the tool nose radius compensation will not be applied
unless there is movement.

(1) When an independent G41/G42/G46 command is issued at an inside corner

Program path
~

N1 G42 ;
Nose R center path
N2 G00 X_Z_ ; N3
N3 G01 X_Z_F_ ; N2
~

N1

Program path
~

N1 G42 ; Nose R center path

N2 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
Inter- N3
N3 G01 X_Z_ ; section
N2
~

N1
~

Program path
N1 G42 ;
N2 G01 X_Z_F_ ; Nose R center path
N4
N3 G00 X_Z_ ; N3
N4 G01 X_Z_ ;
~

N2

N1
~

Program path
N1 G42 ;
N2 G00 X_Z_ ; Nose R center path
N3 G00 X_Z_ ; N4
N3
N4 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
~

N2

N1

221
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(2) When a G41/G42/G46 command is issued at an inside corner, in the same block as a
movement command

Linear → Linear Linear → Circular

θ Program path θ
Program path
r = Nose R radius r
Nose R s
s center path
G42 G42
Nose R
Start point center path
Start point
Center of circular

(3) When an independent G41/G42/G46 command is issued at an outside corner (obtuse angle)

Type A Type B
N3 Nose R center path Intersection N3 Nose R center path
~

N1 G41 ; Program path Program path

N2 G00 X_Z_ ; N2
N3 G01 X_Z_F_ ; N2
~

N1 N1
Type A, Type B
Intersection N3 Nose R center path
~

N1 G41 ; Program path

N2 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
N3 G01 X_Z_ ; N2
~

N1

Type A Type B
Inter-
~

Nose R center path section Nose R center path

N1 G41 ; N4 N4
Program path Program path
N2 G01 X_Z_F_ ; N3
N3 G00 X_Z_ ; N3
N4 G01 X_Z_ ;
~

N2 N2

N1 N1

222
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

~ Type A Type B
Nose R center path Inter- Nose R center path
N1 G41 ; section
N4 N4
N2 G00 X_Z_ ;
Program path Program path
N3 G00 X_Z_ ; N3
N4 G01 X_Z_F_ ; N3
~

N2
N2
N1
N1

(4) When a G41/G42/G46 command is issued at an outside corner (obtuse angle), in the same
block as a movement command [90° ≤ θ < 180°]

Linear → Linear (Type A) Linear → Circular (Type A)

s Nose R center path s

r Nose R
r = Nose R radius center path
G41 G41
Program path
θ θ

Start point Start point Center of Program

circular path

Linear → Linear (Type B) Linear → Circular (Type B)

Intersection Intersection
s s
Nose R center path r
r r Nose R
r
center path
Program path G41
G41 θ
θ

Start point Start point Center of Program

circular path

223
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(5) When an independent G41/G42/G46 command is issued at an outside corner (acute angle)

Type A Type B
~ Nose R center path Nose R center path
N3 N3
N1 G41 ; Program path Program path
N2 G00 X_Z_ ;
N3 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
N2
~

N2
N1 N1

Type A, Type B
~

Nose R center path

N1 G41 ; N3
Program path
N2 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
N3 G01 X_Z_ ;
N2
~

N1

Type A Type B
Nose R center path Nose R center path
~

N4 N4
N1 G41 ;
Program path Program path
N2 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
N1 Program N1
N3 G00 X_Z_ ; path
N3 Nose R
N4 G01 X_Z_ ; center path
Nose R
~

center path N3 N2
Program path

N2

Type A Type B
~

Nose R center path Nose R center path

N1 G41 ; N4 N4
N2 G00 X_Z_ ; Program path Program path
N3 G00 X_Z_ ; N3 N1 N1
Nose R Nose R
N4 G01 X_Z_ F_ ; center center path Program
path path
N2
~

N2
Program path
N3

224
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(6) When a G41/G42/G46 command is issued at an outside corner (acute angle), in the same
block as a movement command [ θ < 90° ]

Linear → Linear (Type A) Linear → Circular (Type A)

Center of
s circular
Nose R center path Nose R
r center path
s
Program path Program path
θ r
G41
θ
G41

Start point

Start point

Linear → Linear (Type B) Linear → Circular (Type B)

Center of circular
s
Nose R center path
r Nose R
s center path
θ Program path
r Program path
r

θ
G41 r

Start point
G41

Start point

(Note 1) If there is axis movement command in the same block as G41 or G42, compensation is
performed perpendicularly to the next block's direction.

225
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Operations in compensation mode

The tool center path is obtained and compensated from the linear and arc designations for the
program path (G00, G01, G02, G03).
Compensation is valid both for positioning and for interpolation commands such as circular and
linear interpolation.
Even if the same compensation command (G41, G42, G46) is issued in a tool nose radius
compensation (G41, G42, G46) mode, the command will be ignored.
When 4 or more blocks not accompanying movement are commanded continuously in the
compensation mode, overcutting or undercutting will result.
When the M00 command has been issued during tool nose radius compensation, pre-reading is
prohibited.

(1) Machining an outside corner

Linear → Linear (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Linear → Linear (0° < θ < 90°)

Nose R center path

r
s
θ Program path
θ
r
Program path

s
Intersection Nose R center path

Linear → Circular (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Linear → Circular (0° < θ < 90°)

Nose R center path

θ s
r

Program path Program path

r r θ
r

s Nose R center path

Center of
circular
Center of circular

226
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Circular → Linear (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Circular → Linear (0° < θ < 90°)

Center of circular
Program path
Program path
θ θ
r
r r Center of
Nose R r Nose R circular
center path center path
s
Intersection
s

Circular → Circular (90° ≤ θ < 180°) Circular → Circular (0° < θ < 90°)

Center of
circular
Program path Program path
θ

r θ
r Nose R r r
s center path Nose R
center path
Intersection

Center of circular Center of circular s Center of circular

227
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(2) Machining an inner wall

Linear → Linear (Obtuse angle) Linear → Linear (Acute angle)

θ
Program path Program path
r
θ r
s s
Intersection Nose R center path r Nose R
center path

Linear → Circular (Obtuse angle) Linear → Circular (Acute angle)

θ
Program path Program path
Center of
θ circular
r
Nose R s s
center path Nose R center path
Inter- Intersection r
section r

Center of circular

Circular → Linear (Obtuse angle) Circular → Linear (Acute angle)

θ Center of circular
Program path
θ Program path
s
s Nose R center path Inter-
r Inter- section
section Nose R center path
r

Center of circular

228
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Circular → Circular (Obtuse angle) Circular → Circular (Acute angle)

Intersection θ Center of circular

s Nose R center path

r
θ
Center of
circular
Program path s
Center of Center of Intersec- Nose R center path
circular circular tion

Program path

(3) When the arc end point is not on the arc

If the error applying after compensation is within the parameter (#1084 RadErr), the area from
the arc start point to the end point is interpolated as a spiral arc.

Hypothetical circle
Nose R center path

Program path End point of circular

s
r
R

Center of circular

(4) When the inner intersection point does not exist

In an instance such as that shown in the figure below, the intersection point of circulars A and
B may cease to exist due to the offset amount. In such cases, program error (P152) appears
and the tool stops at the end point of the previous block.

Program error stop

Nose R center path
Center of
r circular A

r
Program path
A B

Line intersecting circulars A, B

229
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Tool nose radius compensation cancel

If either of the following conditions is met in the tool nose radius compensation mode, the
compensation will be canceled. However, the movement command must be a command which is
not a circular command.
If the compensation is canceled by a circular command, program error (P151) results.
(1) The G40 command has been executed.
(2) The T00 tool number has been executed.
The cancel mode is established once the compensation cancel command has been read, 5-block
pre-reading is suspended and 1-block pre-reading is applies instead.

Tool nose radius compensation cancel operation

Issuing a tool nose radius compensation cancel command results in the following.
(1) If the command before G40 is G00 after the tool nose radius compensation is completed, the
tool nose radius compensation is temporarily stopped, and the tool nose radius compensation
is canceled in that state by an independent G40 command.
(2) If there is an interpolation command before G40 after the tool nose radius compensation is
completed, the tool nose radius compensation is not canceled by the independent G40
command, so the nose R center can stop in a vertical position. Instead, the tool nose radius
compensation is canceled by the first axis movement command after G40. The nose radius
compensation will not be canceled by the axis command if there is no axis movement. If there
is no axis movement command after G40, and the program finishes by M02, etc., the tool nose
radius compensation will remain valid. Resetting will cancel the tool nose radius compensation,
but the operation will not be canceled.
(3) When an independent T00 command is issued in a block, a tool nose radius cancel mode will
result in that block, and the axis will move to the tool nose radius cancel position.

230
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(4) Relation of an inside corner/outside corner and cancel

(a)-1 When an independent G40 command is issued at an inside corner

Program path

N1
~
G01 X_Z_F_ ; Nose R center path
N2 G00 X_Z_ ; N1
N3 G40 ; N2
~

N3

Program path
~

N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; Nose R center path

N2 G01 X_Z_ ; Inter- N1
N3 G40 ; section
N2
N4 M05 ;
N5 G00 X_Z_ ; N3
N4
~

N5

Program path
~

N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; Nose R center path

N2 G00 X_Z_ ; N1
N3 G01 X_Z_ ; N2
N4 G40 ;
N5 M05 ;
N3
N6 G01 X_Z_ ;
N4
~

N5

N6

Program path
~

N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
Nose R center path
N2 G00 X_Z_ ;
N1
N3 G00 X_Z_ ; N2
N4 G40 ;
~

N3

N4

231
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(a)-2 When a G40 command is issued at an inside corner, in the same block as a movement
command

Linear → Linear Circular → Linear

θ θ
Program path Program path
r = Nose R radius r
s Nose R center path s

Nose R
G40 G40 center path

End point End point

Center of circular

232
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(b)-1 When an independent G40 command is issued at an outside corner (obtuse angle)

Type A, Type B
~ N1 Nose R center path

N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; Program path

N2 G00 X_Z_ ; N2
N3 G40 ;
~

Type A, Type B
N3 N1 Nose R center path
~

Intersection
N2 Program path
N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
N2 G01 X_Z_ ;
N3 G40 ; N3
N4
N4 M05 ;
N5 G00 X_Z_ ;
~

N5

Type A
N1 Nose R center path
~

N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
N2 Program path
N2 G00 X_Z_ ; Type B
N3 G01 X_Z_ ; (Type B) N1 Nose R center path
N4 G40 ; N3 N2
Program path
N5 M05 ; N4
N6 G01 X_Z_ ; N5
N6
N3
~

N4
N5
N6

Type A, Type B
~

N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; N1 Nose R center path

N2 G00 X_Z_ ;
Program path
N3 G00 X_Z_ ; N2
N4 G40 ;
~

N3

N4

233
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(b)-2 When a G40 command is issued at an outside corner (obtuse angle), in the same block
as a movement command

Linear → Linear (Type A) Circular → Linear (Type A)

s s
Nose R center path
r Nose R
r = Nose R radius center path
G40 G40
Program path
θ θ

End point End point Program path

Center of circular

Linear → Linear (Type B) Circular → Linear (Type B)

s Intersection s Intersection
Nose R center path Nose R
r r center path
r r
Program path G40
G40
θ θ

End point End point

Program path
Center of circular

234
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(c)-1 When an independent G40 command is issued at an outside corner (acute angle)

Type A, Type B
N1 Nose R center path
~
N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; Program path
N2 G00 X_Z_ ;
N3 G40 ; N2
~

N3
Type A, Type B
N1 Nose R center path
~

N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; Program path

N2 G01 X_Z_ ;
N3 G40 ;
N4 M05 ;
N5
N5 G00 X_Z_ ; N2
~

N3
N4
~

N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; Type A Type B

N2 G00 X_Z_ ; N1 Nose R center path N1 Nose R center path
N3 G01 X_Z_ ;
N4 G40 ; Program path Program path
N5 M05 ; N6 N4
N2
N5 N4
N6 G01 X_Z_ ; N6 N5
N3
N2
~

Nose R
center path N3

Type A, Type B
~

N1 Nose R center path

N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ;
N2 G00 X_Z_ ; Program path
N3 G00 X_Z_ ;
N4 G40 ; N4
N2
~

N3
(Type A, Type B)

235
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(c)-2 When a G40 command is issued at an outside corner (acute angle), in the same block
as a movement command

Linear Linear (type A) Circular Linear (type A)

Center of circular
s Nose R center path

r Nose R
Program path center path
s
θ
r Program path
G40
θ
G40

End point

End point

Linear Linear (type B) Circular Linear (type B)

Center of circular

Nose R
center path
Nose R center path
r r
Program path
s Program path s
θ θ
r r

G40 G40

End point End point

236
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

12.4.3 Other operations during tool nose radius compensation

Changing the compensation direction during tool nose radius compensation

The compensation direction is determined by the tool nose radius compensation commands (G41,
G42).
G code Compensation direction
G41 Left-side compensation
G42 Right-side compensation
The compensation direction can be changed by changing the compensation command in the
compensation mode without the compensation having to be first canceled.
However, no change is possible in the compensation start block and the following block.

Linear → Linear

Nose R center path

r

r
Program path
G41 G41 G42

r
r

Linear ↔ Circular

r
r

G41 G42 G41 G41 G42

Program path

r
Nose R center path

237
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Linear return
G41
Nose R center path
G42
r
Program path

Arc exceeding 360° due to compensation method

In the cases below, it is possible that
the circular may exceed 360°.
G42 a. With offset direction selection
based on G41/G42

In cases like this, compensation is

Program path provided shown in the figure on the
left and a section will be left uncut.
Nose R
center
path
G41
G42
Section left uncut

238
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Tool nose radius compensation of path closed by G46/G41/G42

(1) G46 command operation (2) G42 → G41 command operation

G00
Left
G01(G41)

Intersection
G01
G41 (G42)
command
G01
Program

G01
G01
Right
(G41)

(3) G42 → G41 command operation

G01(G42)

G41
G01

G01
(G42)

239
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Command for eliminating offset vectors temporarily

When the following command is issued in the compensation mode, the offset vectors are
temporarily eliminated and a return is then made automatically to the compensation mode.
In this case, the compensation is not canceled, and the tool goes directly from the intersection point
vector to the point without vectors or, in other words, to the programmed command point. When a
return is made to the compensation mode, it goes directly to the intersection point.

(1) Reference point return command

X
S S
Z

Intermediate point

N5 N6 N7 N8
~

(G41)
N5 G01 U 30. W 60. ;
←Temporarily no compensation vectors at intermediate
N6 G28 U-40. W 50. ; point
N7 U-60. W 30. ; (Reference point when there is no intermediate point)
N8 U 40. W 70. ;
~

(Note 1) The offset vectors do not change with the coordinate system setting (G92) command.

(2) The compensation vector will be eliminated temporarily with the G53 command (basic
machine coordinate system selection).

240
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(3) Positioning (G00) commands

~ Tool nose radius compensation is temporarily canceled for G00 commands.

Nose R Nose R
N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; center path center path
N1 N2 N4
N2 G00 X_Z_ ; N3 N5
N3 G00 X_Z_ ;
N4 G00 X_Z_ ; Program Program
path path
N5 G01 X_Z_ ;
~

Intersection
~

Nose R Nose R
N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; N2 center path
center path
N2 G01 X_Z_ ; N1 N3 N4 N5
N3 G00 X_Z_ ;
N4 G00 X_Z_ ; Program Program
path path
N5 G01 X_Z_ ;
~
~

Intersection
N1 G01 X_Z_F_ ; Nose R Nose R
N2 G01 X_Z_ ; center path N2 N3 center path
N4
N3 G01 X_Z_ ; N1 N5
N4 G00 X_Z_ ; Intersection
N5 G01 X_Z_ ; Program Program
path path
~

(4) G33 thread cutting command

Tool nose radius compensation does not apply to the G33 block.

G33
Intersection
Nose R center path
r

Program path

241
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(5) Compound fixed cycles

When a compound fixed cycle I command (G70, G71, G72, G73) is assigned, the tool nose
radius compensation is temporarily canceled, the finished shape to which tool nose radius
compensation has been applied is cut with the compensation canceled and, upon completion, a
return is automatically made to the compensation mode.

Blocks without movement

The following blocks are known as blocks without movement.

a.M03 ;…………………….……. M command
b.S12 ;………………………….. S command
c.T0101 ;……………………….. T command
d.G04 X500 ;…………………… Dwell No movement
e.G10 P01R50 ;……………….. Offset amount setting
f.G92 X600. Z500. ;…………… Coordinate system setting
g.Y40. ;…………………………. Movement but not on offset plane
G.00 ;…………………………… G code only
i.U0 ;……………………………. Zero movement amount Movement amount
is zero

(1) When commanded at compensation start

Compensation vector cannot be created when there are four or more successive without
movement, or when pre-read prohibit M command is issued.

N1 U60. W30. T0101 ; N2, 3, 4, 5, 6

N2 G41 ;
N3 G4 X1000 ; N7
N4 F100 ; Block without
movement N1 (Intersection)
N5 S500 ; X N8
N6 M3 ;
N7 U-50. W20. ;
N8 U-20. W50. ; Z

(2) When command is assigned in the compensation mode

The normal intersection vector is created when there are four or more blocks without
movement in succession during the compensation mode, or when the pre-read prohibit M
command is not issued.

N6 U200. W100. ; N7 N8
N7 G04 P1000 ; ….. Block without
N8 W200. ; movement
N6 N8

Block N7 is
N6 executed here.

242
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

The offset vector is created perpendicularly to the end point of the previous block when there are
four or more successive blocks without movement, or when pre-read prohibit M command is
issued.

N11
N6 U200. W100. ;
N7 G4 X1000 ;
N8 F100 ; N6 N11
Block without N7~N10
N9 S500 ; movement
N10 M4 ;
N11 W100. ; N6

In this case, a cut result

(3) When commanded together with compensation cancel

Only the offset vectors are canceled when a block without movement is commanded together
with the G40 command.

X
N6 U200. W100. ;
N7 G40 M5 ;
N8 U50. W100. ; N8
Z
N7

N6

When I, J, K are commanded in G40

A perpendicular vector is created in the block before G40.

(a,b)
X
G40
Nose R center path A
G41
Z r
Program path
(i,k) r

Hypothetical nose R center path

243
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Corner movement

When a multiple number of compensation vectors are created at the joints between movement
command blocks, the tool will move in a linear between those vectors. This action is called corner
movement.
When the vectors do not coincide, the tool moves in order to machine the corner.
Consequently, operation in the single block mode will execute the previous block + corner
movement as a single block and the remaining joining movement + following block will be executed
as a single block in the following operation.

Program path N1

N2
θ
r
Nose R center path
r Center of circular
This movement and feedrate
fall under block N2.

Stop point with single block

244
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

12.4.4 G41/G42 commands and I, J, K designation

Function and purpose

The compensation direction can be intentionally changed by issuing the G41/G42 command and I,
J, K in the same block.

Command format

G18 (Z-X plane) G41/G42 X Z I K ;

Assign a linear command (G00, G01) in a movement mode.

I, K type vectors (G18 X-Z plane selection)

The new I, K type vector (G18 plane) created by this command is now described. (Similar
descriptions apply to vector I, J for the G17 plane and to J, K for the G19 plane.)
As shown in the figures below, the vectors with a size equivalent to the offset amount are made to
serve as the I, K type compensation vector perpendicularly to the direction designated by I, K
without the intersection point of the programmed path being calculated. The I, K vector can be
commanded even in the mode (G41/G42 mode in the block before) and even at the compensation
start (G40 mode in the block before).

(1) When I, K is commanded at compensation start

N110 (G40)
N120
~

N130
N140 N150 N100 G41 U100. W100. K150. T0101 ;
X
N110 G04 X1000 ;
T0101
N100 N120 G01 F1000 ;
Z N130 S500 ;
N140 M03 ;
Program path N150 Z150. ;
~

Nose R center path

(2) When there are no movement commands at the compensation start

X (G40)
N3
~

Z N1 G41 K150. T0101 ;

N2 N2 U100. W100. ;
N3 W150. ;
~

T0101 N1

245
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(3) When I, K has been commanded in the mode (G18 plane)

~
(I,K)N110
(2) (G18 G41)
N100 T0101 N100 G41 T0101 G01 W150. I50. ;
(1) (N120) N110 G02 W100. I50. ;
N120 G01 W100.
X

~
Z

Program path (1) I, K type vector

Nose R center path (2) Intersection point calculation type vector
Path for intersection point calculation

(4) When I, K has been commanded in a block without movement

N3 N4

N5 N1 G41 T0101 G01 F1000 ;

(I,K)
N2 U100. W100. ;
N2
N3 G41 K50. ;
N4 W150. ;

N1 N5 G40 ;
T0101

246
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Direction of offset vectors

(1) In G41 mode

Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I, K through 90° to the left from the
forward direction of the Y axis (3rd axis) as seen from the zero point
(Example 1) With K100. (Example 2) With K −100.
Offset vector direction (0, –100) IK direction

(0, 100) IK direction Offset vector direction

(2) In G42 mode

Direction produced by rotating the direction commanded by I, K through 90° to the right from
the forward direction of the Y axis (3rd axis) as seen from the zero point
(Example 1) With K100. (Example 2) With K −100.
(0, 100) IK direction Offset vector direction

Offset vector direction (0, −100) IK direction

Selection of offset modal

The G41 or G42 modal can be selected at any time.

X
N1 G28 X0Z0 ;
N2 G41 T0101 F1000 ;
Z
N3 G01 U100. W100. ;
N4 (I,K) N4 G42 W100. I-100. K100.
N3 T0102 T0102 ;
N5 U-100. W100. ;
N2 N6 G40 ;
N5 N7 M02 ;
T0101 N6 %

247
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Offset amount for offset vectors

The offset amounts are determined by the offset number (modal) in the block with the I, K
designation.

<Example 1>

T0101 (A) T0101 (G41 T0101)

~
(I,K)
X N100 N100 G41 W150. K50. ;
N110 N110 U-100. W100. ;
Z

~
Vector (A) is the offset amount entered in tool offset number modal 1 in the N100 block.

<Example 2>

(G41 T0101)
(B) T0102
T0101

~
X (I,K) N200 G41 W150. K50. T0102 ;
N200
N210 U-100. W100. ;
N210

~
Z

Vector (B) is the offset amount entered in tool offset number modal 2 in the N200 block.

248
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Precautions

(1) Issue the I, K type vector in a linear mode (G0, G1). If it is issued in an arc mode at the start of
compensation, program error (P151 G2, 3 CMP. ERR) will result.
An I, K designation in an arc mode functions as an arc center designation in the offset mode.
(2) When the I, K type vector has been designated, it is not deleted (avoidance of interference)
even if there is interference. Consequently, overcutting may arise in such a case.

N1 G28 X0Z0 ;
Z N2 G41 T0101 F1000 ;
N3 W100. ;
N3 N4 N5 N6 N4 G41 U-100. W100. K10. ;
N5 U100. W100. ;
N6 G40 ;
N7 M02 ;

Cut
(I,K)

(3) Refer to the following table for the offset methods based on the presence and/or absence of the
G41 and G42 commands and I, K (J) command.
G41/G42 I, K (J) Offset method
No No Intersection point calculation type vector
No Yes Intersection point calculation type vector
Yes No Intersection point calculation type vector
Yes Yes I, K type vector No insertion block

249
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

12.4.5 Interrupts during tool nose radius compensation

MDI interrupt

Tool nose radius compensation is valid in any automatic operation mode - whether tape, memory
or MDI operation.
An interrupt based on MDI will give the result as in the figure blow after block stop during tape or
memory operation.

(1) Interrupt without movement (tool path does not change)

N1 G41 T0101 ; (Stop position

S
with single block)
N2 U50. W20. ; MDI interrupt
N3 G3 U−40. W40. R70. ; S1000 M3 ;

N2 N3

(2) Interrupt with movement

The offset vectors are automatically re-calculated at the movement block after interrupt.

With linear interrupt

S
N1 G41 T0101 ;
N2 U50. W20. ; MDI interrupt

N3 G3 U−40. W40. R70. ; U−30. W50. ; S

U50. W30. ;

N2
N3

With circular interrupt S

N1 G41 T0101 ;
MDI interrupt
N2 U50. W20. ;
N3 G3 U−40. W40. R70. ; G2 U−40. W40. R70. ;
G1 W40. ; S

N2 N3

250
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Manual interrupt

(1) Interrupt with manual

absolute OFF. Tool path after interrupt
The tool path is shifted by
an amount equivalent to
the interrupt amount. Tool path after
Interrupt
compensation

Program path

(2) Interrupt with manual

absolute ON.
In the incremental value
mode, the same operation
results as with manual
absolute OFF.
In the absolute value
mode, however, the tool
returns to its original path
at the end point of the
block following the
interrupted block, as
shown in the figure.

Interrupt

Interrupt

251
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

12.4.6 General precautions for tool nose radius compensation

Assigning the compensation amounts

(1) The compensation amount is normally assigned by designating the number of the
compensation amount by the last 1 or 2 digits of the T code. Depending on the machine
specifications, the high-order digits may be used. The T code will remain valid once
designated until another T code is subsequently commanded.
Besides being used to designate the compensation amounts for tool nose radius compensation,
the T codes are also used to designate the offset amounts for tool length offset.
(2) The compensation amounts are normally changed when a different tool has been selected in the
compensation cancel mode. However, when an amount is changed in the compensation mode,
the vectors at the end point of the block are calculated using the compensation amount
designated in that block.

Errors during tool nose radius compensation

(1) An error results when any of the following commands are programmed during tool nose radius
compensation.
G17, G18, G19 ("P112" when a plane differing from that applying during the compensation has
been commanded)
G31 ("P608")
G74, G75, G76 ("P155")
G81 ~ G89 ("P155")

(2) An error ("P158") results when a tool nose point other than 1 to 8 has been designated in the
G46 mode.
(3) An error ("P156") results when the compensation direction is not determined by the movement
vector of the initial cutting command even when the tool nose radius compensation operation has
started in the G46 mode and 5 blocks have been pre-read.
(4) An error ("P151") results when a circular command is issued in the first or last block of the tool
nose radius compensation.
(5) A program error ("P157") results when the offset direction is reversed in the G46 mode.
A parameter can be set to move the tool in the same compensation direction. (Control
parameter "#8106 G46 NO REV-ERR")
(6) A program error ("P152") results during tool nose radius compensation when the intersection
point is not determined with single block skip in the interference block processing.
(7) A program error results when there is an error in one of the pre-read blocks during tool nose
radius compensation.
(8) A program error ("P153") results when interference arises under no interference avoidance
conditions during tool nose radius compensation.
(9) A program error ("P150") results when a tool nose radius compensation command is issued
even though the tool nose radius compensation specification has not been provided.

252
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

12.4.7 Interference check

Function and purpose

A tool, whose tool nose has been compensated under the tool nose radius compensation function
by the usual 2-block pre-read, may sometimes cut into the workpiece. This is known as
interference, and interference check is the function which prevents this from occurring.
There are two types of interference check, as indicated below, and each can be selected for use by
parameter.
Function Parameter Operation
Interference check Interference check avoidance OFF A program error results before the execution of
alarm function Interference check invalid OFF the block in which the cut arises, and operation
stops.
Interference check Interference check avoidance ON The tool path is changed so that workpiece is
avoidance function Interference check invalid OFF not cut into.
Interference check Interference check invalid OFF Cutting continues as is, even if the workpiece
invalid function is cut into.
Use in the fine segment program.

(Note) #8102 Interference avoidance

#8103 Interference check invalid

Detailed description

(Example)

(G41) Avoidance path

N1 G1 X100. Z50. ;
N2 Z70. ; Outer diameter
N3 X300. Z120. ; of tool nose R

N1 N3

N2
Z
Cutting with N2 Cutting with N2

(1) With alarm function

The alarm occurs before N1 is executed and so, using the edit function, N1 can be changed as
below and machining can be continued: N1 G1 X−100. Z−20. ;
(2) With avoidance function
The intersection point of N1 and N3 is calculated and the interference avoidance vectors are
created.
(3) With interference check invalid function
The tool passes while cutting into the straight line between N1 and N3.

253
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Operation during interference avoidance

Solid line : Path when interference is avoided.

Broken line: Path when interference check is invalid.
Nose R center path when interference is avoided
Nose R center path when interference check is invalid
Program path

N2 N3
N1

Nose R center path when interference is avoided

Linear movement Nose R center path when interference check is invalid

r
Program path

N2 N3

N1 Center of circular
r

In the case of the figure below, the groove will be left uncut.

Interference avoidance path

Nose R center path

Program path

Solid line : Path when interference is avoided.

Broken line: Path when interference check is invalid.

254
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

Interference check alarm

The interference check alarm occurs under the following conditions.

(1) When the interference check alarm function has been selected
(a) When all the vectors at the end block of its own block have been deleted
When, as shown in the
figure on the right, vectors
1 to 4 at the end point of
the N1 block have all been N1
deleted, program error
(P153) results prior to N1
execution.
1
N2
2 3
N3
4

(2) When the interference check avoidance function has been selected
(a) When there are valid vectors at the end point of the following block even when all the
vectors at the end point of its own block have been deleted
(i) When, in the figure on
the right, the N2 in
interference check is
conducted, the N2 end
point vectors are all
deleted but the N3 end Alarm
point vectors are stop
regarded as valid.
Program error (P153)
now occurs at the N1 N1 2 3
end point.
1 4 N4

N2 N3

255
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(ii) In a case such as that

shown in the figure on
the below, the tool will 1234
move in the reverse
direction at N2.
Program error (P153)
now occurs prior to N1
execution.

N1 N4
N2 N3

(b) When avoidance vectors cannot be created

(i) Even when, as in the
figure on the below, the Alarm stop
conditions for creating
the avoidance vectors
are met, it may still be
impossible to create
these vectors or the N1
interference vectors
may interfere with N3.
As a result, program N2
error (P153) will occur
at the N1 end point N4
when the vector
intersecting angle is
more than 90°. N3

Alarm stop

N1

N2
N4

Angle of
N3
intersection

256
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.4 Tool nose radius compensation

(c) When the program advance direction and the advance direction after compensation are
reversed
In the following case,
interference is still
Program path Nose R center path
regarded as
occurring even when
there is actually no Stop
interference.
When grooves which
are narrower than the
tool nose R diameter
or which have parallel
or widening walls are
programmed.

Stop

257
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.5 Programmed offset input

12.5 Programmed offset input; G10

Function and purpose

The amount of tool offset and workpiece offset can be set or changed by the G10 command. When
commanded with absolute values (X,Z,R), the commanded offset amounts serve as the new
amounts; when commanded with incremental values (U,W,C), the new offset amounts are
equivalent to the commanded amounts plus the current offset amount settings.

Command format

(1) Workpiece offset input (L2)

G10 L2 P X (U )Z (W ) ;
P Offset number
X X-axis offset amount (absolute)
U X-axis offset amount (incremental)
Z Z-axis offset amount (absolute)
W Z-axis offset amount (incremental)

(2) Tool length offset input (L10)

G10 L10 P X (U )Z (W )R (C )Q ;
P Offset number
X X-axis offset amount (absolute)
U X-axis offset amount (incremental)
Z Z-axis offset amount (absolute)
W Z-axis offset amount (incremental)
R Tool nose radius compensation amount (absolute)
C Tool nose radius compensation amount (incremental)
Q Hypothetical tool nose point

(3) Tool nose wear offset input (L11)

G10 L11 P X (U )Z (W )R (C )Q ;
P Offset number
X X-axis offset amount (absolute)
U X-axis offset amount (incremental)
Z Z-axis offset amount (absolute)
W Z-axis offset amount (incremental)
R Tool nose radius compensation amount (absolute)
C Tool nose radius compensation amount (incremental)
Q Hypothetical tool nose point

(4) When there is no L command with tool length offset input (L10) or tool nose wear offset input
(L11)
Tool length offset input command : P = 10000 + offset number
Tool nose wear offset input command : P = offset number

258
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.5 Programmed offset input

Detailed description

(1) The following table shows the offset numbers and the setting ranges of the hypothetical tool
nose points.

Add Significance Setting range

ress of address L2 L10 L11
0:External workpiece When L command is When L command is/is
offset present: not present:
1:G54 workpiece offset 1 ~ Max. number of 1 ~ Max. number of
2:G55 workpiece offset offset sets offset sets
Offset 3:G56 workpiece offset
P
number 4:G57 workpiece offset When L command is
5:G58 workpiece offset not present:
6:G59 workpiece offset 10001 ~ 10000 +
Max. number of
offset
Hypothetical
Q tool nose — 0~9
point
(Note1) The maximum number of offset sets for P (offset number) with tool offset input (L10 or
L11) is up to a total of 80 with the addition of options.
(The No. of sets will differ according to the model so check the specifications.)

(2) The setting range for the offset amount is given blow.
Program error (P35) occurs for any value not listed in the table after command unit conversion.
With an incremental value command, the setting range for the offset amount is the sum of the
present setting and command value.
Tool length offset amount Tool wear offset amount
Setting
Metric system Inch system Metric system Inch system
#1003 = B ±99999.999 (mm) ±9999.9999 (inch) ±9999.999 (mm) ±9999.9999 (inch)
#1003 = C ±9999.9999 (mm) ±999.99999 (inch) ±999.9999 (mm) ±999.99999 (inch)
#1003 = D ±999.99999 (mm) - ±99.99999 (mm) -

259
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.5 Programmed offset input

Precautions and Restrictions

(1) Offset amount setting range check

The maximum value of the wear offset amount and the maximum additional value for the wear
offset input check respectively take precedence for a single-time offset amount in the
maximum value and incremental value command of the wear offset amount, and when an
amount greater than these values has been commanded, program error (P35) results.
(2) G10 is an unmodal command and is valid only in the commanded block.
(3) Offset input can be performed similarly for the third axis but even when the C axis has been
designated as the third axis, address C is treated as an incremental command value of the tool
nose radius in the L10 or L11 command.
(4) If an illegal L number or tool compensation No. is commanded, program error (P172 or P170)
will result, respectably.
(5) When the P command in the workpiece offset input is a command besides 0 to 6, or the P
command is omitted, it will be handled as the currently selected workpiece offset input.
(6) Program error (P35) results when the offset amount exceeds the setting range.
(7) X, Z and U, W are input together in a single block but when an address that commands the
same offset input (X, U or Z, W) is commanded, the address which is input last is valid.
(8) Offset will be input if even one address following G10 L(2/10/11) P_ is commanded. Program
error (P33) results when not even a single command has been assigned.
(Example) G10 L10 P3 Z50. ;

[Tool length data]

# Z
3 50.000 Input as per left

(9) Decimal points are valid for offset amounts.

(10) G40 ~ G42 are ignored when they have been commanded in the same block as G10.
(11) Do not command G10 in the same block as fixed cycles and subprogram call commands.
This will cause malfunctioning and program errors.
(12) When a T command has been issued in the same block as G10 with parameter "#1100
Tmove" as zero, the offset will be accomplished in the following block.
(13) For the multiple C-axis system, both C axis workpiece offsets are rewritten with the workpiece
offset input.

260
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.6 Tool life management II

12.6 Tool life management II

Function and purpose

Tool life management divides the tools being used into several groups, and manages the life
(usage time, No. of uses) of the tools in each group. When the life is reached, a similar spare tool in
the same group will be selected in order. This tool life management function with spare tools allows
unmanned operation over a long time.

(1) Number of life-managed tools 1 system : Maximum 80 tools,

2 systems : Maximum 40 tools/system
(2) Number of groups 1 system : Maximum 80 groups,
2 systems : Maximum 40 groups/system
(3) Group No. 1 to 9999
(4) Number of tools in one group Maximum 16 tools
(5) Life time 0 to 999999 minutes (approx. 16667 hours)
(6) Number of lives 0 to 999999 times

The tool life management data can be set from the NC program or from the Tool Life Management
screen.
Refer to the Operation manual for the method of setting from the Tool Life Management screen.
When using the NC program, register the data with the same method as program compensation
input.

Command format

G10 L3 ; Life management data registration start

P_ L_ N_ ; Registration of group No., life per tool, method
T_ ; Registration of tool No.; First group
T_ ;

P_ L_ N_ ; Registration of next group No., life per tool, method

T_ ; Registration of tool No.; Next group
T_ ;
G11 ; End of life management data registration
P Group No., (1 to 9999)
L Life per tool (0 to 999999 minutes, or 0 to 999999 times)
N Method (0:Time management, 1:No. of times management)
T Tool No.; the spare tool is selected in the order registered here.
(Tool number 1 to 999999. Compensation No. 1 to 80)
Tn follows the specifications.

261
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.6 Tool life management II

Precautions and restrictions

(1) The tool life data is registered by executing the above program in the memory or MDI mode.
(2) When the above program is executed, all data (group No., tool No., life data) registered
previously will be deleted. The registered data is held even when the power is turned OFF.
(3) The group No. designated with P does not have to be consecutive, but it should be set in
ascending order if possible. This will make monitoring on the screen easier. The group No.
cannot be commanded in duplicate.
(4) If the life data L_ is omitted, the life data for that group will be "0". If N_, which designates the
method, is omitted, the method for that group will follow the base specification parameter
"#1106 Tcount".
(5) Programming with a sequence No. is not possible between G10 L3 and G11.
(6) If the usage data count valid signal (Y2CA/W14A) is ON, G10 L3 cannot be commanded.
(P177 LIFE COUNT ACT)

Example of program

(1) Format
:
T††††99 ; Start use of †††† group tool
:
:
T††††88 ; Cancel †††† group tool offset
: (Equivalent to T∆∆00: ∆∆is number of tool being used).
:
M02 (M30) ; End of machining program
(2) Actual example
:
T0119 ; Start use of group 01 tool
:
:
T0188 ; Cancel group 01 tool offset
: If the number of the tool being used is 17, this is equivalent to T1700.
:
T0609 ; Selects tool No. 06 and offset No. 09.
: * Life management is not carried out for tool 06.
:
T0600 ; Cancel of group 06 tool offset
:
:
T0299 ; Start use of group 02 tool
:
:
T0199 ; Start use of group 01 tool
: If the selected tool has several compensation numbers, the second
compensation No. is selected.

262
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.6 Tool life management II

Example of tool selection operation (When one tool has several compensation numbers)

(1) To use several compensation numbers with one tool, select the next compensation No. for
each T††††99 command.
(2) If T††††99 is commanded for more times than the number of registered compensation
numbers, the last compensation No. will be selected, and the operation will continue. (Refer to
following.)

Registration to group 1 Program Tool selection

T1701 T0199 ; Equivalent to T1701

:
T1702 T0199 ; Equivalent to T1702
:
T1703 T0199 ; Equivalent to T1703
:
T2104 T0199 ; Equivalent to T1703
: :
(Group 1) : :(Hereafter, same until tool 17 reaches life.)

(3) If the above program is executed after resetting with M02/M30, or by resetting with external
reset, the selection will be made from the head compensation No.

263
 12. Tool Offset Functions
12.6 Tool life management II

12.6.1 Counting the tool life

Function and purpose

The tool life can be counted with the time-count type or No. of uses-count type. The count method
and timing for the No. of uses-count type can be changed to type 2 with the parameter setting
(#1277 ext13/bit0).
If the usage data is equivalent to or more than the life data as a result of the count up, a spare tool
in the group will be selected with the next group selection command (T††††99), and the newly
selected tool will be counted.
When all tools in the group have reached their lives and a spare tool cannot be selected, the count
will continue.

(1) Counting the time of uses when the time-count type method is selected
In the cutting mode (G01, G02, G03, G31, G33, etc.), the time that the tool is used is counted
with 100ms units.
The time is not counted during dwell, machine lock, miscellaneous function lock or dry run.
Whether to count or not for a single block can be changed by setting the parameter.

(Note) • The maximum value for the life is 999999 minutes.

• The data is displayed as a minute unit on the Tool Life Management screen.

264
12. Tool Offset Functions
12.6 Tool life management II

(2) Counting the No. of uses when the No. of uses-count type method is selected
(a) Type 1 (#1277 ext13/bit0: 0)
The No. of uses is counted when the number of the tool being used is changed with the
tool selection command (T††††99) and when the program is in the cutting mode
(excluding machine lock, miscellaneous function lock and dry run states).
The use is not counted if the cutting mode is not entered even once after the No. changes.
Whether to count or not during single block can be changed with the parameter setting.

(Note) • The maximum value for the life is 999999 times.

• If only the compensation No. of the tool being used changes, a count will not be
made.

Example: When T code of tool being used is T12345678

T12345678
Compensation No.: No count even when changed.
Tool No.: Counted when changed.

<<Operation example>>

Program Program

T0199........ 1 T0199....... 1
: :
T0299 T0199
: :
T0199........ 2 T0199
:
Group 01 has been used one time.
T0299
:
T0199........ 3
Group 01 has been used three
times.
* The No. of uses is for one program execution. If the program is executed again after
resetting, it will be counted.

(b) Type 2 (#1277 ext13/bit0: 1)

(i) Only the group used for cutting from when the machining program starts to when it is
reset is incremented by "1". The count is made at the reset.
(ii) If recount M is commanded, the group used up to that point will be incremented by "1"
in the counter.

(Note 1) A count is not made in the machine lock, miscellaneous function lock or dry
run states.
(Note 2) During single block, select whether to count with the parameter.
(Note 3) The maximum value of the life is 999999 times.

265
 13. Program Support Functions
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning

13. Program Support Functions

13.1 Fixed cycles for turning
Function and purpose

When performing rough cutting and other such operations during turning, these functions enable
shapes normally commanded in several blocks to be commanded in a single block. In other words,
they simplify the machining program. The following types of fixed cycles for turning are available.
G code Function
G77 Longitudinal turning cycle
G78 Thread cutting cycle
G79 Face turning cycle

Command format

G77 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F_ ;

(Same for G78, G79)

Detailed description

(1) Fixed cycle commands are modal G codes and so they are valid until another command in the
same modal group or a cancel command is issued.
The following G code cancel commands are available.
G00, G01, G02, G03
G07,
G09,
G10, G11,
G27, G28, G29, G30,
G31,
G33, G34,
G37,
G92,
G52, G53,
G65,
(2) The fixed cycle call becomes the movement command block call.
The movement command block call calls the fixed cycle macro subprogram only when there is
an axis movement command during the fixed cycle mode. It is executed until the fixed cycle is
canceled.

(3) A manual interrupt can be applied while a fixed cycle for turning (G77 ~ G79) is being executed.
Upon completion of the interrupt, however, the tool must be returned to the position where the
manual interrupt was applied and then the fixed cycle for turning should be resumed.
If it is resumed without the tool having been returned, all subsequent operations will deviate by
an amount equivalent to the manual interrupt.

266
 13. Program Support Functions
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning

13.1.1 Longitudinal cutting cycle; G77

Straight thread cutting

This function enables continuous straight cutting in the longitudinal direction using the following
command.
G77 X/U_ Z/W_ F_ ;

X axis

4(R)
U (R) : Rapid traverse
3(F) 1(R) (F) : Cutting feed
2(F) 2

Z W
X
Z axis

Taper thread cutting

This function enables continuous taper cutting in the longitudinal direction using the following
command.
G77 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F_ ;

X axis
4(R)
U (R) : Rapid traverse
3(F) 1(R) 2 (F) : Cutting feed
2(F)
R
Z W
X
Z axis

R: Taper depth (radius designation, incremental value, sign required)

With a single block, the tool stops at the end points of operations 1, 2, 3 and 4.

267
13. Program Support Functions
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning

Depending on the U, W and R signs, the following shapes are created.

(1) U < 0, W < 0, R < 0 (2) U < 0, W < 0, R > 0

W W

4 4 1
U 3 1 U
2 2 3
2
R
2
R
X X

Z Z

(3) U > 0, W < 0, R < 0 (4) U > 0, W < 0, R > 0

X X
Z Z

2 R

R
U 2
2 3 U 3 1
1 2
4
4

W
W

Program error (P191) results with shapes (2) and (3) unless the following condition is satisfied.
|u/2 | ≥ | r |

268
 13. Program Support Functions
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning

13.1.2 Thread cutting cycle; G78

Straight cutting

This function enables straight thread cutting using the following command.
G78 X/U_ Z/W_ F/E_ Q_ ;

X axis
4(R)
U (R) : Rapid traverse
3(R) 1(R) 2
2(F) (F) : Cutting feed
Z W
X
Z axis

Taper cutting

This function enables taper thread cutting using the following command.
G78 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F/E_ Q_ ;

X axis 4(R)
U
3(R) 1(R)
2(F) 2
(R) : Rapid traverse
r (F) : Cutting feed
Z W X

Z axis

R: Taper depth (radius designation, incremental value, sign required)

269
13. Program Support Functions
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning

Details for chamfering

α : Chamfering amount of thread
If the thread lead is assumed to be L,
then the parameter can be set in 0.1L
units from 0 to 12.7L.
θ θ : Chamfering angle of thread
The parameter can be set in 1° units
from 0 to 89°

With a single block, the tool stops at the end points of operations 1, 3 and 4.

When the feed hold function is applied during a thread cutting cycle, automatic operation will stop if
no thread is then being cut, or if applied in the interval from the execution of the thread cutting
command to the axis movement. If thread cutting is proceeding when the function is applied, the
operation stops at the next movement completion position (completion of operation 3) of the thread
cutting.
The dry run valid/invalid status does not change during thread cutting.

270
13. Program Support Functions
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning

Depending on the U, W and R signs, the following shapes are created.

(1) U < 0, W < 0, R < 0 (2) U < 0, W < 0, R > 0

W W

4 4
1
U 3
U 3 1 2
2 2 R

2
R

X X

Z Z

(3) U > 0, W < 0, R < 0 (4) U > 0, W < 0, R > 0

X X
Z Z

R
2

R U
U 2 1
3 2 3
2
1 4
4
W
W

Program error (P191) results with shape (2) and (3) unless the following condition is satisfied.
| u/2 | ≥ | r |

(Note 1) The thread cutting start shift angle is not a modal. If there is no Q command with G78,
this will be handled as "Q0".
(Note 2) If a value exceeding 360.000 is command for G78 Q, this will be handled as "Q360.000".
(Note 3) G78 cuts one row with one cycle. To cut two rows, change the Q value, and issue the
same command.

271
 13. Program Support Functions
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning

13.1.3 Face cutting cycle; G79

Straight cutting

This function enables continuous straight cutting in the face direction using the following command.
G79 X/U_ Z/W_ F_ ;

X axis

1(R)

U
2(F) 4(R)
2
(R) : Rapid traverse
3(F) (F) : Cutting feed

Z W
X
Z axis

272
13. Program Support Functions
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning

Taper cutting

This function enables continuous taper thread cutting using the following command.
G79 X/U_ Z/W_ R_ F_ ;

X axis r

1(R)
U (R) : Rapid traverse
2(F) 4(R)
2 (F) : Cutting feed

3(F)

Z W
X

Z axis

R: Taper depth (radius designation, incremental value, sign required)

With a single block, the tool stops at the end points of operations 1, 2, 3 and 4.

273
13. Program Support Functions
13.1 Fixed cycles for turning

Depending on the U, W and R signs, the following shapes are created.

(1) U < 0, W < 0, R < 0 (2) U < 0, W < 0, R > 0

R W R

1(R) 1(R)

U
U 2(F) 4(R) 2 2(F)
2 4(R)

3(F) 3(F)
X X

Z Z W

(3) U > 0, W < 0, R < 0 (4) U > 0, W < 0, R > 0

R W W

3(F) 3(F)

U U 2(F) 4(R)
2 4(R) 2
2(F)

X 1(R) X 1(R)

Z Z R

Program error (P191) results with shapes (2) and (3) unless the following condition is satisfied.
|w|≥|r|

274
 13. Program Support Functions
13.2 Fixed cycle for turning (MELDAS special format)

13.2 Fixed cycle for turning (MELDAS special format)

Function and purpose

When performing rough cutting and other such operations during turning, these functions enable
shapes normally commanded in several blocks to be commanded in a single block. In other words,
they simplify the machining program.
When using the MELDAS special format (#1265 ext01/bit1 ON), some addresses differ from the
normal format. The sections that differ from the normal format are shown below.
Refer to section "13.1 Fixed cycle for turning " for details on the fixed cycles for turning.

Command format

G77 X(U)_ Z(W)_ I_ F_ ;

(The same for G78)

G79 X(U)_ Z(W)_ K_ F_ ;

Detailed description

(1) Comparison of MELDAS special format and normal format

Some addresses in the MELDAS special format differ from the normal format.

MELDAS special Difference from normal

Function Normal format
format format
Longitudinal G77 X Z I F ; G77 X Z R F ; Taper depth
turning cycle or or Designate with R → I
G77 U W I F ; G77 U W R F ;
Thread G78 X Z I F ; G78 X Z R F ; Taper depth
cutting cycle or or Designate with R → I
G78 U W I F ; G78 U W R F ;
Face turning G79 X Z K F ; G79 X Z R F ; Taper depth
cycle or or Designate with R → K
G79 U W K F ; G79 U W R F ;

275
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Function and purpose

These functions enable prepared fixed cycle to be executed by commanding the corresponding
program in a block.
The types of fixed cycles are listed below.
G code Function
G70 Finishing cycle
G71 Longitudinal rough cutting cycle (finished shape chamfering) Compound fixed
G72 Face rough cutting cycle (finished shape chamfering) cycles I
G73 Formed material rough cutting cycle
G74 Face cut-off cycle
Compound fixed
G75 Longitudinal cut-off cycle
cycles II
G76 Compound thread cutting cycle
If, with any of the above functions for the compound fixed cycle I (G70 ~ G73), the finished shape
program has not been entered in the memory, the function cannot be used.

Command format

G70 A_ P_ Q_ ;
G71 U_ R_ ;
G71 A_ P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G72 W_ R_ ;
G72 A_ P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G73 U_ W_ R_ ;
G73 A_ P_ Q_ U_ W_ F_ S_ T_ ;
G74 R_ ;
G74 X (U)_ Z (W)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;
(Same for G75)
G76 P_ R_ ;
G76 X (U)_ Z (W)_ P_ Q_ R_ F_ ;

Detailed description

(1) The A, P and Q commands of the compound fixed cycles I are described below.
(a) When the A command is not present, P and Q in the program now being executed are
called.
When the A command is present and the P command is not present, the head block of
the program designated by the A command is treated as the P command.
(b) When the Q command is not present, operation continues until the M99 command is
located.
When both the Q and M99 commands are not present, operation continues until the final
block in the finished shape program.

276
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

13.3.1 Longitudinal rough cutting cycle; G71

Function and purpose

This function calls the finished shape program and, while automatically calculating the tool path,
performs rough cutting in the longitudinal direction.

Command format

G71 Ud Re Hh ; (May be omitted when using value set in parameters)

G71 Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt ;
<H0: Used for finished shape with no pockets> <H1: Mainly used for finished shape with pocket>
G71 Ud Re H0 ; (R) G71 Ud Re H1 ; (R)
G71 Pp Qq . . ; (R) G71 Pp Qq . . ; Rough cutting (R)
Rough cutting start point start point
q q
(R/f) (R/f)

(f) d (f) d
X X
(f) (R)
(R)
u/2 u/2
(f) 45° e p Hole base p
(f) e
Z w Z w

Ud Cut amount (modal).................. Reversible parameter ("G71 THICK")

Unit ....... µm/ 1/10000 inch radius value command
Re Retract amount (modal)............ Reversible parameter ("G71 PULL UP")
Unit ....... µm/ 1/10000 inch radius value command
Hh Pocket machining (modal)........ Reversible parameter ("G71 POCKET")
0: Select this only for finished shapes that have no indent section (pocket).
* The cutting section will retract 45° per cycle, and finally will trace the finished
shape.
1: This can be selected whether or not there is an indent (pocket) in the finished
shape.
* The cutting section will trace the finished shape each cycle.
Parameter cutting method [Control parameter] "#8110 G71/G72 POCKET"
0: Do not machine pocket
1: Machine pocket
Pocket machining is selected with the parameter "#8110 G71/G72 POCKET" or with
Hh. However, if the following parameters are ON, pocket machining will be
automatically selected according to the number of axes in the finished shape start
block.
<ext08/bit0=0>
Follows parameter "#8110 G71/G72 POCKET" or Hh designation.
<ext08/bit0=1>
When X and Z axes are commanded in finished shape start block:
Pocket machining (equivalent to H1)
When only X or Z axis is commanded in finished shape start block:
Equivalent to H0
(Note) When ext08/bit0 = 1, the tool will retract in the X axis direction during cutting.
(Refer to section 13.3.1 "Cutting method and retract amount" for details.)

277
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Aa Finished shape program No. (Program being executed when omitted)

If the A command is omitted, the P and Q commands in the program being executed
will be used.
If A is omitted, the program will be executed in the order of G71 and then the
program following Qq (finished shape end sequence No.)
Pp Finished shape start sequence No. (Head of program when omitted)
Qq Finished shape end sequence No. (To end of program when omitted)
Even when Q is commanded, if M99 is commanded first the program will continue to
M99.
Uu X axis direction finishing allowance (When omitted, X axis direction finishing
allowance is handled as 0.)
Unit ......µm/ Follows 1/10000ich diameter/radius value command (#1019 dia).
Ww Z axis direction finishing allowance (When omitted, Z axis direction finishing
allowance is handled as 0.)
Unit ......µm/ Follows 1/10000ich radius value command
Ff Cutting speed (Follows cutting speed (modal) before G71 when omitted)
Ss,Tt Spindle command, tool command

278
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Cutting shape

(1) Finished shape start block and finished shape end block
G71 Aa Pp Qq
The finished shape start block and finished shape end block are designated with the above
command.
There may be up to 50 finished shape blocks, including the blocks inserted with corner
chamfer, corner R command and nose R command. A program error (P202) will occur if the
number of blocks is exceeded.

<When pocket machining is OFF> <When pocket machining is ON>

Cycle Cycle
command command
(R) (R)
(R)point (R)
point

q Rough cutting q Rough cutting

(R) start point (R) start point
(f)
(R/f) (R/f)
(f) Finished shape (R) Finished shape
(f) program program
G0 : R (f) G0 : R
X G1 : f G1 : f
X
d d
(R)
(R) (f)
(f) 45° e
P u/2 Hole base u/2
(f) e P
Z Z
w Finishing allowance w

<When creating finished shape program in <When creating finished shape program in program
machining program other than that being currently currently being executed>
executed> G71 Pp Qq
G71 Aa Pp Qq p: Finished shape start sequence No.
a: Finished shape program No. q: Finished shape end sequence No.
p: Finished shape start sequence No.
(From head of finished shape program when
omitted)
q: Finished shape end sequence No.
(To end of finished shape program or M99 when
omitted)
Program currently being executed Program currently being executed
G0 X80.0 Z75.0 T0101 ; ← (a) G0 X80.0 Z75.0 T0101 ; ← (a)
G71 U10. R3. ; ← (b) G71 U10. R3. ; ← (b)
G71 A100 P10 Q20 U3. W1.5 F500 S1500 ; ←(c) G71 P10 Q20 U3. W1.5 F500 S1500 ; ←(c)
G70 A100 P10 Q20 ; ← (d) N10 G0 X15.0 Z65.0 ;
: G1 Z55. F450 ;
Shape program G1 X30.0 ; Finished shape
O100 G3 X40.0 Z50.0 R5.0 ; program
G28 XZ ; G1 Z42.0 ;
N10 G0 X15.0 Z65.0 ; G1 X50.0 ;
G1 Z55. F450 ; G1 X55.0 Z35.0 ;
G1 X30.0 ; N20 G1 X60.0 ;
G3 X40.0 Z50.0 R5.0 ; Finished shape G70 A100 P10 Q20 ; ← (d)
: program
G1 Z42.0 ; Program execution order (a) (b) (c) (d)
G1 X50.0 Z35.0 ;
N20 G1 X60.0 ; * G70 command: Finishing cycle
N30 G0 X13.0 Z68.0 ; The workpiece is finished
: following the finishing program,
Program execution order (a) (b) (c) (d) and then the axis returns to the
G70 command position.

279
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

(2) Machining of open section and machining of mid-section

The rough cutting cycle machining includes that in which one end of the workpiece is open,
and that in which machining starts at a mid-section of the workpiece.
Machining of open section .............. Possible when pocket machining is either OFF or ON
Machining of mid-section ................ Possible only when pocket machining is ON
(Entire rough cutting cycle is handled as one pocket.)

<Machining of open section>

A (G71 cycle command point)

C (finished shape end block) Rough cutting start point

B (finished shape start block)

<Machining of mid-section>
A (G71 cycle command point)

C (finished shape end block) Rough cutting start point =

B (finished shape start block)

280
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

(3) Rough cutting direction

<Rough cutting direction when pocket machining is OFF>
Select one of the following.

• Automatically determine according to finished shape (ext09/bit2=0)

The rough cutting direction is determined in the following manner according to the finished
shape. The finished shape program is A → B → C.
C (finished shape end block) X axis > B (finished shape start block) Z axis (1) or (2)
C (finished shape end block) X axis < B (finished shape start block) Z axis (2) or (4)
C (finished shape end block) Z axis > B (finished shape start block) Z axis (2) or (3)
C (finished shape end block) Z axis < B (finished shape start block) Z axis (1) or (4)
* A program error (P203) will occur if C (finished shape end block) X axis = B (finished shape
start block) X axis, or C (finished shape end block) Z axis = B (finished shape start block) Z
axis.

A X A
C C

(2) (1)

B B

Z
B
B

(3) (4)

C C
A A

A (G71 cycle command point)

B (finished shape start block)
C (finished shape end block)

• Designate with program (ext09/bit2=1)

The finishing allowance direction follows the sign of the finishing allowance designated in the
program.

281
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

<Rough cutting direction when pocket machining is ON>

Select one of the following.

• Automatically determine according to finished shape (ext09/bit2=0)

The rough cutting direction is determined in the following manner according to the finished
shape. The finished shape program is A → B → C.
A (G71 cycle command point) X axis > B (finished shape start block) X axis, (1) or (2)
and B (finished shape start block) X axis ≤ C (finished shape end block) X
axis
A (G71 cycle command point) X axis < B (finished shape start block) X axis, (3) or (4)
and B (finished shape start block) X axis ≥ C (finished shape end block) X
axis
C (finished shape end block) Z axis > B (finished shape start block) Z axis (2) or (3)
C (finished shape end block) Z axis < B (finished shape start block) Z axis (1) or (4)
* A program error (P203) will occur if C (finished shape end block) Z axis = B (finished shape
start block) Z axis.

A
A X
C C
B
B

(2) (1)

(3) (4)

B B
C C
A A

A (G71 cycle command point)

B (finished shape start block)
C (finished shape end block)

* When setting the B point X axis at the base, the method is the same as the "<Rough
cutting direction when pocket machining is OFF>".

• Designate with program (ext09/bit2=1)

The finishing allowance direction follows the sign of the finishing allowance designated in the
program.

282
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

(4) Finished shape

Selection of cut start position (ext07/bit5)
The cut start position is obtained from the final position of the finished shape program, but this
can be changed to the cycle start point.

<ext07/bit5=0>
Cycle start point

Finishing allowance

First cut

Finished shape

Finishing allowance

<ext07/bit5=1>

Finishing allowance

First cut Finishing allowance

Cycle start point

Finished shape

Finishing allowance

283
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

<Finished shape in Z axis direction when pocket machining is OFF>

The Z axis direction finishing allowance must always change monotonously (only
increment, or only decrement).
A program error (P203) will occur if the shape is illegal.
<Finished shape in X axis direction when pocket machining is OFF>
As a principle, the X axis direction finishing allowance must change monotonously (increment
or decrement).
At sections that do not change monotonously, the rough cutting cycle will not be executed at
the indent section (pocket), but the finishing allowance will be traced as commanded. Thus, if
the pocket's X axis depth is not less than the cut amount, the cutting load will increase at the
pocket section. Take care when programming.
<Example of illegal Z axis direction when pocket machining is OFF>

A A
C C

B B
Z axis direction reverses Z axis direction reverses at middle of arc
Program error (P203) Program error (P203)

<Example of illegal X axis direction when pocket machining is OFF>

A
A C

Smaller than cut amount d

C B
There is a pocket when pocket
machining is OFF.
(An error will not occur, but the
B pocket section will be rough cut with
Program error (P203) one cut.)

284
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

<Finished shape in Z axis direction when pocket machining is ON>

The finished shape in the Z axis direction will always change monotonously (only increment,
or only decrement).
Sections that do not change monotonously will have a cover.
<Finished shape in X axis direction when pocket machining is ON>
As a principle, the finished shape in the X axis direction must change monotonously
(increment or decrement). The direction must reverse only at the indent shape (pocket).
Make sure that the blocks in the finished shape do not exceed the C (finished shape end
block) X axis position during pocket machining.
A program error (P203) if the interim blocks exceed the C (finished shape end block) X axis
position.
<Example of section where Z axis direction does not change monotonously when pocket machining is ON>
A A
C C

B B
The Z axis direction reverses, so a finished The Z axis direction reverses in the middle of the arc, so
shape with cover at shaded section is created. a finished shape with cover at the shaded section is
(The shaded section is not cut) created.
(The shaded section is not cut)

<Example of illegal X axis direction when pocket machining is ON>

A A

Block in finishing is higher

than finished end point
Smaller than cut amount d block.
C

B
B
Program error (P203) Program error (P203)

285
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

(5) Finished shape during nose R compensation

Selection of nose R compensation (ext07/bit6)
<ext07/bit6=0>
If there is a G71 command in nose R compensation, the G71 cycle command point will be
at the position where nose R compensation is temporarily canceled. The finished shape will
be created while nose R compensation is applied.
(Note) To machine a mid-section while pocket machining is ON, program so that the
finished shape start block's X axis position and finished shape end block's X axis
position are the same after nose R compensation is applied.
<Example of tool nose No. 3 (pocket machining OFF) ... Machining of open section>
G71 Ud Re H0 ;
Cycle command point
G71 Pp Qq ;
G0
G0
q
Rough cutting start point
G1
G1
G1
G0
G1
G3

G1

G1 p

<Example of tool nose No. 8 (pocket machining) ... Machining of mid-section>

G71 Ud Re H1 ;
G71 Pp Qq ; Cycle command point

G0
G0
q p
G1 G1
G1 Finished shape start block
G1 after nose R compensation
G1
Finished shape end block G3 G1
after nose R compensation
G1
G1

Precautions for machining mid-section

The mid-section will be machined when the finished shape start block's X axis position and
finished shape end block's X axis position are the same after nose R compensation.
Program so that the blocks enclosed with the square above move only the X axis (distance
more than nose R diameter).

<ext07/bit6=1>
The shape for which nose R compensation is not executed in the finished shape program
will be the rough cutting shape.

286
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Cut amount

(1) The cut amount is designated by Ud. However, it is possible to change the cut amount with
each cutting pass by setting the cut change amount (∆d) using a parameter.
Cut amount designation (ext07/bit7)
<ext07/bit7=0>
If the amount of one cut commanded in the program is deeper than the cutting depth of the
finished shape (d < ∆d), a program error (P204) occurred.

<ext07/bit7=1>
A program error will not occur even if the amount designated for one cut is deeper than the
cutting depth of the finished shape, and the command will be executed as one cut.
Note that the amount of one cut must be commanded between 0 and 99.999mm. A
program error will occur if the value is not within this range.

(2) The end of the cutting is the cut amount, but if this value is smaller than the value set in the
parameters, cutting will not be carried out, and instead finishing rough cutting will be executed.
Parameter Cut amount (d) [Machining parameter] "#8051 G71 THICK"
0 to 99.999mm
Cutting change amount (∆d) [Machining parameter] "#8017 G71 DELTA-D"
0 to 99.999mm
Minimum cut amount for final cut [Machining parameter] "#8016 G71 MINIMUM"
0 to 99.999mm

1st d + ∆d
d + ∆d

2nd d
d

3rd d – ∆d
d – ∆d

4th d + ∆d d + ∆d

Final margin Margin

287
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Cutting method and retract amount

(1) The cutting method differs according to whether pocket machining is ON or OFF.
Pocket machining OFF ............Retracts in 45° direction in respect to workpiece
Pocket machining ON ..............Traces shape
(2) The retract amount is designated with Re, but the retract amount can also be set by
designating the amount in the parameters.
Pocket machining OFF ............Retracts in 45° direction in respect to workpiece
Parameter retract amount (e) [Machining parameter] "#8052 G71 PULL UP" 0 to 99.999mm
<When pocket machining is OFF>

(R)
(f) 45° e
(f)
Z

<When pocket machining is ON>

<ext08/bit0=0> <ext08/bit0=1>

X X
(R)
(R) e
(f) (f)

Hole base Hole base

e
Z Z

(Note) ext08/bit0 is also used to select whether to automatically determine pocket machining.
(Refer to the explanation of "Hh" in Command format.)

288
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Finishing margin

When the finishing allowance is designated, the Uu/Ww section will be left uncut from the finished
shape.
X axis finishing allowance ...... The finishing allowance is left uncut in the rough cutting start
point direction.
Z axis finishing allowance ...... The finishing allowance is left uncut in the rough cutting start
point direction.
Note that if down cutting (block commanded in direction in which
X axis faces hole base) is executed when pocket machining is
ON and then cutting is started from the middle of the longitudinal
direction, the Z axis finishing allowance direction will be
reversed.
<Finishing allowance when pocket machining is OFF or finishing allowance of open section when pocket
machining is ON (finished shape start block X axis is at base)>
G71 Ud Re H0 (or H1) ; Cycle
G71 Pp Qq ... ; command
point
Finished shape end block
q Rough cutting
start point

(f)

Finished shape
start block

p u/2

w
<Finishing allowance of mid-section when pocket machining is ON (Finished shape start block X axis =
finished shape end block X axis)>
The block that starts cutting from the middle of the
G71 Ud Re H1; (Valid when pocket machining is ON) longitudinal direction will have a reversed Z axis
G71 Pp Qq ... ; Cycle finishing allowance direction.
command Note) During nose R compensation, program so that
point the p and q X axis positions after nose R
Finished shape end block
Rough cutting compensation have the same value. (Refer to
q start point p "Cutting shape" (5).)

Finished shape
start block

The block that executes down cut has a reversed Z

axis finishing allowance direction.
u/2

289
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Example of program

Machining of open section (example with pocket machining OFF)

Cycle
G71 Ud Re H0 ; command G0 X80.0 Z75.0 T0101 ; ← (1)
point G71 U10. R3. H0 ; ← (2)
(R)
(R) G71 P10 Q20 U3.W1.5 F500 S1500 ; ← (3)
q Rough cutting N10 G0 X15.0 Z65.0 ;
(R) start point G1 Z55. F450 ;
(R/f)
(f) G1 X30.0 ; Finished
(f)
Finished shape program G3 X40.0 Z50.0 R5.0 ; program
G0 : R
G1 : f G1 Z42.0 ;
X
d
G1 X50.0 ;
G1 X55.0 Z35.0 ;
(R)
(f) 45° e N20 G1 X60.0 ;
(f) P u/2 G70 P10 Q20 ; ← (4)
Z
w Finishing allowance Program execution order (1) (2) (3) (4)

Machining of open section (example with pocket machining ON)

Cycle G0 X80.0 Z75.0 T0101 ; ← (1)
command
(R) point G71 U10. R3. H1 ; ← (2)
(R) G71 P10 Q20 U3.W1.5 F500 S1500 ; ← (3)
q Rough cutting N10 G0 X15.0 Z65.0 ;
(f) (R) start point G1 Z55. F450 ;
(R/f) G1 X30.0 ; Finished
(R)
(f) Finished shape program G3 X40.0 Z50.0 R5.0 ; program
G0 : R
G1 : f G1 Z42.0 ;
X
d G1 X50.0 ;
(R)
(f) G1 X55.0 Z35.0 ;
Hole base N20 G1 X60.0 ;
u/2
e P G70 P10 Q20 ; ← (4)
Z w Finishing allowance Program execution order (1) (2) (3) (4)

Machining of mid-section (example with pocket machining ON)

Cycle
G71 Ud Re H1 ; command G0 X80.0 Z75.0 T0101 ; ← (1)
(R) point G71 U10. R3. H1 ; ← (2)
(R) Rough cutting G71 P10 Q20 U3.W1.5 F500 S1500 ; ← (3)
q start point N10 G0 X60.0 Z73.0 ;
(R) P
G1 X15.0 Z65.0 ;
G1 Z55. F450 ;
(f) G1 X30.0 ; Finished
(f)
G3 X40.0 Z50.0 R5.0 ; program
X
d G1 Z42.0 ;
(R)
(f) G1 X50.0 ;
Hole base G1 X55.0 Z35.0 ;
u/2
e N20 G1 X60.0 ;
Z w Finishing allowance G70 P10 Q20 ; ← (4)
Program execution order (1) (2) (3) (4)

290
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

13.3.2 Face rough cutting cycle; G72

Function and purpose

This function calls the finished shape program and, while automatically calculating the path,
performs rough cutting in the face direction.

Command format

G72 Wd Re Hh ; (May be omitted when using value set in parameters)

G72 Ae Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt ;
G72 Wd Re H0 ; G72 Wd Re H1 ;
Cycle G72 Pp Qq ... ; Cycle
G72 Pp Qq ... ; command command
(R/f) point (R/f) point
d Finished shape d Finished shape
(R)
program (R) program
G0 : R G0 : R
G1 : f Rough G1 : f
P cutting P
(R) Rough
cutting
(R) start point

(R) (R)
(f) (f)
Hole base

(f)
X X
e
(R)
(f) 45° (R) (f)
e
(f)
(f) q u/2 q u/2
Z Z
w Finishing allowance w
Finishing allowance

Wd Cut amount (modal)

Unit ....... µm/ 1/10000 inch radius value command
Re Retract amount (modal)............ Reversible parameter ("G71 PULL UP")
Unit ....... µm/ 1/10000 inch radius value command
Hh Pocket machining (modal)........ Reversible parameter ("G71 POCKET")
0: Select this only for finished shapes that have no indent section (pocket).
* The cutting section will retract 45° per cycle, and finally will trace the finished
shape.
1: This can be selected whether or not there is an indent (pocket) in the finished
shape.
* The cutting section will trace the finished shape each cycle.
Aa Finished shape program No. (Program being executed when omitted)
If the A command is omitted, the P and Q commands in the program being executed
will be used.
If A is omitted, the program will be executed in the order of G72 and then the
program following Qq (finished shape end sequence No.)
Pp Finished shape start sequence No. (Head of program when omitted)
Qq Finished shape end sequence No. (To end of program when omitted)
Even when Q is commanded, if M99 is commanded first the program will continue to
M99.

291
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Uu X axis direction finishing allowance (When omitted, X axis direction finishing

allowance is handled as 0.)
Unit ......µm/ Follows 1/10000ich diameter/radius value command (#1019 dia).
Ww Z axis direction finishing allowance (When omitted, Z axis direction finishing
allowance is handled as 0.)
Unit ......µm/ Follows 1/10000ich radius value command
Ff Cutting speed (Follows cutting speed (modal) before G72 when omitted)
Ss,Tt Spindle command, tool command

* The other detailed functions are the same as "13.3.1 Longitudinal rough cutting cycle".

292
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

13.3.3 Formed material rough cutting cycle; G73

Function and purpose

This calls the finished shape program, automatically calculates the path and performs rough cutting
while cutting the workpiece into the finished shape.

Command format

G73 Ui Wk Rd ;
G73 Aa Pp Qq Uu Ww Ff Ss Tt ;
Ui X-axis direction cutting allowance i • Cutting allowances when P, Q
Wk Z-axis direction cutting allowance k commands are not present
Rd Number of divisions d • Modal data
• Sign is ignored
• Radius designation applies to the
cutting allowance.
Aa Finished shape program number (program being executed when omitted)
Pp Finished shape start sequence number (program head when omitted)
Qq Finished shape end sequence number (up to end of program or M99 when
omitted)
Note that this is up to M99 when M99
comes first, even when there is a Qq
command.
Uu X-axis direction finishing allowance u • Cutting allowance when P, Q
Ww Z-axis direction finishing allowance w commands are present
• Sign is ignored.
• Diameter/radius designation changes
in accordance with the parameters
(#1019 dia).
• The shift direction is determined by the
shape. For details, refer to the
"finishing allowance direction" for G71.

Ff Cutting feedrate (F function) The F, S and T commands in the finished

Ss Spindle speed (S function) shape program are ignored and the value
Tt Tool command (T function) in the rough cutting cycle command or
previous value is valid.

293
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

k+w
S1
S2
X
S3 i + u/2
7
1
13 S
Z 2
19
6 8
14
12 5
E 18 11 4
17 10 3

16 9
15
A u/2
w

(Note) With a single block, operation stops at the end point of each block.

294
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Finished shape

In the program, S → A → E in the previous program are commanded.

The section between A and E must be a shape with monotonous changes in both the X axis and Z
axis directions.

1 cycle configuration

A cycle is configured as shown below.

Operation 1 :
Based on shape program
2(R)
with shape profiling
S 1 Operation 2 :
Rapid traverse on return
1
E
1
1
1

Cut amount

The cut amount is the value produced by dividing the cutting allowances (i, k) by the number of
divisions (d−1).
X axis direction i/(d−1)
Z axis direction k/(d−1)
When divisions cannot be made, chamfering is performed and adjustment is made at the final
pass.

i
(d-1)
i
(d-1)
i
(d-1)
Remainder
k
(d-1)
k k
Remainder (d-1) (d-1)

295
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Tool nose R compensation

When this cycle is commanded with the tool nose R compensation mode still in force, tool nose R
compensation is applied to the finished shape program covered by this cycle and the cycle is
executed for this shape.
However, when this cycle is commanded with the tool nose R compensation mode still in force, the
compensation is temporarily canceled immediately before this cycle and started at the head block
of the finished shape program.

Others

(1) Cutting direction

• Determined according to finish shape (ext09/bit2=0)
The shift direction for the cutting is determined by the shape in the finishing program, as shown
in the table below.

1 2 3 4

S1 S1 S
S E E
Drawing E E
S
S
S1
S1
Initial X axis "−" direction − + +
Complete Z
"−" direction + + −
axis
X axis cutting "+" direction + − −
Z axis cutting "+" direction − − +

• Determined according to commanded finish margin/cutting margin (ext09/bit2=1)

The shift direction for cutting follows the sign of the cutting allowance, etc., designated in the
program.

296
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

13.3.4 Finishing cycle; G70

Function and purpose

After rough cutting have been carried out by the G71 ~ G73 commands, finishing cutting can be
performed by the following command.
Command format

G70 A_ P_ Q_ ;
A Finished shape program number (program being executed when omitted)
P Finished shape start sequence number (program head when omitted)
Q Finished shape end sequence number (up to end of program when omitted)
Note that this is up to M99 when M99 comes first, even when there is a Q command.

(1) The F, S and T commands in the finished shape program are valid during the finishing cycle.
(2) When the G70 cycle is completed, the tool returns to the start point by rapid traverse and the
next block is read.
(Example 1) When a sequence number is designated
~

N100 G70 P200 Q300 ; N200 ……… ;

~

N110
N300 ……… ;

N120
~

N200
~

Finished shape program

N300
N310
~

(Example 2) When a program number is designated

~

N100 G70 A100 ;

N110 ……… ; O100
N120 ……… ;
G01 X100 Z50 F0.5 ;
~

M99 ;

If the N100 cycle is executed in either Example 1 or Example 2, the N110 block is executed
next.

297
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

13.3.5 Face cut-off cycle; G74

Function and purpose

The G74 fixed cycle automatically enters a groove in the face direction of the workpiece by
commanding the coordinates of the groove end point, cut amount, cutter shift amount and cutter
escape at the bottom of the cut.
The machining program commands are as follows.

Command format

G74 Re ;
C74 X/(U)x Z/(w)z Pi Qk Rd Ff ;
Re Return amount (no X/U, P commands) (modal)
X/Ux B point X coordinate (absolute/incremental value)
Z/Wz B point Z coordinate (absolute/incremental value)
Pi Tool shift amount (radius designation, incremental value, sign not required)
Qk Cut amount (radius designation, incremental value, sign not required)
Rd Escape at the bottom of the cut When there is no sign, escapes even at the
bottom of the first cut. When a - sign is
attached, the tool escapes from the second
cut without escaping the first cut.
Ff Feedrate

z w
(11)
(10) S (Start point)
(9) (5) (1) (12) • Operation (9) as well as
i (7) (4) (3) (2) operation (12) immediately
(8) (6)
d before the final cycle are
executed with the remainder
u/2 amount.
• Operations (2), (4), (6), (8),
(10), (11) and (12) are
e executed at the rapid traverse
rate.

B
x
k k k k

298
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Single block stop

Operation stops at each block from (1) to (12).

Others

(1) When X/U and P are omitted or when the values of "x" and "i" are zero, operation will apply to
the Z axis only. Note that when there is an Rd command and no sign, the tool will escape at the
bottom of the cut.
(2) A case where the X/U or Z/W command is not present is treated as the assignment of a
parameter setting command (G74 Re). Even when G74 Pi Qk Rd ; is commanded, Rd is
regarded as Re, and the return amount is set.
(3) The escape direction does not change when a - sign is attached to the Rd command, or when
there is no sign.
(4) A program error (P204) results in the following cases.
(a) When " i " is zero or P has not been commanded even though X/U has been commanded.
(b) When tool shift amount " i " is greater than the "x" movement amount.
(c) When the escape amount "d" is greater than the shift amount " i ".
(d) When the return amount "e" is greater than the cut amount "k".
(e) When the cut in amount "k" is larger than the hole depth "w".

299
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

13.3.6 Longitudinal cut-off cycle; G75

Function and purpose

The G75 fixed cycle automatically enters a groove in the longitudinal direction of the workpiece by
commanding the coordinates of the groove end point, cut amount, cutter shift amount and cutter
escape at the bottom of the cut.
Command format

G75 Re ;
C75 X/(U)x Z/(w)z Pi Qk Rd Ff ;
Re Return amount (no X/U, P commands) (modal)
X/Ux B point X coordinate (absolute/incremental value)
Z/Wz B point Z coordinate (absolute/incremental value)
Pi Cut amount (radius designation, incremental value, sign not required)
Qk Tool shift amount (radius designation, incremental value, sign not required)
Rd Escape at the bottom of the cut When there is no sign, escapes even at the
bottom of the first cut. When a - sign is
attached, the tool escapes from the second
cut without escaping the first cut.
Ff Feedrate

z w
S (Start point)
(12)
i
(1) • Operation (9) as well as
e (2)
operation (12) immediately
i (3) before the final cycle are
(4) executed with the remainder
(5) amount.
i (11) u/2 • Operations (2), (4), (6), (8),
(6) (10), (11) and (12) are
(7)
executed at the rapid traverse
i rate.
(8)
(9)

B
d (10)
k x

300
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Single block stop

Operation stops at each block from (1) to (12).

Others

(1) When Z/W and Q are omitted or when the values of "z" and "k" are zero, operation will apply to
the X axis only (slitting). Note that when there is an Rd command and no sign, the tool will
escape at the bottom of the cut.
(2) A case where both the X/U and Z/W commands are not present is treated as the assignment of
a parameter setting command (G75 Re). Even when G75 Pi Qk Rd ; is commanded, Rd is
regarded as Re, and the return amount is set.
(3) The escape direction does not change when a - sign is attached to the Rd command, or when
there is no sign.
(4) A program error (P204) results in the following cases.
(a) When "k" is zero or Q has not been commanded even though Z/W has been commanded.
(b) When tool shift amount "k" is greater than the "z" movement amount.
(c) When the escape amount "d" is greater than the shift amount "k".
(d) When the return amount "e" is greater than the cut amount " i ".
(e) When the cut in amount "i" is larger than the hole depth "u/2".

301
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

13.3.7 Compound thread cutting cycle; G76

Function and purpose

The G76 fixed cycle enables the workpiece to be cut at the desired angle by designating the thread
cutting start point and end point, and it automatically cuts so that the cutting cross section (cutting
torque) per cutting pass is constant.
Various longitudinal direction threads can be cut by bearing in mind the command value for the
thread end point coordinate and taper height component.

Command format

G76 Pmra Rd ;
G75 X/U Z/W Ri Pk Q∆d Fl ;
m Number of cutting passes for finishing: 00 ~ 99 (times) (modal)
r Chamfering amount: 00 ~ 99 (0.1mm/rev) (modal)
The chamfering width based on thread lead "l" is designated by a 2-digit integer
without decimal point from 0.0 to 9.9.
a Tool nose angle (thread angle): 00 ~ 99 (°) (modal)
The angle from 0° to 99° is assigned in 1° units.
"m", "r" and "a" are commanded in succession in address P.
(Example) When m=5, r=1.5 and a=0° P is 051500 and the leading and trailing
zeroes cannot be omitted.
d Finishing allowance 0 to 9999 (µm) (modal)
X/U X-axis end point coordinate of thread
The X coordinate of the end point for the thread is commanded by an absolute or
incremental value.
Z/W Z-axis end point coordinate of thread
The Z coordinate of the end point for the thread is commanded by an absolute or
incremental value.
i Taper height component (radius value) for thread straight thread when "i" is zero
k Thread height
This is commanded by a positive radial value.
∆d Cut amount
The cut amount of the first cutting pass is commanded by a positive radius value.
l Thread lead

(Note 1) The two above G76 commands cannot be placed in the same block.
The data commanded by P, Q and R are automatically identified according to the
presence or absence of the X/U and Z/W axis addresses.
(Note 2) Parameter settings can be used for the above "r" modal data but these parameter (#8014
chamfer amount) settings are rewritten by the program commands.
(Note 3) The chamfering amount designation is valid even for thread cutting fixed cycles.
(Note 4) Program error (P204) results in the following cases.
(a) When "a" is outside the rating
(b) When both the X and Z commands have not been issued or when the start and end
point coordinates are the same for either the X or Z command.
(c) When the thread is greater than the movement of the X axis at the thread bottom
(Note 5) The precautions for the thread cutting command (G33) and thread cutting cycle (G78)
should be observed.

302
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

1 cycle configuration

The tool moves at rapid traverse for operations (1), (2), (5) and (6) in the cycle and at the cutting
feed based on the F designation for operations (3) and (4).

z w

S
(6) (1)

(5)

u/2
(4)
(2)
(3)

( -i)

x r
When Ri is negative a°/2

z w

S
(6) (1)

(5)
(2)
u/2
(4) (3) k

i
a°/2

r
x When Ri is positive

303
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

a° ∆d for 1st
cutting pass

2nd cutting
k pass
∆d × √ 2 nth cutting pass
∆d × √ n

Finishing allowance "d"

(cutting results for "m" number of passes)

Example of program

X axis

The tool moves with rapid

traverse over the solid line
section, and at the cutting
feed that is F-designated
over the thread cutting
sections.
30.0
6.0
9.0
1.5l

32.0
0.2

Z axis

24.0 46.0

G76 P011560 R0.2 ;

G76 U−28.0 W−46.0 R9.0 P6.0 Q3.5 F4.0 ;

304
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

Interrupt operation

(1) When the feed hold button is pressed while G76 is being executed, automatic operation will
stop upon completion of a block without thread cutting if thread cutting is ongoing. (The
automatic operation pause lamp lights immediately in the feed hold mode and it goes off when
automatic operation stops.)
If feed hold is applied when no thread is then being cut, or if applied in the interval from the
execution of the thread cutting command to the axis movement, the automatic operation
pause lamp will turn ON, and the automatic operation will pause.
(2) The tool stops upon completion of operations (1), (4) and (5) when the mode is switched to
another automatic operation mode during the G76 command execution, when automatic
operation is changed to manual operations or when single block operation is conducted.
(3) The dry run valid/invalid status during G76 execution does not change during thread cutting.

305
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

13.3.8 Precautions for compound fixed cycles; G70 ~ G76

Precautions

(1) Command all required parameters in a compound fixed cycle command block.
(2) Provided that the finished shape program has been entered in the memory, compound fixed
cycle I commands can be executed in the memory, MDI or tape operation mode.
(3) When executing a G70 ~ G73 command, ensure that the sequence number of the finished
shape program which is stop with P and Q is not duplicated in that program.
(4) The finished shape program specified by P and Q in the G71 ~ G73 blocks should be prepared
so that the maximum number of blocks is 200 for all the commands for corner chamfering,
corner rounding and other commands including the automatic insertion blocks based on tool
nose R compensation. If this number is exceeded, program error (P202) results.
If the cutting start position is the cycle start position (#1271 ext07/bit5 =1), the finished shape
program can have up to 199 blocks. (When the cycle start point is on the other side of the
finished shape program's final position.)
(5) The finished shape program which is designated by the G71 ~ G73 blocks should be a
program with monotonous changes (increases or reductions only) for both the X and Z axes.
(6) Blocks without movement in the finished shape program are ignored.
(7) N, F, S, M, and T commands in the finished shape program are ignored.
(8) When any of the following commands are present in a finished shape program, program error
(P201) results.
(a) Commands related to reference point return (G27, G28, G29, G30)
(b) Thread cutting (G33)
(c) Fixed cycles
(d) Skip functions (G31, G37)
(9) If subprogram call or macro call commands are present in the finished shape program, these
commands will also be executed.
(10) Except for thread cutting cycles, operation stops at the end (start) point of each block in the
single block mode.

306
13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

(11) Remember that, depending on whether the sequence or program number is designated, the
next block upon completion of the G71, G72 or G73 command will differ.
(a) When the sequence number is (b) When the program number is
designated designated
The next block is the next block designated The next block is the next block of the cycle
by Q. command.

~
N100 G71P200 Q500 U_W_ ….. ; N100 G71 A100 U_W_ ….. ;
N200
N200
N300 O100
Finished shape N300
N400 program N10 X100. Z50. ;
N400
N500 N20
N600

Operation moves to the N600 block upon Operation moves to the N200 block upon
completion of the cycle. completion of the cycle.
(12) The next block applying upon completion of the G70 command is the next block of the
command block.
~

N100 ...... ;
N200 ;
N300 ;
N400 ;
N500 ;
~

N1000 G70 P200 Q500 ; (or G70 A100 ;)

N1100 ...... ;
~

Operation moves to the N1100 block upon completion of the G70 command.

(13) It is possible to apply a manual interrupt while a compound fixed cycle command (G70 ~ G76)
is being executed. However, upon completion of the interrupt, the tool must first be returned to
the position where the interrupt was applied and then the compound fixed cycle must be
restarted.
If it is restarted without the tool having been returned, all subsequent movements will deviate
by an amount equivalent to the manual interrupt amount.
(14) Compound fixed cycle commands are unmodal commands and so they must be issued every
time they are required.
(15) Program error (P203) results with the G71 and G72 commands even when, because of tool
nose R compensation, there is no further movement of the Z axis in the second block or the Z
axis has moved in the opposite direction.
(16) A program error (P204) will occur if the finished shape program is issued in the same program
with G70 to G73 and both P and Q are not designated.
Note that if A, P and Q are all not designated in G71 to G73, this will be interpreted as the first
block for the compound fixed cycle I, and an error will not occur.

307
 13. Program Support Functions
13.3 Compound fixed cycles

(17) Set the cycle start point in the final block of the compound turning fixed cycle I so that the tool
retracts from the workpiece cutting face. This is necessary to prevent the cutter from interfering
with the convex sections of the workpiece.
Poor example Good example
Cycle command point
Interferes at final block since cycle start
point is low

q q

Cycle
command
point

p p

(18) Pocket machining is an option. If the option is not provided, H1 will operate as H0 even if
designated.

308
 13. Program Support Functions
13.4 Compound fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

13.4 Compound fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

Function and purpose

This function allows a prepared fixed cycle to be executed by commanding the program in one
block.
When using the MELDAS special format (#1265 ext01/bit0 ON), some of the addresses differ from
the normal format.
With the normal format, G71 to G76 are commanded in two blocks. However with the MELDAS
special format, these are commanded with one block. The sections that differ from the normal
format are explained in this section.
Refer to section "13.3 Compound fixed cycle" for details on the compound fixed cycle.

Command format

G71 P Q U_ W D F S T ;
(Same for G72)
P Finished shape start sequence No.
Q Finished shape end sequence No.
U X axis direction finishing allowance
W Z axis direction finishing allowance
D Cut amount
F Cutting speed
S Spindle speed
T Tool command

G73 P Q U_ W I K D F S T ;
P Finished shape start sequence No.
Q Finished shape end sequence No.
U X axis direction finishing allowance
W Z axis direction finishing allowance
I X axis direction cutting allowance
K Z axis direction cutting allowance
D Number of divisions
F Cutting speed
S Spindle speed
T Tool command

G74 X(U) Z(W) I K F D ;

(Same for G75)
X(U) X axis slot insertion end point coordinate
Z(W) Z axis slot insertion end point coordinate
I Tool shift amount (X/U axis direction movement amount)
K Cut amount (Z/W axis direction cut amount)
F Cutting speed
D Tool escape amount at cutting base

309
13. Program Support Functions
13.4 Compound fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

G76 X(U) Z(W) I K D F A Q P ;

X(U) Thread section X axis end point coordinate
Z(W) Thread section Z axis end point coordinate
I Radius value at thread section
K Thread height
D 1st cut amount
F Thread lead
A Thread angle
Q Thread cutting start shift amount (0.001 to 360.000 [°])
P Zigzag thread cutting at P2 command

Detailed description

(1) Check of command format

A check is performed to check whether the normal command format is being used with the
MELDAS special format.
[When normal format is selected (#1265 ext01/bit0 OFF)]
(a) Check of command format
If the format check selection parameter (#1222 aux06/bit5) is set to 0, a program error
(P33) will occur in the following cases.
• There is no 1st block command.
• A MELDAS special format is commanded.

(b) Check of command address

A program error (P32) will occur in the following cases.
• When address I, K or D is commanded in the G71, G72, G73, G74 or G75 block.
• When address I, K, D or A is commanded in the G76 block.

[When MELDAS special format is selected (#1265 ext01/bit0 ON)]

(a) Check of command format
A program error (P33) will occur if a normal format is commanded.

(b) Check of command address

A program error (P32) will occur in the following cases.
• When address R or A is commanded in the G71, G72 or G73 block.
• When address P, Q or R is commanded in the G74 or G75 block.
• When address R is commanded in G76 the block.

310
13. Program Support Functions
13.4 Compound fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(2) Comparison of MELDAS special format and normal format

While the normal format is commanded with two blocks, the MELDAS special format is
commanded with one block. Some addresses differ, and some are designated with the
parameters.
Function MELDAS special format Normal format Difference from normal format
Longitudinal G71 P Q U W D F S T ; (1) G71 U R ; Cut amount
rough cutting (2) G71 A P Q U W F S T ; Designate with U (1) → D
cycle I Retract amount
R (1) → Parameter (#8052 G71 PULL
UP)
No A command (finished shape program
No.)
Face rough G72 P Q U W D F S T ; (1) G72 W R ; Cut amount
cutting cycle I (2) G72 A P Q U W F S T ; Designate with W (1) → D
Retract amount
R (1) → Parameter (#8052 G71 PULL
UP)
No A command (finished shape program
No.)
Formed G73 P Q U W I K D F S T ; (1) G73 U W R ; X axis cutting allowance
material (2) G73 A P Q U W F S T ; U (1) → I
rough cutting Z axis cutting allowance
cycle W (1) → K
Number of divisions
R (1) → D
No A command (finished shape program
No.)
Face cut-off G74 X Z I K F D ; (1) G74 R ; X axis direction movement amount
cycle or (2) G74 X Z P Q R F ; P (2) → I
G74 U W I K F D ; or Z axis direction cut amount
Q (2) → K
(1) G74 R ;
Escape amount at cutting base
(2) G74 U W P Q R F ; R (2) → D
Return amount
R (1) → parameter (#8056 G74
RETRACT)
Outer G75 X Z I K F D ; (1) G75 R ; X axis direction cut amount
diameter or (2) G75 X Z P Q R F ; P (2) → I
cut-off cycle Z axis direction movement amount
G75 U W I K F D ; or
Q (2) → K
(1) G75 R ;
Escape amount at cutting base
(2) G75 U W P Q R F ; R (2) → D
Return amount
R (1) → parameter (#8056 G74
RETRACT)
Compound G76 X_ Z_ I_ K_ D_ F_ A_ (1) G76 Pmra R_; Radius at thread section
thread cutting Q_ ; (2) G76 X_ Z_ R_ P_ Q_ R (2) → I
cycle F_ ; Thread height
P (2) → K
1st cut amount
Q (2) → D
(Q in the MELDAS special format is
the thread cutting start shift angle)
Thread angle
P (1) a → A
Thread cutting
P (1) r → parameter (#8014 CDZ-
VALE)
Number of finish cuts
P (1) m → parameter (#8058 TIMES)
Finishing allowance
R (1) → parameter (#8057 G76
LAST-D)

311
13. Program Support Functions
13.4 Compound fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

Zigzag thread cutting

By commanding P2 in the G76 block of the compound thread cutting cycle, zigzag thread cutting
with a set cut amount can be carried out.

z w

(5) (6) (1)

(4)
u/2
(3)
(2)

When Ii (taper height element at thread section) is negative

x
r

z w

(5) (6) (1)

a

(2)
u/2
(4) (3)

x When Ii (taper height element at thread section) is positive

r

312
13. Program Support Functions
13.4 Compound fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

Tool nose

The cut amount increases at a set rate.

√2D/2
H1

(√2+√4)D/2
√2D

√4D

(√4+√6)D/2

√6D
H2 k
H3
H4
H5
H6 H7
H8
d (Finishing allowance)
H9
Parameter setting value

Relational expression of cut amount

H1 = H2 ∗ 1/2 = (√2 ∗ D) ∗ 1/2
H2 = √2 ∗ D
H3 = H2 + (H4 - H2) ∗ 1/2 = (√2 + √4) ∗ D ∗ 1/2
H4 = √4 ∗ D
H5 = H4 + (H6 - H4) ∗ 1/2 = (√4 + √6) ∗ D ∗ 1/2
H6 = √6 ∗ D
:
:
Hn = (√(n-1) + √(n+1)) ∗ ∆d/2 (n = 1,3,5,7,.....)
Hn = √n ∗ ∆d (n = 2,4,6,8,.....)

Precautions and restrictions

(1) Always designate P and Q in G71 to G73. A program error (P204) will occur if either is not
designated.
(2) The thread cutting start shift angle is to a modal. If there is no Q command at G76, this will be
handled as "Q0".
(3) If a value exceeding 360.000 is commanded for Q in G76, it will be handled as "Q360.000".
(4) G76 cuts one row with one cycle. To cut two rows, change the Q value, and issue the same
command.

313
 13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles; G80 ~ G89

Function and purpose

These fixed cycles are used for predetermined sequences of machining operations such as normal
positioning, hole drilling, boring and tapping which are specified in a block. The various sequences
available using these functions are listed in the table below.
Hole
Operation at hole Return
G code drilling Hole drilling start Application
bottom operation
axis
G80 − − − − Cancel
Cutting feed, In-position check Rapid Deep hole
G83 Z Dwell
intermittent feed traverse drilling cycle 1
In-position check Tapping cycle
G84 Dwell, spindle
Z Cutting feed Cutting feed (Reverse tap
(G84.1) reverse rotation cycle)
In-position check
G85 Z Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring cycle

Cutting feed, In-position check Rapid Deep hole

G87 X Dwell
intermittent feed traverse drilling cycle 1
In-position check Tapping cycle
G88 Dwell, spindle
X Cutting feed Cutting feed (Reverse tap
(G88.1) reverse rotation cycle)
In-position check
G89 X Cutting feed Dwell Cutting feed Boring cycle

Cutting feed, In-position check Rapid Deep hole

G83.2 Z/X Dwell
intermittent feed traverse drilling cycle 2
A fixed cycle mode is canceled when the G80 or any G command in the 01 group is issued. The
various data will also be cleared simultaneously to zero.

314
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

Command format

(1) Face hole drilling

G8∆ X/U C/H Z/W R Q P F K D S ,S M ;
G8∆ Hole machining mode (G83, G84, G85)
X/U C/H Hole positioning data
Z/W R Q P F Hole machining data
K Number of repetitions
D Tool spindle No.
S Spindle rotation speed
,S Spindle rotation speed at return
M Miscellaneous command

(2) Longitudinal hole drilling

G8* Z/W C/H X/U R Q P F K D S ,S M ;
G8* Hole machining mode (G87, G88, G89)
Z/W C/H Hole positioning data
X/U R Q P F Hole machining data
K Number of repetitions
D Tool spindle No.
S Spindle rotation speed
,S Spindle rotation speed at return
M Miscellaneous command

(3) Cancel
G80 ;

315
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

(4) Data outline and corresponding addresses

(a) Hole machining modes : These are the fixed cycle modes for drilling (G83, G87),
tapping (G84, G88) and boring (G85, G89).
These are modal commands and once they have been issued,
they will remain valid until another hole machining mode
command, the cancel command for the hole drilling fixed
cycle or a G command in the 01 group is issued.
(b) Hole positioning data : These are for the positioning of the X (Z) and C axes.
These are unmodal data, and they are commanded block by
block when the same hole machining mode is to be executed
continuously.
(c) Hole machining data : These are the actual machining mode.
Except for Q, they are modal. Q in the G83 or G87 command
is unmodal and is commanded block by block as required.
(d) Number of repetitions : This number is designated for machining holes at equal
intervals when the same cycle is to be repeated.
The setting range is from 0 to 9999; the decimal point is not
valid.
The number is unmodal and is valid only in the block in which
it has been assigned.
When this number is not designated, it is treated as K1. When
K0 is designated, the hole machining data are stored in the
memory but no holes will be machined.

Address Significance
Selection of hole machining cycle sequence (G80, G83, G84, G85,
G
G87, G88, G89)
∗ X/U (Z/W), Designation of hole position initial point (absolute/incremental
C/H value)
Designation of hole bottom position (absolute/incremental value
∗ Z/W (X/U)
from R point)
Designation of R point position (incremental value from initial point)
R
(sign ignored)
Designation of cut amount for each cutting pass with G83 (G87);
Q
always incremental value, radius value (sign ignored)
Designation of dwell time at hole bottom point; relationship between
P
time and designated value is same as for G04 designation
F Designation of feedrate for cutting feed
K Designation of number of repetitions, 0 ~ 9999 (standard value = 1)
D Designate of spindle used in tap cycle
S Designation of spindle rotation speed
,S Designation of spindle rotation speed at return
Designation of synchronous tapping/asynchronous tapping
,R (Note) The spindle rotation direction can be reversed using the
synchronous tap command polarity reversal signal.
M Designation of miscellaneous command
∗ : Addresses in parentheses apply for commands G87, G88 and G89.

316
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

Detailed description

The hole drilling axes for the hole drilling fixed cycle and the positioning are shown in the outline
drawing below.

During the hole drilling cycle, the C axis

(spindle) is clamped so that it does not move.

(3)
(4)
x4
(1)
q4
(2)
z2
q2
r2
r4 x2

z4 C

Rotary tool for X axis

+Z
Rotary tool for Z axis +X

Commands M03, M04 and M05 (forward rotation, reverse rotation

and stop) apply to the rotary tools.

(1) G83 Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 ;
(2) G83 Xx2 Cc2 Zz2 Rr2 Qq2 Pp2 Ff2 Kk2 ;
(3) G87 Zz3 Cc3 Xx3 Rr3 Qq3 Pp3 Ff3 Kk3 ;
(4) G87 Zz4 Cc4 Xx4 Rr4 Qq4 Pp4 Ff4 Kk4 ;

317
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

Example of operation

There are 7 actual operations which are each described in turn below.

Operation 1 Operation 2 Initial point

Operation 3 Operation 7
R point

Operation 4
Operation 6
Operation 5

Operation 1 : This denotes the positioning (by rapid traverse) of the tool to the X (Z) and C
axis initial point. If ",I" (Positioning axis in-position width) is commanded,
in-position check will be carried out after the block completes.
Operation 2 : This is output provided that the M code for C-axis clamping is issued.
Operation 3 : The tool is positioned as far as the R point by rapid traverse.
Operation 4 : Hole machining is conducted by cutting feed.
If ",J" (Hole drilling axis in-position width) is commanded, in-position check will
be carried out after the block completes.
Note that in case of deep drilling cycle 1 or 2, in-position check will not be
carried out halfway for the hole drilling. It will be carried out at designated hole
bottom position (the last hole drilling).
Operation 5 : This operation takes place at the hole bottom position and it differs according
to the fixed cycle mode. Possible actions include rotary tool reverse rotation
(M04), rotary tool forward rotation (M03) and dwell.
Operation 6 : The tool is retracted as far as the R point.
Operation 7 : The tool is returned as far as the initial point at the rapid traverse rate.
(Operations 6 and 7 may be a single operation depending on the fixed cycle mode.)

(Note) As for the synchronous tapping command, in-position check will be carried out depending on
the parameter #1223 (Synchronous tap improvement). (Only some models)

Whether the fixed cycle is to be completed at operation 6 or 7 can be selected by the following G
commands.
G98 ..... Initial level return
G99 ..... R point level return

These G commands are modal. Once, for instance, G98 is designated, the G98 mode will remain
valid until the G99 command is issued. The G98 mode is established in the initialized state when
the NC unit is ready to operate.

318
 13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

In-position check at synchronous tapping

Refer to "Example of operation" for in-position check of the other hole drilling cycle (including
asynchronous tapping).

Setting values of synchronous tap in-position check parameters and tap axis movement

(1) Synchronous tap in-position check settings

Synchro- Hole R point I point →

nous tap bottom in- R point
"P" designation of In-position check during synchronous tap
improve- in- position in-
position position G84/G88 command
ment check
check check
‘0’ — — — — Carry out in-position check at I point → R point/R point/
hole bottom.
‘1’ — — — No "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
S1000 R-5. I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Valid Valid Valid "P" designation Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tap
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. in-position width.
S1000 PO R point: Carry out in-position check.
R-5. I point → R point: Carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Valid Invalid Valid "P" designation Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tap
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. in-position width.
S1000 PO R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
R-5. I point → R point: Carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Invalid Valid Valid "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Carry out in-position check.
S1000 PO I point → R point: Carry out in-position check.
R-5.
‘1’ Invalid Invalid Valid "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
S1000 PO I point → R point: Carry out in-position check.
R-5.
‘1’ Valid Valid Invalid "P" designation Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tap
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. in-position width.
S1000 PO R point: Carry out in-position check.
R-5. I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Valid Invalid Invalid "P" designation Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tap
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. in-position width.
S1000 PO R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
R-5. I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Invalid Valid Invalid "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Carry out in-position check.
S1000 PO I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
R-5.
‘1’ Invalid Invalid Invalid "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
S1000 PO I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
R-5.

(Note 1) The I point refers to the initial point.

(Note 2) "Synchronous tap improvement" in the above table corresponds to #1223 aux07/bit3 Synchronous
tap in-position check improvement, "Hole bottom in-position check" corresponds to #1223 aux07/
bit4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check, and "R point in-position check" corresponds to
#1223 aux07/bit5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2.

319
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

(2) In-position width and tap axis movement for a synchronous tap in-position check

FIN
Hole bottom R point

(1) Section in which the in-

↑ position check is carried
Speed
out by the SV024 value.
Time T → (2) Section in which the in-
Start of position check is carried
G0 feed
In-position to the R out by the TapInp value.
completion of G1 point → (3) Section in which the in-
the G0 feed deceleration G1 deceleration
from the R start at tap start at tap return → position check is carried
point → cut-in → out by the G1inps value.
(4) (2) (3) (1) (4) Section in which the in-
R point : In-position check by the G1inps value. position check is carried
I point : In-position check by the G0inps value. out by the G0inps value.
Hole bottom : In-position check by the Tapinps value.

320
 13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

(3) Relation between the parameter setting values and tap axis movement for a synchronous tap
in-position check
Synchro- In-position In-position In-position Operation at
nous tap check at check at check at Hole bottom Operation at Operation at I point →
improve- hole R point I point → wait time hole bottom R point R point
ment bottom R point
‘0’ — — — Time designated Operation Operation Operation
by "P". determined by determined by determined by
Processing time is setting of inpos setting of inpos setting of inpos
several 10ms (#1193) and aux (#1193) and aux (#1193) and aux
when no "P". 07 (#1223): bit 1 07 (#1223): bit 1 07 (#1223): bit 1
parameters. parameters. parameters.
‘1’ Not Not Executed Larger value of Wait until time in Wait until
executed executed "P" and TapDwl left column has completion of
(#1313) is valid. elapsed. in-position check
No dwell executed by G0inps value.
if both values are
0.
‘1’ Not Executed Executed Larger value of Wait until time in Wait until Wait until
executed "P" and TapDwl left column has completion of completion of
(#1313) is valid. elapsed. in-position check in-position check
No dwell executed by G1inps value. by G0inps value.
if both values are
0.
‘1’ Executed Not Executed Larger value of Wait until dwell Wait until
executed "P" and TapDwl time in left column completion of
(#1313) is valid. has elapsed after in-position check
No dwell executed completion of by G0inps value.
if both values are in-position check.
0.
‘1’ Executed Executed Executed Larger value of Wait until dwell Wait until Wait until
"P" and TapDwl time in left column completion of completion of
(#1313) is valid. has elapsed after in-position check in-position check
Processing time is completion of by G1inps value. by G0inps value.
several 10ms if in-position check.
both values are 0.
‘1’ Not Not Not Larger value of Wait until time in
executed executed executed "P" and TapDwl left column has
(#1313) is valid. elapsed.
No dwell executed
if both values are
0.
‘1’ Not Executed Not Larger value of Wait until time in Wait until
executed executed "P" and TapDwl left column has completion of
(#1313) is valid. elapsed. in-position check
No dwell executed by G1inps value.
if both values are
0.
‘1’ Executed Not Not Larger value of Wait until dwell
executed executed "P" and TapDwl time in left column
(#1313) is valid. has elapsed after
No dwell executed completion of
if both values are in-position check.
0.
‘1’ Executed Executed Not Larger value of Wait until dwell Wait until
executed "P" and TapDwl time in left column completion of
(#1313) is valid. has elapsed after in-position check
Processing time is completion of by G1inps value.
several 10ms if in-position check.
both values are 0.

(Note 1) The I point refers to the initial point.

(Note 2) "Synchronous tap improvement" in the above table corresponds to #1223 aux07/bit3 Synchronous tap
in-position check improvement, "Hole bottom in-position check" corresponds to #1223 aux07/
bit4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position check, and "R point in-position check" corresponds to
#1223 aux07/bit5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2.

Remarks: The processing time is several 10ms when an in-position check is not carried out at the
hole bottom.
The processing time is between 0 to 14.2ms when an in-position check is not carried
out at the R point.
The processing time is the spindle gain changeover time when an in-position check is
not carried out at I point → R point.

321
 13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

13.5.1 Face deep hole drilling cycle 1; G83 (Longitudinal deep hole drilling cycle 1; G87)

When the Q command is present (deep hole drilling)

G83 (G87) X(z) C Z(x) R r Q q P p F f K k Mm ;

G98 mode G99 mode

Initial point Initial point

(Mα) (Mα)
(Mβ), P '
r r
R point
R point (Mβ)
q q P'
d d

q q
d d

q q
.. ..
. .
P -Z point P Z point

(1) Return amount "d" is set by the setup parameter (#8013 G83 return). The tool returns at rapid
traverse.
(2) (Mα) : The M code (Mm) is output when there is a C-axis clamping M code command (Mm).
(3) (Mβ) : The C-axis unclamping M code (C-axis clamp M code + 1 = Mm + 1) is output when
there is a C-axis clamping M code command (Mm).
(4) P : Dwell is performed for the duration equivalent to the time designated by P.

(5) P' : After the C-axis unclamping M code (Mm+2) has been output, dwell is performed for
the duration equivalent to the time set by the parameter (#1184 clmp_ D).

When the Q command is not present (drilling)

G83 (G87) X(z)__ C__ Z(x)__ R r Pp F f Kk Mm ;

G98 mode G99 mode

Initial point Initial point

(Mβ), P ' (Mα)

(Mα)

R point R point
(Mβ), P '

Z point P Z point P

See "When the Q command is present (deep hole drilling)" for details on Mα, Mβ, P and P ' .

322
 13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

13.5.2 Face tapping cycle; G84 (Longitudinal tapping cycle; G88)

/ Face reverse tapping cycle; G84.1 (Longitudinal reverse tapping cycle; G88.1)

Detailed description

G84 (G88) is explained below. With the reverse tapping cycle G84.1 (G88.1), the tap rotation
direction is reversed.
G84 (G88) Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 Dd1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Rr2 Mm1 ;
G98 mode G99 mode

~Rotary tool ~Rotary tool

Initial point
Initial point
(Mα) (Mα)
R point
R point (Mβ), P '
(Mβ), P '

Forward rotation Forward rotation

of rotary tool of rotary tool
Reverse rotation Reverse rotation
of rotary tool Z point P of rotary tool Z point P

(1) See Section 13.5.1"When the Q command is present (deep hole drilling)" for details on Mα, Mβ,
P and P ' .

(2) When G84 (G88) is executed, the override will be canceled and the override will automatically
be set to 100%.
(3) Dry run is valid when the control parameter "G00 DRY RUN" is ON and is valid for the
positioning command. If the feed hold button is pressed during G84 (G88) execution, block stop
occurs after returning completes.
(4) During single block operation, the axis will not stop at the turning point of tap cycle.
(5) During the G84 (G88) modal, the "Tapping" NC output signal will be output.
(6) During the G84 (G88) synchronous tapping modal, the M3, M4, S code, etc. will not be output.
(7) The tool stops at the reference point and the rotary tool forward rotation signal is output.
(8) The rotation of the rotary tool is reversed at the hole bottom and tapping is performed.
(9) Before the rotary tool reverse (M04) or forward rotation (M03) signal is output, the fixed cycle
subprograms should be edited if the rotary tool stop (M05) command is required.

323
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

Synchronous/asynchronous tap selection

(1) Selecting with a program command

Tap cycle ",R0/1" command
G84 (G88) Xx1 Cc1 Zz1 Rr1 Pp1 Ff1 Kk1 Dd1 Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Rr2 Mm1 ;
When r2 = 1, the synchronous tap mode is entered, and when r2 = 0, the asynchronous tap
mode is entered.

(2) Selecting with parameters

[Base specifications parameters]
Setting range
# Items Details
(unit)
1229 set01 bit4 0: Handles the tap cycles as the tap cycles 0/1
with a floating tap chuck.
1: Handles the tap cycles as the tap cycles
without a floating tap chuck.
The tap command will be the synchronous tap cycle when this parameter is turned ON.

(3) Selecting with M function

[Base specifications parameters]
Setting range
# Items Details
(unit)
1272 ext08 bit1 M function synchronous tap cycle valid 0: Invalid
(PR) 1: Valid
Synchronous tap cannot be selected with the M function when this parameter is OFF.

[Base specifications parameters]

Setting range
# Items Details
(unit)
1513 stapM M code for synchronous tap selection 0 to 99999999
The synchronous tap mode is selected with the M function code set with this parameter.
The M function can be commanded in the same block before the tap command.

(Note) Do not use M00, 01, 02, 30, 98 or 99.

(Example)
M29 ; (M command synchronous tap)
G84 Z50. R20. F2. ; or G84 Z50. R20. F2. M29 ;
The synchronous and asynchronous tap will follow the combination shown below.
Combination
Program command (,R0/1) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 No command
#1229 (bit4) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
M function code (M**) × { × { × { × { × { × {
Synchronous/
A A A A S S S S A S S S
asynchronous selection
× : Does not command A : Asynchronous tap
{ : Commands S : Synchronous tap

324
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

Canceling synchronous tap selection

The synchronous tap selection is canceled when the reset, G80 (hole drilling fixed cycle cancel), 01
group G code or other fixed cycle G code is commanded.

Spindle acceleration/deceleration pattern during synchronous tap

This function allows spindle acceleration/deceleration pattern to be approached to the speed loop
acceleration/deceleration pattern by dividing the spindle and drilling axis acceleration/ deceleration
pattern into up to three stages during synchronous tapping.
The acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set up to three stages for each gear.
When returning from the hole bottom, rapid return is possible depending on the spindle rotation
speed during return. The spindle rotation speed during return is held as modal information.

(1) When tap rotation speed < spindle rotation speed during return ≤ synchronous tap changeover
spindle rotation speed 2

Smax
S2

S(S1)

T2
T1 T1

T1 T1

S1
S’
S2
Smax T2

S : Command spindle rotation speed

S' : Spindle rotation speed during return
S1 : Tap rotation speed (spindle base specification parameters #3013 to #3016)
S2 : Synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2
(spindle base specification parameters #3037 to #3040)
Smax : Maximum rotation speed (spindle base specification parameters #3005 to
#3008)
T1 : Tap time constant (spindle base specification parameters #3017 to #3020)
T2 : Synchronous tap changeover time constant 2
(spindle base specification parameters #3041 to #3044)

325
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

(2) When synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2 < spindle rotation speed during
return

Smax
S2
S(S1)
T3
T2
T1 T1

T1 T1

S1
S2
S'(Smax)
T2
T3

S : Command spindle rotation speed

S' : Spindle rotation speed during return
S1 : Tap rotation speed (spindle base specification parameters #3013 to #3016)
S2 : Synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2
(spindle base specification parameters #3037 to #3040)
Smax : Maximum rotation speed (spindle base specification parameters #3005 to
#3008)
T1 : Tap time constant (spindle base specification parameters #3017 to #3020)
T2 : Synchronous tap changeover time constant 2
(spindle base specification parameters #3041 to #3044)
T3 : Synchronous tap changeover time constant 3
(spindle base specification parameters #3045 to #3048)

Precautions for commanding tool spindle No. (Dd1)

(1) The command value range is "1 to the number of spindles". A program error (P35) will occur if
a value exceeding the range is set.
(2) When multiple spindle control II is valid, the spindle is selected from the PLC so do not
command Dd1. A program error (P32) will occur if commanded.
(3) When Dd1 is omitted, the spindle designated with the spindle selection command will be
selected.

326
 13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

13.5.3 Face boring cycle; G85 (Longitudinal boring cycle; G89)

Detailed description

G85 (G89) X (z)_ C_ Z (x)_ R_ P_ F_ K_ M_ ;

G98 mode G99 mode

Initial point Initial point

(Mα)

R point R point
(Mβ), P ' (Mβ), P '

f 2f f 2f

Z point P Z point P

(1) See Section 13.5.1 "When the Q command is present (deep hole drilling)" for details on Mα,
Mβ, P and P ' .

(2) The tool returns to the R point at a cutting feedrate which is double the designated feedrate
command. However, it does not exceed the maximum cutting feedrate.

13.5.4 Deep hole drilling cycle 2; G83.2

Function and purpose

The deep hole drilling cycle 2 drills deep holes in the X-axis or Z-axis direction by commanding the
X or Z coordinate of the end point and the cut amount with cutting feed.

Command format

G83.2 W/Z/U/X R I K A Q J F ;
W/Z/U/X Incremental value from hole drilling start point/coordinates of hole bottom (with
sign)
R Incremental value (sign ignored) from present position up to hole drilling start
point, always radius value with incremental value.
I Cut amount of first cutting pass (sign ignored), always radius value with
incremental value.
K Cut amount of second and subsequent cutting passes (sign ignored), always
radial value with incremental value.
A Drill stop safety distance for second and subsequent cutting passes (sign
ignored), always radial value with incremental value.
Q Dwell time at cut point (sign ignored, decimal point invalid)
J Dwell time at return point (sign ignored, decimal point invalid)
F Cutting feedrate

327
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

Operation

Z W R
K K K I
A A A A

(For Z-axis direction)

G1 G0
Dwell J
G0
Dwell Q

No dwell J

Example of program (when deep hole drilling cycle 2 is used as a modal command)

G28 XZ ;
G0 X0. Z0. ;................................................................................................................. (1)
G83.2 Z110. R20. I30. K20. A5. Q1000 J500. F300. ; ............................................... (2)
X100. ;......................................................................................................................... (3)
X50. ;........................................................................................................................... (4)
M02 ;

Operation

100. (3) Hole drilling

Movement as
far as X100. Movement as far as X50.

50. (4) Hole drilling

(2) Hole drilling

(1) 20. 50. 70. 90. 110. Z

328
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

Detailed description

(1) When the drill stop safety distance (address "A") command is not given, the parameter #8013
return parameter setting value is used.
(2) The deep hole drilling cycle 2 is a modal command and so it will remain valid until a command
in the same modal group or the cancel command (G80) is issued.
(3) If the command either for the cut amount (address "I") for the first cutting pass or the cut
amount (address "K") for the second and subsequent passes is not present (including a
command value of zero), the command value which is present will be used and the operation
will be executed with both I and K equal to the command value.
If both commands are not present, hole drilling is conducted once as far as the hole bottom.
(4) When the axis address of the hole drilling axes has been commanded a multiple number of
times in a block, the address commanded last is valid.
(5) The deep hole drilling fixed cycle 2 is also canceled by any G code in the 01 group except G80.
If it is commanded in the same block as the fixed cycle, the fixed cycle will be ignored.
m = 01 group code, n = hole drilling fixed cycle code

(a) Gm Gn X(z)__ C__ Z(x)__ R__ I__ K__ A__ Q__ J__ F__ ;
Executed Ignored Executed Ignored Memorized

(b) Gn Gm X(z)__ C__ Z(x)__ R__ I__ K__ A__ Q__ J__ F__ ;
Ignored Executed Ignored Memorized

(Examples) G01 G83.2 Z50. R−10. I8. K10. A3. Q1000 J500 F100. ;
G83.2 G01 Z50. R−10. I8. K10. A3. Q1000 J500 F100. ;
In both cases, G01 Z50. F100. is executed.

(6) When a miscellaneous command is issued in the same block as the deep hole drilling cycle 2
command, it is output at the same time as the initial positioning.
(7) When a tool length offset command (T function) is issued in the deep hole drilling cycle 2 mode,
execution will follow the tool length offset function.
(8) If the basic axis, additional axis or R data are in the block during the deep hole drilling cycle 2
mode, hole drilling is performed; if the data are not present, no holes are machined.
Even if the X-axis data are present, no holes will be machined if the dwell (G04) time command
is present in the block.
(9) Command the hole machining data (A, I, K, Q, J) in the block (including the basic axis,
additional axis or R data) in which the hole drilling operation is conducted.
Even if they are commanded in a block with no hole drilling operation, the modal data will not
be updated.
(10) A program error (P33) results with the following commands.
(a) When both the X hole drilling axis (command address X or U) and the Z hole drilling axis
(command address Z or W) have been commanded.
(b) When any axis except X or Z (any command address except X, U, Z and W) has been
commanded.

329
 13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

(11) When the feed hold button is pressed while the deep hole drilling cycle 2 is being executed,
feed hold results at that point, and when automatic operation is restarted, the remainder is
executed.
(12) When an interrupt based on manual operation is performed during the feed hold (manual
absolute switch ON), the operation in the deep hole drilling cycle 2 modal is shifted from the
automatic operation restart by an amount equivalent to the movement caused by the interrupt.
(13) With single block operation, block stop results upon completion of the deep hole drilling cycle 2
command.

13.5.5 Hole drilling fixed cycle cancel; G80

Detailed description

This cancels the hole drilling fixed cycle (G83, G84, G85, G87, G88, G89). The hole machining
mode and hole machining data are both canceled.

13.5.6 Precautions when using a hole drilling fixed cycle

Precautions

(1) When a G84 or G88 fixed cycle is commanded, the rotary tool must be rotated in the specified
direction beforehand by the previous miscellaneous functions (M3, M4).
(2) If there is data for the basic axis, additional axis or R in the same block during fixed cycle mode,
hole drilling is carried out. If there is no data, the hole drilling is not carried out.
Note that even with X axis data, if that block is a dwell (G04) time command, the hole drilling is
not carried out.
(3) Command hole machining data (Q, P) in the block in which hole drilling is carried out (block
containing data for the basic axis, additional axis or R).
The modal data is not updated in blocks without hole drilling, even if these data are
commanded.
(4) The F modal may change when a reset is applied during execution of G85 (G89).

330
13. Program Support Functions
13.5 Hole drilling fixed cycles

(5) The hole drilling fixed cycle is also canceled by 01 group G codes other than G80. If these are
commanded in the same block as the fixed cycle, the fixed cycle will be ignored.
m = 01 group code n = hole drilling fixed cycle code
(a) Gm Gn X(z)__ C__ Z(x)__ R__ Q__ P__ K__ F__ ;
Executed Ignored Executed Ignored Memorized

(b) Gn Gm X(z)__ C__ Z(x)__ R__ Q__ P__ K__ F__ ;

Ignored Executed Ignored Memorized
(Examples) G01 G83 X100. C30. Z50. R-10. Q10. P1 F100. ;
G83 G01 X100. C30. Z50. R-10. Q10. P1 F100. ;
In both cases, G01X100. C30. Z50. F100 is executed..
(6) When miscellaneous functions are commanded in the same block as fixed cycle commands,
they are output simultaneously with the initial positioning.
Note that when the M code of the C axis clamp set in the parameters (#1183 clmp_M) is
commanded in the same block, the M code is output after positioning (Operation 2).
Once the axis has returned to the return point (G98 mode: initial point/G99 mode: R point) after
hole drilling, the M code of the C axis clamp (clamp M + 1)is output, and the axis dwells for the
time set in the parameters (#1184 clmp_D).
When the No. of rotations is designated, M codes other than that of the C axis clamp carry out
the control above for the first rotation only.
C axis clamp/unclamp M commands work in modal, and are output every rotation until
canceled by the fixed cycle cancel command.
(7) When tool length offset commands (T functions) are commanded in the hole drilling fixed cycle,
they are executed according to the tool length offset function.
(8) A program error (P155) will result when a hole drilling fixed cycle is commanded during nose R
compensation.
(9) For the G code list 1, the initial point level return is fixed. The return level cannot be changed
with a G98/G99 command. Note that a separate function will be executed if G98/G99 is
commanded.
(10) In a block where the movement direction of any axis reverses as shown below, the servo
system load will greatly increase so do not command the in-position width in the machining
program.
G0 X100. ,I10.0 ;
X–200. ;

331
 13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle; G80~G89 (MELDAS special format)

Function and purpose

These fixed cycles are used for predetermined sequences of machining operations such as normal
positioning, hole drilling, boring and tapping which are specified in a block. The various sequences
available using these functions are listed in the table below.
This function is valid when the MELDAS special format is added (#1265 ext01/bit2 is ON).
Hole machining Operation at hole Return
G code start bottom operation Application
(−Z direction) Dwell Spindle (+Z direction)
G80 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Cancel
Drill, spot drilling
G81 Cutting feed ⎯ ⎯ Rapid traverse
cycle
Drill, counter boring
G82 Cutting feed Yes ⎯ Rapid traverse
cycle
Deep hole drilling
G83 Intermittent feed Yes ⎯ Rapid traverse
cycle
G83.1 Intermittent feed Yes ⎯ Rapid traverse Stepping cycle
Reverse
G84 Cutting feed Yes Cutting feed Tapping cycle
rotation
Reverse Synchronous tap
G84.2 Cutting feed Yes Cutting feed
rotation cycle
G85 Cutting feed ⎯ ⎯ Cutting feed Boring cycle
G89 Cutting feed Yes ⎯ Cutting feed Boring cycle

A fixed cycle mode is canceled when the G80 or any G command in (G00, G01, G02, G03) is
issued. The various data will also be cleared simultaneously to zero.

Command format

G8∆ X Y Z R Q P F L S , S ,I ,J
G8∆ Hole machining mode
X Y Z Hole positioning data
R Q P F Hole machining data
L Number of repetitions
S Spindle rotation speed
,S Spindle rotation speed during return
,I Positioning axis in-position width
,J Drilling axis in-position width
As shown above, the format is divided into the hole machining mode, hole positioning data, hole
machining data, No. of repetitions, spindle rotation speed, spindle rotation speed during return,
positioning axis in-position width and drilling axis in-position width.

332
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

Detailed description

(1) The hole machining mode refers to the fixed cycle modes such as drilling, counter boring,
tapping and boring. The hole positioning data is the data used to position the X and Y axes.
The hole machining data is the machining data actually used for machining. The hole
positioning data and No. of repetitions are unmodals and the hole machining data and spindle
rotation speed during return are modals.
(2) If M00 or M01 is commanded in the same block as the fixed cycle or during the fixed cycle
mode, the fixed cycle will be ignored. Instead, M00 and M01 will be output after positioning.
The fixed cycle will be executed if X, Y, Z or R is commanded.
(3) There are 7 actual operations which are each described in turn below.
Operation 1 : This indicates the X and Y axes positioning, and executes positioning with G00.
Operation 2 : This is an operation done after positioning is completed (at the initial point), and
when G87 is commanded, the M19 command is output from the control unit to
the machine. When this M command is executed and the finish signal (FIN) is
received by the control unit, the next operation will start. If the single block stop
switch is ON, the block will stop after positioning.

Operation 1 Operation 2
Initial point
Operation 3 Operation 7
R point

Operation 4 Operation 6

Operation 5

Operation 3 : The tool is positioned to the R point by rapid traverse.

Operation 4 : Hole machining is conducted by cutting feed.

Operation 5 : This operation takes place at the hole bottom position and it differs according to
the fixed cycle mode. Possible actions include spindle stop (M05) spindle
reverse rotation (M04), spindle forward rotation (M03), dwell and tool shift.

Operation 6 : Escaping to the R point may take place with either cutting feed or rapid traverse
depending on the fixed cycle mode.

Operation 7 : The tool is returned to the initial pint at the rapid traverse rate.

Whether the fixed cycle is to be completed at operation 6 or 7 can be selected by the following
G commands.
G98 ............ Initial level return
G99 ............ R point level return

These are modal commands, and for example, if G98 is commanded once, the G98 mode will
be entered until G99 is designated. The initial state when the NC is ready is the G98 mode.
The hole machining data will be ignored if X, Y, Z or R is not commanded. This function is
mainly used with the special fixed cycle.

333
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(4) Fixed cycle addresses and meanings

Address Significance
G Selection of hole drilling fixed cycle sequence (G80 to G89)
X Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)
Y Designation of hole drilling position (absolute value or incremental value)
Z Designation of hole bottom position (absolute value or incremental value)
Designation of dwell time at hole bottom position (decimal points will be
P
ignored)
Designation of cut amount for each cutting pass with G83, or designation of
Q
the shift amount at G87 (incremental value)
R Designation of R point position (absolute value or incremental value)
F Designation of feedrate for cutting feed
L Designation of number of repetitions. 0 to 9999

(5) Difference between absolute value command and incremental value command

For absolute value For incremental value

-r

R point +r R point

-z

-z
Workpiece Workpiece

(6) Feedrate for tapping cycle and tapping return

The feedrate for the tapping cycle and tapping return are as shown below.

(a) Selection of asynchronous tapping cycle feedrate

Control parameter
G94/G95 F command value Feed designation
F1-digit value
OFF F designation
Per-minute feed
G94 Other than F0 to F8
ON
F0 to F8 (no decimal point) F1-digit feed
G95 ⎯ F designation Per-rotation feed
− is irrelevant to the setting

334
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(b) Spindle rotation speed during return of synchronous tapping cycle

Meaning of Command
Address Remarks
address range (unit)
,S Spindle 0 to 99999 The data is held as modal information.
rotation (r/min) If the value is smaller than the spindle
speed rotation speed, the spindle rotation
during speed value will be valid even during
return return.
If the spindle rotation speed is not 0
during return, the tap return override
value will be invalid.

Positioning plane and hole drilling axis

The fixed cycle has basic control elements for the positioning plane and hole drilling axis. The
positioning plane is determined by the G17, G18 and G19 plane selection command, and the hole
drilling axis is the axis perpendicular (X, Y, Z or parallel axis) to the above plane.
Plane selection Positioning plane Hole drilling axis
G17 (X − Y) Xp − Yp Zp
G18 (Z − X) Zp − Xp Yp
G19 (Y − Z) Yp − Zp Xp
Xp, Yp and Zp indicate the basic axes X, Y and Z or an axis parallel to the basic axis.

A random axis other than the hole drilling axis can be commanded for positioning.
The hole drilling axis is determined by the axis address of the hole drilling axis commanded in the
same block as G81 to G89. The basic axis will be the hole drilling axis if there is no designation.

(Example 1) When G17 (XY plane) is selected, and the axis parallel to the Z axis is set as the W
axis.
G81 ... Z__ ; The Z axis is used as the hole drilling axis.
G81 ... W__ ; The W axis is used as the hole drilling axis.
G81 ... ; (No Z or W) The Z axis is used as the hole drilling axis.
(Note 1) The hole drilling axis can be fixed to the Z axis with parameter #1080 Dril_Z.
(Note 2) Change over the hole drilling axis in the fixed cycle canceled state.
(Note 3) A program error will occur if the hole drilling axis does not exist.

In the following explanations on the movement in each fixed cycle mode, the XY plane is used for
the positioning plane and the Z axis for the hole drilling axis.
Note that all command values will be incremental values, the positioning plane will be the XY plane
and the hole drilling axis will be the Z axis.

335
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

Programmable in-position width command in fixed cycle

This command commands the in-position width for the fixed cycle from the machining program.
The commanded in-position width is valid only in the G81 (drill, spot drill), G82 (drill, counter boring),
G83 (deep drill cycle), G84 (tap cycle), G85 (boring), G89 (boring), G83.1 (step cycle) and G84.2
(synchronous tap cycle) fixed cycles. The ", I" address is commanded in respect to the positioning
axis, and the ",J" address is commanded in respect to the hole drilling axis.

Command range
Address Meaning of address Remarks
(unit)
In-position width When a value exceeding
,I
(position error amount) the command range is
1 to 999.999 (mm)
In-position width for hole issued, a program error will
1µm unit
,J drilling axis in fixed cycle occur.
(position error amount) Program error (P35)

In-position check in fixed cycle

When the number of repetitions L is designated as two or more times in the fixed cycle, the
commanded in-position width will be valid in the repetition block (operation 5 to operation 8).

:
G81 X–50. Z–50. R–50. L2 F2000 ,I0.2 ,J0.3 ;
:

Operation1 Operation5 Operation

-50. ,I ,J
-50. pattern

Operation6
Operation 1 Valid –
Operation2
Operation 2 – Invalid
Operation 3 – Invalid
Operation 4 – Valid
Operation3 Operation7 Operation 5 Valid –
Operation4 Operation8
Operation 6 – Invalid
Operation 7 – Invalid
Operation 8 – Valid

Operation when number of repetitions L is designated

In the following machining program, the commanded in-position width is valid for the following Fig.
block.
In the (B) block, the in-position width (,I) commanded for positioning in the previous block (A) is
invalid (operation 5). However, when returning from the hole bottom, the in-position width (,J)
commanded in the previous block (A) is valid (operation 8).

336
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

In the following machining program, the commanded in-position width is valid for the following Fig.
block.
In the (B) block, the in-position width (, I) commanded for positioning in the previous block (A) is
invalid (operation 5). However, when returning from the hole bottom, the in-position width (, J)
commanded in the previous block (A) is valid (operation 8).
To validate the in-position width for positioning, command again as shown in block (C) (Operation
9).
:
G81 X–50. Z–50. R–50. F2000 ,I0.2 ,J0.3 ;........... (A)
X–10. ; ......................................................................... (B)
X–10. ,I0.2 ; ................................................................. (C)
:

Operation
Operation5 Operation9 ,I ,J
Operation1 pattern
-10. -10.
-50. Operation 1 Valid –
Opera- Opera- Operation 2 – Invalid
tion6 tion10
Operation2 Operation 3 – Invalid
Operation 4 – Valid
Operation 5 Invalid –
Opera- Opera-
Operation3 Operation 6 – Invalid
tion7 tion11
Opera- Operation 7 – Invalid
Operation4 tion12
Operation8 Operation 8 – Valid
Operation 9 Valid –
Operation 10 – Invalid
Operation 11 – Invalid
Operation 12 – Valid

Operation in fixed cycle modal

337
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

Setting values of synchronous tap in-position check parameters and tap axis movement

(1) Synchronous tap in-position check settings

Synchro- Hole R point I point
nous tap bottom in- →R
"P" designation of In-position check during synchronous tap
improve- in- position point in- G84/G74 command
ment position check position
check check
‘0’ — — — — Carry out in-position check at I point → R point/R point/
hole bottom.
‘1’ — — — No "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
S1000 R-5. I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Valid Valid Valid "P" designation Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tap
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. in-position width.
S1000 PO R point: Carry out in-position check.
R-5. I point → R point: Carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Valid Invalid Valid "P" designation Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tap
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. in-position width.
S1000 PO R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
R-5. I point → R point: Carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Invalid Valid Valid "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Carry out in-position check.
S1000 PO I point → R point: Carry out in-position check.
R-5.
‘1’ Invalid Invalid Valid "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
S1000 PO I point → R point: Carry out in-position check.
R-5.
‘1’ Valid Valid Invalid "P" designation Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tap
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. in-position width.
S1000 PO R point: Carry out in-position check.
R-5. I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Valid Invalid Invalid "P" designation Hole bottom: Carry out in-position check by tap
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. in-position width.
S1000 PO R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
R-5. I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
‘1’ Invalid Valid Invalid "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Carry out in-position check.
S1000 PO I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
R-5.
‘1’ Invalid Invalid Invalid "P" designation Hole bottom: Do not carry out in-position check.
Example: G84 F1. Z-5. R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
S1000 PO I point → R point: Do not carry out in-position check.
R-5.
(Note 1) The I point refers to the initial point.
(Note 2) "Synchronous tap improvement" in the above table corresponds to #1223 aux07/bit3 Synchronous tap in-position check
improvement, "Hole bottom in-position check" corresponds to #1223 aux07/bit4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position
check, and "R point in-position check" corresponds to #1223 aux07/bit5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2.
(2) Relation between the in-position width and tap axis movement for a synchronous tap
in-position check
FIN
Hole bottom R point

(1) Section in which the in-

↑ position check is carried
Speed
out by the SV024 value.
Time T → (2) Section in which the in-
Start of position check is carried
G0 feed
In-position to the R out by the TapInp value.
completion of G1 point → (3) Section in which the in-
the G0 feed deceleration G1 deceleration
from the R start at tap start at tap return → position check is carried
point → cut-in → out by the G1inps value.
(4) (2) (3) (1) (4) Section in which the in-
R point : In-position check by the G1inps value. position check is carried
I point : In-position check by the G0inps value. out by the G0inps value.
Hole bottom : In-position check by the Tapinps value.

338
 13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(3) Relation between the parameter setting values and tap axis movement for a
synchronous tap in-position check
Synchro- In-position In-position In-position Operation at
nous tap check at check at check at Hole bottom Operation at Operation at I point →
improve- hole R point I point → wait time hole bottom R point
R point
ment bottom R point
‘0’ — — — Time designated Operation Operation Operation
by "P". determined by determined by determined by
Processing time setting of inpos setting of inpos setting of inpos
is several 10ms (#1193) and aux (#1193) and aux (#1193) and aux
when no "P". 07 (#1223): bit 1 07 (#1223): bit 1 07 (#1223): bit 1
parameters. parameters. parameters.
‘1’ Not Not Executed Larger value of Wait until time in Wait until
executed executed "P" and TapDwl left column has completion of
(#1313) is valid. elapsed. in-position check
No dwell by G0inps value.
executed if both
values are 0.
‘1’ Not Executed Executed Larger value of Wait until time in Wait until Wait until
executed "P" and TapDwl left column has completion of completion of
(#1313) is valid. elapsed. in-position check in-position check
No dwell by G1inps value. by G0inps value.
executed if both
values are 0.
‘1’ Executed Not Executed Larger value of Wait until dwell Wait until
executed "P" and TapDwl time in left completion of
(#1313) is valid. column has in-position check
No dwell elapsed after by G0inps value.
executed if both completion of
values are 0. in-position check.
‘1’ Executed Executed Executed Larger value of Wait until dwell Wait until Wait until
"P" and TapDwl time in left completion of completion of
(#1313) is valid. column has in-position check in-position check
Processing time elapsed after by G1inps value. by G0inps value.
is several 10ms if completion of
both values are in-position check.
0.
‘1’ Not Not Not Larger value of Wait until time in
executed executed executed "P" and TapDwl left column has
(#1313) is valid. elapsed.
No dwell
executed if both
values are 0.
‘1’ Not Executed Not Larger value of Wait until time in Wait until
executed executed "P" and TapDwl left column has completion of
(#1313) is valid. elapsed. in-position check
No dwell by G1inps value.
executed if both
values are 0.
‘1’ Executed Not Not Larger value of Wait until dwell
executed executed "P" and TapDwl time in left
(#1313) is valid. column has
No dwell elapsed after
executed if both completion of
values are 0. in-position check.
‘1’ Executed Executed Not Larger value of Wait until dwell Wait until
executed "P" and TapDwl time in left completion of
(#1313) is valid. column has in-position check
Processing time elapsed after by G1inps value.
is several 10ms if completion of
both values are in-position check.
0.
(Note 1) The I point refers to the initial point.
(Note 2) "Synchronous tap improvement" in the above table corresponds to #1223 aux07/bit3 Synchronous tap in-position check
improvement, "Hole bottom in-position check" corresponds to #1223 aux07/bit4 Synchronous tap hole bottom in-position
check, and "R point in-position check" corresponds to #1223 aux07/bit5 Synchronous tap R-point in-position check 2.

Remarks: The processing time is several 10ms when an in-position check is not carried out at the hole bottom.
The processing time is between 0 to 14.2ms when an in-position check is not carried out at the R point.
The processing time is the spindle gain changeover time when an in-position check is not carried out at I point → R point.

339
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(a) G81 (Drilling, spot drilling)

Program
G81 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ;

(1) x1 , y1

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

r1 (2) G0 Zr1
(2) (3) G1 Zz1 Ff1
(4) G98 mode G0Z − (z1+r1)
G99 mode G0Z − z1
(3) (4)
z1
(4)

G98 G99
mode mode

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (4) commands during single block operation.
Operation
i1 j1
pattern
Operation (1) Valid –
Operation (2) – Invalid
Operation (3) – Invalid
Operation (4) – Valid

340
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(b) G82 (Drilling, counter boring)

Program
G82 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ;
P : Dwell designation

(1) x1 , y1

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) r1 (2) G0 Zr1
(3) G1 Zz1 Ff1
(4) G4 Pp1 (Dwell)
(5) (5) G98 mode G0Z − (z1+r1)
(3) (5) z1 G99 mode G0Z − z1

(4) G98 G99

mode mode

Operation
i1 j1
pattern
Operation (1) Valid –
Operation (2) – Invalid
Operation (3) – Invalid
Operation (4) – –
Operation (5) – Valid

The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (5) commands during single block operation.

341
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(c) G83 (Deep hole drilling cycle)

Program
G83 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Qq1 Pp1 Ff1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ;
Q : This designates the cutting amount per pass, and is always designated with an
incremental value.
P : Dwell time at hole bottom

(1) x1,y1
(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1
(2) G0 Zr1
(3) G1 Zq1 Ff1 (2) r1
(4) G0 Z − q1
(5) G0 Z (q1 − m)
q1 (3) (4)
(6) G1 Z (q1 + m) Ff1 (5)
(7) (8) (10)
(7) G0 Z − 2 • q1
q1 m (6)
(8) G0 Z (2 • q1 − m)
(9) G1 Z (q1 + m) Ff1 (9)
q1 m z1
(10) G0 Z − 3 • q1
: (n) (n)
(n) - 2
: (n) - 1
(n) - 1 G4 Pp1 (Dwell)
(n) G98 mode G0Z − (z1+r1) G98 G99
G99 mode G0Z − z1 mode mode

Operation
i1 j1
pattern
Operation (1) Valid –
Operation (2) – Invalid
Operation (3) – Invalid
Operation (4) – Invalid
Operation (5) – Invalid
Operation (6) – Invalid
Operation (7) – Invalid
Operation (8) – Invalid
Operation (9) – Invalid
Operation (10) – Invalid
:
:
Operation
– Invalid
(n-2)
Operation
– Invalid
(n-1)
Operation (n) – Valid

When executing a second and following cutting in the G83 as shown above, the movement will
change from rapid traverse to cutting feed several mm before the position machined last.
When the hole bottom is reached, the axis will return according to the G98 or G99 mode.
m will differ according to the parameter #8013 G83 return. Program so that q1>m.
The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (n) commands during single block operation.

342
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(d) G83.1 (Step cycle)

Program
G83.1 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Qq1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ;
P : Dwell designation

(1) x1 , y1

(2) r1

q1 (3) m
(5) (6)
q1 (4) (n)
q1 z1
(n)

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) G0 Zr1 (n) -1
(3) G1 Zq1 Ff1
(4) G4 Pp1 G98 G99
(5) G0 Z−m mode mode
(6) G1 Z (q1 + m) Ff1
:
(n) G98 mode G0Z − (z1+r1)
G99 mode G0Z − z1

Operation
i1 j1
pattern
Operation (1) Valid –
Operation (2) – Invalid
Operation (3) – Invalid
Operation (4) – –
Operation (5) – Invalid
Operation (6) – Invalid
:
:
Operation
– Invalid
(n-1)
Operation (n) – Valid

When executing a second and following cutting in the G83.1 as shown above, the movement will
return several m mm with rapid traverse and then will change to cutting feed.
The return amount m will differ according to the parameter #8012 G73 return.
The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (n) commands during single block operation.

343
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(e) G84 (Tapping cycle)

Program
G84 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 Rr2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ;
P : Dwell designation

x1 ,y1
(1) (1) G0 Xx1 Yy1
(2) G0 Zr1
(9) (3) G1 Zz1 Ff1
(2) r1 (4) G4 Pp1
(7) (8) (7) (8) (5) M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)
(6) G1 Z − z1 Ff1
(7) G4 Pp1
(3) (6) (6) z1 (8) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
(9) G98 mode G0Z − r1
G99 mode No movement
(4) (5) G98 G99
mode mode

Operation
i1 j1
pattern
Operation (1) Valid –
Operation (2) – Invalid
Operation (3) – Invalid
Operation (4) – –
Operation (5) – –
Operation (6) – Invalid
Operation (7) – –
Operation (8) – –
Operation (9) – Valid

When G84 is executed, the override will be canceled and the override will automatically be set
to 100%. Dry run is valid when the control parameter "G00 DRY RUN" is ON and is valid for the
positioning command. If the feed hold button is pressed during G84 execution, and the
sequence is at (3) to (6), the movement will not stop immediately, and instead will stop after (6).
During the rapid traverse in sequence (1), (2) and (9), the movement will stop immediately.
The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (9) commands during single block operation.
During the G84 modal, the "Tapping" NC output signal will be output.
During the G84 synchronous tapping modal, the M3, M4, M5 and S code will not be output.

344
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(f) G84.2 (Synchronous tapping cycle)

Program
G84.2 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1 ,Ss1 ,Ss2 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ;
P : Dwell designation

x1 ,y1
(1) (1) G0 Xx1 Yy1
(2) G0 Zr1
(9) (3) G1 Zz1 Ff1
(2) r1 (4) G4 Pp1
(7) (8) (7) (8) (5) M4 (Spindle reverse rotation)
(6) G1 Z − z1 Ff1
(7) G4 Pp1
(3) (6) (6) z1 (8) M3 (Spindle forward rotation)
(9) G98 mode G0Z − r1
G99 mode No movement
(4) (5) G98 G99
mode mode

Operation
i1 j1
pattern
Operation (1) Valid –
Operation (2) – Invalid
Operation (3) – Invalid
Operation (4) – –
Operation (5) – –
Operation (6) – Invalid
Operation (7) – –
Operation (8) – –
Operation (9) – Valid

When G84.2 is executed, the override will be canceled and the override will automatically be
set to 100%. Dry run is valid when the control parameter "G00 DRY RUN" is ON and is valid for
the positioning command. If the feed hold button is pressed during G84.2 execution, and the
sequence is at (3) to (6), the movement will not stop immediately, and instead will stop after (6).
During the rapid traverse in sequence (1), (2) and (9), the movement will stop immediately.
The operation stops at after the (1), (2) and (9) commands during single block operation.
During the G84.2 modal, the "Tapping" NC output signal will be output.
During the G84.2 synchronous tapping modal, the M3, M4, M5 and S code will not be output.

345
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

This function allows spindle acceleration/deceleration pattern to be approached to the speed

loop acceleration/deceleration pattern by dividing the spindle and hole drilling axis
acceleration/deceleration pattern into up to three stages during synchronous tapping.
The acceleration/deceleration pattern can be set up to three stages for each gear.
When returning from the hole bottom, rapid return is possible depending on the spindle
rotation speed during return. The spindle rotation speed during return is held as modal
information.

When tap rotation speed < spindle rotation speed during return ≤ synchronous tap changeover
spindle rotation speed 2

Smax
S2

S(S1)

T2
T1 T1

T1 T1

S1
S'
S2
Smax T2

S :
Command spindle rotation speed
S' :
Spindle rotation speed during return
S1 :
Tap rotation speed (spindle base specification parameters #3013 to #3016)
S2 :
Synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2
(spindle base specification parameters #3037 to #3040)
Smax : Maximum rotation speed (spindle base specification parameters #3005 to #3008)
T1 : Tap time constant (spindle base specification parameters #3017 to #3020)
T2 : Synchronous tap changeover time constant 2
(spindle base specification parameters #3041 to #3044)

346
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

When synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2 < spindle rotation speed during
return

Smax
S2
S(S1)
T3
T2
T1 T1

T1 T1

S1
S2
S'(Smax)
T2
T3

S : Command spindle rotation speed

S' : Spindle rotation speed during return
S1 : Tap rotation speed (spindle base specification parameters #3013 to #3016)
S2 : Synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2
(spindle base specification parameters #3037 to #3040)
Smax : Maximum rotation speed (spindle base specification parameters #3005 to #3008)
T1 : Tap time constant (spindle base specification parameters #3017 to #3020)
T2 : Synchronous tap changeover time constant 2
(spindle base specification parameters #3041 to #3044)
T3 : Synchronous tap changeover time constant 3
(spindle base specification parameters #3045 to #3048)

(g) G85 (Boring)

Program
G85 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 ,Ii1 ,Jj1 ;

(1) x1 , y1
(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1
(2) G0 Zr1
(2) (5) r1 (3) G1 Zz1 Ff1
(4) G1 Z − z1 Ff1
(5) G98 mode G0Z − r1
G99 mode No movement
(3) (4) (4) z1

G98 G99
mode mode

347
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

Operation
i1 j1
pattern
Operation (1) Valid –
Operation (2) – Invalid
Operation (3) – Invalid
Operation (4) – Invalid
Operation (5) – Valid

The operation stops at after the (1), (2), (4) or (5) commands during single block operation.

(h) G89 (Boring)

Program
G89 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 Pp1, Ii1, Jj1 ;

(1) x1 , y1

(1) G0 Xx1 Yy1

(2) (6) r1 (2) G0 Zr1
(3) G1 Zz1 Ff1
(4) G4 Pp1
(5) G1 Z − z1 Ff1
(3) (5) (5) z1 (6) G98 mode G0Z − r1
G99 mode No movement

(4) G98 G99

mode mode

Operation
i1 j1
pattern
Operation (1) Valid –
Operation (2) – Invalid
Operation (3) – Invalid
Operation (4) – –
Operation (5) – Invalid
Operation (6) – Valid

The operation stops at after the (1), (2), (5) or (6) commands during single block operation.

348
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

Precautions for using fixed cycle

(1) Before the fixed cycle is commanded, the spindle must be rotating in a specific direction with
an M command (M3 or M4).
(2) If there is a basic axis, additional axis or R data in the block during the fixed cycle mode, the
hole drilling operation will be executed. If there is no data, the hole will not be drilled.
Note that in the X axis data, if the data is a dwell (G04) time command, the hole will not be
drilled.
(3) Command the hole machining data (Q, P, I, J, K) in a block where hole drilling is executed.
(Block containing a basic axis, additional axis or R data.)
(4) The fixed cycle can be canceled by the G00 to G03 or G33 command besides the G80
command. If these are designated in the same block as the fixed cycle, the following will occur.
(Where, 00 to 03 and 33 are m, and the fixed cycle code is n)
Gm Gn X___ Y___ Z___ R___ Q___ P___ L___ F___ ;
Execute Ignore Execute Ignore Record
Gm Gn X___ Y___ Z___ R___ Q___ P___ L___ F___ ;
Ignore Execute Ignore Record
Note that for the G02 and G03 commands, R will be handled as the arc radius.
(5) If an M function is commanded in the same block as the fixed cycle command, the M code and
MF will be output during the initial positioning. The next operation will be moved to with FIN
(finish signal).
If there is a No. of times designated, the above control will be executed only on the first time.
(6) If another control axis (ex., rotation axis, additional axis) is commanded in the same block as
the fixed cycle control axis, the fixed cycle will be executed after the other control axis is moved
first.
(7) If the No. of repetitions L is not designated, L1 will be set. If L0 is designated in the same block
as the fixed cycle G code command, the hole machining data will be recorded, but the hole
machining will not be executed.
(Example) G83.1 X___ Y___ Z___ R___ Q___ P___ F___ L0___ ;
Execute Record only code having an address
(8) When the fixed cycle is executed, only the modal command commanded in the fixed cycle
program will be valid in the fixed cycle subprogram. The modal of the program that called out
the fixed cycle will not be affected.
(9) Other subprograms cannot be called from the fixed cycle subprogram.
(10) Decimal points in the movement command will be ignored during the fixed cycle subprogram.
(11) If the No. of repetitions L is 2 or more during the incremental value mode, the positioning will
also be incremented each time.
(Example) G91 G81 X10. Z−50. R−20. F100. L3 ;

Z 10. 10. 10.

X

349
13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

(12) If the spindle rotation speed value during return is smaller than the spindle rotation speed, the
spindle rotation speed value is valid even during return.
(13) If the 2nd and 3rd acceleration/deceleration stage inclinations following the spindle rotation
speed and time constants set in the parameters are each steeper than the previous stage's
inclination, the previous stage's inclination will be valid.
(14) If the values set in the spindle base specification parameter "stap1-4" (tap rotation speed) and
"taps21-24" (synchronous tap changeover spindle rotation speed 2) exceed the maximum
rotation speed, the spindle rotation speed will be clamped at the maximum rotation speed.
(15) If the spindle rotation speed during return is not 0, the tap return override value will be invalid.
(16) In a block where the movement direction of any axis reverses as shown below, the servo
system load will greatly increase so do not command the in-position width in the machining
program.
G0 X100., I10.0 ;
X–200. ;
(17) If the in-position width commanded with the programmable in-position width command is
increased, the positioning time and linear interpolation time can be reduced. However, the
position error amount of the previous block will also increase before the next block starts, so
the actual machining could be obstructed.
(18) The in-position width and the position error amount are compared at a set time, so the position
error amount at the point to be judged as in-position will be smaller than the commanded
in-position width.
(19) If the in-position width commanded with the programmable in-position command is small, the
commanded deceleration check or in-position check following the parameters may be carried
out first.
(20) Synchronous and asynchronous tap can be selected with the M function.

[Base specifications parameters]

# Items Details Setting range
1513 stapM M code for synchronous tap selection 0 to 99999999
The synchronous tap mode is selected with the miscellaneous function code set with this
parameter.
The M function can be commanded in the same block before the tap command.

The synchronous and asynchronous tap will follow the combination shown below.
Combination
Program command
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 No command
(G84/G84.2))
#1229 (bit4) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
M function code (M**) × × × × × ×
Synchronous/
A A A A S S S S A S S S
asynchronous selection
0: G84 × : Does not command A : Asynchronous tap
1: G84.2 : Commands S : Synchronous tap

(Note1) Do not use M00, 01, 02, 30, 98 or 99.

(Note2) Depending on the model, selection with the M function may not be possible.

350
 13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

13.6.1 Initial point and R point level return; G98, G99

Function and purpose

Whether to use R point or initial level for the return level in the final sequence of the fixed cycle can
be selected.

Command format

G98 ; Initial level return

G99 ; R point level return

Detailed description

The relation of the G98/G99 mode and No. of repetition designation is as shown below.
G98
No. of hole
Program example At power ON, at cancel with G99
drilling times
M02, M30, and reset button
G81 X100. Y100.
Z−50. R25. F1000 ; Initial point Initial point

Only one R point R point

execution

Initial level return is executed. R point level return is executed.

G81 X100. Y100.

Z−50. R25. L5 F1000 ;

Second and
following
executions
First Second Final First Second Final
time time time time time time

Initial level return is executed for all

times.

Example of program

(Example 1)
G82 Zz1 Rr1 Pp1 Ff1 L0 ;.......... Record only the hole machining data (Do not execute)
Xx1 Yy1 ; ............................. Execute hole drilling operation with G82 mode

The No. of fixed cycle repetitions is designated with L. If L1 is designated or L not designated, the
fixed cycle will be executed once. The setting range is 1 to 9999.
If L0 is commanded, only the hole machining data will be recorded.
G8∆ Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Pp1 Qq1 Ff1 Ll1 ;

351
 13. Program Support Functions
13.6 Hole drilling fixed cycle (MELDAS special format)

The ideology of the data differs between the absolute value mode (G90) and incremental value
mode (G91) as shown below.

Z axis
R absolute R
R point value R point
Z zero point
Z

Absolute value mode (G90) Incremental value mode (G91)

Designate a command value with a symbol for X, Y and Z. R indicates the coordinate value from
the zero point in the absolute value mode, so a symbol must always be added. However, in the
incremental value the symbol will be ignored and will be viewed as the same symbol as for Z. Note
that the symbols will be viewed in reverse for G87.
The hole machining data is held as shown below in the fixed cycle. The hole machining data is
canceled when the G80 command or G commands (G00, G01, G02, G03, G2.1, G3.1, G33) in the
01 group are reached.

(Example 2)
N001 G81 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 Rr1 Ff1 ;
N002 G81 ; ................................ Only selection of fixed cycle sequence
N003 Xx2 Yy2 ; .......................... Change of positioning point, and execution of fixed cycle
N004 M22 ; ................................ Execution of only M22
N005 G04 Xx3 ; ........................ Execution of only dwell
N006 G92 Xx4 Yy4 ; ................. Execution of only coordinate system setting
N007 G28 (G30) Z0 ; ............... Execution of only reference point (zero point) return
N008 ; ........................................ No work
N009 G99 Zz2 Rr2 Ff2 L0 ; ...... Execution of only hole machining data recording
N010 Xx5 Yy5 Ll5 ; ................... Change of positioning point, and execution of R point return
fixed cycle for 15 times
N011 G98 Xx6 Yy6 Zz6 Rr6 ; .. Change of positioning point, and execution of fixed cycle
N012 Ww1 ; ............................... Execute W axis according to 01 group modal before N001, and
then execute fixed cycle

13.6.2 Setting of workpiece coordinates in fixed cycle mode

Function and purpose

The designated axis moves with the workpiece coordinate system set for the axis.
The Z axis is valid after the R point positioning after positioning or from Z axis movement.
(Note) When the workpiece coordinates are changed over for address Z and R, re-program even if
the values are the same.
(Example)
G54 Xx1 Yy1 Zz1 ;
G81 Xx2 Yy2 Zz2 Rr2 ;
G55 Xx3 Yy3 Zz2 Rr2 ;.......... Re-command even if Z and R are the same as the previous
value.
Xx4 Yy4 ;
Xx5 Yy5 ;

352
 13. Program Support Functions
13.7 Subprogram control

13.7 Subprogram control; M98, M99, M198

13.7.1 Calling subprogram with M98 and M99 commands

Function and purpose

Fixed sequences or repeatedly used parameters can be stored in the memory as subprograms
which can then be called from the main program when required. M98 serves to call subprograms
and M99 serves to return operation from the subprogram to the main program. Furthermore, it is
possible to call other subprograms from particular subprograms and the nesting depth can include
as many as 8 levels.

Main program Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram Subprogram

O0010; O1000; O1200; O2000; O3000;

N20;
M98 P1000; M98 P1200 M98 P2000; M98 P2500;
H20;
N60;

M02; M99; M99; M99 P60; M99;

(Level 1) (Level 2) (Level 3) (Level 8)

Nesting depth

The table below shows the functions which can be executed by adding and combining the tape
storing and editing functions, subprogram control functions and fixed cycle functions.
Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4
1. Tape storing and editing Yes Yes Yes Yes
2. Subprogram control No Yes Yes No
3. Fixed cycles No No Yes Yes
Function
1. Memory operation
2. Tape editing (main memory)
3. Subprogram call × ×
4. Subprogram variable designation (Note 2) × ×
5. Subprogram nesting level call (Note 3) × ×
6. Fixed cycles × ×
7. Subprogram editing for fixed cycle × ×

(Note 1) " " denotes a function which can be used and "×" a function which cannot be used.
(Note 2) Variables cannot be transferred with the M98 command but variable commands in
subprograms can be used provided that the variable command option is available.
(Note 3) A maximum of 8 nesting levels form the nesting depth.

353
13. Program Support Functions
13.7 Subprogram control

Command format

Subprogram call
M98 P H L ;
M98 Subprogram call command
P_ Program number of subprogram to be called (own program if omitted)
P can be omitted only during memory operation and MDI operation.
(Max. 8 digits)
H_ Sequence number in subprogram to be called (head block if omitted)
(Max. 5 digits)
L_ Number of subprogram repetitions
(When omitted, this is interpreted at L1, and is not executed when L0.)
(Between 1 and 9999 times according to 4-digit value.)
For instance, M98 P1 L3 ; is equivalent to the following:
M98 P1 ;
M98 P1 ;
M98 P1 ;

Return to main program from subprogram

M99 P L ;
M99 Subprogram return command
P_ Sequence number of return destination (returned to block that follows the
calling block)
L_ Number of times after repetition number has been changed

Creating and entering subprograms

Subprograms have the same format as machining programs for normal memory operation except
that the subprogram completion instruction M99 (P_ L_ ) ; is entered as an independent block at
the last block.

∆∆∆∆∆∆∆∆ ; Program number as subprogram number

................................ ;
................................ ;
: Main body of subprogram
:
:
................................ ;
M99 ; Subprogram return command
% (EOR) Entry completion code

(1) The above program is entered by editing operations at the setting and display unit. For further
details, refer to the section on program editing in the Operating Manual.
(2) Only those subprograms numbers ranging from 1 to 99999999 designated by the optional
specifications can be used. When there are no program numbers on the tape, they are entered
as the setting number for "program input."
(3) Up to 8 nesting levels can be used for calling programs from subprograms, and program error
(P230) results if this number is exceeded.

354
13. Program Support Functions
13.7 Subprogram control

(4) No distinction between main programs and subprograms is made since they are entered in the
sequence in which they were read. This means that main programs and subprograms should
not be given the same numbers. (If they are, error "E11" appears during entry.)

;
O ;
................................. ;
:
: Subprogram A
M99 ;
%
;

O ∆∆∆∆ ;
................................ ;
:
: Subprogram B
M99 ;
%
;

O **** ;
................................ ;
:
: Subprogram C
M99 ;
%
;

355
13. Program Support Functions
13.7 Subprogram control

(5) Main programs can be executed during memory, tape or MDI operation but subprograms
must be entered in the memory.
(6) Besides the M98 command, subprogram nesting is subject to the following commands:
• G65 : Macro call
• G66 : Modal call
• G66.1 : Modal call
• G code call
• Miscellaneous function call
• MDI interrupt
• Automatic tool length measurement
• Macro interrupt
• Multi-step skip function
(7) Subprogram nesting is not subject to the following commands which can be called even
beyond the 8th nesting level.
• Fixed cycles
• Pattern cycles
(8) To repeatedly use the subprogram, it can be repeated l1 times by programming M98 Pp1
Ll1;.
(9) When using the 2-part system, if the subprogram attributed to the system with the call
command is empty, the subprogram call operation will change according to the
parameters.

#1050 #1285
Details
MemPrg ext21/bit1
0, 2, 4, 6 - The subprogram registered in the memory common for the
systems is called out.
1, 3, 5, 7 OFF The subprogram registered in the memory for the selected
system is called out.
ON The subprogram registered in the memory for the selected
system is called out.
If the subprogram in the selected system is empty, the
subprogram with the same number in the 1st system is called
out.

356
13. Program Support Functions
13.7 Subprogram control

Example of program 1

When there are 3 subprogram calls (known as 3 nesting levels)

Main program Subprogram 1 Subprogram 2 Subprogram 3

O1; O10; O20;

(1) (2) (3)

M98P1; M98P10; M98P20;

(1)’ (2)’ (3)’

M02; M99; M99; M99;

Sequence of execution : (1) → (2) → (3) → (3)’ → (2)’ → (1)’

(1) For nesting, the M98 and M99 commands should always be paired off on a 1:1 basis (1)’ for (1),
(2)' for (2), etc.
(2) Modal information can be rewritten according to the execution sequence without distinction
between main programs and subprograms. This means that after calling a subprogram,
attention must be paid to the modal data status when programming.

357
13. Program Support Functions
13.7 Subprogram control

Example of program 2

The M98 H_ ; M99 P_ ; commands designate the sequence numbers in a program with a call
instruction.

M98H__ ; M99P__ ;
O123;
M98H3; N100___;
M98P123;
N200_;
N300___;
N3___; N400___;

Search
M99; M99P200;

Precautions

(1) Program error (P232) results when the designated P (program number) is not located.
(2) Single block stop does not occur with the M98 P_ ; M99 ; block. If any address except O, N, P,
L or H is used, single block stop can be executed. (With X100. M98 P100 ;, operation branches
to O100 after X100. is executed.)
(3) When M99 is commanded by the main program, operation returns to the head. (This is same
for MDI.)
(4) Branching from tape and BTR operation to the subprogram with M98 P_ is possible, but the
return destination sequence No. cannot be designated with M99 P_ ;. (P_ is ignored).
(5) Bear in mind that the search operation will take time when the sequence number is designated
by M99 P_ ;.

358
 13. Program Support Functions
13.7 Subprogram control

13.7.2 Calling subprogram with M198 commands

Function and purpose

Programs saved in the IC card can be called as subprograms. To call a program in the IC card as a
subprogram, command in the main program as shown below.

Command format

M198 P H L ;
P Number of program in IC card to be called as subprogram. (Max. 8 digits)
H Number of sequence in program to be called out. (Head block when omitted)
(Max. 5 digits)
L Number of subprogram repetitions. (Max. 4 digits)
• This can be omitted. (In this case, the subprogram will be called once.)
When "L0" is designated, the subprogram call will not be executed.

Detailed description

The subprograms that can be called from the main program are shown below. The subprogram can
be called with the M198 command once in the subprogram nest.
Sub
Operation mode Memory IC card Tape
Main
Memory and MDI mode Memory { { ×
IC card { × ×
Tape mode
Tape { × ×

(Note 1) The section from the head of the program to the first LF (carriage return code, 0x0A
hexadecimal) is invalid, and is not run or displayed. Note that if the head starts with a 0
number, the program will be valid from the head.
(Note 2) To run a program saved on an IC card with the tape mode, set the number of characters
in the program to 250 characters or more.

359
 13. Program Support Functions
13.8 Variable commands

13.8 Variable commands

Function and purpose

Programming can be endowed with flexibility and general-purpose capabilities by designating

variables, instead of giving direct numerical values to particular addresses in a program, and by
assigning the values or those variables as required when executing a program.

Command format

#∆∆∆ = or #∆∆∆ = [formula]

Detailed description

(1) Variable expressions Example

(a) #m ............. m = value consisting of 0~9 #100
(b) # [f] ............. f = one of the following in the formula # [− #120]
Numerical value m 123
Variable #543
Formula Operator Formula #110 + #119
− (minus) formula − # 120
[Formula] [#119]
Function [formula] SIN [#110]
(Note 1) The 4 standard operators are +, −, ∗ and / .
(Note 2) Functions cannot be used unless the user macro specifications are available.
(Note 3) Error (P241) results when a variable number is negative.
(Note 4) Examples of incorrect variable expressions are given below.
Incorrect Correct
#6/2 → # [6/2] (Note that expression such as "#6/2" is regarded as
"[#6]/2".)]
#−−5 → # [ − [ −5 ] ]
# − [# 1] → # [ − #1 ]

360
13. Program Support Functions
13.8 Variable commands

(2) Types of variables

The following table gives the types of variables.
Type of variable Number Function
Common variables Common Common • Can be used in common
variables 1 variables 2 throughout main, sub and
System 1 100 sets 500 to 549 100 to 149 macro programs.
200 sets 500 to 599 100 to 199 • When using common
variables in the multi-
300 sets 500 to 699 100 to 199 system, common
600 sets 500 to 999 100 to 199 variables can be shared
between the systems by
700 sets 400 to 999 100 to 199
setting the following
System 2 50 + 50 sets 500 to 549 100 to 149 *2 parameter.
100 + 100 sets 500 to 599 100 to 199 *2 #1303 V1comN
#100 to setting value
400 + 100 sets 500 to 899 100 to 199 *2
#1304 V0comN
500 + 100 sets 500 to 999 100 to 199 *2 #500 to setting value
Can be used for local
Local variables 1 to 33 variables in macro
programs.
Application is fixed by
System variables 1000 to
system.
Local variables in fixed
Fixed cycle variables 1 to 32
cycle programs.

(Note 1) All common variables are retained even when the power is turned OFF.
(Note 2) When the power is turned OFF or reset, the common variables can be set to <null> by
setting the parameter (#1128 RstVC1, #1129 PwrVC1).
(Note 3) The common variables are divided into the following two types.
Common variables 1 : Used in common through all systems
Common variables 2 : Used in common in the programs of the system

(3) Variable quotations

Variables can be used for all addresses accept O, N and / (slash).
(a) When the variable value is used directly:
X#1................................. Value of #1 is used as the X value.
(b) When the complement of the variable value is used:
X−#2............................... Value with the #2 sign changed is used as the X value.
(c) When defining variables:
#3 = #5........................... Variable #3 uses the equivalent value of variable #5.
#1 = 1000....................... Variable #1 uses the equivalent value 1000 (which is treated as
1000.).
(d) When defining the variable arithmetic formula:
#1 = #3 + #2 − 100......... The value of the operation result of #3 + #2 − 100. is used as the
#1 value.
X [#1 + #3 + 1000] ......... The value of the operation result of #1 + #3 + 1000 is used as
the X value.

(Note 1) A variable cannot be defined in the same block as an address. It must be defined in a
separate block.
Incorrect Correct
X #1= #3 + 100 ; → #1= #3 + 100 ;
X#1 ;

361
13. Program Support Functions
13.8 Variable commands

(Note 2) Up to five sets of square parentheses [ ] may be used.

#543 = − [ [ [ [ [ #120]/2 + 15.]∗3 − #100]/#520 + #125 + #128]∗#130 + #132] ;
(Note 3) There are no restrictions on the number of characters and number of variables for
variable definition.
(Note 4) The variable values should be within a range from 0 to ±99999999.
If this range is exceeded, the operations may not be conducted properly.
(Note 5) The variable definitions are valid from the moment that the variables are actually
defined.
#1 = 100 ; ............................. #1 = 100
#1 = 200 #2 = #1 + 200 ;...... #1 = 200, #2 = 400
#3 = #1 + 300 ;..................... #3 = 500
(Note 6) Variable quotations are always regarded as having a decimal point at the end.
When #100 = 10,
then X#100 ; is treated as X10.

362
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

13.9 User macro

13.9.1 User macro commands; G65, G66, G66.1, G67

Function and purpose

By combining the user macros with variable commands, it is possible to use macro program call,
operation, data input/output with PLC, control, decision, branch and many other instructions for
measurement and other such applications.

O Main program O Macro program

……. ; ……. ;

Macro call instruction

M30 ; M99 ;

Macro programs use variables, operation instructions and control instructions to create
subprograms which function to provide dedicated control.
These dedicated control functions (macro programs) are called by the macro call instructions
exactly when required from the main program.

G code Function
G65 User macro Simple call
G66 User macro Modal call A (Movement command call)
G66.1 User macro Modal call B (Per-block call)
G67 User macro Modal call (G66, G66.1) cancel

Detailed description

(1) When the G66 or G66.1 command is entered, the specified user macro program will be called
after each block has been executed or after the movement command in the block with the
movement commands has been executed until the G67 (cancel) command is entered.
(2) The G66 (G66.1) and G67 commands must be paired in the same program.

363
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

13.9.2 Macro call instruction

Function and purpose

Included among the macro call commands are the simple calls which apply only to the instructed
block and also modal calls (types A and B) which apply to each block in the call modal.
Simple macro calls

Main program Subprogram (Oo1)

To subprogram
O o1
~

~
G65Pp1Ll1 <argument> ;
~

M99
To main program

M99 is used to conclude the user macro subprogram.

Format
M98 P__ L__ <argument> ;
P_ Program No.
L_ No. of repetitions

When the <argument> must be transferred as a local variable to a user macro subprogram, the
actual value should be designated after the address.
Regardless of the address, a sign and decimal point can be used in the argument. There are 2
ways in which arguments are designated.

(1) Argument designation I

Format : A_ B_ C_ ... X_ Y_ Z_
Detailed description
(a) Arguments can be designated using any address except G, L, N, O and P.
(b) Except for I, J and K, there is no need for designation in alphabetical order.
(c) I, J and K must be designated in alphabetical order.
I_ J_ K_ ...... Correct
J_ I_ K_ ...... Incorrect
(d) Addresses which do not need to be designated can be omitted.
(e) The following table shows the correspondence between the addresses which can be
designated by argument designation I and the variable numbers in the user macro main
body.

364
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Address and variable number

Call instructions and usable address
correspondence
Argument
designation I Variable in macro G65, G66 G66.1
address
A #1
B #2
C #3
D #7
E #8
F #9
G #10 × ×∗
H #11
I #4
J #5
K #6
L #12 × ×∗
M #13
N #14 × ×∗
O #15 × ×
P #16 × ×∗
Q #17
R #18
S #19
T #20
U #21
V #22
W #23
X #24
Y #25
Z #26

: Can be used.
× : Cannot be used.
∗ : Can be used while G66.1 command is modal.

365
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(2) Argument designation II

Format : A_ B_ C_ I_ J_ K_ I_ J_ K_ ...
Detailed description
(a) In addition to addresses A, B and C, up to 10 groups of arguments with I, J, K serving as 1
group can be designated.
(b) When the same address is duplicated, designate the addresses in the specified order.
(c) Addresses which do not need to be designated can be omitted.
(d) The following table shows the correspondence between the addresses which can be
designated by argument designation II and the variable numbers in the user macro main
body.
Argument Argument
Variable within Variable within
designation II designation II
macro macro
address address
A #1 J5 #17
B #2 K5 #18
C #3 I6 #19
I1 #4 J6 #20
J1 #5 K6 #21
K1 #6 I7 #22
I2 #7 J7 #23
J2 #8 K7 #24
K2 #9 I8 #25
I3 #10 J8 #26
J3 #11 K8 #27
K3 #12 I9 #28
I4 #13 J9 #29
J4 #14 K9 #30
K4 #15 I10 #31
I5 #16 J10 #32
K10 #33

(Note 1) The numbers 1 to 10 accompanying I, J and K denote the sequence of the

commanded groups and they are not required for the actual instructions.

(3) Using arguments designations I and II together

If addresses corresponding to the same variable are commanded when both types I and II are
used to designate arguments, the latter address is valid.
(Example 1)
Call instruction G65 A1.1 B–2.2 D3.3 I4.4 I7.7 ;
Variable
#1 : 1.1
#2 : –2.2
#3 :
#4 : 4.4
#5 :
#6 :
#7 : 3.3 7.7

In the above example the last I7.7 argument is valid when both arguments D3.3 and I7.7 are
commanded for the #7 variable.

366
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Modal call A (movement command call)

Main program Subprogram

Oo1
To subprogram

~
G66 Pp1 Ll1 <argument> ;
:
M99 ;
~

: To main
: program
G67 ;
~

To subprogram

When the block with a movement command is commanded between G66 and G67, the movement
command is first executed and then the designated user macro subprogram is executed. The
number of times the subprogram is executed is l1 times with each call.
The <argument> is the same as for a simple call.

Format
G66 P__ L__ <argument> ;
P_ Program No.
L_ No. of repetitions

Detailed description
(1) When the G66 command is entered, the designated user macro subprogram will be called
after the movement command in the block with the movement commands has been executed
until the G67 (cancel) command is entered.
(2) The G66 and G67 commands must be paired in the same program.
A program error will result when G67 is issued without the G66 command.

367
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Modal call B (for each block)

The designated user macro subprogram is unconditionally called at each command block
commanded between G66.1 and G67, and is executed the number of times designated with L.
The <argument> is the same as for a simple call.

Format
G66.1 P__ L__ <argument> ;
P_ Program No.
L_ No. of repetitions

Detailed description
(1) In the G66.1 mode, everything except the O, N and G codes in the various command blocks
which are read are handled as the argument without being executed. Note that the G code
designated last, or the N code commanded after other than O and N is the argument.
(2) The same applies as when G65 P_ is assigned at the head of a block for all significant blocks
in the G66.1 mode.
(Example 1)
N100 G01 G90 X100. Z200. F400 R1000 ;
in the G66.1 P1000 ; mode is the same as:
N100 G65 P1000 G01 G90 X100. Z200. F400 R1000 ;
(Note 1) The call is performed even in the G66.1 command block in the G66.1 mode and the
correspondence between the argument address and the variable number is the
same as for G65 (simple call).
(3) The range of the G and N command values which can be used new as variables in the G66.1
mode is subject to the restrictions applying to value as normal NC command values.
(4) Program No. O, sequence numbers N and modal G code are updated as modal information.

368
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

G code macro call

User macro subprograms with prescribed program numbers can be called merely by issuing the G
code command.

Format
G×× <argument> ;
G×× G code for macro call

Detailed description
(1) The above instruction functions in the same way as the instructions below, and parameters are
set for each G code to determine the correspondence with the instructions.
a: M98 P∆∆∆∆ ;
b: G65 P∆∆∆∆∆ <argument> ;
c: G66 P∆∆∆∆∆ <argument> ;
d: G66.1 P∆∆∆∆∆ <argument> ;

When the parameters corresponding to c and d above are set, issue the cancel command
(G67) either in the user macro or after the call code has been commanded so as to cancel the
modal call.
(2) The correspondence between the "××" which conducts the macro call and the program
number P∆∆∆∆ of the macro to be called is set by parameter.
(3) Up to 10 G codes from G00 to G255 can be used with this command. (G01 to G99 can also be
used with parameter “#1081Gmac_P”).
(4) The commands cannot be issued during a user macro subprogram which has been called by a
G code.

Example of program O 9016

G16 X100. Z100. F500 ;

M99 ;

369
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Miscellaneous command macro call (for M, S, T, B code macro call)

The user macro subprograms of the specified program number can be called merely by issuing an
M (or S, T, B) code. (Only entered codes apply for M but all S, T and B codes apply.)

Format
Mm ; (or Ss ;, Tt ;, Bb ;)
Mm M code for macro call (or S, T, B code)

Detailed description
(1) The above instruction functions in the same way as the instructions below, and parameters are
set for each M code to determine the correspondence with the instructions. (Same for S, T and
B codes)
a: M98 P∆∆∆∆ ;
b: G65 P∆∆∆∆ Mm ;
c: G66 P∆∆∆∆ Mm ; M98, Mm are not output
d: G66.1 P∆∆∆∆ Mm ;
When the parameters corresponding to c and d above are set, issue the cancel command
(G67) either in the user macro or after the call code has been commanded so as to cancel the
modal call.
(2) The correspondence between the "Mm" which conducts the macro call and the program
number P∆∆∆∆ of the macro to be called is set by parameter. Up to 10 M codes from M00 to
M95 can be entered.
Any code except the codes basically required by the machine and the M0, M1, M2, M30 and
M96 ~ M99 codes can be entered.
(3) As with M98, the display appears on the CRT screen of the setting and display unit but the M
codes and MF are not output.
(4) Even if the miscellaneous command entered above is issued during a user macro subprogram
called by the M code, macro call will not result and it will be handled as an ordinary
miscellaneous command.
(5) All S, T and B codes call the subprograms in the prescribed program numbers of the
corresponding S, T and B functions.
(6) Up to 10 M codes can be set, but set the parameter in the following manner when they will not
all be used.

[MACRO FILE (1)]

<CODE> <TYPE> <PROGRAM-No.>

M[01] 20 0 8000 For M20 commands, set to call O8000 in type 0 (M98 type)
M[02] 21 0 8001 For M21 commands, set to call O8001 in type 0 (M98 type)
M[03] 9999 0 199999999
M[04] 9999 0 199999999
M[05] 9999 0 199999999
: : :
Set parameters that will not be used as shown at the left.
: : :
M[10] 9999 0 199999999

370
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Differences between M98 and G65 commands

(1) The argument can be designated for G65 but not for M98.
(2) The sequence number can be designated for M98 but not for G65, G66 and G66.1.
(3) M98 executes a subprogram after all the commands except M, P, H and L in the M98 block
have been executed, but G65 branches to the subprogram without any further operation.
(4) When any address except O, N, P, H or L is included in the M98 block, single block stop results.
This is not the case with G65.
(5) The level of the M98 local variables is fixed but it can be varied in accordance with the nesting
depth for G65. (#1, for instance, has the same significance either before or after M98 but a
different significance in each case with G65.)
(6) The M98 nesting depth extends up to 8 levels in combination with G65, G66 and G66.1. The
G65 nesting depth extends up to only 4 levels in combination with G66 and G66.1.

Macro call command nesting depth

Up to 4 nesting levels are available for macro subprogram calls based on simple call or modal call.
The argument with a macro call instruction is valid only on the called macro level. Since the nesting
depth for macro calls extends up to 4 levels, the argument can be used as a local variable for the
program with each respective macro call.

(Note 1) When a G65, G66, G66.1 G code macro call or miscellaneous command macro call is
conducted, this is regarded as nesting level 1 and the level of the local variables is also
incremented by one.
(Note 2) The designated user macro subprogram is called every time the movement command is
executed with modal call A. However, when the G66 command has been duplicated, the
next user macro subprogram is called every time an axis is moved even with movement
commands in the macro.
User macro subprograms are called in sequence from the subprogram commanded last.

(Example 1)

Main program User macro operation

Macro p1
G66Pp1; (p1 call) x1 w1 x2 M99
Zz1 ; After Z1 execution
Macro p2
G66Pp2; (p2 call)
x1 w1 x2 M99
Zz2 ; After Z2 execution

G67 ; (p2 cancel) Macro p1 Macro p1 Macro p1

Macro p1

Zz3 ; x1 w1 x2 M99
After Z3 execution

G67 ; (p1 cancel)

Zz4 ;
Zz5 ;

371
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

13.9.3 Variables

Function and purpose

Both the variable specifications and user macro specifications are required for the variables which
are used with the user macros.
The offset amounts of the local, common and system variables among the variables for this NC unit
are retained even when the unit's power is turned OFF. (Common variables can also be set to <
Blank > in parameter “#1129PwrVC1”)

Use of multiple variable

When the user macro specifications apply, variable numbers can be turned into variables (multiple
use of variables) or replaced by <formula>. Only one of the arithmetical (+, −, ×, ÷) operations can
be conducted with <formula>.
(Example 1) Multiple use of variables
#1 = 10 #10 = 20 #20 = 30 ; # [# [#1] ] = # [#10] from #1 = 10.
#5 = # [# [#1] ] ; # [#10] = #20 from #10 = 20.
Therefore, #5 = #20 or #5 = 30.

#1 = 10 #10 = 20 #20 = 30 #5 = 1000 ; # [# [#1] ] = # [#10] from #1 = 10.

# [# [#1]] = #5 ; # [#10] = #20 from #10 = 20.
Therefore, #20 = #5 or #20 = 1000.

(Example 2) Replacing variable numbers with <formula>

#10 = 5 ;
# [#10 + 1] = 1000 ; In which case, #6 = 1000.
# [#10 − 1] = −1000 ; In which case, #4 = −1000.
# [#10∗3] = 100 ; In which case, #15 = 100.
# [#10/2] = −100 ; In which case, #3 = −100. (fraction rounded up)

372
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Undefined variables

Variables applying with the user macro specifications such as variables which have not been used
even once after the power was turned ON or local variables not quoted by the G65, G66 or G66.1
commands can be used as <Blank>. Also, variables can forcibly be set to <Blank>. Variable #0 is
always used as the <Blank> variable and nothing can be defined in the left-side member.

(1) Arithmetic expressions

#1 = #0 ; ........................... #1 = <Blank> It should be borne in mind that <Blank> in an
#2 = #0 + 1 ;..................... #2 = 1 arithmetic expression is handled in the same
#3 = 1 + #0 ;..................... #3 = 1 way as 0.
#4 = #0∗10 ; ..................... #4 = 0 <Blank> + <Blank> = 0
#5 = #0 + #0 ;................... #5 = 0 <Blank> + <Constant> = Constant
<Constant> + <Blank> = Constant

(2) Variable quotations

When undefined variable only are quoted, they are ignored up to the address.
When #1 = <Blank>
G0 X#1 Z1000 ; ......................... Equivalent to G0 Z1000 ;
G0 X#1 + 10 Z1000 ; ................. Equivalent to G0 X10 Z1000 ;

(3) Conditional expressions

<Blank> differs from "0" only for EQ and NE. (#0 is <Blank>.)
When #101 = <Blank> When #101 = 0
#101 EQ #0 #101 EQ #0
<Blank> = <Blank> established 0 = <Blank> not established
#101 NE 0 #101 NE 0
<Blank> ≠ 0 established 0 ≠ 0 not established
#101 GE #0 #101 GE #0
<Blank> ≥ 0 established 0 ≥ <Blank> established
#101 GT 0 #101 GT 0
<Blank> > 0 not established 0 > 0 not established
#101 LE #0 #101 LE #0
<Blank> ≤ <Blank> established 0 ≤ <Blank> established
#101 GT0 #101 LT0
<Blank> < 0 not established 0 < 0 not established

(Note 1) Only compare EQ and NE by integers. Use GE, GT, LE and LT for comparison
when there are numbers below the decimal point.

373
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

13.9.4 Types of variables

Common variables

These are the variables used commonly from a random position.

The number of the common variables sets depends on the specifications.
Refer to the explanation about Variables for details.

Local variables (#1 to #33)

These can be defined as an <argument> when a macro subprogram is called or used locally within
main programs and subprograms. They can be duplicated regardless of the relationship existing
between macros (up to 4 levels).
G65 Pp1 Ll1 <argument> ;
p1 Program number
l1 Number of repetitions
The <argument> is assumed to be Aa1 Bb1 Cc1...... Zz1.
The following table shows the correspondences between the addresses designated by
<argument> and the local variable numbers used in the user macro main body.

[Argument designation I]
Call command Local Call command Local
Argument Argument
G65, variable G65, variable
G66.1 address G66.1 address
G66 number G66 number

A #1 Q #17
B #2 R #18
C #3 S #19
D #7 T #20
E #8 U #21
F #9 V #22
× ×∗ G #10 W #23
H #11 X #24
I #4 Y #25
J #5 Z #26
K #6 – #27
× ×∗ L #12 – #28
M #13 – #29
× ×∗ N #14 – #30
× ×∗ O #15 – #31
× ×∗ P #16 – #32
– #33

"×" in the above table denotes an argument address which cannot be used. However, provided that
the G66.1 mode has been established, an argument address denoted by the asterisk can be added
for use.
The hyphen (–) mark indicates that there is no corresponding address.

374
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

[Argument designation II]

Argument Argument
designation II Variable in macro designation II Variable in macro
address address
A #1 J5 #17
B #2 K5 #18
C #3 I6 #19
I1 #4 J6 #20
J1 #5 K6 #21
K1 #6 I7 #22
I2 #7 J7 #23
J2 #8 K7 #24
K2 #9 I8 #25
I3 #10 J8 #26
J3 #11 K8 #27
K3 #12 I9 #28
I4 #13 J9 #29
J4 #14 K9 #30
K4 #15 I10 #31
I5 #16 J10 #32
K10 #33
(Note 1) The numbers 1 to 10 added to I, J and K indicate the sequence of the commanded
sets, and are not required in the actual command.

375
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(1) Local variables in subprograms can be defined by means of the <argument> designation
during macro call. (Local variables can be used freely in those subprograms.)

Main program Subprogram (9900)

To subprogram

G91 G01 X [#19∗COS [#1]]

Y [#19∗SIN [#1]] F#9 ;
G65 P9900 A60. S100. F800 ;

M02 ; M99 ;

Refer to the local variables and

control the movement, etc.

Local variables A (#1) = 60.000

set by argument

F (#9) = 800
Local variable data
table S (#19) = 100.000

(2) Local variables can be used independently on each of the macro calls levels (4 levels).
Local variables are also provided independently for the main program (macro level 0).
Arguments cannot be used for the level 0 local variables.

Main (level 0) O1 (macro level 1) O10 (macro level 2) O100 (macro level 3)
#1=0.1 #2=0.2 #3=0.3 ;
~

~
~

G65 P1 A1. B2. C3. ; G65 P10 A10. B20. C30. ; G65 P100 A100. B200. ;
~
~

M02 ; M99 ; M99 ; M99 ;

Local variables (0) Local variables (1) Local variables (2) Local variables (3)
#1 0.100 A (#1) 0.100 A (#1) 10.000 A (#1) 100.000
#2 0.200 B (#2) 0.200 B (#2) 20.000 B (#2) 200.000
#3 0.300 C (#3) 0.300 C (#3) 30.000 C (#3)
D (#7) D (#7)
~

~
~

~
~

Z (#26) Z (#26) Z (#26)

~

~
~

#32 #32 #32 #32

The statuses of the local variables appear on the setting and display unit.
For details, refer to the Operating Manual.

376
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Macro interface inputs (#1000 ~ #1035, #1200 ~ #1295)

The status of the interface input signals can be ascertained by reading out the values of variable
numbers #1000 to #1035, #1200 to #1295. Available value which has been read out can be only
one of 2 values: 1 or 0 (1: contact closed, 0: contact open). All the input signals from #1000 to
#1031 can be read at once by reading out the value of variable number #1032. In the same manner,
by reading the values for variable numbers #1033 to #1035, the input signals for #1200 to #1231,
#1232 to #1263 and #1264 to #1295 can be read.
Variable numbers #1000 to #1035, #1200 to #1295 are for readout only, and nothing can be placed
in the left side member of their operation formula.
System No. of System No. of Interface input
Interface input signal
variable points variable points signal
#1000 1 Register R72 bit 0 #1016 1 Register R73 bit 0
#1001 1 Register R72 bit 1 #1017 1 Register R73 bit 1
#1002 1 Register R72 bit 2 #1018 1 Register R73 bit 2
#1003 1 Register R72 bit 3 #1019 1 Register R73 bit 3
#1004 1 Register R72 bit 4 #1020 1 Register R73 bit 4
#1005 1 Register R72 bit 5 #1021 1 Register R73 bit 5
#1006 1 Register R72 bit 6 #1022 1 Register R73 bit 6
#1007 1 Register R72 bit 7 #1023 1 Register R73 bit 7
#1008 1 Register R72 bit 8 #1024 1 Register R73 bit 8
#1009 1 Register R72 bit 9 #1025 1 Register R73 bit 9
#1010 1 Register R72 bit 10 #1026 1 Register R73 bit 10
#1011 1 Register R72 bit 11 #1027 1 Register R73 bit 11
#1012 1 Register R72 bit 12 #1028 1 Register R73 bit 12
#1013 1 Register R72 bit 13 #1029 1 Register R73 bit 13
#1014 1 Register R72 bit 14 #1030 1 Register R73 bit 14
#1015 1 Register R72 bit 15 #1031 1 Register R73 bit 15

System No. of
Interface input signal
variable points
#1032 32 Register R72, R73
#1033 32 Register R74, R75
#1034 32 Register R76, R77
#1035 32 Register R78, R79

377
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

System No. of System No. of Interface input

Interface input signal
variable points variable points signal
#1200 1 Register R74 bit 0 #1216 1 Register R75 bit 0
#1201 1 Register R74 bit 1 #1217 1 Register R75 bit 1
#1202 1 Register R74 bit 2 #1218 1 Register R75 bit 2
#1203 1 Register R74 bit 3 #1219 1 Register R75 bit 3
#1204 1 Register R74 bit 4 #1220 1 Register R75 bit 4
#1205 1 Register R74 bit 5 #1221 1 Register R75 bit 5
#1206 1 Register R74 bit 6 #1222 1 Register R75 bit 6
#1207 1 Register R74 bit 7 #1223 1 Register R75 bit 7
#1208 1 Register R74 bit 8 #1224 1 Register R75 bit 8
#1209 1 Register R74 bit 9 #1225 1 Register R75 bit 9
#1210 1 Register R74 bit 10 #1226 1 Register R75 bit 10
#1211 1 Register R74 bit 11 #1227 1 Register R75 bit 11
#1212 1 Register R74 bit 12 #1228 1 Register R75 bit 12
#1213 1 Register R74 bit 13 #1229 1 Register R75 bit 13
#1214 1 Register R74 bit 14 #1230 1 Register R75 bit 14
#1215 1 Register R74 bit 15 #1231 1 Register R75 bit 15

System No. of System No. of Interface input

Interface input signal
variable points variable points signal
#1232 1 Register R76 bit 0 #1248 1 Register R77 bit 0
#1233 1 Register R76 bit 1 #1249 1 Register R77 bit 1
#1234 1 Register R76 bit 2 #1250 1 Register R77 bit 2
#1235 1 Register R76 bit 3 #1251 1 Register R77 bit 3
#1236 1 Register R76 bit 4 #1252 1 Register R77 bit 4
#1237 1 Register R76 bit 5 #1253 1 Register R77 bit 5
#1238 1 Register R76 bit 6 #1254 1 Register R77 bit 6
#1239 1 Register R76 bit 7 #1255 1 Register R77 bit 7
#1240 1 Register R76 bit 8 #1256 1 Register R77 bit 8
#1241 1 Register R76 bit 9 #1257 1 Register R77 bit 9
#1242 1 Register R76 bit 10 #1258 1 Register R77 bit 10
#1243 1 Register R76 bit 11 #1259 1 Register R77 bit 11
#1244 1 Register R76 bit 12 #1260 1 Register R77 bit 12
#1245 1 Register R76 bit 13 #1261 1 Register R77 bit 13
#1246 1 Register R76 bit 14 #1262 1 Register R77 bit 14
#1247 1 Register R76 bit 15 #1263 1 Register R77 bit 15

378
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

System No. of System No. of Interface input

Interface input signal
variable points variable points signal
#1264 1 Register R78 bit 0 #1280 1 Register R79 bit 0
#1265 1 Register R78 bit 1 #1281 1 Register R79 bit 1
#1266 1 Register R78 bit 2 #1282 1 Register R79 bit 2
#1267 1 Register R78 bit 3 #1283 1 Register R79 bit 3
#1268 1 Register R78 bit 4 #1284 1 Register R79 bit 4
#1269 1 Register R78 bit 5 #1285 1 Register R79 bit 5
#1270 1 Register R78 bit 6 #1286 1 Register R79 bit 6
#1271 1 Register R78 bit 7 #1287 1 Register R79 bit 7
#1272 1 Register R78 bit 8 #1288 1 Register R79 bit 8
#1273 1 Register R78 bit 9 #1289 1 Register R79 bit 9
#1274 1 Register R78 bit 10 #1290 1 Register R79 bit 10
#1275 1 Register R78 bit 11 #1291 1 Register R79 bit 11
#1276 1 Register R78 bit 12 #1292 1 Register R79 bit 12
#1277 1 Register R78 bit 13 #1293 1 Register R79 bit 13
#1278 1 Register R78 bit 14 #1294 1 Register R79 bit 14
#1279 1 Register R78 bit 15 #1295 1 Register R79 bit 15

379
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Macro interface outputs (#1100 ~ #1135, #1300 ~ #1395)

The interface output signals can be sent by substituting values in variable numbers #1100 to #1135,
#1300 to #1395. An output signal can be only 0 or 1.
All the output signals from #1100 to #1131 can be sent at once by substituting a value in variable
number #1132. In the same manner, by reading the values for variable numbers #1133 to #1135,
the output signals for #1300 to #1331, #1332 to #1363 and #1364 to #1395 can be read. (20 to 231)
The status of the writing and output signals can be read in order to offset the #1100 to #1135,
#1300 to #1395 output signals. Output here refers to the output from the NC side.
System No. of System No. of Interface input
Interface input signal
variable points variable points signal
#1100 1 Register R172 bit 0 #1116 1 Register R173 bit 0
#1101 1 Register R172 bit 1 #1117 1 Register R173 bit 1
#1102 1 Register R172 bit 2 #1118 1 Register R173 bit 2
#1103 1 Register R172 bit 3 #1119 1 Register R173 bit 3
#1104 1 Register R172 bit 4 #1120 1 Register R173 bit 4
#1105 1 Register R172 bit 5 #1121 1 Register R173 bit 5
#1106 1 Register R172 bit 6 #1122 1 Register R173 bit 6
#1107 1 Register R172 bit 7 #1123 1 Register R173 bit 7
#1108 1 Register R172 bit 8 #1124 1 Register R173 bit 8
#1109 1 Register R172 bit 9 #1125 1 Register R173 bit 9
#1110 1 Register R172 bit 10 #1126 1 Register R173 bit 10
#1111 1 Register R172 bit 11 #1127 1 Register R173 bit 11
#1112 1 Register R172 bit 12 #1128 1 Register R173 bit 12
#1113 1 Register R172 bit 13 #1129 1 Register R173 bit 13
#1114 1 Register R172 bit 14 #1130 1 Register R173 bit 14
#1115 1 Register R172 bit 15 #1131 1 Register R173 bit 15

System No. of
Interface input signal
variable points
#1132 32 Register R172, R173
#1133 32 Register R174, R175
#1134 32 Register R176, R177
#1135 32 Register R178, R179

380
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

System No. of System No. of Interface input

Interface input signal
variable points variable points signal
#1300 1 Register R174 bit 0 #1316 1 Register R175 bit 0
#1301 1 Register R174 bit 1 #1317 1 Register R175 bit 1
#1302 1 Register R174 bit 2 #1318 1 Register R175 bit 2
#1303 1 Register R174 bit 3 #1319 1 Register R175 bit 3
#1304 1 Register R174 bit 4 #1320 1 Register R175 bit 4
#1305 1 Register R174 bit 5 #1321 1 Register R175 bit 5
#1306 1 Register R174 bit 6 #1322 1 Register R175 bit 6
#1307 1 Register R174 bit 7 #1323 1 Register R175 bit 7
#1308 1 Register R174 bit 8 #1324 1 Register R175 bit 8
#1309 1 Register R174 bit 9 #1325 1 Register R175 bit 9
#1310 1 Register R174 bit 10 #1326 1 Register R175 bit 10
#1311 1 Register R174 bit 11 #1327 1 Register R175 bit 11
#1312 1 Register R174 bit 12 #1328 1 Register R175 bit 12
#1313 1 Register R174 bit 13 #1329 1 Register R175 bit 13
#1314 1 Register R174 bit 14 #1330 1 Register R175 bit 14
#1315 1 Register R174 bit 15 #1331 1 Register R175 bit 15

System No. of System No. of Interface input

Interface input signal
variable points variable points signal
#1332 1 Register R176 bit 0 #1348 1 Register R177 bit 0
#1333 1 Register R176 bit 1 #1349 1 Register R177 bit 1
#1334 1 Register R176 bit 2 #1350 1 Register R177 bit 2
#1335 1 Register R176 bit 3 #1351 1 Register R177 bit 3
#1336 1 Register R176 bit 4 #1352 1 Register R177 bit 4
#1337 1 Register R176 bit 5 #1353 1 Register R177 bit 5
#1338 1 Register R176 bit 6 #1354 1 Register R177 bit 6
#1339 1 Register R176 bit 7 #1355 1 Register R177 bit 7
#1340 1 Register R176 bit 8 #1356 1 Register R177 bit 8
#1341 1 Register R176 bit 9 #1357 1 Register R177 bit 9
#1342 1 Register R176 bit 10 #1358 1 Register R177 bit 10
#1343 1 Register R176 bit 11 #1359 1 Register R177 bit 11
#1344 1 Register R176 bit 12 #1360 1 Register R177 bit 12
#1345 1 Register R176 bit 13 #1361 1 Register R177 bit 13
#1346 1 Register R176 bit 14 #1362 1 Register R177 bit 14
#1347 1 Register R176 bit 15 #1363 1 Register R177 bit 15

381
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

System No. of System No. of Interface input

Interface input signal
variable points variable points signal
#1364 1 Register R178 bit 0 #1380 1 Register R179 bit 0
#1365 1 Register R178 bit 1 #1381 1 Register R179 bit 1
#1366 1 Register R178 bit 2 #1382 1 Register R179 bit 2
#1367 1 Register R178 bit 3 #1383 1 Register R179 bit 3
#1368 1 Register R178 bit 4 #1384 1 Register R179 bit 4
#1369 1 Register R178 bit 5 #1385 1 Register R179 bit 5
#1370 1 Register R178 bit 6 #1386 1 Register R179 bit 6
#1371 1 Register R178 bit 7 #1387 1 Register R179 bit 7
#1372 1 Register R178 bit 8 #1388 1 Register R179 bit 8
#1373 1 Register R178 bit 9 #1389 1 Register R179 bit 9
#1374 1 Register R178 bit 10 #1390 1 Register R179 bit 10
#1375 1 Register R178 bit 11 #1391 1 Register R179 bit 11
#1376 1 Register R178 bit 12 #1392 1 Register R179 bit 12
#1377 1 Register R178 bit 13 #1393 1 Register R179 bit 13
#1378 1 Register R178 bit 14 #1394 1 Register R179 bit 14
#1379 1 Register R178 bit 15 #1395 1 Register R179 bit 15
(Note 1) The last values of the system variables #1100 to #1135, #1300 to #1395 sent are
retained as 1 or 0.
(They are not cleared even with resetting.)
(Note 2) The following applies when any number except 1 or 0 is substituted into #1100 to #1131,
#1300 to #1395.
<Blank> is treated as 0.
Any number except 0 and <Blank> is treated as 1.
Any value less than 0.00000001 is indefinite.

382
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

#1032 (R72,R73) #1132 (R172,R173)

Input signal Output signal
#1000 #1100

#1031 #1131

#1033 (R74,R75) #1133 (R174,R175)

#1200 #1300

Macro instructions
#1231 #1331

#1034 (R76,R77) #1134 (R176,R177)

#1232 #1332

#1263 #1363

#1035 (R78,R79) #1135 (R178,R179)

#1264 #1364

#1295 #1395

383
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Tool offset

This is used to change the variable number of the user macro variable's tool offset shape
compensation and wear compensation.

The variable No. of the address #2000 X, Z and R compensation amounts is changed according to
the value set in the "#1120 TofVal (change macro variable)" parameter.
Variable number range
Details
#1120 TofVal=0,1 #1120 TofVal=0 #1120 TofVal=1
#10001 to #10000+n #2001 to #2000+n #2701 to #2700+n X shape compensation amount
#11001 to #11000+n #2701 to #2700+n #2001 to #2000+n X wear compensation amount
Tool compensation selection
#12001 to #12000+n – additional axis shape compensation
amount
Tool compensation selection
#13001 to #13000+n – additional axis wear compensation
amount
#14001 to #14000+n #2101 to #2100+n #2801 to #2800+n Z shape compensation amount
#15001 to #15000+n #2801 to #2800+n #2101 to #2100+n Z wear compensation amount
#16001 to #16000+n #2201 to #2200+n #2901 to #2900+n R shape compensation amount
#17001 to #17000+n #2901 to #2900+n #2201 to #2200+n R wear compensation amount
#18001 to #18000+n #2301 to #2300+n Nose compensation amount

(Note) Using the parameter (#1520 Tchg34) select whether the additional axis tool compensation is
valid for the 3rd axis or 4th axis.

Tool data can be read and values substituted using the variable numbers.
Either the numbers in the #10000 order or #2000 order can be used.
The last 3 digits of the variable numbers correspond to the tool offset number.
The tool offset data are configured as data with a decimal point in the same way as for other
variables.
Consequently, this decimal point must be commanded when data below the decimal point is to be
entered.

Programming example Common variables Tool offset data

#101 = 1000 ; #101 = 1000.0

After
#10001 = #101 ; execution H1 = 1000.000
#102 = #10001 ; #102 = 1000.0

(Example 1) Calculation and tool offset data setting

Zero point return #1

G28 X0 T0101 ;
Tool change (T0101)
M06 ; G00
#1 = #5001 ; Start point storage H1
G00 X–200. ; Rapid traverse to safe position
G31
G31 X–50. F100 ; Skip measuring #5061
#10001 = #5061 – #1 ; Measurement distance
calculation and tool offset
~

data setting
Sensor

384
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(Note 1) In (Example 1) no consideration is given to the delay in the skip sensor signal.
#5001 is the X-axis start point position and #5061 is the X-axis skip coordinates, and
indicated is the position at which the skip signal is input while G31 is being executed.
(Note 2) For multiple systems
There are cases when each system has tool data and when the systems share common
tool data. This can be selected with parameter (#1501 MemTol).
Parameter #1501 MemTol 0 : Tool data provided for each system
1 : Tool data shared by systems
When the tool data is shared by the systems, the read amount and substitution amount
for the system 1 tool offset variable and system 2 tool offset variable will be the same
(when the same variable No. is commanded).

385
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Workpiece coordinate system offset

By using variable numbers #5201 to #532n, it is possible to read out the workpiece coordinate
system offset data or to substitute values.
(Note) The number of axes which can be controlled differs according to the specifications.
The last digit in the variable number corresponds to the control axis number.
Axis No.
1st 2nd 3rd 4th • •
nth
Remarks
Coordinate axis axis axis axis axis
name
External workpiece
External workpiece • •
#5201 #5202 #5203 #5204 #520n offset specifications
offset
are required.
G54 #5221 #5222 #5223 #5224 • • #522n
G55 #5241 #5242 #5243 #5244 • • #524n Workpiece coordinate
G56 #5261 #5262 #5263 #5264 • • #526n system offset
G57 #5281 #5282 #5283 #5284 • • #528n specifications are
G58 #5301 #5302 #5303 #5304 • • #530n required.
G59 #5321 #5322 #5323 #5324 • • #532n

(Example 1)
N1 G28 X0 Z0 ;
N2 #5221 = –20. #5223 = –20. ; N1
N3 G00 G54 X0 Z0 ; -90. -20.
~

N3
N10 #5221 = –10. #5223 = –90. ;
-10.
N11 G00 G54 X020 ;
W1 N11 -20.
~

G54 workpiece coordinate W1

M02 ;
system defined by N10

G54 workpiece coordinate

system defined by N2
(Example 2)

Basic machine coordinate

External workpiece offset
~

Coordinate
system before G55
G54
change
W2 (G55)
N100 #5221 = #5221 + #5201 ;
W1 (G54)
#5222 = #5222 + #5202 ;
#5241 = #5241 + #5201 ;
#5242 = #5242 + #5202 ;
#5201 = 0 #5202 = 0 ; Basic machine coordinate system

G55
~

Coordinate G54
system after
change W2 (G55)
W1 (G54)

This is an example where the eternal workpiece offset values are added to the workpiece
coordinate (G54, G55) system offset values without changing the position of the workpiece
coordinate systems.

386
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

NC alarm (#3000)

The NC unit can be forcibly set to the alarm state by using variable number #3000.
Format
#3000 = 70 (CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530) ;
70 Alarm number
CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530 Alarm message
Any alarm number from 1 to 9999 can be specified.
The alarm message must be less than 31 characters long.

The "P277: MACRO ALM MESG" appears in the <ALARM> column on "DIAG 1." screen while the
alarm number and alarm message "70: (CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530)" is indicated in the
<Operator massage>.

Example of program (alarm when #1 = 0)

~

<ALARM> DIAG 1.
1F [#1 NE 0] GOTO 100 ; Stops with
#3000=70 (CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530 ) ; NC alarm
P277 : MACRO ALM MESG

N100 <Operator message>

~

CALL #PROGRAMMER #TEL #530 70

(Note 1) Alarm number 0 is not displayed and any number exceeding 9999 cannot be indicated.
(Note 2) The characters following the first alphabet letter in the right member is treated as the
alarm message. Therefore, a number cannot be designated as the first character of an
alarm manage. It is recommended that the alarm messages be enclosed in round
parentheses.

387
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Integrating time (#3001, #3002)

The integrating time can be read when the power is turned ON or automatic start or values can be
substituted by using variable numbers #3001 and #3002.
Variable Contents when power Initialization
Type Unit Count conditions
number is switched on of contents
At all times while
Power ON 3001 Value
Same as when power is power is ON
1ms substituted
Automatic turned OFF
3002 for variable In-automatic start
start
The integrating time returns to zero in about 2.44 × 1011 ms (approximately 7.7 years).

To subprogram O9010
#3001=0 ;
~

WHILE [#3001LE#20] DO1 ;

G65 P9010T (allowable time) ms ;
~

END1 ;

M99 ;

Local variable
Allowable time portion:
T#20 ——— DO1~END1 is repeated and
Entered in local variable #20 when allowable time is
reached, operations jumps to
M99.

Suppression of single block stop and miscellaneous function finish signal waiting

By substituting the values below in variable number #3003, it is possible to suppress single block
stop in the subsequent blocks or to advance to the next block without waiting for the miscellaneous
function (M, S, T, B) finish (FIN) signal.
#3003 Single block stop Miscellaneous function finish signal
0 Not suppressed Wait
1 Suppressed Wait
2 Not suppressed No wait
3 Suppressed No wait
(Note 1) #3003 is cleared to zero by resetting.

388
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Feed hold, feedrate override, G09 valid/invalid

By substituting the values below in variable number #3004, it is possible to make the feed hold,
feedrate override and G09 functions either valid or invalid in the subsequent blocks.
#3004 contents Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2
(value) Feed hold Feedrate override G09 check
0 Valid Valid Valid
1 Invalid Valid Valid
2 Valid Invalid Valid
3 Invalid Invalid Valid
4 Valid Valid Invalid
5 Invalid Valid Invalid
6 Valid Invalid Invalid
7 Invalid Invalid Invalid
(Note 1) #3004 is cleared to zero by resetting.
(Note 2) The functions are valid when the above bits are 0 and invalid when they are 1.

Message display and stop

By using variable number #3006, the execution is stopped after the previous block has been
executed and, if message display data have been commanded, then the corresponding message
will be indicated.
Format
#3006=1 (TAKE FIVE) ;
TAKE FIVE Message
The message should not be longer than 31 characters and it should be enclosed within round
parentheses.

Mirror image

By reading variable number #3007, it is possible to ascertain the status of mirror image at a
particular point in time for each axis.
The axes correspond to the bits of #3007. When the bits are 0, it means that the mirror image
function is invalid; when they are 1, it means that it is valid.

Bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
nth axis 4 3 2 1

389
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

G command modals

Using variable numbers #4001 to #4021, it is possible to read the G modal commands which have
been issued up to the block immediately before.
Similarly, it is possible to read the medals in the block being executed with variable numbers #4201
to #4221.

Variable number
Pre-read Execution Function
block block
#4001 #4201 Interpolation mode: G00:0, G01:1, G02:2, G03:3, G33:33
#4002 #4202 Plane selection: G17:17, G18:18, G19:19
#4003 #4203 Absolute/incremental: G90:90, G91:91
#4004 #4204 Barrier check: G22:22, G23:23
#4005 #4205 Feed designation: G94:94, G95:95
#4006 #4206 Inch/metric: G20:20, G21:21
#4007 #4207 Tool nose R compensation: G40:40, G41:41, G42:42, G46:46
#4008 #4208 No variable No.
Fixed cycle: G80:80, G70~79:70~79, G83~G85:83~85,
#4009 #4209
G83.2:83.2, G87~G89:87~89
#4010 #4210 Return level: G98:98, G99:99
#4011 #4211
#4012 #4212 Workpiece coordinate system: G54~G59:54~59
#4013 #4213 Acceleration/deceleration:G61~G64:61~64, G61.1:61.1
#4014 #4214 Macro modal call: G66:66, G66.1:66.1, G67:67
#4015 #4215
#4016 #4216 No variable No.
#4017 #4217 Constant surface speed control: G96:96, G97:97
#4018 #4218 Balance cut: G14:14, G15:15
#4019 #4219
#4020 #4220
#4021 #4221
(Example)
G29 X0 Z0 ;
G00 X150. Z200 ;
G65 P300 G02 W−30. K−15. F1000 ;
M02 ;
O300
#1 = #4001 ; → Group 01 G modal (pre-read) #1 = 2.0
#2 = #4201 ; → Group 01 G modal (now being executed) #2 = 0.0
G#1 W#24 ;
M99 ;
%

390
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Other modals

Using variable numbers #4101 to #4120, it is possible to read the modal commands assigned up to
the block immediately before.
Similarly, it is possible to read the medals in the block being executed with variable numbers #4301
to #4320.
Variable number
Modal information Variable number
Pre-read Execution Modal information
Pre-read Execution
#4101 #4301
#4111 #4311
#4102 #4302
#4112 #4312
#4103 #4303
#4113 #4313 Miscellaneous function M
#4104 #4304
#4114 #4314 Sequence number N
#4105 #4305
#4115 #4315 Program number O
#4106 #4306
#4116 #4316
#4107 #4307
#4117 #4317
#4108 #4308
#4118 #4318
#4109 #4309 Feedrate F
#4119 #4319 Spindle function S
#4110 #4310
#4120 #4320 Tool function T
Position information

Using variable numbers #5001 to #5104, it is possible to read the servo deviation amounts, tool
position offset amount, skip coordinates, work coordinates, machine coordinates and end point
coordinates in the block immediately before.
Position End point Tool
information coordinate Servo
Machine Workpiece Skip position
of block deviation
coordinate coordinate coordinate offset
immediately amount
before amount
Axis No.
1 #5001 #5021 #5041 #5061 #5081 #5101
2 #5002 #5022 #5042 #5062 #5082 #5102
3 #5003 #5023 #5043 #5063 #5083 #5203
4 #5004 #5024 #5044 #5064 #5084 #5104
: : : : : : :
n #5000+n #5020+n #5040+n #5060+n #5080+n #5100+n
Remarks (reading
Yes No No Yes No Yes
during movement)
(Note) The number of axes which can be controlled differs according to the NC specifications.
The last digit of the variable number corresponds to the control axis number.

391
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Basic machine coordinate system M

Workpiece coordinate system W

G00

G01

Read
command
[End point
coordinates]

W Workpiece
coordinate
system
[Workpiece
coordinates] Machine
coordinate
[Machine
M system
coordinates]

(1) The positions of the end point coordinates and skip coordinates are positions in the workpiece
coordinate system.
(2) The end point coordinates, skip coordinates and servo deviation amounts can be read even
during movement. However, it must first be checked that movement has stopped before
reading the machine coordinates and workpiece coordinates.
(3) The position where the skip signal is turned ON in the G31 block is indicated for the skip
coordinates. The end point position is indicated when the skip signal has not been turned ON.
(For further details, refer to the section on tool length measurement.)

Read
Command
Gauge,
etc.

Skip coordinates value

392
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(4) The tool nose position where the tool offset and other such factors are not considered is
indicated as the end point position. The tool reference point position with consideration given
to tool offset is indicated for the machine coordinates, workpiece coordinates and skip
coordinates.

Skip signal

G31
F (feedrate)
W Workpiece coordinate
system
[Workpiece
[Input coordinates of skip signal] coordinates]
Machine coordinate
M system
[Machine coordinates]

For " ", check stop and then proceed to read.

For " ", reading is possible during movement.

The position of the skip signal input coordinate value is the position in the workpiece
coordinate system. The coordinate value in variable numbers #5061 to #5064 memorize the
moments when the skip input signal during movement was input and so they can be read at
any subsequent time.
For further details, reference should be made to the section on the skip function.

393
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Variable name setting and quotation

Any name (variable name) can be given to common variables #500 to #519. It must be composed
of not more than 7 alphanumerics and it must begin with a letter. Do not use "#" in the variable
name. An alarm will result at execution when this sign is used.
Format
SETVNn [NAME1, NAME2,….…] ;
n Head number of variable which assigns name
NAME1 #n name (variable name)
NAME2 #n + 1 name (variable name)
Variable names are separated by a comma (,).
Detailed description
(1) Once variable names have been set, they will not be cleared even when the power is turned
OFF.
(2) The variables in the program are quoted as variable names. In cases like this, the variables
should be enclosed in square parentheses.
(Example 1) G01X [#POINT1] ;
(3) The variable numbers, data and variable names appear on the CRT screen of the setting and
display unit.
(Example 2)
Program... SETVN500 [A234567, DIST, TOOL25] ;

[Common variables]
#500 –12345.678 A234567
#501 5670.000 DIST
#502 –156.500 TOOL25

#518 10.000 NUMBER

Common variable #(502) DATA (–156.5) NAME (TOOL25)

(Note) Do not use characters (SIN, COS, etc.) predetermined by the NC for use as operation
commands at the head of the variable name.

394
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Workpiece coordinate shift amount

The workpiece coordinate system shift amount can be read using variables #2501 and #2601.
By substituting a value in these variables, the workpiece coordinate system shift amount can be
changed.
Workpiece coordinate
Axis No.
system shift amount
1 #2501
2 #2601

Number of workpiece machining times

The number of workpiece machining times can be read using variables #3901 and #3902.
By substituting a value in these variables, the number of workpiece machining times can be
changed.
Type Variable No. Data setting range
Number of workpiece
#3901
machining times
0 to 999999
Maximum workpiece
#3902
value
(Note) Always input the number of workpiece machining times as a positive value.

395
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Tool life management

(1) Definition of variable numbers

(a) Designation of group No.
#60000
The tool life management data group No. to be read with #60001 to #64700 is designated
by substituting a value in this variable. If a group No. is not designated, the data of the
group registered first is read. This is valid until reset.
(b) Tool life management system variable No. (Read)
#60001 to #64700

# ? ? ? ? ?

+ Variable No. or data type

Data class
6: Tool life management

(c) Details of data classification

Data class M System L System Remarks
00 For control For control Refer to following types
05 Group No. Group No. Refer to registration No.
10 Tool No. Tool No. Refer to registration No.
15 Tool data flag Method Refer to registration No.
20 Tool status Status Refer to registration No.
25 Life data Life time/No. of times Refer to registration No.
Usage time/No. of
30 Usage data Refer to registration No.
times
Tool length
35 – Refer to registration No.
compensation data
Tool radius
40 – Refer to registration No.
compensation data
45 Auxiliary data – Refer to registration No.
The group No., L System method, and life data are common for the group.
(d) Registration No.
M System 1 to 200
L System 1 to 16
(e) Data type
Type M System L System Remarks
1 Number of registered tools Number of registered tools
2 Life current value Life current value
3 Tool selected No. Tool selected No.
Number of remaining Number of remaining
4
registered tools registered tools
5 Signal being executed Signal being executed
Cutting time cumulative Cutting time cumulative
6
value (minute) value (minute)
7 Life end signal Life end signal
8 Life prediction signal Life prediction signal

396
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Variable
Item Type Details Data range
No.
60001 Number of System Total number of tools registered in each 0 to 80
registered common group.
tools
60002 Life For each Usage time/No. of uses of tool being used. 0 to 999999
current group min
value Usage data of tool being used (If tool uses 0 to 999999
(Desig- several compensation numbers, the total of
nate times
the usage data for each compensation No.).
group
60003 Tool No. Registration No. of tool being used. 0 to 16
selected #60000)
No. Designated group's selection tool registration
No. (If tool is not selected, the first tool of
ST:1, or if ST:1 is not used, the first tool of
ST:0. When all tools have reached their lives,
the last tool).
60004 Remaining Total number of "usable" tools in the group. 0 to 16
number of
registered Number of tools registered in designated
tools group for which ST is 0: Not used.
60005 Signal "1" when this group is used in program being 0/1
being executed.
executed
"1" when tool in designated group is selected.
60006 Cutting Indicates the time that this group is used in
time the program being executed.
cumulative
value
(minute)
60007 Life end "1" when lives of all tools in this group have 0/1
signal been reached.
"1" when all tools registered in designated
group reach lives.
60008 Life "1" when new tool is selected with next 0/1
prediction command in this group.
signal
"1" when there is a tool for which ST is 0: Not
used in the tools registered the designated
group, and there are no tools for which ST is
1: Tools in use.

397
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Variable
Item Type Details Data range
No.
60500 Group No. Each This group's No. 1 to 9999
+*** group/
61000 Tool No. registra- Tool's No. and compensation No. 0 to 9999
+*** tion No.
(Group Tool No. + compensation No.
No. (When tool No. = 22 and compensation No. =
#60000/ 01, 2201=899H)
61500 Method registra- Whether to management this group's life as 0/1
+*** tion No. time or No. of uses.
*** is
0: Time, 1: No. of uses
desig-
62000 Status nated.) Tool usage state 0 to 3
+***
0: Not used tool
Note the 1: Tool being used
group 2: Normal life tool
No., 3: Tool skip tool
62500 Life method This group's tool life value 0 to 999999
+*** time/No. of and life min
uses are 0 to 999999
common times
for the
63000 Usage 0 to 999999
groups.
+*** time/No. of min
uses 0 to 999999
times
63500 –
+***
64000 –
+***
64500 –
+***

398
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Example of program

(1) Normal commands

#101 = #60001 ; ...... Reads the number of registered tools.
#102 = #60002 ; ...... Reads the life current value.
#103 = #60003 ; ...... Reads the tool selection No.
#60000 = 10 ; .......... Designates the group No. of the life data to be
read.
#104 = #60004 ; ...... Reads the remaining number of registered
tools in group 10.
#105 = #60005 ; ...... Reads the signal being executed in group 10. Designated
#111 = #61001 ; ...... Reads the group 10, #1 tool No. program No. is
#112 = #62001 ; ...... Reads the group 10, #1 status. valid until reset.
#113 = #61002 ; ...... Reads the group 10, #2 tool No.
%
(2) When group No. is not designated
#104 = #60004 ; ...... Reads the remaining number of registered tools in the group registered
first.
#111 = #61001 ; ...... Reads the #1 tool No. in the group registered first.
%
(3) When non-registered group No. is designated (Group 9999 does not exist.)
#60000 = 9999 ; ...... Designates the group No.
#104 = #60004 ; ...... #104 = –1.
(4) When registration No. not used is designated (Group 10 has 15 tools)
#60000 = 10 ; .......... Designates the group No.
#111 = #61016 ; ...... #101 = –1.
(5) When registration No. out of the specifications is designated
#6000 = 10 ;
#111 = #61017 ; ...... Program error (P241)

(6) When tool life management data is registered with G10 command after group No. is
designated
#60000 = 10 ; .......... Designates the group No.
G10 L3 ; ................... Starts the life management data registration.
P10 LLn NNn ; ........ 10 is the group No., Ln is the life per tool,
Nn is the method.
TTn ; ........................ Tn is the tool No. The group 10 life data
: is registered.
G11 ; ....................... Registers the group 10 data with the G10
................................. command.
#111 = #61001 ; ...... Reads the group 10, #1 tool No.
G10 L3 ; ................... Starts the life management data registration.
P1 LLn NNn ; .......... 1 is the group No., Ln is the life per tool,
................................. Nn is the method.
TTn ; ........................ Tn is the tool No.
: The life data other than
group 10 is registered.
G11 ; ........................ Registers the life data with the G10 command.
................................. (The registered data is deleted.)
#111 = 61001 ; ........ Group 10 does not exist. #111 = –1.

399
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Precautions

(1) If the tool life management system variable is commanded without designating a group No.,
the data of the group registered at the head of the registered data will be read.
(2) If a non-registered group No. is designated and the tool life management system variable is
commanded, "–1" will be read as the data.
(3) If an unused registration No. tool life management system variable is commanded, "–1" will be
read as the data.
(4) Once commanded, the group No. is valid until NC reset.
(5) When the tool life control I specifications are provided with the L System, the tool life
management system variable specifications are not provided. "P241 NO VARI NUMBER" will
occur if commanded.

400
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Reading the parameters

System data can be read in with the system variables.

(Note) These can be used only with some models.
Variable No. Application
#100000 Parameter # designation
#100001 System No. designation
#100002 Axis No./spindle No. designation
#100010 Parameter value read

The parameter values are read in with the following four blocks using these four system variables.
#100000 = 1001 ; ..........Designates the parameter #.
#100001 = 1 ; ................Designates the system No.
#100002 = 1 ; ................Designates the axis No./spindle No.
#100 = #100010 ; ..........Reads the parameter value.

(1) Parameter # designation (#100000)

The parameter to be read in is designated by substituting the parameter # in this system
variable.
If the parameters are read without designating this number, the parameters will be read in the
same manner as if the minimum parameter # (#1) is designated. Once designated, the setting
is held until the parameter # is designated again or until it is reset.
A program error (P39) will occur if a parameter # that does not exist is set.

(2) System No. designation (#100001)

(a) System variable for system No. designation
The system No. of the parameter to be read in is designated by substituting an index value
in this system variable. This designation will be ignored when reading in parameters that
are not in a specific system.
If the parameters are read without designating this number, the parameters will be read in
the same manner as if the index value 0 (system in running program) is designated. Once
designated, the setting is held until the system No. is designated again or until it is reset.
A program error (P39) will occur if a system No. that does not exist is set.

(b) Index values

Index value Parameters per system
0 Running system
1 1st system
2 2nd system
3 –
: –
9 –
10 PLC axis

401
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(3) Axis/spindle No. designation (#100002)

(a) System variable for axis/spindle No. designation
The axis No./spindle No. of the parameter to be read in is designated by substituting an
index value in this system variable. This designation will be ignored when reading in
parameters that are not for a specific axis or spindle.
The axis parameter index value is the value set in the system designated with #100001.
Thus, when reading parameters that are not in the designated system, the system No.
must be designated again.
The spindle parameter's index value is not affected by the system designation.
If the parameters are read without designating this number, the parameters will be read in
the same manner as if the index value 1 (1st axis/1st spindle in designated system) is
designated. Once designated, the setting is held until the index value is designated again
or until it is reset.
A program error (P39) will occur if an axis/spindle No. that does not exist is set.

(b) Index values

Index values Axis parameter Spindle parameter
1 1st axis 1st spindle
2 2nd axis 2nd spindle
3 3rd axis –
4 4th axis –
5 5th axis –
6 6th axis –

(4) Parameter read (#100010)

The designated parameter data is read with this system variable.
The following data is read according to the parameter type.
Type Read data
Value The values displayed on the Parameter screen are output.
Text ASCII codes are converted into decimal values.

402
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Example of programs for reading parameters

(1) To read the parameter per system [#1002 axisno Number of axes]
#100000 = 1002 ; .....................Designates [#1002].
#100001 = 1 ; ...........................Designates [1st system].
#101 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the number of axes in system 1.
#100000 = 1002 ; .....................Designates [#1002].
(can be omitted since parameter # is the same)
#100001 = 2 ; ...........................Designates [2nd system].
#102 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the number of axes in system 2.
#100001 = 5 ; ...........................Designates [5th system]. (Program error (P39) occurs.)
#100001 = 10 ; .........................Designates [PLC axis].
#110 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the number of PLC axes.

(2) To read the axis parameter [#2037 G53ofs #1 reference point]

[Conditions] [1st system] [2nd system]
<1st axis> <2nd axis> <1st axis> <2nd axis>
#2037 G53ofs 1000.000 200.000 300.000 400.000
[1st system program]
#100002 = 1 ; ...........................Designates [1st axis].
#100000 = 2037 ; .....................Designates [#2037].
#101 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#1 reference point] for the 1st axis.
(#101 = 100.000.)
#100002 = 2 ; ...........................Designates [2nd axis].
#102 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#1 reference point] for the 2nd axis.
(#102 = 200.000.)
#100001 = 2 ; ...........................Designates [2nd system].
#100002 = 1 ; ...........................Designates [1st axis].
#201 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#1 reference point] for the 1st axis in the 2nd
system. (#201 = 300.000.)

[2nd system program]

#100002 = 1 ; ...........................Designates [1st axis].
#100000 = 2037 ; .....................Designates [#2037].
#101 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#1 reference point] for the 1st axis.
(#101 = 300.000.)
#100002 = 2 ; ...........................Designates [2nd axis].
#102 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#1 reference point] for the 2nd axis.
(#102 = 400.000.)
#100001 = 1 ; ...........................Designates [1st system].
#100002 = 1 ; ...........................Designates [1st axis].
#201 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#1 reference point] for the 1st axis in the 1st
system. (#201 = 100.000.)

403
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(3) To read each parameter for each system, axis and spindle
#100002 = 1 ; ...........................Designates [1st spindle].
#100000 = 3001 ; .....................Designates [#3001].
#101 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#3001 slimt1 Number of limit rotation gears 00]
for 1st spindle.
#100000 = 3002 ; .....................Designates [#3002].
#102 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#3002 slimt2 Number of limit rotation gears 01]
for 1st spindle.
#100002 = 2 ; ...........................Designates [2nd spindle].
#100000 = 3001 ; .....................Designates [#3001].
#201 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#3001 slimt1 Number of limit rotation gears 00]
for 2nd spindle.
#100000 = 3002 ; .....................Designates [#3002].
#202 = #100010 ; .....................Reads the [#3002 slimt2 Number of limit rotation gears 01]
for 2nd spindle

(4) To read text type parameter [#1169 system name System name]
[Conditions] [1st system] [2nd system]
#1169 system name SYS1 SYS2
#100000 = 1169 ; .....................Designates #1169.
#100001 = 1 ; ...........................Designates 1st system.
#101 = #100010 ; .....................This becomes #101 = 1398362929 (0x53595331).

Example of parameter read macro program

<Macro specifications>
Q341 A_. Q_ . ;
A_. ...... Storage common variable Designates the common variable No. for storing the
data read in.
Q_....... Parameter # designation For an axis/spindle parameter, designates the
axis/spindle No. with one digit after the decimal point.

<Macro contents>
#100000 = FIX [#17] ; .......... Designates parameter #.
#100002 = FIX [#17∗10] MOD 10 ; .......... Designates axis/spindle No.
#[#1] = #100010 ; .......... Reads parameter data.
M99 ;

Precautions for reading parameters

(1) The number of systems, axes and spindles is the maximum number in the specifications
determined by the model.
(2) The inch/metric changeover function for the setting and display is valid even for the data read
in.

404
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Reading PLC data

PLC data can be read in with the system variables.

(Note 1) These can be used only with some models.
(Note 2) The read devices are limited.
Variable No. Application
#100100 Device type designation
#100101 Device No. designation
#100102 Number of read bytes designation
#100103 Read bit designation
#100110 PLC data read

The PLC data is read in with the following five blocks using these five system variables.
#100100 = 1 ; ............ Designates the device type.
#100101 = 0 ; ............ Designates the device No.
#100102 = 1 ; ............ Designates the number of bytes.
#100103 = 2 ; ............ Designates the bit. (Valid only when reading word device bits.)
#100 = #100110 ; ...... Reads in the PLC data.

(1) Device designation (#100100)

(a) System variable for device designation
The type of device to be read in can be designated by substituting the device designation
value in this system variable.
If the data is read without designating this number, the data will be read in the same
manner as if the minimum device designation value (0: M device) is designated. Once
designated, the setting is held until the device is designated again or until it is reset.
A program error (P39) will occur if a device that does not exist is set.

(b) Device designation values

Device Device
designa- Device designa- Device
tion value Unit Device No. tion value Unit Device No.
0 M Bit M0 to M5503 10 F Bit F0 to F255
1 D Word D0 to D1023 11 I* Bit I0 to I3FF
2 C Bit C0 to C23 12 J* Bit J0 to J63F
3 G Bit G0 to G3071 13 L Bit L0 to L255
4 X* Bit X0 to X4BF 14 Q Bit Q0 to Q151
5 Y* Bit Y0 to Y53F 15 S* Bit S0 to S13F
6 R Word R0 to R8191 16 U* Bit U0 to U17F
7 T Bit T0 to T103 17 W* Bit W0 to W1FF
8 B Bit B0 to B103
9 E Bit E0 to E127
The unit is the amount of data per device No. "Word" has 16 bits, and "Bit" has one bit.
* is a device that expresses the device No. as a hexadecimal.

405
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(2) Device No. designation (#100101)

The device to be read in is designated by substituting the device No. in this system variable.
Convert a device expressed as a hexadecimal into a decimal when designating.
If the data is read without designating this number, the data will be read in the same manner as
if the minimum device No. (0) is designated. Once designated, the setting is held until the
device No. is designated again or until it is reset.
A program error (P39) will occur if a device No. that does not exist is set.

(3) Number of bytes designation (#100102)

(a) System variable for number of bytes designation
The reading size is designated by substituting the number of bytes designation value in
this system variable.
If the data is read without designating this number, the data will be read in the same
manner as if the minimum number of bytes designation value (0: bit designation) is
designated. Once designated, the setting is held until the number of bytes is designated
again or until it is reset.
A program error (P39) will occur if a number of bytes that does not exist in the
specifications is set.

(b) Number of bytes designation value

Number of Read in data Operation
bytes
designa- Size Sign Range Word device Bit device
tion value
0 1 bit – 0 to 1 The number of The bits for the
bits designated designated device No.
is read in. are read in.
1 1 byte No 0 to 255 The low-order 8 bits are read in from
101 Yes –128 to 127 byte is read in. the designated device
No.
2 2 bytes No 0 to 65535 Two bytes are 16 bits are read in from
102 Yes –32768 to 32767 read in. the designated device
No.
4 4 bytes No 0 to 4294967295 The designated 32 bits are read in from
104 Yes –2147483648 to device (L) and the designated device
2147483647 next device (H) No.
are read in.

0 to 4 are designated without a sign, and 101 to 104 are designated with a sign.

406
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(4) Bit designation (#100103)

(a) System variable for bit designation
The bit to be read in is designated by substituting the bit designation value in this system
variable.
This designation is valid only when reading the bits for a 16-bit device, and is invalid in all
other cases.
If the data is read without designating this number, the data will be read in the same
manner as if the minimum bit designation value (0: bit 0) is designated. Once designated,
the setting is held until the bit is designated again or until it is reset.
A program error (P39) will occur if a bit that does not exist is set.

(b) Bit designation values

Bit designation
Read in bit
value
0 Bit 0
1 Bit 1
: :
15 Bit 15

(5) PLC data read (#100110)

The data for the designated device is read in with this system variable.
Refer to the table for number of bytes designation for details on the range of data read in.

407
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Examples of programs for reading PLC data

(1) To read a bit device

#100100 = 0 ; ............ Designates [M device].
#100101 = 0 ; ............ Designates [Device No. 0].
#100102 = 0 ; ............ Designates [Bit].
#100 = #100110 ; ...... Reads M0 (one bit).
#100102 = 1 ; ............ Designates [1 byte].
#101 = #100110 ; ...... Reads M0 to M7 (eight bits).
(If M7 to M0 is 0001 0010, this will be #102 = 18 (0x12).)
#100102 = 102 ; ........ Designates [Signed two bytes].
#102 = #100110 ; ..... Reads M0 to M15 (16 bits).
(If M15 to M0 is 1111 1110 1101 1100, this will be
#102 = –292 (0xFEDC).)
#100102 = 4 ; ............ Designates [4 bytes].
#104 = #100110 ; ..... Reads M0 to M31 (32 bits).
(If M31 to M0 is 0001 0010 0011 0100 0101 0110 0111 1000,
this will be #104 = 305419896 (0x12345678).)

(2) To read a word device

#100100 = 1 ; ............ Designates [D device].
#100101 = 0 ; ............ Designates [Device No. 0].
#100102 = 0 ; ............ Designates [Bit].
#100103 = 1 ; ............ Designates [Bit 1].
#100 = #100110 ; ...... Reads the D0 bit 1.
(If D0 = 0x0102, this will be #101 =1.)
#100102 = 1 ; ............ Designates [1 byte].
#101 = #100110 ; ..... Reads the low-order byte of D0.
(If D0 = 0x0102, this will be #101 =2.)
#100102 = 2 ; ............ Designates [2 bytes].
#102 = #100110 ; ..... Reads D0. (If D0 = 0x0102, this will be #102 =258.)
#100102 = 104 ; ........ Designates [Signed four bytes].
#104 = #100110 ; ..... Reads D0 and D1.
(If D0 = 0xFFFE and D1 = 0xFFFF, this will be #104 =–2.)

408
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Examples of using macro program for reading PLC data

<Macro specifications>
G340 F_. A_. Q_. H_. ;
F_. ...........Number of bytes designation F0 ..... Designates bit.
F1 ..... Designates one byte.
F2 ..... Designates two bytes.
A_. ............Device designation A0 ..... Designates M.
A1 ..... Designates D.
A2 ..... Designates C.
A3 ..... Designates G.
A4 ..... Designates X.
A5 ..... Designates Y.
A6 ..... Designates R.
A7 ..... Designates T.
Q_.............Device No. designation For a bit, designates the bit with two digits
after the decimal point.
For a byte, a decimal value is not designated.
H_.............Storage common variable Designates the common variable No. for
storing the read data.

<Macro contents>
#100100 = #1 ; ...... Designates device.
#100101 = FIX [#17] ; ...... Designates device No.
#100102 = #9 ; ...... Designates number of bytes.
#100103 = FIX [#17∗100] MOD 100 ; ...... Designates bit.
#[#11] = #100110 ; ...... Reads PLC data.
M99 ;

Precautions for reading PLC data

(1) As the PLC data is read asynchronously from the ladder execution, the data is not necessarily
from the running program. Take care when reading devices that change.
(2) If reading of a device that does not exist is attempted by designating the device No. and
number of bytes, the 0 value will be read in only for the sections that do not exist.

409
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Time reading variables

The following operations can be carried out using the system variable extension for the user macro
time.

(1) By adding time information system variable #3011 and #3012, the current date (#3011) and
current time (#3012) can be read and written.
(2) By adding parameter #1273/bit1, the unit (millisecond unit/hour unit) of the cumulative time
during system variable #3002 automatic start can be changed.
Variable No. Details
#3001 The cumulative time during power ON can be read and the value can be
substituted.
The unit is a millisecond unit.
#3002 The cumulative time during automatic start can be read and the value can
be substituted.
The unit can be changed between millisecond and hour with parameter
#1273/bit1.
#3011 The current date can be read and written.
YYYY/MM/DD is read as a YYYYMMDD value.
When a YYYYMMDD value is written in, it will be set as YY/MM/DD (the
last two digits of the year are displayed).
Command range for year/month/date setting
Year (YYYY) : 2000 to 2099
Month (MM) : 1 to 12
Date (DD) : 1 to maximum number of days in month
#3012 The current time can be read and written.
HH/MM/SS is read as a HHMMSS value.
When an HHMMSS value is written in, it will be set as HH/MM/DD.
Command range for hour/minute/second setting
Hour (HH) : 0 to 23 (24-hour system)
Minute (MM) : 0 to 59
Second (SS) : 0 to 59

(3) The cumulative time returns to 0 at approx. 2.44 × 1011 milliseconds (approx. 7.7 years).
(4) If a negative value or a value exceeding 244335917226 milliseconds (67871.08811851 hours
for #3002 time designation) is set for the cumulative time, a program error (P35) will occur.
(5) If a value exceeding the command range is set for the date or time, a program error (P35) will
occur.
(6) Always set the month/date/hour/minute/second as a two-digit value when setting the date and
time.
If the value only has one digit, always add 0. (February 14, 2001 ⇒ #3001= 20010214 ;, etc.)

410
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Examples of using time reading variable

(Example 1) To read the current date (February 14, 2001) in common variable #100
#100 = #3011 ; (20010214 is inserted in #100)
(Example 2) To write current time (18 hours, 13 minutes, 6 seconds) into system variable #3012
#3012 = 181306 ; (The command value cumulative time #2: time is set to 18:13:06.)
(Example 3) By setting the following type of program, the machining start/end time
(year/month/date/hour/minute/second) can be viewed.
#100=#3011 ; ⇒ Machining start year/month/date
#101=#3012 ; ⇒ Machining start hour/minute/second
G28 X0 Y0 Z0 ;
G92 ;
G0 X50. ;
.
.
.
#102=#3011 ; ⇒ Machining end year/month/date
#103=#3012 ; ⇒ Machining end hour/minute/second
M30 ;

Limits and precautions for using time reading variable

(1) #3011 reads the date as an eight-digit value, so the difference of the two dates read in will not
be the difference of days.
(2) #3012 reads the time as a six-digit value, so the difference of the two times read in will not be
the difference of hours.

411
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

13.9.5 Operation commands

A variety of operations can be performed between variables.

Command format

#i = <formula> ;
<Formula> is a combination of constants, variables, functions and operators.
Constants can be used instead of #j and #k below.
(1) Definition and #i = #j Definition, substitution
substitution of
variables
(2) Addition #i = #j + #k Addition
operation #i = #j – #k Subtraction
#i = #j OR #k Logical sum (at every bit of 32 bits)
#i = #j XOR #k Exclusive OR (at every bit of 32 bits)
(3) Multiplication #i = #j ∗ #k Multiplication
operation #i = #j / #k Division
#i = #j MOD #k Remainder
#i = #j AND #k Logical product (at every bit of 32 bits)
(4) Functions #i = SIN [#k] Sine
#i = COS [#k] Cosine
#i = TAN [#k] Tangent tan θ uses sinθ/cosθ.
#i = ASIN [#k] Arcsine
#i = ATAN [#k] Arctangent (ATAN or ATN may be used)
#i = ACOS [#k] Arccosine
#i = SQRT [#k] Square root (SQRT or SQR may be used)
#i = ABS [#k] Absolute value
#i = BIN [#k] Conversion from BCD to BIN
#i = BCD [#k] Conversion from BIN to BCD
#i = ROUND [#k] Rounding off (ROUND or RND may be used)
#i = FIX [#k] Discard fractions less than 1
#i = FUP [#k] Add for fractions less than 1
#i = LN [#k] Natural logarithm
#i = EXP [#k] Exponent with e (=2.718...) as bottom
(Note 1) A value without a decimal point is basically treats as a value with a decimal point at the
end (1 = 1.000).
(Note 2) Offset amounts from #10001 and workpiece coordinate system offset values from #5201
are handled as data with a decimal point. Consequently, data with a decimal point will be
produced even when data without a decimal point have been defined in the variable
numbers.
(Example)
Common variables
after execution
#101 = 1000 ; #101 1000.000
#10001 = #101 ; #102 1000.000
#102 = #10001 ;

(Note 3) The <formula> after a function must be enclosed in the square parentheses.

412
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Sequence of operations

(1) The sequence of the operations (1) to (3) is, respectively, the functions followed by the
multiplication operation followed in turn by the addition operation.

#101 = #111 + #112 ∗ SIN [#113]

(1) Function
(2) Multiplication operation
(3) Addition operation

(2) The part to be given priority in the operation sequence should be enclosed in brackets. Up to 5
pairs of such brackets including those for the functions may be used.

#101=SQRT [ [ [#111 – #112] ∗ SIN [#113] + [#114] ∗ #115] ;

First pair of
brackets

Second pair of brackets

Third pair of brackets

413
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Examples of operation commands

(1) Main program G65 P100 A10 B20. ; #1 10.000

and argument #101=100.000 #102=200.000 ; #2 20.000
designation #101 100.000
#102 200.000
(2) Definition and #1=1000 #1 1000.000
substitution #2=1000. #2 1000.000
(=) #3=#101 #3 100.000 From common variables
#4=#102 #4 200.000
#5=#10001 (#10001=-10.) #5 −10.000 ··· From offset amount
(3) Addition and #11=#1+1000 #11 2000.000
subtraction #12=#2−50. #12 950.000
(+, −) #13=#101+#1 #13 1100.000
#14=#10001−3. (#10001 = -10.) #14 −13.000
#15=#10001+#102 #15 190.000
(4) Multiplication #21=100∗100 #21 10000.000
and division #22=100.∗100 #22 10000.000
(∗, /) #23=100∗100 #23 10000.000
#24=100.∗100. #24 10000.000
#25=100/100 #25 1.000
#26=100./100 #26 1.000
#27=100/100. #27 1.000
#28=100./100. #28 1.000
#29=#10001∗#101 #29 −1000.000
( #10001 = -10.)
#30=#10001/#102 #30 –0.050
(5) Remainder #19=48 #19/#20 = 48/9 = 5 with 3 over
(MOD) #20=9
#31=#19 MOD #20 #31 = 3
(6) Logical sum #3=100 #3 = 01100100 (binary)
(OR) #4=#3 OR 14 14 = 00001110 (binary)
#4 = 01101110 = 110
(7) Exclusive OR #3=100 #3 = 01100100 (binary)
(XOR) #4=#3 XOR 14 14 = 00001110 (binary)
#4 = 01101010 = 106
(8) Logical #9=100 #9 = 01100100 (binary)
product (AND) #10=#9 AND 15 15 = 00001111 (binary)
#10 = 00000100 = 4

414
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(9) Sin (SIN) #501 = SIN [60] #501 0.860

#502 = SIN [60.] #502 0.860
#503 = 1000∗SIN [60] #503 866.025
#504 = 1000∗SIN [60.] #504 866.025
#505 = 1000.∗SIN [60] #505 866.025
#506 = 1000.∗SIN [60.] #506 866.025
(Note) SIN [60] is equivalent to SIN [60.]
(10) Cosine #541 = COS [45] #541 0.707
(COS) #542 = COS [45.] #542 0.707
#543 = 1000∗COS [45] #543 707.107
#544 = 1000∗COS [45.] #544 707.107
#545 = 1000.∗COS [45] #545 707.107
#546 = 1000.∗COS [45.] #546 707.107
(Note) COS [45] is equivalent to COS [45.]
(11) Tangent #551 = TAN [60] #551 1.732
(TAN) #552 = TAN [60.] #552 1.732
#553 = 1000∗TAN [60] #553 1732.051
#554 = 1000∗TAN [60.] #554 1732.051
#555 = 1000.∗TAN [60] #555 1732.051
#556 = 1000.∗TAN [60.] #556 1732.051
(Note) TAN [60] is equivalent to TAN [60.]
(12) Arcsine #531 = ASIN [100.500/201.] #531 30.000
ASIN #532 = ASIN [100.500/201] #432 30.000
#533 = ASIN [0.500] #533 30.000
#534 = ASIN [–0.500] #534 –30.000
(Note) When #1273/bit 0 is
set to 1, #534 will be
330º.
(13) Arctangent #561 = ATAN [173205/100000] #561 60.000
(ATAN or #562 = ATAN [173205/100000.] #562 60.000
ATN) #563 = ATAN [173.205/100] #563 60.000
#564 = ATAN [173.205/100.] #564 60.000
#565 = ATAN [1.73205] #565 60.000
(14) Arccosine #521 = ACOS [100./141.421] #521 45.000
(ACOS) #522 = ACOS [100./141.421] #522 45.000
(15) Square root #571 = SQRT [1000] #571 31.623
(SQR or #572 = SQRT [1000.] #572 31.623
SQRT) #573 = SQRT [10. ∗10. +20. ∗20.] #573 22.360
(Note) In order to increase the accuracy,
proceed with the operation inside
parentheses.
(16) Absolute #576 = −1000 #576 −1000.000
value (ABS) #577 = ABS [#576] #577 1000.000
#3 = 70. #4 = −50.
#580 = ABS [#4 − #3] #580 120.000
(17) BIN, BCD #1 = 100
#11 = BIN [#1] #11 64
#12 = BCD [#1] #12 256

415
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(18) Rounding off #21 = ROUND [14/3] #21 5

(ROUND or #22 = ROUND [14./3] #22 5
RND) #23 = ROUND [14/3.] #23 5
#24 = ROUND [14./3.] #24 5
#25 = ROUND [−14/3] #25 −5
#26 = ROUND [−14./3] #26 −5
#27 = ROUND [−14/3.] #27 −5
#28 = ROUND [−14./3.] #28 −5
(19) Discarding #21 = FIX [14/3] #21 4.000
fractions #22 = FIX [14./3] #22 4.000
below #23 = FIX [14/3.] #23 4.000
decimal #24 = FIX [14./3.] #24 4.000
point (FIX) #25 = FIX [−14/3] #25 −4.000
#26 = FIX [−14./3] #26 −4.000
#27 = FIX [−14/3.] #27 −4.000
#28 = FIX [−14./3.] #28 −4.000
(20) Adding #21 = FUP [14/3] #21 5.000
fractions #22 = FUP [14./3] #22 5.000
less than 1 #23 = FUP [14/3.] #23 5.000
(FUP) #24 = FUP [14./3.] #24 5.000
#25 = FUP [−14/3] #25 −5.000
#26 = FUP [−14./3] #26 −5.000
#27 = FUP [−14/3.] #27 −5.000
#28 = FUP [−14./3.] #28 −5.000
(21) Natural #101 = LN [5] #101 1.609
logarithms #102 = LN [0.5] #102 −0.693
(LN) #103 = LN [−5] Error "P282"
(22) Exponents #104 = EXP [2] #104 7.389
(EXP) #105 = EXP [1] #105 2.718
#106 = EXP [−2] #106 0.135

416
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Operation accuracy

As shown in the following table errors will be generated when performing operations once and
these errors will be accumulated by repeating the operations.
Operation format Average error Maximum error Type of error
a=b+c ε
2.33 × 10−10 5.32 × 10−10 Min. | ε | , | |
a=b−c b c
a = b∗c 1.55 × 10−10 4.66 × 10−10
Relative error
4.66 × 10−10 1.86 × 10−9
| ε |
a = b/c
a=b 1.24 × 10−9 3.73 × 10−9 a
a = SIN [b]
5.0 × 10−9 1.0 × 10−8 Absolute error
a = COS [b]
|ε|°
a = ATAN [b/c] 1.8 × 10−6 3.6 × 10−6
(Note) SIN/COS is calculated for the function TAN.

Notes on reduced accuracy

(1) Addition and subtraction

It should be noted that when absolute values are used subtractively in addition or subtraction,
the relative error cannot be kept below 10.
For instance, it is assumed that the real value produced as the operation calculation result of
#10 and #20 are as follows (these value cannot be substituted directly):
#10 = 2345678988888.888
#20 = 2345678901234.567
Performing #10 − #20 will not produce #10 − #20 = 87654.321. There are 8 decimal digits in
the variables and so the values of #10 and #20 will be as follows (strictly speaking, the internal
values will differ somewhat from the value below because they are binary numbers):
#10 = 2345679000000.000
#20 = 2345678900000.000
Consequently, #10 − #20 = 100000.000 will generate a large error.

(2) Logical relation

EQ, NE, GT, LT, GE and LE are basically the same as addition and subtraction and so care
should be taken with errors. For instance, to determine whether or not #10 and #20 are equal
in the above example:
IF [#10 EQ #20]
It is not always possible to provide proper evaluation because of the above-mentioned error.
Therefore when the error is evaluated as in the following expression:
IF [ABS [#10 − #20] LT 200000]
and the difference between #10 and #20 falls within the designated range error, both values
should be considered equal.

(3) Trigonometric functions

Absolute errors are guaranteed with trigonometric functions but since the relative error is not
under 10, care should be taken when dividing or multiplying after having used a trigonometric
function.

417
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

13.9.6 Control commands

The flow of programs can be controlled by IF ~ GOTO ~ and WHILE ~ DO ~.

Branching

Format
IF [conditional expression] GOTO n ; (where n = sequence number in the program)
When the condition is satisfied, control branches to "n" and when it is not satisfied, the next block is
executed.
IF [conditional expression] can be omitted and, when it is, control passes to "n" unconditionally.
The following types of [conditional expressions] are available.
#i EQ #j = When #i and #j are equal
#i NE #j ≠ When #i and #j are not equal
#i GT #j > When #i is greater than #j
#i LT #j < When #i is less than #j
#i GE #j ≥ When #i is #j or more
#i LE #j ≤ When #i is #j or less
"n" of "GOTO n" must always be in the same program. Program error (P231) will result if it is not. A
formula or variable can be used instead of #i, #j and "n".
In the block with sequence number "n" which will be executed after a "GOTO n" command, the
sequence number Nn must always be at the head of the block. Otherwise, program error (P231)
will result.
If "/" is at the head of the block and Nn follows, control can be branched to the sequence number.
~

Branching to N100
N10 #22=#20 #23=#21 ; when content of #2 is 1
IF [#2 EQ1] GOTO100 ;
Branch
search

Branch
#22=#20–#3 ; search
#23=#21–#4 ;
~

N100 With
N10
N100 X#22 Z#23 ;
#1=#1+#1 ;
To
~

head

(Note 1) When the sequence number of the branch destination is searched, the search is
conducted up to the end of the program (% code) from the block following "IF….. ;" and if
it is not found, it is conducted up to the block before "IF ..... ;". Therefore, branch searches
in the opposite direction to the program flow will take longer to execute compared with
branch searches in the forward direction.
(Note 2) Only compare EQ and NE by integers. Use GE, GT, LE and LT for comparison when
there are numbers below the decimal point.

418
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Repetition

Format
WHILE [conditional expression] DOm ; (m =1, 2, 3 ..... 127)
~
END m ;
While the conditional expression is established, the blocks from the following block to ENDm are
repeatedly executed; when it is not established, execution moves to the block after ENDm. DOm
may come before WHILE.
"WHILE [conditional expression] DOm" and "ENDm" must be used as a pair. If "WHILE [conditional
expression]" is omitted, these blocks will be repeatedly ad infinitum. The repeating identification
numbers range from 1 to 127 (DO1, DO2, DO3, ..... DO127). Up to 27 nesting levels can be used.
(1) Same identification number can be used any (2) Any number may be used for the WHILE~ DOm
number of times. identification number.
WHILE ~ DO1 ;

~
WHILE ~ DO1 ;
END1 ;
Possible

~
END1 ;
WHILE ~ DO3 ;

~
END3 ;
WHILE ~ DO1 ; Possible

~
Possible WHILE ~ DO2 ;
END1 ; ~
END2 ;
~

WHILE ~ DO1 ;
~

END1 ;

(3) Up to 27 nesting levels for WHILE~DOm. (4) The number of WHILE~DOm nesting levels
"m" is any number form 1 to 127 for the nesting cannot exceed 27.
depth.
DO1 WHILE ~ DO1 ;
WHILE ~ DO1 ;
~

DO2 WHILE ~ DO2 ;

WHILE ~ DO2 ;
:
:
: WHILE ~ DO3 ;
~

WHILE~DO27 ; DO27
WHILE ~ DO28 ;
Possible
~

Not
possible
END28 ;
END27 ;
~

: END3 ;
: :
END2 ; END2 ;
~

END1 ; END1 ;

(Note) With nesting, "m" which has been

used once cannot be used.

419
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

(5) WHILE ~ DOm must be designated first and (6) WHILE ~ DOm and ENDm must correspond on a
ENDm last. 1:1 (pairing) basis in the same program.

WHILE ~ DO1 ;
END1 ;
Not
possible Not WHILE ~ DO1 ;
WHILE ~ DO1 ; possible

END1 ;

(7) Two WHILE ~ DOm’s must not overlap. (8) Branching externally is possible from the WHILE
~ DOm range.

WHILE ~ DO1 ; WHILE ~ DO1 ;

~ ~

Not
possible WHILE ~ DO2 ; IF ~ GOTOn ;

END1 ;
Possible END1 ;
~

END2 ;

Nn ;

(9) No branching is possible inside WHILE ~ (10) Subprograms can be called by M98, G65 or G66
DOm. between WHILE ~ DOm’s.
IF ~ GOTOn ; WHILE ~ DO1 ;
Main program Subprogram
WHILE ~ DO1 ; IF ~ GOTOn ;
WHILE ~ DO1 ; WHILE ~ DO2 ;
Nn ; END1 ;
Not
~
Possible

possible Not
END1 ; G65 P100 ; END 2 ;
possible To subprogram
~
WHILE ~ DO1 ;
END1 ; M99 ;
Nn ;
M02 ;
END 1 ;

(11) Calls can be initiated by G65 or G66 between (12) A program error results with M99 unless WHILE
WHILE ~ DOm’s and commands can be and END are paired within the subprograms
issued again from 1. Up to 27 nesting levels (including macro programs).
are possible for the main program and
subprograms.
Main program Subprogram (100) Main program Subprogram

WHILE ~ DO1 ; WHILE ~ DO1 ;

~

~
~

~
Possible

M99 P100 ; WHILE ~ DO1 ;

G65 P100 ; To subprogram END1 ; To subprogram
~

~
~

M02 ; M99 ;
END1 ; M99 ;

M02 ; DOn ENDn

illegal usage.

(Note) Even if a fixed cycle containing WHILE is called, the nesting level will be counted up.

420
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

13.9.7 External output commands

Function and purpose

Besides the standard user macro commands, the following macro instructions are also available as
external output commands. They are designed to output the variable values or characters via the
RS-232C interface.

Command format

POPEN For preparing the processing of data outputs

PCLOS For terminating the processing of data outputs
DPRNT For character output and digit-by-digit variable numerical output
Command sequence

POPEN Open command

DPRNT Data output command

PCLOS Closed command

Open command : POPEN

(1) The command is issued before the series of data output commands.
(2) The DC2 control code and % code are output from the NC system to the external output
device.
(3) Once POPEN ; has been issued, it will remain valid until PCLOS ; is issued.

Close command : PCLOS

(1) This command is issued when all the data outputs are completed.
(2) The DC4 control code and % code are output from the NC unit to the external output device.
(3) This command is used together with the open command and it should not be issued unless the
open mode has been established.
(4) Issue the close command at the end of the program even when operation has been
suspended by resetting or some other operation during data output.

421
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Data output command : DPRNT

DPRNT [ l1 # v1 [ d1 c1 ] l2 # v2 [ d2 c2 ] ……………... ]
l1 Character string
v1 Variable number
d1 Significant digits above decimal point
c1 Significant digits below decimal point c+d≤8

(1) The character output and decimal output of the variable values are done with ISO codes.
(2) The commanded character string is output as is by the ISO code.
Alphanumerics (A ~ Z, 0 ~ 9) and special characters (+, −, ∗, /) can be used.
(3) The required significant digits above and below the decimal point in the variable values are
commanded within square parentheses. As a result, the variable values equivalent to the
commanded number of digits including the decimal point are output in ISO code in decimal
notation from the high-order digits. Trailing zeroes are not omitted.
(4) Leading zeroes are omitted.
The leading zeroes can also be replaced by blank if so specified with a parameter. This can
justify printed data on the last column.

(Note) A data output command can be issued even in dual-system mode. In this case, however,
note that the output channel is shared for both systems. So, take care not to execute data
output in both systems simultaneously.

422
 13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

13.9.8 Precautions

Precautions

(1) When the user macro commands are employed, it is possible to use the M, S, T and other
control commands together with the operation, decision, branching and other macro
commands for creating the machining programs. When the former commands are made into
executable statements and the latter commands into macro statements, the macro statement
processing should be accomplished as quickly as possible in order to minimize the machining
time, because such processing is not directly related to machine control.
As a result, the parameter (#8101 MACRO SINGLE on the parameter screen) can be decided
upon and the macro statements can be processed in parallel with the execution of the
executable statement.
(The parameter can be set OFF during normal machining to process all the macro statements
together or set ON during a program check to execute the macro statements block by block.
This enables the setting to be made in accordance with the intended objective in mind.)

Example of program

G91G28X0 Z0 ; ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅(1)
G92X0 Z0 ; ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅(2)
G00X–100. Z–100. ; ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅(3)
#101=100.∗COS [210,] ; ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅(4)
Macro statement
#103=100.∗SIN [210.] ; ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅(5)
G01 X#101 Z #103 F800 ; ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅(6)

Macro statements are:

(a) Operation commands (blocks including "=")
(b) Control commands (blocks including GOTO, DO~END, etc.)
(c) Macro call commands (including macro calls based on G codes and cancel command
(G65. G66. G66.1, G67))
NC statements are all those statements which are not executable statements.

423
13. Program Support Functions
13.9 User macro

Flow of processing

Program analysis (1) (2) (3) (4)(5)(6)

MACRO
SINGLE
OFF
Block executing (1) (2) (3) (4)(5)(6)

Program analysis (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

MACRO
SINGLE
ON
Block executing (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)

Machining program display

N4, N5 and N6 are processed in

parallel with the control of the
executable statement of N3. N6 is
[Executing] an executable statement and so it
MACRO
N3 G00 X–100. Z–100. ;
SINGLE
[Next command]
is displayed as the next command.
OFF If the N4, N5 and N6 analysis is in
N6 G01 X#101 Z#103 F800 ;
time during N3 control, the
machine movement will be
continuously controlled.

N4 is processed in parallel with the

control of the executable
statement of N3, and it is displayed
MACRO [Executing] as the next command. N5 and N6
SINGLE N3 G00 X–100. Z–100. ; are analyzed and N6 is executed
ON [Next command] after N3 has finished, and so the
N4 #101=100.∗COS[210.] ;
machine control is held on standby
during the N5 and N6 analysis
time.

424
 13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

13.10 Double-turret mirror image

Function and purpose

In a machine in which the base turret and facing turret are integrated, this function is used to cut
with the facing turret cutter using a program created with the base turret side.
The distance between the two turrets is set in the parameters beforehand.

Command format

G68 Double-turret mirror image ON

G69 Double-turret mirror image cancel

[T command double-turret mirror image]

The double-turret mirror image can be turned ON and OFF with the T command instead of the
G68/G69 command.
The T command for the G68 mode and the G69 mode is determined for each tool No. with the
following base specification parameters.
Setting range
# Item Details
(unit)
1119 Tmiron Select the mirror Selects whether the double-turret 0: Invalid
image of each mirror image with the T command is 1: Valid
facing turret with T valid or invalid.
command
1203 TmirS1 Select turret as The turret selection for the T 0 to FFFFFFFF
facing turret with T command double-turret mirror
command image corresponding to tool No. 1
to 32 is set.
1204 TmirS2 Select turret as The turret selection for the T 0 to FFFFFFFF
facing turret with T command double-turret mirror
command image corresponding to tool No. 33
to 64 is set.

425
13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

Detailed description

When G68 is commanded, the following program coordinate system is shifted to the facing
turret side of the axis for which the facing turret mirror image is valid (hereafter unless noted in
particular, the X axis will be described as the axis for which double-turret mirror image is valid). The
axis movement direction is reversed from the program command. When G69 is commanded, the
following program coordinate system will be returned to the base turret side.

Base turret

Program path

(G69)

Turret distance
Z (parameter "#1202 mirofs"
set with radius value)

(G68)

Facing turret path

(Mirror image ON)

Facing turret

The double-turret mirror image is valid for the following axes.

(1) When parameter #1273 ext09 BIT4=0

Double-turret mirror image is valid for the 1st axis in the system.
(2) When parameter #1273 ext09 BIT4=1
Double-turret mirror image is valid for the axis determined in the following manner by the plane
selected when double-turret mirror image is selected. Note that even if the plane is changed
during double-turret mirror image, the axis for which double-turret mirror image is valid will not
change.
Plane
Axis for which double-turret mirror image is valid
selection
G17 J designated axis (#1027 base_J or #1030 aux_J axis in plane configuration)
G18 I designated axis (#1026 base_I or #1029 aux_I axis in plane configuration)
G19 K designated axis (#1028 base_K or #1031 aux_K axis in plane configuration)

426
13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

Absolute value command/incremental value command

(1) Absolute value command

The command position for the Z axis is reversed symmetrically, and the base turret moves to
the position shifted by the distance between cutters.

T0101 ;
Base turret path
Program G00 X0. ;
Base turret
G68 ; Double-turret
Path for mirror image ON
reversing
program Distance T0202 ; Facing turret
between cutters
selection
Facing
turret path G00 X10. Z0. ;
* This figure does not incorporate Facing turret G01 Z-50. F400 ;
the tool length.
X20. ;

(2) Incremental value command

The commanded X axis direction reverses, and the base turret moves.
Program
Base
turret T0101 ;
G00 X0. ;
Base
turret
path G68 ; Double-turret
(Path for mirror image ON
reversing
program) T0202 ; Facing turret
Facing selection
turret
Facing G00 U10. W-30. ;
turret path
G01 W-50. F400 ;
* This figure does not incorporate
the tool length. U10. ;

(3) Changing from an incremental value command to an absolute value command

After changing to the absolute value, the same operation as “(1) Absolute value command”
takes place.

Program Base turret T0101 ;

Base
turret G00 X0. ;
path

Distance G68 ; Double-turret

between mirror image ON
Path for cutters
reversing T0202 ; Facing turret
program
selection

Facing
G00 U10. W-30. ;
Facing turret
turret path G01 W-50. F400 ;
* This figure does not incorporate
the tool length. X20. Z-80. ;

427
 13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

Displaying the workpiece coordinate values

The workpiece coordinate values of the axis for which double-turret mirror image is valid are
displayed in the following manner.
#1273 ext09/bit3 = 0 #1273 ext09/bit3 = 1
In double-turret The workpiece coordinate values are at the The workpiece coordinate values are the
mirror image position where the program command same as the program command value, and
mode value sign has been reversed, and increases/decreases opposite the actual
increases/decreases in the same manner movement, that is, movement on the
as the actual movement, that is, movement machine coordinate system.
on the machine coordinate system.
(Indicates coordinate values for facing
turret side.)
At startup Workpiece coordinate value = Workpiece coordinate value =
Workpiece coordinate value before {Workpiece coordinate value before
double-turret mirror image starts – double-turret mirror image starts –
distance between cutters distance between cutters} × (–1)
When Workpiece coordinate value = Workpiece coordinate value =
movement is Workpiece coordinate value before Workpiece coordinate value before
commanded movement + movement amount movement – movement amount
while valid
When canceled Workpiece coordinate value = Workpiece coordinate value =
Workpiece coordinate value before {Workpiece coordinate value before
double-turret mirror image is canceled + double-turret mirror image is canceled ×
distance between cutters (–1)} + distance between cutters

428
13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

Example of program and operation

T0101 ; Base turret selection

G00 X10. Z0. ; Machining with base turret ....... A
G01 Z–40. F400 ;
X20. ;

G68 ; Double-turret mirror image ON

T0202 ; Facing turret selection
G00 X20. Z–40. ; Machining with facing turret...... B
G01 Z–80. F200 ;
X30. ;

G69 ; Double-turret mirror image cancel

T0101 ; Base turret selection Machining with base turret ....... C
G00 X30. Z–80. ;
G01 Z–120. F400 ;

X
Base turret

A
C

Double-turret
Facing turret

429
13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

Tool compensation of double-turret

Z tool length Base turret

X Tool length basic point

X tool length
2 6 1
X tool length
Workpiece offset 7 0 5

Wear
amount 3 8 4

Z tool length

Turret distance
Z (parameter:
Workpiece coordinate radius value,
zero point X axis only)
Z tool length
Z tool length

Wear 2 6 1
amount
7 0

X tool length
X tool length 5

3 8 4

Tool length basic point Facing turret

The original tool direction for the facing turret is shown in the drawing.
To set the facing turret tool to the same direction as the base turret tool, set the base specification
parameter "#1118 mirr_A" to "1".

430
 13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

(1) Tool length offset

The tool length offset amount is the length from the tool nose to the tool length basic point. This
also applies for the facing turret. Note that the offset amount setting value differs according to
the tool length basic point position as shown below.

Tool length basic point and tool length offset

Type A Type B Type C
Tool length basic point Each turret basic point Base turret basic point Workpiece face center
Workpiece coordinate Workpiece face center Workpiece face center Workpiece face center
zero point
Turret interval Distance between basic 0 0
points of both turrets
(radius value)
Workpiece offset Workpiece coordinate zero Workpiece coordinate zero 0
point point
– base turret tool length – base turret tool length
basic point basic point
Tool length Tool length basic point Tool length basic point Tool length basic point
– tool nose position – tool nose position – tool nose position
Outline drawing Turret basic
Base turret Turret basic Base turret Turret basic Base turret
point point point
Tool length
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
coordinate coordinate coordinate
zero point Tool zero point Tool zero point
length length
Turret interval

Workpiece Workpiece Tool

offset offset length

Tool length Tool length

Turret Turret Turret
basic basic basic
Facing turret Facing turret point Facing turret
point point

The outline drawings above show the case when #1118 mirr_A is set to 0. If #1118 mirr_A is
set to 1, the sign of the X axis tool length offset amount for the double-turret will be reversed.

(2) Tool nose wear compensation

The tool nose wear compensation amount is the length from the current tool nose to the
original tool nose. The original tool nose is the tool nose when the tool length offset value was
set.
Base turret side

2 6 1 The drawing shows the case when #1118

mirr_A is set to 0.
X 0 5
7 When #1118 mirr_A is set to 1, the sign of the X
Wear amount axis tool nose wear compensation amount for
3 8 4 the facing turret will be reversed.
Basic tool
Z
Basic tool

Wear amount 2 6 1

7 0
5
-X
3 8 4
Facing turret side

431
 13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

(3) Tool nose point with nose R compensation

The tool nose point with nose R compensation is as follows.
Note that if the selected plane differs from when double-turret mirror image was started, this
will be handled as #1118 mirr_A = 0 even if #1118 mirr_A = 1.
#1118 mirr_A = 0 #1118 mirr_A = 1
Base turret side Base turret side

X 2 6 1 X 2 6 1

0 5 0 5
7 7

3 8 4 3 8 4
Z Z
2 6 1 3 8 4

7 0 7 0 5
5

-X 3 8 4 -X 2 6 1
Facing turret side Facing turret side

(4) Examples of setting the tool compensation

Type A Type B Type C
mirr_A = 0 mirr_A = 1 mirr_A = 0 mirr_A = 1 mirr_A = 0 mirr_A = 1
X Z X Z X Z X Z X Z X Z
Workpiece offset –100. –150. –100. –150. –100. –150. –100. –150. 0. 0. 0. 0.
Turret interval
100. 100. 0. 0. 0. 0.
(Setting value)
Base turret tool length 40. 20. 40. 20. 40. 20. 40. 20. 40. 20. 40. 20.
Base turret tool wear
–4. –2. –4. –2. –4. –2. –4. –2. –4. –2. –4. –2.
amount
Base turret nose point 3 3 3 3 3 3
Facing turret tool
–30. 10. 30. 10. 170. 10. –170. 10. 70. –140. –70. –140.
length
Facing turret tool wear
2. –1. –2. –1. 2. –1. –2. –1. 2. –1. –2. –1.
amount
Facing turret nose
2 3 2 3 2 3
point

432
13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

Precautions and restrictions

(1) The balance cut command (G68, G69) cannot be issued when the double-turret mirror image
option is valid in the G code system 6, 7 (#1037 cmdtyp = 7, 8).
(2) If double-turret mirror image is turned ON for an axis in a system having axes that are
exchanged with complex control or in a system to which the axis control is transferred, the
"M01 operation error 1035" will occur.
Note that double-turret mirror image can be started after the axis is exchanged with complex
control.
(4) A program error (P486) will occur if pole coordinate interpolation, cylindrical interpolation or
milling interpolation is commanded while double-turret mirror image is ON.
(5) A program error (P612) will occur if double-turret mirror image is turned ON while the axis is
moving with exponential function interpolation.
(6) A program error (P371) will occur if the axis to which double-turret mirror image is commanded
is a rotation axis.

Relation with other functions

(1) Reference point return (G28, G30)

Double-turret mirror image will remain valid when moving to the intermediate point.
Double-turret mirror image will be invalidated when moving past the intermediate point and
during movement that ignores the intermediate point.
Double-turret mirror image will be validated from the next block.

(2) Machine coordinate system selection (G53)

Double-turret mirror image will be invalidated during the movement.
Double-turret mirror image will be validated from the next block.

(3) Coordinate system setting (G92)

The following will take place on the axis for which double-turret mirror image is valid.
Parameter Details
The "command value × (–1)" coordinate system will be set as the
0
#1273 coordinate system on the facing turret side.
ext09/bit3 The commanded coordinate system will be set as the coordinate
1
system on the facing turret side.

(4) Reading the coordinate position with variables

The following will take place on the axis for which double-turret mirror image is valid.
(a) When previous block is end point coordinate system (#5001, etc.)
The "end point coordinate values on the base turret side in the workpiece coordinate
system" will be read in.
(b) For machine coordinate values (#5021, etc.)
The "coordinate values on the base turret side in the machine workpiece system" will be
read in.
(c) For workpiece coordinate values (#5041, etc.)
The "workpiece coordinate value in the double-turret mirror image" will be read in.
(d) For skip coordinate values (#5061, etc.)
If double-turret mirror image is valid when skip is executed, the "workpiece coordinate
values in the double-turret mirror image" will be read in.

433
13. Program Support Functions
13.10 Double-turret mirror image

(5) Resetting
(a) When parameter #1210 RstGmd/bit14 = 0
The double-turret mirror image will be canceled when reset.
(b) When parameter #1210 RstGmd/bit14 = 1
The double-turret mirror image state will be maintained even if reset.

(6) External mirror image, parameter mirror image

(a) A program error (P371) will occur if double-turret mirror image is applied on the axis
during external mirror image or parameter mirror image.
(b) The "M01 operation error 1036" alarm will occur if external mirror image or parameter
mirror image is applied on the axis during double-turret mirror image.

(7) Manual interrupt

(a) When manual absolute is OFF
If manual interrupt is applied on an axis for which double-turret mirror image is valid, the
mirror image will not be applied on the interrupt amount. The interrupt movement amount
will not be added to the workpiece coordinate values.
(b) When manual absolute is ON
If manual interrupt is applied on an axis for which double-turret mirror image is valid, the
mirror image will not be applied on the interrupt amount. The interrupt movement amount
will be added to the workpiece coordinate values.

434
 13. Program Support Funtions
13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I

13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I

Chamfering at any angle or corner rounding is performed automatically by adding ",C_" or ",R_" to
the end of the block to be commanded first among those command blocks which shape the corner
with lines only.
By setting the parameters, "I_", "K_", "C_" can be set for the chamfer instead of ",C_", and "R_" can
be set for rounding instead of ",R_".

13.11.1 Corner chamfering ",C" (or "I_", "K_", "C_")

Function and purpose

The corner is chamfered in such a way that the positions produced by subtracting the lengths
commanded by ",C_" (or "I_", "K_", "C_") from the hypothetical starting and final corners which
would apply if no chamfering were to be performed, are connected.

Command format

N100 G01 X__ Z__ ,C__ (or I_ / K_ / C_) ;

N200 G01 X__ Z__ ;
,C_ / I_ / K_ / C_ Length up to chamfering starting point or end point from hypothetical
corner
Chamfering is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect.

Example of program

G01 W100. ,C10. F100 ;

U280. W100. ;

X axis

Hypothetical corner
intersection point 140
Chamfering Chamfering
start point end point

10.0

10.0

Z axis
100.0 100.0

435
13. Program Support Funtions
13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I

Detailed description

(1) The start point of the block following the corner chamfering serves as the hypothetical corner
intersection point.
(2) If the base specification parameter "#1272 ext08/bit6" is "0", the ",C" command will be
interpreted as a C command if there is no "," (comma).
(3) If there are multiple or duplicate corner chamfering commands in the same block, the
command issued last will be valid.
(4) When both corner chamfering and corner rounding are commanded in the same block, the
latter command is valid.
(5) Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner chamfering.
(6) When the block following a command with corner chamfering does not contain a linear
command, a corner chamfering/corner rounding II function results.
(7) Program error (P383) results when the movement amount in the block commanding corner
chamfering is less than the chamfering amount.
(8) Program error (P384) results when the movement amount in the block following the block
commanding corner chamfering is less than the chamfering amount.
(9) A program error (P382) results when a movement command is not issued in the block
following the corner chamfering I command.
(10) If "C" is used as the axis name or 2nd miscellaneous function, corner chamfering cannot be
commanded with "C".
(11) Corner chamfering cannot be commanded with "I" or "K" in an arc command block. "I" and "K"
are the arc center commands.

Precautions

(1) Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be commanded with "I", "K", "R" only when the 1st
block of the corner chamfering/corner rounding command is linear.
(2) Corner chamfering with "I", "K", and corner rounding with "R" can be commanded when the 1st
block of the corner chamfering/corner rounding command is linear and the 2nd block is an arc
command. "I", "K" in the 2nd block are the arc center commands.
N100 G01 Xx Zz Ii ;.................. Ii corner chamfering length
N200 G02 Xx Zz Ii Kk ; ............ Ii, Kk arc center command
(3) If ",C_", ",R_" or "I_", "K_", "C_", "R_" are commanded in the same block, ",C_", ",R_" will have
the priority.

436
 13. Program Support Funtions
13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I

13.11.2 Corner rounding ",R_" (or "R_")

Function and purpose

Corner rounding of the hypothetical starting and final corners when corner is assumed as not
rounded is performed at the radius of the arc commanded in ",R_" (or "R_")

Command format

N100 G01 X__ Z__ ,R__ (or R_) ;

N200 G01 X__ Z__ ;
,R_ / R_ Arc radius of corner rounding
Corner rounding is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect.

Example of program

G01 W100. ,R10. F100 ;

U280. W100. ;

X axis

Corner rounding
end point
Corner rounding
start point 140
Hypothetical
corner
intersection
point
R10.0

Z axis
100.0 100.0

437
13. Program Support Funtions
13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I

Detailed description

(1) The start point of the block following the corner rounding serves as the hypothetical corner
intersection point.
(2) If the base specification parameter "#1272 ext08/bit6" is "0", the ",R" command will be
interpreted as a R command if there is no "," (comma).
(3) When both corner chamfering and corner rounding are commanded in the same block the
latter command is valid.
(4) Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner rounding.
(5) When the block following a command with corner rounding does not contain a linear command,
a corner chamfering/corner rounding II function results.
(6) Program error (P383) results when the movement amount in the block commanding corner
rounding is less than the R value.
(7) Program error (P384) results when the movement amount in the block following corner
rounding is less than the R value.
(8) A program error (P382) will occur if a movement command is not issued in the block following
corner rounding.
(9) Corner rounding cannot be commanded with "R" in an arc command block. "R" is the arc
radius command.

Precautions

(1) Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be commanded with "I", "K", "R" only when the 1st
block of the corner chamfering/corner rounding command is linear.
(2) Corner chamfering with "I", "K", and corner rounding with "R" can be commanded when the 1st
block of the corner chamfering/corner rounding command is linear and the 2nd block is an arc
command. "I", "K" in the 2nd block are the arc center commands.
N100 G01 Xx Zz Ii ;.................. Ii corner chamfering length
N200 G02 Xx Zz Ii Kk ; ............ Ii, Kk arc center command
(3) If ",C_", ",R_" or "I_", "K_", "C_", "R_" are commanded in the same block, ",C_", ",R_" will have
the priority.

438
 13. Program Support Funtions
13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I

13.11.3 Corner chamfering/corner rounding expansion

Function and purpose

Using an E command, the feedrate can be designated for the corner chamfering and corner
rounding section.
In this way the corner section can be cut to the correct shape.

Example

F200.
E100.
(G94)
G01 U70. ,C30. F200. E100. ;
W–110. ;

F200.

F200.
E100.

(G94)
G01 U70. ,R30. F200. E100. ;
W–110. ; F200.
X

439
13. Program Support Funtions
13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I

Detailed description

(1) The E command is modal. It is also valid for the feed in the next corner chamfering/corner
rounding section.
Example

F100. (G94)
G01 U30. ,C10. F100. E50. ;
E50.
W–50. ,C10. ;
U50. ,C10. ;
F100. W–50. ;

E50. F100.
X E50.

F100.
Z

(2) E command modal has separate asynchronous feedrate modal and synchronous feedrate
modal functions.
Which one is validated depends on the asynchronous/synchronous mode (G94/G95).
(3) When the E command is 0, or there has not been an E command up to now, the corner
chamfering/corner rounding section feedrate is the same as the F command feedrate.
Example

X
F100. F100.
F100. E50.
Z
F100. F100.

E50. F100.
F100. F100.
(G94) E50. (G94) F100.
G01 U30. ,C10. F100. E50. ; G01 U30. ,C10. F100. ;
W–50. ,C10. ; W–50. ,C10. ;
U50. ,C10. E0 ; F100. U50. ,C10. E50 ; F100.
W–50. ; W–50. ;

(4) E command modal is not cleared when the reset button is pressed.
It is cleared when the power is turned OFF. (In the same manner as F commands.)
(5) All E commands except those shown below are at the corner chamfering/corner rounding
section feedrate.
• E commands during thread cutting modal
• E commands during thread cutting cycle modal

440
 13. Program Support Funtions
13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I

13.11.4 Interrupt during corner chamfering/corner rounding

Detailed description

(1) The operations are shown below for manual interrupt during corner chamfering or corner
rounding.
With an absolute value command and manual absolute switch ON.

N1 G28 XZ ;
N2 G00 X40. Z120. ;
N3 G03 X140. Z70. K−50. ,R20. F100 ;
N4 G01 X40. Z20. ;
: Z-axis interrupt
X

When
X-axis interrupt
interrupt
is applied

140.

N4
N3

When
40. interrupt
is not applied
Z
20. 70. 120. (Unit: mm)

441
13. Program Support Funtions
13.11 Corner chamfering/corner rounding I

With an incremental value command and manual absolute switch OFF

N1 G28 XZ ;
N2 G00 U40. W120. ;
N3 G03 U100. W−50. K−50. ,R20. F100 ;
N4 G01 U−100. W−50. ;
:
X Z-axis interrupt
When interrupt
is applied

X-axis interrupt

140.

N4
N3

40. When
interrupt
is not applied
Z
20. 70. 120. (Unit: mm)

(2) With a single block during corner chamfering or corner rounding, the tool stops after corner
chamfering or corner rounding is executed.

442
 13. Program Support Funtions
13.12 Corner chamfering/corner rounding II

13.12 Corner chamfering/corner rounding II

In a block that forms a corner with continuous random angle lines or arcs, corner chamfering and
corner rounding can be performed by adding ",C" or ",R" to the end of the block commanded first.
By setting the parameters, "I_", "K_", "C_" can be set for the chamfering instead of ",C_", and "R_"
can be set for rounding instead of ",R_". Corner chamfering and corner rounding can both be
commanded as an absolute value or incremental value.

13.12.1 Corner chamfering ",C_" (or "I_", "K_", "C_")

Function and purpose

The corner is chamfered by commanding ",C" (or "I_", "K_", "C_") in the 1st block of two blocks
having continuous arcs. For an arc, this will be the chord length.

Command format

N100 G03 X__ Z__ K__ ,C__ ; (or C_) ;

N200 G01 X__ Z__ ;
,C_ / C_ Length up to chamfering starting point or end point from hypothetical
corner
Corner chamfering is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect.

Example of program

(1) Linear – arc

Absolute value command
N1 G28 X Z ; X
N2 G00 X50. Z100. ; Hypothetical corner intersection point
N3 G01 X150. Z50. ,C20. F100 ;
C20.
N4 G02 X50. Z0 I0 K–50. ; 150
C20.
:
N3
Relative value command N4
N1 G28 X Z ;
50
N2 G00 U25. W100. ;
N3 G01 U50. W–50. ,C20. F100 ;
Z
N4 G02 U–50. W–50. I0 K–50. ; 50 100.
: (Unit: mm)

443
13. Program Support Funtions
13.12 Corner chamfering/corner rounding II

(2) Arc – arc

Absolute value command
N1 G28 X Z; X
N2 G00 X20. Z140. ; 260.

N3 G02 X100. Z60. I100. K0. ,C20. 220.

F100 ;
N4 X60. Z0 I80. K–60. ; Hypothetical corner
intersection point
:
C20.
C20.
Relative value command 100.

N1 G28 X Z ; N4
60. N3
N2 G00 U10. W140. ;
N3 G02 U40. W–80. R100. ,C20. F100 ; 20.
Z
N4 U–20. W–60. I80. K–60. ; 60 140
(Unit: mm)
:

Detailed description

(1) The corner chamfering and corner rounding options are required to use this function. A
program error (P381) will occur if the function is commanded when the option is not provided.
(2) The start point of the block following the corner chamfering serves as the hypothetical corner
intersection point.
(3) If the base specification parameters "#1272 ext08/bit6" is "0", the ",C" command will be
interpreted as a C command if there is no "," (comma).
(4) If there are multiple or duplicate corner chamfering commands in the same block, the
command issued last will be valid.
(5) When both corner chamfering and corner rounding are commanded in the same block, the
latter command is valid.
(6) Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner chamfering.
(7) A program error (P385) results when positioning or thread cutting is commanded in the corner
chamfering command block or next block.
(8) A program error (P382) results when the block following corner chamfering contains a G
command other than group 01 or another command.
(9) Program error (P383) results when the movement amount in the block commanding corner
chamfering is less than the chamfering amount.
(10) Program error (P384) results when the movement amount in the block following the block
commanding corner chamfering is less than the chamfering amount.
(11) Even if a diameter is commanded, it will be handled as a radius value during corner
chamfering.
(12) A program error (P382) results when a movement command is not issued in the block
following the corner chamfering II command.
(13) If "C" is used as the axis name or 2nd miscellaneous function, corner chamfering cannot be
commanded with "C".
(14) Corner chamfering cannot be commanded with "I" or "K" in an arc command block. "I" and "K"
are the arc center commands.

444
13. Program Support Funtions
13.12 Corner chamfering/corner rounding II

Precautions

(1) Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be commanded with "I", "K", "R" only when the 1st
block of the corner chamfering/corner rounding command is linear.
(2) Corner chamfering with "I", "K", and corner rounding with "R" can be commanded when the 1st
block of the corner chamfering/corner rounding command is linear and the 2nd block is an arc
command. "I", "K" in the 2nd block are the arc center commands.
N100 G01 Xx Zz Ii ;.................. Ii corner chamfering length
N200 G02 Xx Zz Ii Kk ; ............ Ii, Kk arc center command
(3) If ",C_", ",R_" or "I_", "K_", "C_", "R_" are commanded in the same block, ",C_", ",R_" will have
the priority.

445
 13. Program Support Funtions
13.12 Corner chamfering/corner rounding II

13.12.2 Corner rounding ",R_" (or "R_")

Function and purpose

The corner is rounded by commanding ",R_" (or "R_") in the 1st block of two blocks containing
continuous arcs.

Command format

N100 G03 X__ Z__ I__ K__ ,R__ (or R_) ;

N200 G01 X__ Z__ ;
,R_ / R_ Arc radius of corner rounding
Corner rounding is performed at the point where N100 and N200 intersect.

Example of program

(1) Linear – arc

Absolute value command X
N1 G28 X Z ; Hypothetical corner intersection point
N2 G00 X60. Z100. ;
160.
N3 G01 X160. Z50. ,R10. F100 ;
N4 G02 X60. Z0 I0 K–50. ;
R10.
: N3
N4

Relative value command 60.

N1 G28 X Z ;
N2 G00 U30. W100. ;
Z
N3 G01 U50. W–50. ,R10. F100 ; 50. 100.
N4 G02 U–50. W–50. I0 K–50. ; (Unit: mm)

(2) Arc – arc

Absolute value command
X
N1 G28 X Z; Hypothetical corner intersection point
N2 G00 X60. Z100. ;
N3 G02 X160. Z50. R60 ,R10. F100 ; 160.

N4 X60. Z0 R50. ;
: R10.
N3
N4
Relative value command
60.
N1 G28 X Z ;
N2 G00 U30. W100. ;
Z
N3 G02 U50. W–50. I50. K0 ,R10. F100 ; 50. 100.
N4 U–50. W–50. I0. K–50. ; (Unit: mm)
:

446
 13. Program Support Funtions
13.12 Corner chamfering/corner rounding II

Detailed description

(1) The corner chamfering and corner rounding options are required to use this function. A
program error (P381) will occur if the function is commanded when the option is not provided.
(2) The start point of the block following the corner rounding serves as the hypothetical corner
intersection point.
(3) If the base specification parameters "#1272 ext08/bit6" is "0", the ",R" command will be
interpreted as a R command if there is no "," (comma).
(4) When both corner chamfering and corner rounding are commanded in the same block the
latter command is valid.
(5) Tool offset is calculated for the shape which has already been subjected to corner rounding.
(6) A program error (P385) results when positioning or thread cutting is commanded in the corner
rounding command block or next block.
(7) A program error (P382) results when the block following corner rounding contains a G
command other than group 01 or another command.
(8) Program error (P383) results when the movement amount in the block commanding corner
rounding is less than the R value.
(9) Program error (P384) results when the movement amount in the block following the block
commanding corner rounding is less than the R value.
(10) Even if a diameter is commanded, it will be handled as a radius value during corner rounding.
(11) A program error (P382) results when a movement command is not issued in the block
following corner rounding.
(12) Corner rounding cannot be commanded with "R" in an arc command block. "R" is the arc
radius command.

Precautions

(1) Corner chamfering and corner rounding can be commanded with "I", "K", "R" only when the 1st
block of the corner chamfering/corner rounding command is linear.
(2) Corner chamfering with "I", "K", and corner rounding with "R" can be commanded when the 1st
block of the corner chamfering/corner rounding command is linear and the 2nd block is an arc
command. "I", "K" in the 2nd block are the arc center commands.
N100 G01 Xx Zz Ii ;.................. Ii corner chamfering length
N200 G02 Xx Zz Ii Kk ; ............ Ii, Kk arc center command
(3) If ",C_", ",R_" or "I_", "K_", "C_", "R_" are commanded in the same block, ",C_", ",R_" will have
the priority.

13.12.3 Corner chamfering/corner rounding expansion

Refer to section "13.11.3 Corner chamfering/corner rounding expansion" for details.

13.12.4 Interrupt during corner chamfering/corner rounding

Refer to section "13.11.4 Interrupt during corner chamfering/corner rounding" for details.

447
 13. Program Support Funtions
13.13 Linear angle command

13.13 Linear angle command

Function and purpose

The end point coordinates are calculated automatically by commanding the linear angle and one of
the end point coordinate axes.

Command format

N1 G01 Xx1 (Zz1) Aa1;

N1 G01 Xx2 (Zz2) A−a2; (A-a2 can also be set as As3.)
or
N1 G01 Xx1 (Zz1) ,Aa1;
N1 G01 Xx2 (Zz2) ,A−a2;
This designates the angle and the X or Z axis coordinates.
Select the command plane with G17 to G19.

X
(z1,x1)
x1
a2

N1 N2

a3
a1
x2
(z2,x2)
Z

Detailed description

(1) The angle is from the + direction of the horizontal axis on the selected plane. The counter-
clockwise (CCW) direction is considered to be + and the clockwise direction (CW) −.
(2) Either of the axes on the selected plane is commanded for the end point.
(3) The angle is ignored when the angle and the coordinates of both axes are commanded.
(4) When only the angle has been commanded, this is treated as a geometric command.
(5) The angle of either the start point (a1) or end point (a2) may be used.
(6) This function is valid only for the G01 command; it is not valid for other interpolation or
positioning commands.
(7) The range of slope "a" is −360.000 ≤ a ≤ 360.000.
When a value outside this range is commanded, it will be divided by 360 (degrees) and the
remainder will be commanded.
(Example) If 400 is commanded, 40° (remainder of 400/360) will become the command angle.

(8) If address A is used for the axis name or 2nd miscellaneous function, use ",A" as the angle.
(9) If "A" and ",A" are commanded in the same block, ",A" will be interpreted as the angle.

448
 13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

13.14 Geometric

13.14.1 Geometric I

Function and purpose

When it is difficult to determine the point at which the two straight lines intersect with a continuous
linear interpolation command, the end point of the first straight line will be automatically calculated
inside the CNC and the movement command will be controlled provided that the slope of the first
straight line as well as the end point coordinates and slope of the second straight line are
commanded.
(Note) If the parameter (#1082 Geomet) is set to 0, geometric I will not function.

Command format

N1 G01 Aa1 (A–a2) Ff1 ; This designates the angle and feedrate.
N2 Xx2 Zz2 A–a2 (Aa3 ) Ff2 ; This designates the next block end point coordinates,
angle and feedrate.
Aa1, A–a2, Aa3 Angle
Ff1, Ff2 Feedrate
Xx2, Zz2 Next block end point coordinates

? X
a3 Z
N1 a2 N2

a1 a1
Present Horizontal axis
position End point (Z2,X2)

449
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Detailed description

(1) Program error (P396) results when the geometric command is not on the selected plane.
(2) The slope is expressed as the angle that is formed with the horizontal axis + direction on the
selected plane. The counterclockwise (CCW) direction is considered to be + and the
clockwise direction (CW) −.
(3) Slope "a" ranges from −360.000 ≤ a ≤ 360.000.
When a value outside this range is commanded, it will be divided by 360 (degrees) and the
remainder will be commanded.
(Example) If 400. is commanded, 40° (remainder of 400/360) will become the command
angle.
(4) The slope of the line can be commanded on the start or end point side. The start or end point
side of the commanded slope is identified automatically inside the NC unit.
(5) The end point coordinates of the second block should be commanded with absolute values.
When incremental values are used, program error (P393) will result.
(6) The feedrate can be commanded for each block.
(7) When the angle where the two straight lines intersect is less than 1°, program error (P392) will
result.
(8) Program error (P396) results when the plane is selected in the 1st block and 2nd block.
(9) This function is ignored when address A is used for the axis name or as the 2nd
miscellaneous function.
(10) Single block stop is possible at the end point of the 1st block.
(11) Program error (P394) results when the 1st and 2nd blocks do not contain the G01 or G33
command.

Relationship with other functions

(1) Corner chamfering or corner rounding can be commanded after the angle command in the 1st
block.
(Example 1) (x2, z2)

N1 Aa1, Cc1 ;
N2 Xx2 Zz2 Aa2 ; N2
a2

c1
?
a1
N1
c1
(x1,z1)

450
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

(Example 2)
(x2, z2)
N1 Aa1, Rr1 ;
N2 Xx2 Zz2 Aa2 ; N2
a2

r1
? a1
N1

(x1, z1)

(2) The geometric command I can be issued after the corner chamfering or corner rounding
command.
(Example 3)
N3 a2
(x3, z3)
N1 Xx2 Zz2 ,Cc1 ;
N2 Aa1 ; ?
N3 Xx3 Zz3 Aa2 ; N2
a1

c1

(x2, z2) N1
c1
(x1, z1)

(3) The geometric command I can be issued after the linear angle command.
(Example 4)
(x3, z3) N3 a3
N1 Xx2 Aa1 ; ?
N2 Aa2 ;
N3 Xx3 Zz3 Aa3 ; N2
a2

(x2, z2) N1
a1

(x1, z1)

451
 13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

13.14.2 Geometric IB

Function and purpose

With the geometric IB function, the contact and intersection are obtained by commanding an arc
center point or linear angle in the movement commands of two continuous blocks (only for blocks
having arc commands), instead of commanding the first block end point.
Control target block
(1) Two-arc contact

N2
r1
(??)
X r2

Z N1

(2) Linear - arc (arc - linear) intersection

N1
r1
(??)
X r1
N2
(??)

N2 N1
Z

(3) Linear - arc (arc - linear) contact

N2
r1 (??)
r1
N1
N1
X (??)
N2

(Note) If the parameter (#1082 Geomet) is set to a value other than 2, geometric IB will not
function.

452
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Function and purpose 1 (Automatic calculation of two-arc contact)

When the contact of two continuous contacting arcs is not indicated in the drawings, it can be
automatically calculated by commanding the 1st arc center coordinate value or radius, and the 2nd
arc end point absolute value and center coordinate value or radius.

Command format 1 (Automatic calculation of two-arc contact)

N1 G02 (G03) Pp1 Qq1 Ff1 ;

N2 G03 (G02) Xx2 Zz2 Pp2 Qq2 Ff2 ;
N1 G02 (G03) Pp1 Qq1 Ff1 ;
N2 G03 (G02) Xx2 Zz2 Rr2 Ff2 ;
N1 G02 (G03) Rr1 Ff1 ;
N2 G03 (G02) Xx2 Zz2 Pp2 Qq2 Ff2 ;
P, Q X and Z axes arc center coordinate absolute value (diameter/radius value command)
The center address for the 3rd axis is commanded with A.
R Arc radius (when a (−) sign is attached, the arc is judged to be 180° or more)
* I and K (X and Z axes arc center coordinate incremental value) commands can be issued
instead of P and Q.
1st block arc : Radius command incremental amount from the start point to the center
2nd block arc : Radius command incremental amount from the end point to the center

(p1, q1)

(x2, z2) r2

(p2, q2)
r1

453
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Detailed description 1 (Automatic calculation of two-arc contact)

(1) A program error (P393) will result before the 1st block if the 2nd block does not contain a
coordinate absolute value command.
(2) A program error (P398) will result before the 1st block if there are no geometric IB
specifications.
(3) A program error (P395) will result before the 1st block if there is no R (here, the 1st block is
designated with P and Q (I, K)) or P and Q (I, K) designation.
(4) A program error (P396) will result before the 1st block if another plane selection command
(G17 to G19) is issued in the 2nd block.
(5) A program error (P397) will result before the 1st block if two arcs that do not contact are
commanded.
(6) The contact calculation accuracy is ±1µm (fractions rounded up).
(7) Single block operation stops at the 1st block.
(8) When I or K is omitted, the values are regarded as I0 and K0. P and Q cannot be omitted.
(9) The error range in which the contact is obtained is set in parameter "#1084 RadErr".

Tool path

"Arc error"

(10) For an arc block perfect circle command (arc block start point = arc block end point), the R
designation arc command finishes immediately, and there is no operation. Thus, use a PQ (IK)
designation arc command.
(11) G codes of the G modal group 1 in the 1st/2nd block can be omitted.
(12) Addresses being used as axis names cannot be used as command addresses for arc center
coordinates or arc radii.
(13) If the 2nd block arc inscribes the 1st arc block when the 2nd block is an R designation arc, the
R+ sign becomes the inward turning arc command, and the R– sign becomes the outward
turning arc command.

R–
N2

R+

N1

454
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Example of program 1 (Automatic calculation of two-arc contact)

(1) PQ, PQ command

X axis

80.0

N2

?
80.0
50.0 50.0
N1
20.0
Z axis
60.0

G01 X20.0 Z60.0 ;

N1 G02 P50.0 Q60.0 F100 ;
N2 G03 X80.0 Z30.0 P50.0 Q30.0 ; (Unit: mm)

(2) PQ, R command

X axis

30.
N2 R60.

N1
80.
40.
Z axis
70.

G01 X40.0 Z70.0 F100 ;

N1 G02 R60.0 ;
N2 G03 X80.0 Z30.0 P40.0 Q30.0 ; (Unit: mm)

455
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Relation with other functions 1 (Automatic calculation of two-arc contact)

Command Tool path

Geometric IB + corner chamfering II

N1 G03 P__ Q__ ;

N2 G02 X__ Z__ R__ ,C__ ; X N2
G02 X__ Z__ R__ ; N1
Z

Geometric IB + corner rounding II

N1 G03 P__ Q__ ; N2

N2 G02 X__ Z__ R__ ,R__ ; N1
X
G02 X__ Z__ R__ ;

Geometric IB + corner chamfering II

N1 G03 P__ Q__ ; N2

N2 G02 X__ Z__ R__ ,C__ ;
X N1
G01 X__ Z__ ;

Geometric IB + corner rounding II

N1 G03 P__ Q__ ;

N2 G02 X__ Z__ R__ ,R__ ; X
G02 X__ Z__ ;

456
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Function and purpose 2 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection)

When the intersection of a shape in which a line and arc intersect is not indicated in the drawings, it
can be automatically calculated by commanding the following program.

Command format 2 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection: For G18 plane)

N1 G01 Aa1 (A−a2) Ff1 ;

N2 G02 (G03) Xx2 Zz2 Pp2 Qq2 Hh2 Ff2 ;
N1 G02 (G03) Pp1 Qq1 Hh1 Ff1 ;
N2 G01 Xx2 Zz2 Aa3 (A−a4) Ff2 ;
A Linear angle (−360.000° to 360.000°)
P, Q X and Z axes arc center coordinate absolute value (diameter/radius value command)
The center address for the 3rd axis is commanded with A.
H Linear - arc intersection selection 0 : Intersection of the shorter line
1 : Intersection of the longer line

* I and K (X and Z axes arc center coordinate incremental value) commands can be issued
instead of P and Q.
1st block arc : Radius command incremental amount from the start point to the center
2nd block arc : Radius command incremental amount from the end point to the center

(??)
N2 H=1 H=1 N1
(??)

H=0 (??)
(??) (p2, q2) H=0
(p1, q1) –a4 N2
N1 –a2 (x2, z2) a3
a1
(x2, z2)
X

457
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Detailed description 2 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection)

(1) When the 2nd miscellaneous function address is A, the 2nd miscellaneous function is
validated and this function is invalidated.

(2) A program error (P393) will result before the 1st block if the 2nd block does not contain a
coordinate absolute value command.

(3) A program error (P398) will result before the 1st block if there are no geometric IB
specifications.

(4) A program error (P395) will result before the 1st block if there is no P and Q (I, K) designation.
A program error (P395) will also result if there is no A designation for the line.

(5) A program error (P396) will result before the 1st block if another plane selection command
(G17 to G19) is issued in the 2nd block.
Tool path
(6) A program error (P397) will result before the 1st block if a
straight line and arc that do not contact or intersect are
commanded. Arc error

(7) Single block operation stops at the 1st block.

(8) When I or K is omitted, the values are regarded as I0 and K0. P and Q cannot be omitted.

(9) When H is omitted, the value is regarded as H0.

(10) The linear - arc contact is automatically calculated by designating R instead of P and Q
(I, K).

(11) The error range in which the intersection is obtained is set in parameter "#1084 RadErr".

(12) The line slope is rotated at the angle regarded as its horizontal axis. Counterclockwise (CCW)
is positive (+). Clockwise (CW) is negative (−).

(13) The line slope can be commanded from either the start point side or the end point side. The
judgment whether the designated slope is start point side or end point side is carried out
automatically.

458
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

(14) When the distance to the intersection of the line and arc is the same (as in the drawing below),
the control by address H (short/long distance selection) is invalidated. In this case the
judgment is carried out based on the angle of the line.

Linear - arc

(p2, q2) N1 G1 A a 1 Ff1 ;

a1 N2 G2 Xx2 Zz2 Pp2 Qq2 Ff2 ;
–a2

N1 G1 A –a2 Ff1 ;
N2 G2 Xx2 Zz2 Pp2 Qq2 Ff2 ;

(15) The intersection calculation accuracy is ±1µm (fractions rounded up).

(16) In linear - arc intersections, the arc command can only be a PQ (IK) command. When the arc
block start point = arc block end point, the arc is a perfect circle.
(17) G codes of the G modal group in the 1st block can be omitted.
(18) Addresses being used as axis names cannot be used as command addresses for angles, arc
center coordinates or intersection selections.
(19) When geometric IB is commanded, two blocks are pre-read.

459
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Example of program 2 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection)

X axis

N2 180°
?
N1

100.0 80.0
50.0

Z axis

G01 X80.0 Z50.0 F100 ;

N1 G01 A180.0 ;
N2 G03 X100.0 Z0 P0 Q0 ; (Unit: mm)

460
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Relation with other functions 2 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection)

Command Tool path

Geometric IB + corner chamfering II
N2
N1 G01 A__ ,C__ ; X
N2 G03 X__ Z__ P__ Q__ H__ ; N1

Z
Geometric IB + corner rounding II
N2
N1 G01 A__ ,R__ ; X
N2 G03 X__ Z__ P__ Q__ H__ ;
N1
Z

Geometric IB + corner chamfering II

N1 G01 A__ ;
X N2
N2 G03 X__ Z__ P__ Q__ H__ ,C__ ;
G01 X__ Z__ ; N1
Z

Geometric IB + corner rounding II

N1 G01 A__ ;
X N2
N2 G03 X__ Z__ P__ Q__ H__ ,R__ ;
G01 X__ Z__ ; N1
Z
Geometric IB + corner chamfering II

N1 G02 P__ Q__ H__ ; X N2

N2 G01 X__ Z__ A__ ,C__ ;
G01 X__ Z__ ; N1
Z

Geometric IB + corner rounding II

N1 G02 P__ Q__ H__ ; X N2

N2 G01 X__ Z__ A__ ,R__ ;
G01 X__ Z__ ; N1
Z

461
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Function and purpose 3 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection)

When the contact of a shape in which a line and arc contact is not indicated in the drawings, it can
be automatically calculated by commanding the following program.

Command format 3 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection: For G18 plane)

N1 G0 Aa1 (A−a2) Ff1 ;

N2 G03 (G02) Xx2 Zz2 Rr2 ;
N1 G03 (G02) Rr2 Ff1 ;
N2 G01 Xx2 Zz2 Aa3 (A−a4) Ff2 ;
A Linear angle (−360.000° to 360.000°)
R Arc radius

N1 (??) –a4
(??) N2

N1 –a2 r1 N2
r2
(x2, z2) a3
X a1
(x2, z2)

462
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Detailed description 3 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection)

(1) When the 2nd miscellaneous function address is A, the 2nd miscellaneous function is
validated and this function is invalidated.

(2) A program error (P393) will result before the 1st block if the 2nd block does not contain a
coordinate absolute value command.

(3) A program error (P398) will result before the 1st block if there are no geometric IB
specifications.

(4) A program error (P396) will result before the 1st block if another plane selection command
(G17 to G19) is issued in the 2nd block.

(5) A program error (P397) will result before the 1st block if a straight line and arc that do not
contact are commanded.

(6) A program error (P395) will result before the 1st block if there is no R designation for the 2nd
block. A program error (P395) will also result if there is no A designation for the line.

(7) Single block operation stops at the 1st block.

(8) The linear - arc intersection is automatically calculated by designating R instead of P and Q (I,
K).

(9) The error range in which the contact is obtained is set in Tool path
parameter "#1084 RadErr".
Arc error
(10) The line slope is rotated at the angle regarded as the positive
(+) direction of its horizontal axis. Counterclockwise (CCW) is
positive (+). Clockwise (CW) is negative (−).

(11) The line slope can be commanded from either the start point side or the end point side. The
judgment whether the designated slope is start point side or end point side is carried out
automatically.

(12) The intersection calculation accuracy is ± 1µm (fractions rounded up).

(13) In linear - arc contact, the arc command can only be an R command. Thus, when the arc block
start point = arc block end point, the arc command finishes immediately, and there is no
operation. (Perfect circle commands are not possible.)

(14) G codes of the G modal group 1 in the 1st block can be omitted.

(15) Addresses being used as axis names cannot be used as command addresses for angles or
arc radii.

(16) When geometric IB is commanded, two blocks are pre-read.

463
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Example of program 3 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection)

X axis

N2

?
135°
50.0 N1
100.0
50.0 40.0

Z axis

G01 X40.0 Z50.0 F100 ;

N1 G01 A135.0 ;
N2 G03 X100.0 Z0.0 R50.0 ; (Unit: mm)

464
13. Program Support Functions
13.14 Geometric

Relation with other functions 3 (Automatic calculation of linear - arc intersection)

Command Tool path

Geometric IB + corner chamfering

N1 G03 R__ ;
X
N2 G01 X__ Z__ A__ ,C__ ;
G01 X__ Z__ R__ ;
Z

Geometric IB + corner rounding

N1 G03 R__ ;
X
N2 G01 X__ Z__ A__ ,R__ ;
G01 X__ Z__ ;
Z

Geometric IB + corner chamfering II

X
N1 G01 A__ ;
N2 G02 X__ Z__ R__ ,C__ ;
G01 X__ Z__ ; Z

Geometric IB + corner rounding II

N1 G01 A__ ; X
N2 G02 X__ Z__ R__ ,R__ ;
G01 X__ Z__ ; Z

465
 13. Program Support Functions
13.15 Program parameter input

13.15 Program parameter input; G10, G11

Function and purpose

The parameters set from the setting and display unit can be changed in the machining programs.
The data format used for the data setting is as follows.

Command format

G10 L50 ; Data setting command

P major classification number N data number H† bit type data ;

P major classification number A axis number N data number D byte type data ;
P major classification number A axis number N data number S word type data ;
P major classification number A axis number N data number L 2 word type data ;

G11 ; Data setting mode cancel (data setting completed)

There are 8 types of data formats according to the type of parameter (axis-common and axis-
independent) and data type, as listed below.
With axis-common data
Axis-common bit-type parameter P N H† ;
Axis-common byte-type parameter P N D ;
Axis-common word-type parameter P N S ;
Axis-common 2-word-type parameter P N L ;
With axis-independent data
Axis-independent bit-type parameter P A N H† ;
Axis-independent byte-type parameter P A N D ;
Axis-independent word-type parameter P A N S ;
Axis-independent 2-word-type parameter P A N L ;
(Note 1) The sequence of addresses in a block must be as shown above.
(Note 2) Refer to Appendix Table 1 for the P, N number correspondence table.
(Note 3) For a bit type parameter, the data type will be H† († is a value between 0 and 7).
(Note 4) The axis number is set in the following manner: 1st axis is 1, 2nd axis is 2, and so forth.
When using two systems, the 1st axis in each system is set as 1, the second axis is set
as 2, and so forth.
(Note 5) Command G10L50, L11 in independent blocks. A program error (P33, P421) will occur if
not commanded in independent blocks.

Example of program

(Example) To turn ON bit 2 of bit selection #6401

G10 L50 ;
P8 N1 H21 ;
G11 ;

466
 13. Program Support Functions
13.16 Macro interrupt

13.16 Macro interrupt

Function and purpose

A user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is input from the machine to interrupt the program being
currently executed and instead call another program and execute it. This is called the user macro
interrupt function.
Use of this function allows the program to operate flexibly enough to meet varying conditions.
For setting the parameters of this function, refer to the Operating Manual.

Command format

M96 P__ H__ ; User macro interrupt enable

M97 ; User macro interrupt disable
P Interrupt program number
H Interrupt sequence number

The user macro interrupt function is enabled and disabled by the M96 and M97 commands
programmed to make the user macro interrupt signal (UIT) valid or invalid. That is, if an interrupt
signal (UIT) is input from the machine side in a user macro interrupt enable period from when M96
is issued to when M97 is issued or the NC is reset, a user macro interrupt is caused to execute the
program specified by P__ instead of the one being executed currently.
Another interrupt signal (UIT) is ignored while one user macro interrupt is being in service. It is also
ignored in a user macro interrupt disable state such as after an M97 command is issued or the
system is reset.
M96 and M97 are processed internally as user macro interrupt control M codes.

Interrupt enable conditions

A user macro interrupt is enabled only during execution of a program. The requirements for the
user macro interrupt are as follows:

(1) An automatic operation mode, memory or tape, or MDI has been selected.

(2) The system is running in automatic mode.

(3) No user macro interrupt is being processed.

(Note 1) A macro interrupt is disabled in manual operation mode (JOG, STEP, HANDLE, etc.)

467
13. Program Support Functions
13.16 Macro interrupt

Outline of operation

(1) When a user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is input after an M96 Pp1 ; command is issued by the
current program, interrupt program Op1 is executed. When an M99 ; command is issued by
the interrupt program, control returns to the main program.
(2) If M99 Pp2 ; is specified, the blocks from the one next to the interrupted block to the last one
are searched for the block with sequence number Np2 ;. Control thus returns to the block with
sequence number Np2 ; that is found first in the above search.

Current program

Interrupt program

M96 Pp1 ; Op1 ;

Interrupt signal (UIT)
User macro not acceptable within
interrupt a user macro program
signal (UIT)

M99 (Pp2) ;

(If Pp2 is specified)

Np2 ;

Np2 ;

M97 ;

468
13. Program Support Functions
13.16 Macro interrupt

Interrupt type

Interrupt types 1 and 2 can be selected by the parameter "#1113 INT_2".

[Type 1]
• When an interrupt signal (UIT) is input, the system immediately stops moving the tool and
interrupts dwell, then permits the interrupt program to run.
• If the interrupt program contains a move or miscellaneous function (MSTB) command, the
commands in the interrupted block are lost. After the interrupt program completes, the main
program resumes operation from the block next to the interrupted one.
• If the interrupted program contains no move and miscellaneous (MSTB) commands, it resumes
operation, after completion of the interrupt program, from the point in the block where the
interrupt was caused.
If an interrupt signal (UIT) is input during execution of a miscellaneous function (MSTB) command,
the NC system waits for a completion signal (FIN). The system thus executes a move or
miscellaneous function (MSTB) command in the interrupt program only after input of FIN.

[Type 2]
• When an interrupt signal (UIT) is input, the program completes the commands in the current
block, then transfers control to the interrupt program.
• If the interrupt program contains no move and miscellaneous function (MSTB) commands, the
interrupt program is executed without interrupting execution of the current program.
However, if the interrupt program has not ended even after the execution of the original block is
completed, the system may stop machining temporarily.

469
13. Program Support Functions
13.16 Macro interrupt

[Type 1]
Main program
block (1) block (2) block (3)

If the interrupt program contains a move

or miscellaneous function command,
the reset of block (2) is lost.
block (1) block (2) block (3)

Interrupt program

User macro interrupt If the interrupted program contains no

signal move and miscellaneous commands,
it resumes operation from where it left in
block (2), that is, all the reset commands.
block (1) block (2) block (2) block (3)

Interrupt program

User macro interrupt

signal Executing
[Type 2]
Main program
block (1) block (2) block (3)

block (1) block (2) block (3)

Interrupt program

User macro If the interrupted program contains no

interrupt signal move and miscellaneous commands,
the interrupted program is kept
executed in parallel to execution of the
current program.

block (1) block (2) block (3)

The move or miscellaneous

Interrupt program command in the interrupt program is
User macro executed after completion of the
interrupt signal current block.

470
13. Program Support Functions
13.16 Macro interrupt

Calling method

User macro interrupt is classified into the following two types depending on the way an interrupt
program is called. These two types of interrupt are selected by parameter "#1229 set01/bit0".
a. Subprogram type interrupt
b. Macro type interrupt
Both types of interrupt are included in calculation of the nest level. The subprograms and user
macros called in the interrupt program are also included in calculation of the nest level.
Subprogram The user macro interrupt program is called as a subprogram. As with calling
type interrupt by M98, the local variable level remains unchanged before and after an
interrupt.
Macro type The user macro interrupt program is called as a user macro. As with calling
interrupt by G65, the local variable level changes before and after an interrupt.
No arguments in the main program can be passed to the interrupt program.

Acceptance of user macro interrupt signal (UIT)

A user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is accepted in the following two modes. These two modes are
selected by a parameter "#1112 S_TRG".
a. Status trigger mode
b. Edge trigger mode
Status trigger The user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is accepted as valid when it is ON.
mode If the interrupt signal (UIT) is ON when the user macro interrupt function is
enabled by M96, the interrupt program is activated.
By keeping the interrupt signal (UIT) ON, the interrupt program can be
executed repeatedly.
Edge trigger The user macro interrupt signal (UIT) is accepted as valid at its rising edge,
mode that is, at the instance it turns ON.
This mode is useful to execute an interrupt program once.

User macro interrupt signal (UIT)

ON

OFF

(Status trigger mode)

User macro interrupt

(Edge trigger mode)

Accepting user macro interrupt signal (UIT)

471
13. Program Support Functions
13.16 Macro interrupt

Returning from user macro interrupt

M99 (P__) ;
An M99 command is issued in the interrupt program to return to the main program. Address P is
used to specify the sequence number of the return destination in the main program. The blocks
from the one next to the interrupted block to the last one in the main program are first searched for
the block with sequence number Np2 ;. If it is not found, all the blocks before the interrupted one
are then searched. Control thus returns to the block with sequence number Np2 ; that is found first
in the above search.
(This is equivalent to M99 P__ used after M98 calling.)

Modal information affected by user macro interrupt

If modal information is changed by the interrupt program, it is handled as follows after control
returns from the interrupt program to the main program.
Returning with The change of modal information by the interrupt program is invalidated and
M99 ; the original modal information is not restored.
With interrupt type 1, however, if the interrupt program contains a move or
miscellaneous function (MSTB) command, the original modal information is
not restored.
Returning with The original modal information is updated by the change in the interrupt
M99 P__ ; program even after returning to the main program. This is the same as in
returning with M99 P__ ; from a program called by M98.

Main program
being executed Interrupt program

M96 Pp1 ; Op1 ;

User macro
interrupt (Modal change)
signal (UIT)

Modal before
interrupt is
restored. M99 (p2) ;

(With Pp2 specified)

Np2 ;

Modal modified
by interrupt
program remains
effective.

Modal information affected by user macro interrupt

472
13. Program Support Functions
13.16 Macro interrupt

Modal information variables (#4401 to #4520)

Modal information when control passes to the user macro interrupt program can be known by
reading system variables #4401 to #4520.
The unit specified with a command applies.

System variable Modal information

#4401 ~ #4421 G code (group 01 to group 21) Some groups are not used.
#4507 D code
#4509 F code
#4511 H code
#4513 M code
#4514 Sequence number
#4515 Program number
#4519 S code
#4520 T code

The above system variables are available only in the user macro interrupt program. If they are used
in other programs, program error (P241) results.

M code for control of user macro interrupt

The user macro interrupt is controlled by M96 and M97. However, these commands may have
been used for other operation. To be prepared for such case, these command functions can be
assigned to other M codes.
(This invalidates program compatibility.)
User macro interrupt control with alternate M codes is possible by setting the alternate M code in
parameters "#1110 M96_M" and "#1111 M97_M" and by validating the setting by selecting
parameter "#1109 subs_M".
(M codes 03 to 97 except 30 are available for this purpose.)
If the parameter "#1109 subs_M" used to enable the alternate M codes is not selected, the M96
and M97 codes remain effective for user macro interrupt control.
In either case, the M codes for user macro interrupt control are processed internally and not output
to the outside.

473
13. Program Support Functions
13.16 Macro interrupt

Parameters

Refer to the Operating Manual for details on the setting methods.

(1) Subprogram call validity "#1229 set01/bit 0"
1 : Subprogram type user macro interrupt
0 : Macro type user macro interrupt
(2) Status trigger mode validity "#1112 S_TRG"
1 : Status trigger mode
0 : Edge trigger mode
(3) Interrupt type 2 validity "#1113 INT_2"
1 : The executable statements in the interrupt program are executed after completion
of execution of the current block. (Type 2)
0 : The executable statements in the interrupt program are executed before completion
of execution of the current block. (Type 1)
(4) Validity of alternate M code for user macro interrupt control "#1109 subs_M"
1 : Valid
0 : Invalid
(5) Alternate M codes for user macro interrupt
Interrupt enable M code (equivalent to M96) "#1110 M96_M"
Interrupt disable M code (equivalent to M97) "#1111 M97_M"

Restrictions

(1) If the user macro interrupt program uses system variables #5001 and after (position
information) to read coordinates, the coordinates pre-read in the buffer are used.
(2) If an interrupt is caused during execution of the tool diameter compensation, a sequence
number (M99 P__ ;) must be specified with a command to return from the user macro interrupt
program. If no sequence number is specified, control cannot return to the main program
normally.

474
 13. Program Support Functions
13.17 Tool change position return

13.17 Tool change position return; G30.1 ~ G30.5

Function and purpose

By specifying the tool change position in a parameter “#8206 tool change” and also specifying a
tool change position return command in a machining program, the tool can be changed at the most
appropriate position.
The axes that are going to return to the tool change position and the order in which the axes begin
to return can be changed by commands.

Command format

(1) The format of tool change position return commands is as follows.

G30.n ;
n = 1 to 5 Specify the axes that return to the tool change position and the order in which
they return.

Commands and return order

Command Return order
G30.1 X axis only ( → additional axis)
G30.2 Z axis only ( → additional axis)
G30.3 X axis → Z axis ( → additional axis)
G30.4 Z axis → X axis ( → additional axis)
G30.5 X axis • Z axis ( → additional axis)
(Note 1) An arrow ( → ) indicates the order of axes that begin to return. A period ( • ) indicates
that the axes begin to return simultaneously.
Example : "Z axis → X axis" indicate that the Z axis returns to the tool change
position, then the X axis does.
(2) The tool change position return on/off for the additional axis can be set with parameter "#1092
Tchg_A" for the additional axis. For the order for returning to the tool change position, the axes
return after the standard axis completes the return to the tool change position (refer to above
table). For specifications having two additional axes, the two additional axes simultaneously
return to the tool change position after the standard axis has finished its return to the tool
change position.
The additional axis alone cannot return to the tool change position.

475
13. Program Support Functions
13.17 Tool change position return

Detailed description

(1) The following drawing shows an example of operation during a tool change position return
command.

Tool changing
position
X axis (1) G30.1 (3) G30.3

(5) G30.5 (4) G30.4

(2) G30.2
Z axis

(1) G30.1 command:

X axis only returns to the tool change position. (If the tool change position return is
validated for the additional axis, the additional axis also returns to the tool change
position after the X axis reaches the tool change position.)
(2) G30.2 command:
Z axis only returns to the tool change position. (If the tool change position return is
validated for the additional axis, the additional axis also returns to the tool change
position after the Z axis reaches the tool change position.)
(3) G30.3 command:
X axis returns to the tool change position, then the Z axis does the same thing. (If the tool
change position return is validated for the additional axis, the additional axis also returns
to the tool change position after the X and Z axes reaches the tool change position.)
(4) G30.4 command:
Z axis returns to the tool change position, then the X axis does the same thing. (If the tool
change position return is validated for the additional axis, the additional axis also returns
to the tool change position after the X and Z axes reaches the tool change position.)
(5) G30.5 command:
X and Z axes return to the tool change position simultaneously. (If the tool change
position return is validated for the additional axis, the additional axis also returns to the
tool change position after the X and Z axes reaches the tool change position.)

476
13. Program Support Functions
13.17 Tool change position return

(2) After all necessary tool change position return is completed by a G30.n command, tool change
position return complete signal TCP (X22B) is turned ON. When an axis out of those having
returned to the tool change position by a G30.n command leaves the tool change position, the
TCP signal is turned OFF.
(With a G30.3 command, for example, the TCP signal is turned ON when the Z axis has
reached the tool change position after the X axis did (supposing tool change position return for
additional axes is OFF). The TCP signal is then turned OFF when the X or Z axis leaves the
position. If tool change position return for additional axes is ON with parameter "#1092
Tchg_A", the TCP signal is turned ON when the additional axis or axes have reached the tool
change position after the standard axes did. It is then turned OFF when one of the X, Z, and
additional axes leaves the position.)
[TCP signal output timing chart] (G30.3 command with tool change position return for
additional axes set ON)

Machining program G30.3 ; T0202 ; G00 X-100. ···

Arrival of X axis to tool
change position

Arrival of Z axis to tool

change position

Arrival of additional axis to

tool change position
Tool change position return
complete signal (TCP)

(3) Tool compensation data such as tool length offset and tool nose wear compensation are
temporarily canceled by the tool change position return command. The machine moves to the
tool change position set in the parameters, but because the tool compensation amount is
stored in the memory, it moves by the next movement command to a position with the tool
compensation applied.
(4) This command is executed by dividing blocks for every axis. If this command is issued during
single-block operation, therefore, a block stop occurs each time one axis returns to the tool
change position. To make the next axis tool change position return, therefore, a cycle start
needs to be specified.

477
 13. Program Support Functions
13.18 ASCII code macro

13.18 ASCII code macro

Function and purpose

A macro program can be called out by setting the correspondence of a subprogram (macro
program) preregistered with the parameters to codes, and then commanding the ASCII code in the
machining program.
This function can be used in addition to the G, M, S, T and B miscellaneous command macro call
function.

Execution example 1) M98 type

Main program Subprogram

O0002 ;
O200
:
:
D2000 ;
:
:
:
M30 ;
M99 ;

After outputting 2000 to common variable #146, the

program No. 200 subprogram is called with the
M98 subprogram call type.

Parameter
#7401 (ASCII [01] Valid/Invalid) 1 (Valid)
#7402 (ASCII [01] Code) D
#7403 (ASCII [01] Type) 0 (M98 type)
#7404 (ASCII [01] Program No.) 200
#7405 (ASCII [01] Variable) 146

Execution example 2) G65 type

Main program Subprogram

O0003 ;
O3000
:
:
A500 ;
:
:
:
M30 ;
M99 ;

After outputting 500 to local variable #1, the

program No. 3000 subprogram is called out with
the G65 macro call type.

Parameter
#7411 (ASCII [02] Valid/Invalid) 1 (Valid)
#7412 (ASCII [02] Code) A
#7413 (ASCII [02] Type) 0 (G65 type)
#7414 (ASCII [02] Program No.) 3000
#7415 (ASCII [02] Variable) 100 (Not used)

478
13. Program Support Functions
13.18 ASCII code macro

Command format

∗∗∗∗; Designates the address and code

ASCII code for calling out macro (one character)
∗∗∗∗ Value or expression output to variable
(Setting range: ±999999.9999)

Detailed description

(1) The command above functions in the same way as that below. The correspondence of
commands is set for each ASCII code with the parameters.
0: M98 P∆∆∆∆ ;
1: G65 P∆∆∆∆ <Argument> ;
2: G66 P∆∆∆∆ <Argument> ;
3: G66.1 P∆∆∆∆ <Argument> ;
When parameters are set for 2 and 3 above, the modal call will be canceled. Thus, command
the cancel command (G67) after commanding the call code or the during the user macro.
(2) The ASCII code for calling the macro with the ASCII codes and the program No. P∆∆∆∆ to be
called are set with the parameters.
Up to two ASCII codes can be registered.
(3) The code section is output to the variables, but the output destination differs according to the
call type and address.
(a) For M98 type
The code section is output to the common variable, and the variable No. is set with the
parameters.
When corresponding to the first address (parameter #7401), the section is output to the
common variable that indicates the first variable No. (parameter #7404).
(b) For G65/G66/G66.1 type
The code section is output to the local variable. The variable No. differs according to the
address, and corresponds to the following table.

Add- Add- Add- Add- Add- Add-

# # # # # #
ress ress ress ress ress ress
A 1 F 9 K 6 P 16 U 21 Z 26
B 2 G 10 L 12 Q 17 V 22
C 3 H 11 M 13 R 18 W 23
D 7 I 4 N 14 S 19 X 24
E 8 J 5 O 15 T 20 Y 25

(Note) The following addresses can be used.

A, B, D, F, H, I, J, K, M, Q, R, S, T

479
13. Program Support Functions
13.18 ASCII code macro

Example of program

A program that controls the tailstock with address A and machines a long thin workpiece is shown
below.

Parameter
#7411 (ASCII [02] Valid/Invalid) 1 (Valid)
#7412 (ASCII [02] Code) A
#7413 (ASCII [02] Type) 1 (G65 type)
#7414 (ASCII [02] Program No.) 500
#7415 (ASCII [02] Variable) 100 (Not used)

Main program Subprogram

G28 XZ ; O500 ;
A1 ; IF [#1 EQ 0] GOTO 10 ;
G00 X20. Z0. ; G53 G00 A–205. ; Tailstock
advance
G01 X15. F100 ; G53 G01 A–200. F100 ;
G01 Z100. F200 ; GOTO N20 ;
X50 Z120. ; N10 M26 ;
A0 ; G53 G0 A–400. ; Tailstock
retract
M30 ; N20 M99 ;

Address A is converted into G65 P500.

120 100 Z0

Press with A1
Pull with A0

50

15
X0
M W –15
Machine
coordinate
zero point –50

Tailstock Tailstock A
spindle spindle
200

(Unit: mm)

480
13. Program Support Functions
13.18 ASCII code macro

Restrictions

(1) Calling a macro with an ASCII code from a program macro-called with an ASCII code

A macro cannot be called with an ASCII code from a program macro-called with an ASCII
code.
The other patterns are shown below.
If it is determined that the macro cannot be called, the command will be handled as a normal
command.
Called side
GMSTB
ASCII G65/66/66.1 M98
macro
ASCII × ×
Calling GMSTB macro × ×
side G65/66/66.1
M98

(2) Nest level of macro call command

The macro subprogram can be called in up to four levels using simple call (G65) and modal
call (G66/G66.1).
The macro call command's argument is valid only in the called macro level.
Since the macro call nest level is four levels, the argument for each macro call can be used in
the program as a local variable.
(3) Nest level of subprogram call

Counting the main program as 0, up to eight levels of subprograms can be called (M98) from a
subprogram.
The following commands are used for subprogram nesting.

(a) M98
(b) G65 G66 G66.1
(c) G code call Miscellaneous function call (M/S/T/B)
(d) MDI interrupt
(e) Automatic tool length measurement
(f) Multi-step skip function

The following commands can be commanded regardless of nesting.

(g) Fixed cycle
(h) Macro interrupt

481
13. Program Support Functions
13.18 ASCII code macro

(4) Order of command priority

If "M" is designated for the ASCII code address, the codes basically necessary for that
machine will be overlapped. In this case, commands will be identified with the following priority
using code values.

(a) M98, M99 (subprogram call command)

M00 (program stop command), M01 (optional stop command)
M02, M30, M198, M199 (end command)
M96, M97 (macro interrupt command)
(b) When corresponding to ASCII code macro command
(c) Used as normal command

"S", "T" and "B" will also overlap with the miscellaneous command macro call. However, if
these commands do not correspond to the identification, the ASCII code macro will be
executed.
If the other addresses do not correspond to the ASCII code macro command, they will be
identified as normal commands. If the command to be used overlaps with an ASCII code
macro command, it must be commanded in the program macro-called with the ASCII code.
Note that there are cases when the command will be unconditionally handled as a normal
command, as explained in (5) below.

(5) Conditions for handling address set in ASCII code macro command as normal command

(a) When there is a data setting command (G10) in the same block.
(b) When ASCII code macro call is executed after the G code macro call command in the
same block (also applies for M, S, T, B and ASCII)
Example) When address "D" (G65 type) is set in the ASCII code macro, and M50 is set
in the macro call (G65 type).

M50 D200 ; Execute M code macro with argument (200 set in #7)

(c) When inputting parameters

(d) When there is a comma (,) before the address. Example) ,D ,R, etc.
(e) When commanded in fixed cycle
(f) When commanded in macro subprogram called with G code macro call
(Also applies when macro is called with M, S, T, B or ASCII)

482
 13. Program Support Functions
13.19 Balance cut

13.19 Balance cut; G15, G14

Function and purpose

The timing for starting the operation of the system 1 turret and system 2 turret can be synchronized.

Turret
(system 1)

Workpiece

Turret
(system 2)

When machining a relatively thin and long workpiece with a lathe, the workpiece could slack, and
highly accurate machining may not be possible.
In this case, if the cutters are applied simultaneously from both sides of the workpiece and the
workpiece is machined while synchronizing these (balance cut), the slack can be suppressed.
Furthermore, the machining time can be shortened by machining with two cutters.
With this function, the movement of two turrets belonging to different systems can be completely
synchronized, so the following type of machining can be done easily.

Command format

G15 ;
G14 ;
G15 Balance cut command ON (modal)
G14 Balance cut command OFF (modal)

Detailed description

(1) Command G15 and G14 in independent blocks.

(2) G15 and G14 are modals. In the CNC's initial state, the G14 balance cut command is OFF.
(3) When G15 is commanded, movement will standby at all cutting feed command blocks until
G14 is commanded or until the modal information is cleared by the reset signal.
(4) If G15 or G14 is commanded in one system, movement will not advance until the same G code
is commanded in the other system.
(5) When subprogram call, macro call or PLC interrupt is carried out, the cutting feed command in
a block that configures the subprogram is handled as one block and will be synchronized.
(6) After G14 is commanded in both systems, system 1 and system 2 will operate independently.

483
13. Program Support Functions
13.19 Balance cut

Example of operation

100 45 <System 1> <System 2>

System 1 : :
G15 G15 ...(1)
S200 ...(2)
40
G00 X40. Z-2. G00 X40. Z–2. ...(3)
(5) (4) (3)
G01 W47. F10. G01 W47. F5. ...(4)
40
G01 U40. W55. G01 X80. Z100. F10. ...(5)
G14 G14 ...(6)
G00 X100. G00 X100. ...(7)
: :
System 2
: :

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) ......

System 1

System 2
(1) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) ......

Synchronized
section : Synchronizing

(1) Balance cut is turned ON with the G15 command.

(2) (3) The S command and rapid traverse command are not synchronized, so the operation will
wait at (4).
(4) System 1 will finish first, but since the next block is a cutting feed command, the operation will
wait at the head of (5).
(5) Cutting will start with system 1 and system 2 together.
(6) Balance cut is turned OFF with the G14 command.
(7) Each system will operate independently after this.

484
13. Program Support Functions
13.19 Balance cut

Example of program

An example of a program for machining with a 1-spindle 2-turret CNC lathe while simultaneously
applying the cutters from the top and bottom of a thin long workpiece using balance cut is shown
below.

Workpiece zero point

120 100 Z0
+Z
System 1 System 1
+X

50

15
X0
-15

-50

+Z
System 2 System 2
+X

System 1 program System 2 program

G28 XZ ; G28 XZ ;
S100 T0101 ; T0101 ;
G15 ; G15 ;
G00 X15 Z–3 ; G00 X15 Z–3 ;
G01 Z100 F0.2 ; G01 Z100 F0.2 ;
X50 Z120 ; X50 Z120 ;
X52 ; X52 ;
G14 ; G14 ;
G28 XZ ; G28 XZ ;
M30 ; M30 ;

485
13. Program Support Functions
13.19 Balance cut

Precautions and restrictions

(1) Synchronization during movement

This function simultaneously starts cutting feed for both systems. The following
synchronization will change according to the movement amount and feedrate, etc., and thus
cannot be guaranteed. To move in complete synchronization, the movement amount and
feedrate must be set to the same values. Note that even if the previous conditions match, there
may be cases when accurate machining, such as thread cutting, is not possible.

(2) Number of cutting feed blocks in balance cut mode

If G14 is commanded in one system first and the other system is in cutting feed, the first
system will enter the synchronization standby state. Operation cannot be advanced to the next
blocks in this case. When commanding balance cut, make sure that the same number of
cutting feed blocks are set between the system 1 and system 2 mode ON and mode OFF
states.

<System 1> <System 2>

: :
N20 G15 N20 G15 The balance cut mode is
N30 G00 X40. Z0. N30 G00 X–40. Z250. canceled with G14 on the
N40 G01 W–30. F1000 N40 G01 W–130. F500 system 2 side first, so system
N50 G01 U40. W–70. N50 G01 X–80. Z50. F1000 1 enters the synchronization
standby state.
N60 G01 W–20. N60 G14 ←
The synchronization standby
N70 G14 N70 S200 state will also be entered
N80 G01 X120. Z30. N80 G00 X–100. when only one system has
: : been reset.

(3) Use with system synchronization command

If one system is standing by for synchronization with the system synchronization standby
command and the other system enters the synchronization standby state with the G15
command, both systems will be in the standby state, and will not shift to the next block.
Command so that standby for synchronization with G15 and standby for synchronization with
the system synchronization standby command do not occur simultaneously.

(4) System synchronization command during balance cutting mode

When the system synchronization command is issued during the balance cut mode, that is
handled as a command of one block without movement and will not be synchronized.

(5) Conditions for alarm with G15 and G14

(a) For one system
A program error (P34) will occur if G15 or G14 is commanded in one system.
(b) Command during milling
A program error (P481) will occur if G15 or G14 is commanded during the milling mode.

(6) Conditions for ignoring G15 and G14

If G14 is commanded when G15 is not commanded (when balance cut is OFF), the G14 block
will be handled as one that has no process.

486
 13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

CAUTION
When programming a multi-system, carefully observe the movements caused by other
systems' programs.

13.20.1 Synchronization standby code (! code)

Function and purpose

The multi-axis, multi-system complex control NC system can simultaneously run multiple
machining programs independently. The synchronizing-between-systems function is used in cases
when, at some particular point during operation, the operations of systems 1 and 2 are to be
synchronized or in cases when the operation of only one system is required.

System 1 machining program System 2 machining program

Simultaneous and
independent operation

! ......; ! ......; ← Synchronized operation

Simultaneous and
independent operation

! ......; ! ......;
← Synchronized operation

No program System 2 operation only;

system 1 synchronizing

! ......; ! ......;
← Synchronized operation

Simultaneous and
independent operation

% %

487
13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

Command format

!Ll ;
l Synchronizing number 1 to 9999

$1 $2

!L1; !L1;
Synchro-
nized
operation

Detailed description

(1) If !L1 is commanded from one system, operation of the first system's program will wait until !L1
is commanded from the other system's program.
When !L1 is commanded, the programs for the two systems will start simultaneously.

System 1 program System 2 program

Pi1 Pn 1

!L1;

Synchronized
operation !L1;

Pi2 Pn 2

Pi1 W aiting Pi2

System 1
Simultaneous
start
Pn 1 Pn 2
System 2

488
13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

(2) Program error (P35) occurs when an illegal system number has been issued.
(3) The synchronizing command is normally issued in a single block. However, if a movement
command or M, S or T command is issued in the same block, whether to synchronize after the
movement command or M, S or T command or to execute the movement command or M, S or
T command after synchronization will depend on the parameter (#1093 Wmvfin).
#1093 Wmvfin 0: Synchronize before movement command execution.
1: Synchronize after executing movement command.
(4) If there is no movement command in the same block as the synchronizing command, when the
next block movement starts, synchronization may not be secured between the systems. To
synchronize the systems when movement starts after synchronization, issue the movement
command in the same block as the synchronizing command.
(5) Synchronizing is done only while the system to be synchronized is operating automatically. If
this is not possible, the synchronizing command will be ignored and operation will advance to
the next block.
(6) The L command is the synchronizing identification number. The same numbers are
synchronized but when they are omitted, the numbers are handled as L0.
(7) "SYN" will appear in the operation status section during synchronization. The synchronizing
signal will be output to the PLC I/F.

Example of synchronizing between systems

$1 $2

P11
P21

!L1;

!L1;

P12
P22

!L2; P23

P13
!L2;

P24

The above programs are executed as follows:

$1 P11 P12 P13

L1 L2

$2 P21 P22 P23 P24

489
 13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

13.20.2 Start Point Designation Synchronizing (Type 1); G115

Function and purpose

The system can wait for the other system to reach the start point before starting itself.
The synchronization point can be set in the middle of a block.

Command format

!Ll G115 X_ Z_ C_ ;
!Ll Synchronizing command
G115 G command
X_ Z_ C_ Start point (Command axis and workpiece coordinate values for checking
synchronization of other system.)

Detailed description

(1) Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of the other system.
(2) The start point check is executed only for the axis designated by G115.
(Example) !L2 G115 X100.;
Once the other system reaches X100., the own system will start. The other axes are not
checked.
(3) The other system starts first when synchronizing is executed.
(4) The own system waits for the other system to move and reach the designated start point, and
then starts.

Own system !G115

Synchronized
operation
Other system !
Designated start point

Own system !G115

Synchronized
operation
Other system !
Designated start point

490
13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

(5) When the start point designated by G115 is not on the next block movement path of the other
system, the own system starts once the other system has reached all of the start point axis
coordinates.

例
Example:
X also has passed

Z has passed

: Movement : Command point : Actual start point

Z

(6) The waiting status continues when the G115 command has been duplicated between
systems.

Own system !L1 G115

Waiting
Other system !L1 G115

(7) The single block stop function does not apply for the G115 block.
(8) A program error (P32) will occur if an address other than an axis is designated in G115
command block.

491
 13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

13.20.3 Start Point Designation Synchronizing (Type 2); G116

Function and purpose

Starting of the other system can be delayed until the own system reaches the designated start point.
The synchronization point can be set in the middle of a block.

Command format

!Ll G116 X_ Z_ C_ ;
!Ll Synchronizing command
G116 G command
X_ Z_ C_ (Command axis and workpiece coordinate values for checking
synchronization of own system.)

Detailed description

(1) Designate the start point using the workpiece coordinates of own system.
(2) The start point check is executed only for the axis designated by G116.
(Example) !L1 G116 X100.;
Once the own system reaches X100., the other system will start. The other axes are not
checked.
(3) The own system starts first when synchronizing is performed.
(4) The other system waits for the own system to move and reach the designated start point, and
then starts.

Designated start point

Own system !G116
Synchronized
operation
Other system !
Designated start point
Own system !G116
Synchronized
operation
Other system !

492
13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

(5) When the start point designated by G116 is not on the next block movement path of the own
system, the other system starts once the own system has reached all of the start point axis
coordinates.

例
Example:
X also has passed

Z has passed

: Movement : Command point : Actual start point

Z

(6) The waiting status continues when the G116 command has been duplicated between
systems.

Own system !L1 G116

Waiting
Other system !L1 G116

(7) The single block stop function does not apply for the G116 block.
(8) A program error (P32) will occur if an address other than an axis is designated in G116
command block.

493
 13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

13.20.4 Synchronization function expansion (M code)

Function and purpose

The system synchronization function is commanded with the conventional "!" code, but by using
this expansion function, the systems can be synchronized with the M code commanded in the
machining program.
If the synchronization M code is commanded in either system during automatic operation, the
system will wait for the same M code to be commanded in the other system before executing the
next block.
The synchronization M code is used to control the synchronization of system 1 and system 2.
Whether the synchronization M code can be used is determined with the parameter settings.
Command format

M∗∗∗ ;
∗∗∗ Synchronization M code
The minimum and maximum values of the synchronization M code range are set beforehand in the
parameters.
Detailed description

(1) When the synchronization M code is commanded in the machining program, the two systems
will be synchronized and operation will start in the commanded block. If the synchronization M
code is commanded in either system during automatic operation, the system will wait for the
same M code to be commanded in the other system before executing the next block.

System 1 machining program System 2 machining program

P21 Simultaneous and

P11 independent operation

M100 ; M100 ; Synchronized

operation
P22
Simultaneous and
P12 M101 ; independent operation

M101 Synchronizing
M101 ; Synchronized
M102 ; operation

P23 System 2 operation only;

M102 Synchronizing system 1 waits

Synchronized
M102 ;
operation

P14 P24 Simultaneous and

independent operation
M30 ; M30 ;

P11 P12 Waiting P14

System 1

P21 P22 Waiting P23 P24

System 2

494
13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

(2) When the synchronization M code has been commanded in one system, and the system is
standing by for synchronization, an alarm will occur if a different M code is commanded in the
other system.

System 1 machining program System 2 machining program

Simultaneous
P11 P21 and independent
M100 ; operation
Different M code
M100 Synchronizing
M101 ; Alarm

Operation stops
P12 P22

(3) The systems are synchronized with the M code following the parameters below.

(a) M code range designation parameter (M code minimum value ≤ M code ≤ M code
maximum value)
# Item Details Setting range
1310 WtMmin Minimum The minimum value of the M code is set. If the 0,
value for setting value is "0", the synchronization M code 100 to 99999999
synchroni- will be ignored.
zation M
code
1311 WtMmax Maximum The maximum value of the M code is set. If the 0,
value for setting value is "0", the synchronization M code 100 to 99999999
synchroni- will be ignored.
zation M
code

System synchronization using the M code is valid when both of the above parameters are
set to a value other than "0". (This function is invalid if either parameter is set to a value
other than "0".)
The synchronization M code cannot be used if the M code maximum value is smaller than
the minimum value.
When the synchronization M code is valid, both the M code and ! code can be used for
synchronization.

(b) Synchronization method parameters

# Item Details Setting range
1279 ext15 System Select the system synchronization pattern. 0/1
(PR) (bit0) synchroni- 0: If one of the systems is not in automatic
zation operation, ignore the synchronization
method command and execute the next block.
1: Operate according to the synchronization
ignore signal.
If the synchronization ignore signal is "1", the
synchronization command will be ignored. If "0",
the systems will be synchronized.

Depending on the synchronization method selection parameter and synchronization

ignore signal combination, the synchronization operation will be determined by the
parameters, regardless of the command format ("!" code and M code).

495
13. Program Support Functions
13.20 Synchronizing operation between systems

(c) Synchronization method pattern

# Item Details Setting range
1093 Wmvfin Inter-system Designate the system synchronization method 0/1
waiting when using two systems.
method When there is a movement command in the
synchronization command (!, M) block:
0: Synchronize before executing movement
command
1: Synchronize after executing movement
command

Precautions and restrictions

(1) When synchronizing with the M code, always command the M code in an independent block.
(2) When standing by after commanding the synchronization M code in one system, an alarm will
occur if a different M code is commanded in the other system. Operation will stop in both
systems.
(3) The M code in the machining program can be ignored with the synchronization ignore signal.
Operation with a single system is possible without deleting the M code in the machining
program.
(4) When the M code can be used, both the M code and ! code can be used.
(5) While the synchronization M code is valid, if one system is standing by with an M code, an
alarm will occur if there is a ! code synchronization command in the other system.
(6) While the synchronization M code is valid, if one system is standing by with a ! code, an alarm
will occur if there is an M code synchronization command in the other system.
(7) The G115 and G116 commands cannot be used when synchronizing with the M code.
(8) If the M code command numbers are overlapped, the order of priority will be M code macro, M
command synchronous tap, synchronization M code and normal M code.

496
 13. Program Support Functions
13.21 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle

13.21 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle

Function and purpose

The 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle function allows system 1 and system 2 to perform
thread-cutting simultaneously for the same spindle.
Featured in this cycle is the command (G76.1) for simultaneously cutting threads in two places,
which is known as the "2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle I".

13.21.1 Parameter setting command

Command format

The various parameters for thread-cutting are set by commands.

G76 Pmra Rd;

Address Meaning
m Number of cutting passes for finishing
Chamfering amount
This sets the chamfering width based on the thread lead 1 across a range
r
from 0.0 to 9.9 with a 2-digit integer with the decimal point omitted. (00 to
P
99)
Tool nose angle (thread angle)
a This selects the angle from 80°, 60°, 55°, 30°, 29° or 0° and commands the
value in two digits.
R d Finishing allowance

Detailed description

(1) The data is set in machining parameters m: #8058, r: #8014, a: #8059 and d: #8057 for each
system.
(2) Issue the command for each system.

497
 13. Program Support Functions
13.21 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle

13.21.2 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle I; G76.1

Command format

G76.1 X/U Z/W Ri Pk Q∆d Fl;

X/U X-axis end point coordinates of thread section
... The X-axis coordinates of the end point at the thread section are
commanded with absolute or incremental values.
Z/W Z-axis end point coordinates of thread section
... The Z-axis coordinates of the end point at the thread section are
commanded with absolute or incremental values.
i Taper height component (radial value) at thread section
... A straight thread is created when i = 0.
k Thread height
... The thread height is commanded with a positive radial value.
∆d Cut amount
... The cut amount for the first cutting pass is commanded with a
positive radial value.
l Thread lead

Detailed description

(1) When G76.1 is issued by system 1 and system 2, synchronized operation is done until the
command is issued to another system. The thread-cutting cycle starts when the commands
are aligned properly.

$1 $2

G00X_ Z_ ;
G76.1… ; G00X_ Z_ ;
G76… ;

498
13. Program Support Functions
13.21 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle

(2) In the G76.1 cycle, G76.1 is issued simultaneously by system 1 and system 2, and the thread
is cut in synchronization at the start and end of thread-cutting.

Command for 1st system

Command for 2nd system

(3) In one cycle, operation is synchronized at the start and end of the thread-cutting.

Command for 1st system

Command for 2nd system

Synchronized operation

(4) The same precautions for thread-cutting command (G33), thread-cutting cycle (G78) and
compound thread-cutting cycle (G76) apply to this cycle.
(5) As the threads are cut in two places by the G76.1 command, the various commands do not
need to be the same. Each of them can be issued independently.
(6) Thread cutting controls the Z axis position while tracking the spindle encoder rotation. Thus,
the relative relation of the spindle position detected by the spindle encoder and the Z axis will
change with the following elements.
(a) Z axis feedrate (spindle rotation speed ∗ screw pitch)
(b) Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant
(c) Position loop gain
Thus, when cutting a multi-thread screw, the above conditions must be the same from the start
to end of machining.

499
 13. Program Support Functions
13.21 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle

13.21.3 2-system simultaneous thread cutting cycle II; G76.2

Command format

G76.2 X/U_ Z/W_ Rj Pk Q∆d Aa F1;

(1) Thread cutting start shift angle

The thread cutting command starts

movement after waiting for the spindle
encoder's one rotation synchronization
signal. However, the start point can be
delayed by the a° amount.

a° a°: Thread cutting start angle

The meanings of the addresses other than A are the same as the 2-system simultaneous
thread cutting cycle I.

Detailed description

(1) When G76.2 is issued by system 1 and system 2, synchronized operation is done until the
command is issued to another system. The thread-cutting cycle starts when the commands
are aligned properly.

$1 $2

G00X_Z_;
G76.2…;
G00X_Z_;
G76.2…;

500
13. Program Support Functions
13.21 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle

(2) G76.2 assumes the same thread cutting, and deeply cuts in with the cutting amount using
system 1 and system 2 alternately.

(2)(1)(2)(1)(2)(1) (2) (1) (2) (1)

a°
d

d× 2
d× n
K

Finishing allowance d

(1) ...... Cutting with system 1

(2) ...... Cutting with system 2

501
13. Program Support Functions
13.21 2-system simultaneous thread-cutting cycle

(3) In one cycle, operation is synchronized at the start and end of the thread-cutting.

Synchronized operation

(4) The same precautions for thread-cutting command (G33), thread-cutting cycle (G78) and
compound thread-cutting cycle (G76) apply to this cycle.
(5) G76.2 is the same thread cutting, so the various parameters, thread section, taper height,
screw thread height, cutting amount and thread lead must be commanded to the same values
for system 1 and system 2.
Note that the start shift angle can be commanded to match the thread cutting state.
(6) Thread cutting controls the Z axis position while tracking the spindle encoder rotation. Thus,
the relative relation of the spindle position detected by the spindle encoder and the Z axis will
change with the following elements.
(a) Z axis feedrate (spindle rotation speed ∗ screw pitch)
(b) Cutting feed acceleration/deceleration time constant
(c) Position loop gain
Thus, with G76.2 which is same thread cutting, the parameters must be set so that the
conditions are the same for system 1 and system 2.
(7) Thread cutting start shift angle command

As shown on the left, if the system 1 and system 2

System 2 blades oppose at 180°, the system 1 and system 2
thread cutting start shift angle difference is set to 180°.

Example) $1 $2

a°

G76.2X_ Z_ A0.; G76.2X_ Z_ A180.;

System 1

(8) When G76.2 and G76.1 are commanded

The systems, in which each are commanded, will carry out the G76.1 and G76.2 movements.
However, G76.2 system will assume that the other system is using G76.2 when cutting the
threads, so the thread grooves will not be guaranteed.

502
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.1 Coordinate words and control axes

14. Coordinate System Setting Functions

14.1 Coordinate words and control axes
Function and purpose

In the case of a lathe, the axis parallel to the spindle is known as the Z axis and its forward direction
is the direction in which the turret moves away from the spindle stock while the axis at right angle to
the Z axis is the X axis and its forward direction is the direction in which it moves away from the Z
axis, as shown in the figure below.

Tailstock

Spindle stock
Tool +Z

+X
+Y Turret
Coordinate axes and polarities

Since coordinates based on the right hand rule are used with a lathe, the forward direction of the Y
axis in the above figure which is at right angles to the X-Z plane is downward. It should be borne in
mind that an arc on the X-Z plane is expressed as clockwise or counterclockwise as seen from the
forward direction of the Y axis. (Refer to the section on circular interpolation.)

Spindle nose
Machine zero point
G54
Workpiece zero points (G54 ~ G59)
G55

G58
G59
G52

Local coordinate system

(Valid in G54 ~ G59)

G30

2nd reference point

+Z
G28
+X
Reference point
(+Y)

Relationship between coordinates

503
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.2 Basic machine, workpiece and local coordinate systems

14.2 Basic machine, workpiece and local coordinate systems

Function and purpose

The basic machine coordinate system is fixed in the machine and it denotes that position which is
determined inherently by the machine.
The workpiece coordinate systems are used for programming and in these systems the reference
point on the workpiece is set as the coordinate zero point.
The local coordinate systems are created on the workpiece coordinate systems and they are
designed to facilitate the programs for parts machining.
Upon completion of the reference point return, the basic machine coordinate system and
workpiece coordinate systems (G54 ~ G59) are automatically set with reference to the parameters.
The basic machine coordinate system is set so that the first reference point is brought to the
position specified by the parameter from the basic machine coordinate zero point (machine zero
point).

Basic machine
coordinate Machine zero point
system +Z

Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

coordinate coordinate coordinate coordinate
Z2 system 6 X3
X2 system 1 system 2 system 5 (G59)
(G54) (G55) (G58)

Hypothetical
machine Local
coordinate coordinate
system system
(G92 shift) X1 (G52)
+X Z1

1st reference point

The local coordinate systems (G52) are valid on the coordinate systems designated by workpiece
coordinate systems 1 to 6.
The hypothetical machine coordinate system can be set on the basic machine coordinate system
using a G92 command. At this time, the workpiece coordinate system 1 to 6 is also simultaneously
shifted.

504
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.3 Machine zero point and 2nd reference point (Zero point)

14.3 Machine zero point and 2nd reference point (Zero point)
Function and purpose

The machine zero point serves as the reference for the basic machine coordinate system. It is
inherent to the machine and is determined by the reference (zero) point return.
The 2nd reference (zero) point relates to the position of the coordinates which have been set
beforehand by parameter from the basic machine coordinate system zero point.

Basic machine coordinate Machine zero point

t
2nd reference point x
z
z x

1st reference point

(X2, Z2)
x
(X1, Z1)

z
Local coordinate system

x (G52)

Workpiece coordinate systems (G54 ~ G59)

z

505
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.4 Automatic coordinate system setting

14.4 Automatic coordinate system setting

Function and purpose

When the tool has arrived at the reference point by dog-type reference point return after the CNC's
power has been turned ON, this function create the various coordinate systems in accordance with
the parameter values input beforehand from the setting and display unit.
The actual machining program is programmed over the coordinate systems which have been set
above.

Basic machine coordinate

Machine zero system +Z
point
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
coordinate coordinate coordinate coordinate
system 1 system 2 system 5 system 6
(G55)
x3
(G54) (G58) (G59)
z3

x2 x1
Local coordinate system
+X z2 (G52)
z1

2nd reference 1st reference

point point

Detailed description

(1) The coordinate systems created by this function are as follows:

(a) Basic machine coordinate system
(b) Workpiece coordinate systems (G54 ~ G59)
The local coordinate system (G52) is canceled.
(2) The coordinate related parameters all provide the distance from the basic machine coordinate
system zero point. Therefore it is decided at which position in the basic machine coordinate
system the 1st reference point should be set and then the zero point positions of the workpiece
coordinate systems are set.
(3) When the automatic coordinate system setting function is executed, the following functions are
canceled: workpiece coordinate system shift based on G92, local coordinate system setting
based on G52, workpiece coordinate system shift based on origin setting and workpiece
coordinate system shift based on manual interrupt.
(4) When a parameter has been used to select the dog-type of first manual reference point return
or automatic reference point return after the power has been turned ON, the dog-type
reference point return will be executed for the 2nd and subsequent manual reference point
returns or automatic reference point returns.

CAUTION
If the workpiece coordinate offset amount is changed during automatic operation
(including single block operation), the changes will be valid from the next block of the
command several blocks later.

506
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.5 Machine coordinate system selection

14.5 Machine coordinate system selection; G53

Function and purpose

The tool is moved to a command position in the basic machine coordinate system, using a G53
command and feed mode command (G01 or G00) and the coordinate command following them.

Command format

G53 G00 Xx Zz αα ;
G53 G00 Uu Ww ββ ;

αα Additional axis
ββ Incremental command of the additional axis

Detailed description

(1) When the power is turned ON, the basic machine coordinate system is automatically set as
referenced to the reference (zero) point return position, which is determined by the automatic
or manual reference (zero) point return.
(2) The basic machine coordinate system is not changed by the G92 command.
(3) The G53 command is valid only in the block in which it has been designated.
(4) When an incremental value is issued (U, W, β), the axis will move with the incremental value
within the selected coordinate system.
(5) The 1st reference point coordinates denote the distance from the basic machine coordinate
system zero point to the reference (zero) point return position.

(–500, 500)

–Z M Reference (zero) point return position (#1)

R#1

Basic machine coordinate system zero point

1st reference point coordinate value X = −500

Z = +500
+X

507
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.6 Coordinate system setting

14.6 Coordinate system setting; G92

Function and purpose

This function places the tool at the desired position, and the coordinate system is set by assigning
the coordinate system setting command G92 at that position.
This system can be set as desired though normally the X and Y axes are set so that the workpiece
center serves as the zero point and the Z axis is set so that the workpiece end serves as the zero
point.

Basic machine
coordinate Machine zero point +Z
system

Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece

X2 Z2 coordinate
Z3 X3
coordinate coordinate coordinate
Hypothetical system 1 (G54) system 2 (G55) system 5 (G58) system 6 (G59)
machine
coordinate system
(shifted by G92) Local
coordinate
X1 system
(G52)
+X Z1

1st reference point

Command format

G92 Xx2 Zz2 αα2 ;

αα Additional axis

Detailed description

(1) The basic machine coordinate system is shifted by the G92 command, the hypothetical
machine coordinate system is created, and at the same time all workpiece coordinate systems
1 to 6 are also shifted.
(2) When G92 and S or Q are assigned, the spindle clamp rotation speed is set. (Refer to the
section on setting the spindle clamp rotation speed.)

508
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.7 Reference point (Zero point) return

14.7 Reference point (Zero point) return; G28, G29

Function and purpose

(1) After the commanded axes have been positioned by G0, they are returned respectively at
rapid traverse to the 1st reference (zero) point when G28 is commanded.
(2) By commanding G29, the axes are first positioned independently at high speed to the G28 or
G30 intermediate point and then positioned by G0 at the commanded position.

2nd reference point 1st reference point

(x3, z3, α3)

(x2, z2, α2) G30

G28
G29 G29

Start Intermediate
point point
G30
(x1, z1, α1)

G28
(0, 0)

Machine zero point Start point

Command format

G28 Xx1 Zz1 αα1 ; Additional axis Automatic reference point return
G29 Xx2 Zz2 αα2 ; Additional axis Start position return

αα1/αα2 Additional axis

509
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.7 Reference point (Zero point) return

Detailed description

(1) The G28 command is equivalent to the following:

G00 Xx1 Zz1 αα1 ;

G00 Xx3 Zz3 αα3 ;
In this case, x3, z3 and α3 are the reference point coordinates and they are set by parameters
"#2037 G53ofs" as the distance from the basic machine coordinate system zero point.
(2) After the power has been turned ON, the axes which have not been subject to manual
reference (zero) point are returned by the dog-type of return just as with the manual type. In
this case, the return direction is regarded as the command sign direction. For the second and
subsequent returns, the return is made at high speed to the reference (zero) point which was
stored at the first time.
(3) When reference (zero) point return is completed, the zero point arrival output signal is output
and also #1 appears at the axis name line on the setting and display unit screen.
(4) The G29 command is equivalent to the following:

G00 Xx1 Zz1 αα1 ; The rapid traverse (non-interpolation type) independent
G00 Xx2 Zz2 αα2 ; for each axis takes place.
In this case, x1, z1 and α1 are the coordinate value of the G28 or G30 intermediate point.
(5) Program error (P430) results when G29 is executed when automatic reference (zero) point
return (G28) is not performed after the power has been turned ON.
(6) The intermediate point coordinate value (x1, z1, α1) of the positioning point are assigned by
absolute/incremental value commands.
(7) G29 is valid for either G28 or G30 but the commanded axes are positioned after a return has
been made to the latest intermediate point.
(8) The tool offset will be temporarily canceled during reference point return unless it is already
canceled, and the intermediate point will be the offset position.
(9) The intermediate point can also be ignored by parameter "#1091 Mpoint" setting.
(10) Control from the intermediate point to the reference (zero) point is ignored for reference
(zero) point return in the machine lock status. The next block is executed when the
commanded axis survives as far as the intermediate point.
(11) Mirror image is valid from the start point to the intermediate point during reference (zero)
point return in the mirror image mode and the tool will move in the opposite direction to that of
the command. However, mirror image is ignored from the intermediate point to the reference
(zero) point and the tool will move to the reference (zero) point.

510
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.7 Reference point (Zero point) return

Example of program

(Example 1) G28 Xx1 Zz1 ;

R
Reference (zero)
point position (#1)
1st operation after
power has been
turned ON G0 Xx3 Zz3 ;

2nd and
subsequent Intermediate point
operations
(x1, z1)

G0Xx1 Zz1;

Return start position

1st operation after power has been turned ON

2nd and subsequent operations

Rapid traverse rate

Reference (zero) point

Near-point dog position (#1)
R

511
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.7 Reference point (Zero point) return

(Example 2) G29 Xx2 Zz2 ; R

Present
position

(G0) Xx1 Zz1 ;

G28, G30 intermediate point (x1, z1)

G0 Xx2 Zz2 ;

(x2, z2)

(Example 3) G28 Xx1 Zz1 ;

: (From point A to reference (zero) point)
G30 Xx2 Zz2 ;
: (From point B to 2nd reference (zero) point)
G29 Xx3 Zz3 ;
(From point C to point D)

Reference (zero) point position (#1)

Present position R1 New intermediate point
A (x2, z2)
G30
G28 D
B (x3, z3)
(x , z ) G29
Old intermediate point 1 1 R2
2nd reference (zero) point position (#2)
C

512
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.8 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point (Zero point) return

14.8 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point (Zero point) return; G30
Function and purpose

The tool can return to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference (zero) point by specifying G30 P2 (P3 or P4).

2nd reference point

R#2
Reference
point
G30P
G28 G28 G29

Intermediate
Start point
point G30 (x1, z1, α1)

G30P3
G30P4
R#3
R#4
G29
3rd reference
point
4th reference point

Command format

G30 P2 (P3, P4) Xx1 Zz1 αα1 ;

αα1 Additional axis

513
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.8 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point (Zero point) return

Detailed description

(1) The 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference (zero) point return is specified by P2, P3, or P4. A command
without P or with P0, P1, P5 or a greater P number is ignored, returning the tool to the 2nd
reference (zero) point.
(2) In the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference (zero) point return mode, as in the 1st reference (zero) point
return mode, the tool returns to the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference (zero) point via the intermediate
point specified by G30.
(3) The 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference (zero) point coordinates refer to the positions specific to the
machine, and these can be checked with the setting and display unit.
(4) If G29 is specified after completion of returning to the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference (zero) points,
the intermediate position used last is used as the intermediate position for returning by G29.

–Z R#1

1st reference (zero) point

Intermediate point (x1,z1)
G30 Xx1Zz1;

G29Xx2Zz2;

R#2
(x2, z2)
+X
2nd reference (zero) point

(5) With reference (zero) point return on a plane during compensation, the tool moves without tool
nose radius compensation (zero compensation) from the intermediate point as far as the
reference (zero) point. With a subsequent G29 command, the tool move without tool nose
radius compensation from the reference (zero) point to the intermediate point and it move with
such compensation until the G29 command from the intermediate point.

–Z R#2

Tool nose center Intermediate point

path 2nd reference (zero)
Program path point
G30Xx1Zz1;

(x1, z1)

+X
G29Xx2Zz2;

(x2, z2)

514
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.8 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference point (Zero point) return

(6) The tool length offset amount for the axis involved is canceled temporarily after the 2nd, 3rd
and 4th reference (zero) point return.
(7) With the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference (zero) point return in the machine lock status, control from
the intermediate point to the reference (zero) point will be ignored. When the designated axis
reaches as far as the intermediate point, the next block will be executed.
(8) With the 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference (zero) point return in the mirror image mode mirror image
will be valid from the start point to the intermediate point and the tool will move in the opposite
direction to that of the command. However, mirror image is ignored from the intermediate point
to the reference (zero) point and the tool moves to the reference (zero) point.

–Z R#2

2nd reference (zero) point

X-axis
mirror image +X

G30P2Xx1Zz1;
No mirror image

515
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.9 Simple zero point return

14.9 Simple zero point return

Function and purpose

By setting the parameter (#1222 aux06/bit7), the G28, G29 and G30 positioning operations can be
simplified and the time shortened.
The time is shortened by approx. several ten ms.
When this function is validated, the positioning accuracy may drop.
Do not use this function when using an inclined axis.

Methods of shortening time

(1) G90 without intermediate point

Fig. 1 The graph shows the commanded speed during movement.

Improvement function invalid

1000
The time is reduced
500 G0 movement during this interval
G0 movement Improvement
0 function invalid
Zero point return
-500

-1000

Improvement function valid

1000

500 G0 movement G0 movement

Improvement
0
function valid
Zero point return
-500

-1000

(2) G90 with intermediate point

Fig. 2 The graph shows the commanded speed during movement.

Improvement function invalid

1000
The time is reduced
500 G0 movement during this interval
G0 movement
Improvement
0 function invalid
Intermediate Zero point
-500 point movement return
-1000

Improvement function valid

1000

500
G0 movement G0 movement
Improvement
0
function valid
Intermediate Zero point
-500 point movement return
-1000

516
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.9 Simple zero point return

(3) G91 without intermediate point

Fig. 3 The graph shows the commanded speed during movement.

Improvement function invalid

1000

500
G0 movement G0 movement
Improvement
0 function invalid
-500 Zero point return

-1000

Improvement function valid

1000

500 G0 movement
G0 movement
Improvement
0 function valid
Zero point return
-500

-1000

(4) G91 with intermediate point

Fig. 4 The graph shows the commanded speed during movement.
Improvement function invalid
1000
Intermediate The time is reduced
point move- during this interval G0 movement
500
G0 movement ment Improvement
0 function invalid
Zero point return
-500

-1000

Improvement function valid

1000
Intermediate
500 point move- G0
G0 movement movement
ment Improvement
0 function valid
-500 Zero point return

-1000

517
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.9 Simple zero point return

Accuracy

(1) Without intermediate point (Absolute value command)

(Program example)
G00 X30.0 Z30.0 ;
G28 XZ ;
G00 X–30.0 Z–30.0 ;
M30 ;
The accuracy of the movement before G28 is maintained.
The G28 zero point return accuracy will drop. (The accuracy is affected by the positioning
speed and movement distance.)
[Improvement function invalid] [Improvement function valid]

G0 G0
(30, –30) (30, –30)
(30, 30) (30, 30)

G0 G0
G28 G28

The accuracy drops.

(2) With intermediate point (Absolute value command)

(Program example)
G00 X30.0 Z30.0 ;
G28 X15.0 Z30.0 ;
G00 X30.0 Z–30.0 ;
M30 ;
The accuracy of the movement before G28 is maintained.
The accuracy of the movement to the intermediate point is maintained.

[Improvement function invalid] [Improvement function valid]

G0 G0
(30, –30) (30, –30)
(30, 30) (30, 30)

G28 (15, 30) G28 (15, 30)

G0 G0

518
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.9 Simple zero point return

(3) Without intermediate point (Incremental value command)

(Program example)
G00 X30.0 Z30.0 ;
G28 UW ;
G00 X30.0 Z–30.0 ;
M30 ;
The accuracy of the movement before G28 will drop. (The accuracy is affected by the
positioning speed and movement distance.)
[Improvement function invalid] [Improvement function valid]

G0 G0
(30, –30) (30, –30)
(30, 30) (30, 30)

G0 G0
G28 G28 The accuracy
drops.

(4) With intermediate point (Incremental value command)

(Program example)
G00 X30.0 Z30.0 ;
G28 U–15.0 W0.0 ;
G00 X30.0 Z–30.0 ;
M30 ;
The accuracy of the movement before G28 is maintained.
The accuracy of the movement to the intermediate point will drop. (The accuracy is affected by
the positioning speed and movement distance.)
[Improvement function invalid] [Improvement function valid]
G0 G0
(30, –30) (30, –30)
(30, 30) (30, 30)

G28 (15, 30) (15, 30)

G0 G0 G28

The accuracy drops.

519
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.9 Simple zero point return

Precautions

(1) Even when this function's parameter is ON and the improvement function is validated, if an
inclined axis is validated, this function's parameter will be forcibly turned OFF, and this function
will be invalidated.
(2) If this function's parameter is turned ON while an inclined axis is valid, a "setting error" will
occur, and this function will be invalidated.
(3) If parameters which "validate this function" and "validate the inclined axis" are input, this
function's parameter will be forcibly turned OFF, and this function will be invalidated.
(4) When the improvement function is valid, the accuracy of the rapid traverse command, cutting
feed command, and movement command to the intermediate point before G28 may drop.
If the rapid traverse command and cutting feed command before G28 must be accurate, use
one of the following methods.
• Invalidate this function.
• Carry out an in-position check in the block before G28/G29/G30, and confirm the accuracy.
(G09: Exact stop check, etc.)
• Input the required dwell command (time) in the block before G28/G29/G30.

520
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.10 Reference point check

14.10 Reference point check; G27

Function and purpose

This command first positions the tool at the position assigned by the program and then, if that
positioning point is the 1st reference point, it outputs the reference point arrival signal to the
machine in the same way as with the G28 command. Therefore, when a machining program is
prepared so that the tool will depart from the 1st reference point and return to the 1st reference
point, it is possible to check whether the tool has returned to the reference point after the program
has been run.

Command format

G27 Xx1 Zz1 αα1 Pp1 ;

G27 Check command
Xx1 Zz1 αα1 Return control axis
Pp1 Check number
P1 : 1st reference point check
P2 : 2nd reference point check
P3 : 3rd reference point check
P4 : 4th reference point check

Detailed description

(1) If the P command has been omitted, the 1st reference point will be checked.
(2) The number of axes whose reference points can be checked simultaneously depends on the
number of axes which can be controlled simultaneously.
(3) An alarm will occur if the reference point is not reached after the command is completed.

521
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.11 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset

14.11 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset; G54 ~ G59 (G54.1)
Function and purpose

(1) The workpiece coordinate systems are for facilitating the programming of workpiece
machining in which the reference point of the workpiece to be machined is to serve as the zero
point.
(2) These commands enable the tool to move to the positions in the workpiece coordinate system.
There are 6 workpiece coordinate systems which are used by the programmer for
programming. (G54 ~ G59)
In addition to the six sets of workpiece coordinate systems between G54 and G59, there are
48 additional workpiece coordinate system sets. (The 48 sets are options.)
(3) Among the workpiece coordinate systems currently selected by these commands, any
workpiece coordinate system with coordinates which have been commanded by the present
position of the tool is reset. (The "present position of the tool" includes the offset amounts for
nose R, tool length and tool position offset.)
(4) An hypothetical machine coordinate system with coordinates which have been commanded by
the present position of the tool is set by this command. (The "present position of the tool"
includes the offset amounts for nose radius, tool length and tool position offset.) (G54 ~ G92)

Command format

(1) Workpiece coordinate system selection (G54 ~ G59)

G54 Xx1 Zz1 αα1 ;

αα1 Additional axis

(2) Workpiece coordinate system setting (G54 ~ G59)

(G54) G92 Xx1 Zz1 αα1 ;

αα1 Additional axis

(3) Workpiece coordinate system selection (P1 ~ P48)

G54.1 Pn ;

(4) Workpiece coordinate system setting (P1 ~ P48)

G54.1 Pn ;
G92 Xx Zz ;

(5) Workpiece coordinate system offset amount setting (P1 ~ P48)

G10 L20 Pn Xx Zz ;

522
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.11 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset

Detailed description

(1) With any of the G54 to G59 commands, the nose radius offset amounts for the commanded
axes will not be canceled even if workpiece coordinate system selection is commanded.
(2) The G54 workpiece coordinate system is selected when the power is turned ON.
(3) Commands G54 to G59 are modal commands (group 12).
(4) The coordinate system will move with G92 in a workpiece coordinate system.
(5) The offset setting in a workpiece coordinate system denotes the distance from the basic
machine coordinate system zero point.

Basic machine coordinate system

Machine zero point +Z

Workpiece
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece coordinate Z3
X2 Z2 coordinate coordinate X3
coordinate system 6 (G59)
system 1 (G54) system 2 (G55) system 5 (G58)

Hypothetical
machine Local
coordinate coordinate
system (shifted X1 system
by G92) (G52)
+X Z1

1st reference point

(6) The offset settings of workpiece coordinate systems can be changed any number of times.
(They can also be changed by G10 L2 Pp1 Xx1 Zz1.)

Handling when L or P is omitted

G10 L2 Pn Xx Zz ; n=0 : Set the offset amount in the external workpiece
coordinate system.
n=1 to 6 : Set the offset amount in the designated workpiece
coordinate system.
Others : The program error (P35) will occur.
G10 L2 Xx Zz ; Set the offset amount in the currently selected workpiece
coordinate system.
When in G54.1 modal, the program error (P33) will occur.
G10 L20 Pn Xx Zz ; n=1 to 48 : Set the offset amount in the designated workpiece
coordinate system.
Others : The program error (P35) will occur.
G10 L20 Xx Zz ; Set the offset amount in the currently selected workpiece
coordinate system.
When in G54 to G59 modal, the program error (P33) will occur.
G10 Pn Xx Zz ;
L10 (tool offset) will be judged if there is no L value.
G10 Xx Zz ;

523
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.11 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset

(7) A new workpiece coordinate system 1 is set by issuing the G92 command in the G54
(workpiece coordinate system 1) mode. At the same time, the other workpiece coordinate
systems 2 to 6 (G55 ~ G59) will move in parallel and new workpiece coordinate systems 2 to 6
will be set.
(8) A hypothetical machine coordinate system is formed at the position which deviates from the
new workpiece reference (zero) point by an amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate
system offset amount.

R#1
Reference (zero) point return
–Z M position

Basic machine coordinate system

zero point
–Z [M]
Hypothetical machine coordinate system
coordinate point based on G92
–Z (G54)
Old workpiece 1 (G54) coordinate system
–Z (G55) W1
Old workpiece 2 (G55) coordinate system
–Z (G54’) W2
New workpiece 1 (G54) coordinate system
–Z (G55’) [W1] –X (G55) –X (G54)
New workpiece 2 (G55) coordinate system
[W2]
–X
–X (G54’)
–X (G55’)
–X
After the power has been turned ON, the hypothetical machine coordinate system is matched
with the basic machine coordinate system by the first automatic (G28) or manual reference
(zero) point return.

(9) By setting the hypothetical machine coordinate system, the new workpiece coordinate system
will be set at a position which deviates from that hypothetical machine coordinate system by an
amount equivalent to the workpiece coordinate system offset amount.
(10) When the first automatic (G28) or manual reference (zero) point return is completed after the
power has been turned ON, the basic machine coordinate system and workpiece coordinate
systems are set automatically in accordance with the parameter settings.
(11) If G54 X– ; is commanded after the reference return (both automatic or manual) executed after
the power is turned ON, the program error (P62) will occur. (A speed command is required as
the movement will be controlled with the G01 speed.)
(12) Do not command a G code for which a P code is used in the same block as G54.1. The P code
will be used in the prioritized G command.
(13) When number of workpiece offset sets additional specifications is not added, the program
error (P39) will occur when the G54.1 command is executed.

524
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.11 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset

(14) When number of workpiece offset sets additional specifications is not added, the program
error (P172) will occur when the G10 L20 command is executed.
(15) The local coordinate system cannot be used during G54.1 modal. The program error (P438)
will occur when the G52 command is executed during G54.1 modal.
(16)A new workpiece coordinate system P1 can be set by commanding G92 in the G54.1 P1 mode.
However, the workpiece coordinate system of the other workpiece coordinate systems G54 to
G59, G54.1, and P2 to P96 will move in parallel with it, and a new workpiece coordinate
system will be set.
(17) The offset amount of the extended workpiece coordinate system is assigned to the variable
number as shown in Table 1.
Table 1 Variable numbers of the extended workpiece coordinate offset system
1st axis to 1st axis to 1st axis to 1st axis to
nth axis nth axis nth axis nth axis
P1 #7001 to #700n P25 #7481 to #748n P49 #7961 to #796n P73 #8441 to #844n
P2 #7021 to #702n P26 #7501 to #750n P50 #7981 to #798n P74 #8461 to #846n
P3 #7041 to #704n P27 #7521 to #752n P51 #8001 to #800n P75 #8481 to #848n
P4 #7061 to #706n P28 #7541 to #754n P52 #8021 to #802n P76 #8501 to #850n
P5 #7081 to #708n P29 #7561 to #756n P53 #8041 to #804n P77 #8521 to #852n
P6 #7101 to #710n P30 #7581 to #758n P54 #8061 to #806n P78 #8541 to #854n
P7 #7121 to #712n P31 #7601 to #760n P55 #8081 to #808n P79 #8561 to #856n
P8 #7141 to #714n P32 #7621 to #762n P56 #8101 to #810n P80 #8581 to #858n
P9 #7161 to #716n P33 #7641 to #764n P57 #8121 to #812n P81 #8601 to #860n
P10 #7181 to #718n P34 #7661 to #766n P58 #8141 to #814n P82 #8621 to #862n
P11 #7201 to #720n P35 #7681 to #768n P59 #8161 to #816n P83 #8641 to #864n
P12 #7221 to #722n P36 #7701 to #770n P60 #8181 to #818n P84 #8661 to #866n
P13 #7241 to #724n P37 #7721 to #772n P61 #8201 to #820n P85 #8681 to #868n
P14 #7261 to #726n P38 #7741 to #774n P62 #8221 to #822n P86 #8701 to #870n
P15 #7281 to #728n P39 #7761 to #776n P63 #8241 to #824n P87 #8721 to #872n
P16 #7301 to #730n P40 #7781 to #778n P64 #8261 to #826n P88 #8741 to #874n
P17 #7321 to #732n P41 #7801 to #780n P65 #8281 to #828n P89 #8761 to #876n
P18 #7341 to #734n P42 #7821 to #782n P66 #8301 to #830n P90 #8781 to #878n
P19 #7361 to #736n P43 #7841 to #784n P67 #8321 to #832n P91 #8801 to #880n
P20 #7381 to #738n P44 #7861 to #786n P68 #8341 to #834n P92 #8821 to #882n
P21 #7401 to #740n P45 #7881 to #788n P69 #8361 to #836n P93 #8841 to #884n
P22 #7421 to #742n P46 #7901 to #790n P70 #8381 to #838n P94 #8861 to #886n
P23 #7441 to #744n P47 #7921 to #792n P71 #8401 to #840n P95 #8881 to #888n
P24 #7461 to #746n P48 #7941 to #794n P72 #8421 to #842n P96 #8901 to #890n

CAUTION
If the workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during single block stop,
the new setting will be valid from the next block.

525
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.11 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset

Example of program

(Example 1)

(1) G28 X0 Z0 ;
(2) G53 X–500 Z–1000 ; Reference (zero) point
(3) G53 X0 Z0 ; return position (#1)

X
R#1

(1) Reference (zero) point

Present Z return position (#1)
(2) M
position (3)

(Unit: mm)

When the 1st reference point coordinate is zero, the basic machine coordinate system zero point
and reference (zero) point return position (#1) will coincide.
(Example 2)

(1) G28 X0 Z0 ;
(2) G00 G53 X0 Z0 ;
(3) G54 X−500 Z −500 ; (1)
(4) G01 W−500 F100 ; Present position
(5) U−500 ; (2)
(6) W+500 ; M
(G54) –1000 –500
(7) U+500 ; (3) –500
(8) G00 G55 X0 Z0 ; W2
(G55) (9) (8) W1
(9) G01 Z−500 F200 ; – –1000
(10) X−500 Z0 ; (5) (4) (7) 500
(11) G28 X0 Z0 ; (10) (11) – –1500
(6) 1000

(G55) (G54) (Unit: mm)

526
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.11 Workpiece coordinate system setting and offset

(Example 3) When workpiece coordinate system G54 has deviated (−500, −500) in Example 2 (It
is assumed that (3) to (10) in Example 2 have been entered in subprogram O1111.)
(1) G28 X0 Z0 ;
(2) G00 G53 X0 Z0 ; (Not required when there is no basic machine
coordinate system offset.)
(3) G54 X–500 Z–500 ; Amount by which workpiece coordinate system
deviates
(4) G92 X0 Z0 ; New workpiece coordinate system is set.
(5) M98 P1111 ;

Reference (zero) point

(1) return position (#1)
(2)
–Z Present position

Old G55 coordinate system –Z (G54) M

–Z Old G54 coordinate system
New G55 coordinate –Z (G55) (G54') (3)
system New G54 coordinate system
(4)
–Z (G55') W1

W2 –X
(G54)
–X –X
(G55) (G54')

–X (G55')

–X

(Note) The workpiece coordinate system will deviate each time steps (3) to (5) are repeated. The
reference point return (G28) command should therefore be issued upon completion of the
program.

CAUTION
If the workpiece coordinate system offset amount is changed during single block stop,
the changes will be valid from the next block.

527
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.12 Local coordinate system setting

14.12 Local coordinate system setting; G52

Function and purpose

The local coordinate systems can be set independently on the G54 ~ G59 workpiece coordinate
systems using the G52 command so that the commanded position serves as the programmed zero
point.
The G52 command can also be used instead of the G92 command to change the deviation
between the zero point in the machining program and the machining workpiece zero point.

Command format

G54 (G54 to G59) G52 Xx1 Zz1 ;

Detailed description

(1) The G52 command is valid until a new G52 command is issued and the tool does not move.
This command comes in handy for employing another coordinate system without changing the
zero point positions of the workpiece coordinate systems (G54 ~ G59).
(2) The local coordinate system offset is cleared by the reference point (zero point) return or
dog-type manual reference (zero) point return after the power is turned ON.
(3) The local coordinate system is canceled by (G54 ~ G59) G52 X0 Z0 ;.
(4) Coordinate commands in the absolute value cause the tool to move to the local coordinate
system position.

Incremental value G52 U_ W_ ;

Ln
Absolute value Local coordinate system
Ln Absolute value
Ln
G52 X_ Z_ ;
Workpiece coordinate system
Wn (n=1~6)

Reference point Workpiece coordinate system offset

R (Screen setting, G10 G54 X__ Z__ ; )

External workpiece coordinate system offset (Screen setting, G10 P0 X__ Z__ ; )
M Machine coordinate system

(Note) If the program is executed repeatedly, the workpiece coordinate system will deviate each
time. Thus, when the program is completed, the reference point return operation must be
commanded.

528
 14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.13 Workpiece coordinate system preset

14.13 Workpiece coordinate system preset; G92.1

Function and purpose

(1) This function presets the workpiece coordinate system shifted with the program command
during manual operation to the workpiece coordinate system offset from the machine zero
point by the workpiece coordinate offset amount by the program command (G92.1).
(2) The set workpiece coordinate system will be shifted from the machine coordinate system
when the following type of operation or program command is executed.
• When manual interrupt is executed while manual absolute is OFF
• When movement command is issued in machine lock state
• When axis is moved with handle interrupt
• When operation is started with mirror image
• When local coordinate system is set with G52
• When workpiece coordinate system is shifted with G92
This function presets the shifted workpiece coordinate system to the workpiece coordinate
system offset from the machine zero point by the workpiece coordinate offset amount. This
takes place in the same manner as manual reference point return. Whether to preset the
relative coordinates or not can be selected with the parameters.

Command format

G92.1 X0 Y0 Z0 α0 ;
(G50.3)
α0 Additional axis

529
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.13 Workpiece coordinate system preset

Detailed description

(1) Command the address of the axis to be preset. The axis will not be preset unless commanded.
(2) A program error (P35) will occur if a value other than "0" is commanded.
(3) This can be commanded in the following G code systems.
• G code system 2 to 7
• G code system 1 when the G code changeover parameter (#1267 ext3/bit0 = 1) is set.
(4) Depending on the G code system, the G code will be "G50.3".
(5) When manual operation is carried out when manual absolute is set to OFF, or if the axis is
moved with handle interrupt

Y Workpiece coordinate x
Present position after preset
Manual
movement Present position
amount Preset
W1’
Workpiece
coordinate y
after preset
W1
Workpiece coordinate X
zero point
W1 Workpiece coordinate X
Workpiece offset zero point

M Machine coordinate
zero point

If manual operation is carried out when manual absolute is set to OFF, or if the axis is moved
with handle interrupt, the workpiece coordinate system will be shifted by the manual
movement amount.
This function returns the shifted workpiece coordinate zero point W1' to the original workpiece
coordinate zero point W1, and sets the distance from W1 to the present position as the
workpiece coordinate system's present position.

530
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.13 Workpiece coordinate system preset

(6) When movement command is issued in machine lock state

Y Y
Movement amount Workpiece
during machine lock coordinate x
after preset
Workpiece coordinate Preset
system coordinate
Present position value
Present position

Workpiece
coordinate y
after preset

W1 Workpiece coordinate W1 Workpiece coordinate

zero point X zero point
X

If the movement command is issued in the machine lock state, the present position will not
move, and only the workpiece coordinates will move.
This function returns the moved workpiece coordinates to the original present position, and
sets the distance from W1 to the present position as the workpiece coordinate system's
present position.

(7) When operation is carried out with mirror image

Workpiece
Y coordinate x Y
after preset
Present position Present position

Preset

Actual
operation Program command Workpiece
coordinate y
after preset

Workpiece Mirror image center W1

W1 X Workpiece coordinate
coordinate
zero point X
zero point

If operation is carried out with mirror image, only the NC internal coordinates are used as the
program command coordinates. The other coordinates are the present position coordinates.
This function sets the NC internal coordinates as the present position coordinates.

531
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.13 Workpiece coordinate system preset

(8) Setting local coordinate system with G52

Y Y
Local coordinates x Workpiece
coordinate x
Present position after preset Present position
Preset
Local
coordinates y
L1

Local coordinate zero point

Workpiece
coordinate y
after preset

W1 Workpiece coordinate W1 Workpiece coordinate

zero point X zero point X

The local coordinate system is set with the G52 command, and the program commands, etc.,
are issued with the local coordinate system.
With this function, the set local coordinate system is canceled, and the program commands,
etc., use the workpiece coordinate system which has W1 as the zero point. The canceled local
coordinate system is only the selected workpiece coordinate system.

(9) Shifting the workpiece coordinate system with G92

Y Y
Workpiece
Workpiece coordinate x
coordinates x Present position after preset Present position

Preset
Workpiece
W1’ coordinates y

Workpiece zero point

after G92 command Workpiece
coordinate y
after preset

W1 Workpiece coordinate X W1 Workpiece coordinate X

zero point zero point

The workpiece coordinate system shifts with the G92 command, and the distance between
W1' and the present position is set as the present position of the workpiece coordinate system.
This function returns the shifted workpiece coordinate zero point to W1, and sets the distance
from W1 to the present position as the workpiece coordinate system's present position. This is
valid for all workpiece coordinate systems.

532
14. Coordinate System Setting Functions
14.13 Workpiece coordinate system preset

Example of program

The workpiece coordinate system shifted with G92 is preset with G92.1.

Y Y
(5)
(4) 1500
1500

(3) G92.1
(2) command 1000
1000 preset
Workpiece zero point
after G92 command
500 500

(1)
W1 500 1000 1500 X W1 500 1000 1500 X
Workpiece coordinate zero point (Unit: mm) Workpiece coordinate zero point (Unit: mm)

(Example)
G28 X0 Y0 ;...................... (1)
G00 G90 X1. Y1. ;............ (2)
G92 X0 Y0 ;...................... (3)
G00 X500 Y500 ;.............. (4)
G92.1 X0 Y0 ;................... (5)

Precautions

(1) Cancel tool radius compensation, tool length offset and tool position offset before using this
function. If these are not canceled, the workpiece coordinates will be at a position obtained by
subtracting the workpiece coordinate offset amount from the machine value. Thus, the
compensation vector will be temporarily canceled.
(2) This function cannot be executed while the program is being resumed.
(3) Do not command this function during the scaling, coordinate rotation or program mirror image
modes.
A program error (P34) will occur if commanded.

533
 15. Protection Function
15.1 Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier

15. Protection Function

15.1 Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier; G22, G23
Function and purpose

By limiting the tool nose movement range, the chuck barrier and tailstock barrier prevent collision
with the chuck and tailstock due to programming errors. If movement is commanded which
exceeds the region set in the parameters, the tool will automatically stop at the barrier boundary.

X axis

P7

P1

P3 P2

P4
P5
P6
Z axis

P1, P2, P3 : Chuck barrier

P4, P5, P6 : Tailstock barrier
P7, P8 : Stored stroke limit
P8

Command format

G22; Barriers valid

G23; Barriers invalid
Set G22 and G23 commands in independent blocks.

534
15. Protection Function
15.1 Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier

Detailed description

(1) An alarm will appear if the machine stops because it was about to exceed the set region.
Reset to cancel this alarm.
(2) This function is also valid during machine lock.
(3) This function is validated when all axes in which chuck barrier and tailstock barrier are set have
finished their reference point returns.
(4) When there is a stored stroke check function, and the stored stroke limit region is set, the
chuck barrier/tailstock barrier function is validated simultaneously with the stored stroke check
function.
(5) A detailed barrier can be set on the left and right by using the PLC external signal.

Setting the chuck barrier/tailstock barrier

(1) Using G22 and G23

P1 P1
P4 P2 P4
P2 P3 P5
P5
P3 P6 P6

Type 1 Type 2

(a) Three points can be input as parameters for both the chuck barrier and tailstock barrier. Set in
the machine coordinate system.
Points P1, P2 and P3 are for the chuck barrier. Points P4, P5 and P6 are for the tailstock
barrier.
(b) The barrier region should be a symmetric shape regarding the Z axis. When the X axis
coordinates of barrier point P_ are a negative value, reverse the sign to the positive side, then
convert and check.
The absolute value of each barrier point's X axis coordinates must be set as follows.
P1 ≥ P2 ≥ P3, P4 ≥ P5 ≥ P6
(Note that the Z axis coordinates do not have to follow this setting.)

535
15. Protection Function
15.1 Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier

(2) Using the PLC external signal input

Set the coordinate values for each point between "#8300 P0" to "#8314 P10".
P0 is the basic X coordinate of the chuck and tailstock barrier. Set the workpiece center
coordinate in the basic machine coordinate system as a radius value.
The coordinate value from the workpiece center (P0) is set as a radius value for the P1 to P10
X axes. The Z axis is set as a basic machine coordinate system coordinate.
The barrier region is symmetrical in respect to P0.
The X axis coordinate of each point must be set in the following manner.

P1 ≥ P2 ≥ P3 P4 ≥ P5 ≥ P6
P7 ≥ P8 P9 ≥ P10

If the P8 Z axis coordinate must be less than P1 to P3, and the P10 Z axis coordinate must be
more than P4 to P6.

The positions of the P0 to P10 points in the chuck/tailstock are as follow.

(a) Setting the chuck

i) For external claw ii) For internal claw

P7 P1 P4 P9 P7 P1 P4 P9
P2 P5 P2 P5
P8 P3 P6 P10 P8 P3 P6 P10

P0 P0

P0: Workpiece rotation center coordinate

P1, P2, P3: Chuck section (left) P4, P5, P6: Chuck section (right)
P7, P8: Spindle section (left) P9, P10: Spindle section (right)

• Set the X axis coordinates so that P1 > P2 > P3 is established.

• The P3 and P7 Z coordinates and the P6 and P9 Z coordinates shall be equal.
• If there is no spindle inner diameter, set the P8 X coordinate to the same value as P0.

536
15. Protection Function
15.1 Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier

If a spindle section is not to be set in the manner of the conventional barrier, set the P3, P7
and P8 values to the same values, and the P6, P9 and P10 values to the same values.
The barrier range will be as shown below in this case.
i) For external claw ii) For internal claw

P1 P4 P1 P4
P2 P5 P2 P5
P3,P7,P8 P6,P9,P10 P3,P7,P8 P6,P9,P10
P0 P0

(b) Setting the tailstock

P1 P4
P2 P5
P3 P6
P8 P10
P0

• P7 and P9 are not used.

• The tailstock end section angle is set with the "#8318 STOCK ANGLE (L)"
parameters. "#8319 STOCK ANGLE (R)"
• If "0" is set, the angle will be 90°. (Default)
• Set the P8 X coordinate to the same value as P0. (No spindle inner diameter)

537
15. Protection Function
15.1 Chuck barrier/tailstock barrier

Restrictions

(1) There is only one checkpoint from the tool regarding the chuck barrier/tailstock barrier.
Therefore, the following cautions must be observed.
In the following examples, when the barrier points are set to be checked by the hypothetical
tool nose point and the tool moves in the direction of the arrow in the drawing, the following
situation may occur.
In Example 1, there is a checkpoint in the range "a", so the tool will automatically stop at the
barrier boundary. However, in Example 2 there is a checkpoint in range "b", so the chuck and
tool may collide in range "a".

(Example 1) (Example 2)

(a) (a)
(b)

To avoid this, Example 3 is given. In this example, if the barrier points P1, P2 and P3 are set
and the checkpoint is set in range "c", the tool can be stopped at the barrier boundary.

(Example 3)

P1

(c)
P3
P2

(2) When the tool enters the barrier region and an alarm occurs, the tool may move in the
opposite direction from which it came, once the alarm is canceled by resetting.
(3) There is no barrier region for axes without a reference point return function. Thus, there is no
barrier alarm for that axis.
(4) When the tool enters a canceled barrier region, and that barrier is then validated, an alarm will
result immediately if the tool is moved.
If the alarm is canceled with reset in this manner, invalidate the barrier (G23) before escaping
or change the value set for each barrier point.
(5) The soft limit is valid even if the barrier is invalid (G23).

538
 15. Protection Function
15.2 Stored stroke limit

15.2 Stored stroke limit

Function and purpose

Three tool entry prohibited ranges can be set with stored stroke limit I, stored stroke limit II and
stored stroke limit IB. These areas are set with parameters.

Command format

With the stored stroke limit II function, the prohibited range (parameters) can be changed and this
function can be turned ON and OFF with the program commands.
G22 X__ Z__ C__ I__ J__ K__ ;
G22 Stored stroke limit II function parameter change
Stored stroke limit II function ON (all axes)
G23 Stored stroke limit II function OFF (all axes)
X, Z, C (1st to 3rd axis name) Stored stroke limit + side designation
I, J, K (Plane selection axis name) Stored stroke limit – side designation

Detailed description

Command G22 and G23 in independent blocks.

Whether to set the prohibited range on the inside or outside follows the parameter settings.

A (X, Z) A (X, Z)

Prohibited
Prohibited range Machine range Machine
coordinate coordinate
system system

B (I, K) B (I, K)

When prohibited range is on outside When prohibited range is on inside

539
15. Protection Function
15.2 Stored stroke limit

Precautions

(1) If the maximum value and minimum value of the stored stroke limit's prohibited range are set to
the same value, the following will occur.
(a) When the maximum value and minimum value are set to 0, if the outside is the prohibited
range, the entire range will be prohibited. If the inside is the prohibited range, the entire
range will be the moveable range.
(b) If data other than 0 is set for the maximum value and minimum value, the entire range will
be the moveable range.
(2) The settings (G22, G23) with the stored stroke limit II program command are valid at the G
code system 6 and 7 (cmdtyp = 7, 8).
(3) G22 and G23 are unmodal (group 0), and are valid only in the commanded block.

540
 16. Measurement Support Functions
16.1 Automatic tool length measurement

16. Measurement Support Functions

16.1 Automatic tool length measurement; G37
Function and purpose

These functions issue the command values from the measuring start position as far as the
measurement time, move the tool in the direction of the measurement position, stop the machine
once the tool has arrived at the sensor, cause the NC system to calculate automatically the
difference between the coordinate values at that time and the coordinate values of the
commanded measurement position and provide this difference as the tool offset amount.
When offset is already being applied to a tool, it moves the tool toward the measurement position
with the offset still applied, and if a further offset amount is generated as a result of the
measurement and calculation, it provides further compensation of the present offset amount.

Command format

G37 α_ R_ D_ F_ ;
α Measuring axis address and coordinates of measurement position
......... X, Z
R This commands the distance between the measurement position and
point where the movement is to start at the measuring speed (Radius
value fixed, incremental value)
D This commands the range within which the tool is to stop. (Radius value
fixed, incremental value)
F This commands the measuring speed.
When R_, D_ or F_ is omitted, the value set in the parameter is used
instead.
<Parameter> ("TLM" on machining parameter screen)
• #8004 Measuring feedrate (Fp) : 0 ~ 60000 (mm/min)
• #8005 Deceleration range r : 0 ~ 99999.999 (mm)
• #8006 Measurement range d : 0 ~ 99999.999 (mm)

541
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.1 Automatic tool length measurement

Detailed description

(1) Operation with G37 command

Rapid traverse rate

Speed

Measurement
allowable range
D(d) D(d)
F(Fp)
Distance R(r)
Offset amount

Measuring Operation 1 Normal completion

position
Stop point Or no detection
Sensor Alarm stop (P607)
output
Operation 2
Alarm stop (P607)
Operation 3

(a) (b) (c) (d)

(2) The sensor signal (measuring position arrival signal) is used in common with the skip signal.
(3) The feedrate will be 1mm/min if the F command and parameter measurement speed are 0.
(4) During the synchronous feed mode, the axis will move at the synchronous feedrate
[mm/rev].
(5) An updated offset amount is valid unless it is assigned from the following T command of the
G37 command.
(6) Excluding the corresponding values at the PLC side, the delay and fluctuations in the sensor
signal processing range from 0 to 0.2ms.
As a result, the measuring error shown below is caused.
Maximum measuring error [mm] = Measuring speed [mm/min] × 1/60 × 0.2 [ms]/1000
(7) The machine position coordinates at that point in time are ready by sensor signal detection,
and the machine will overtravel and stop at a position equivalent to the servo droop.
Maximum overtravel [mm] = Measuring speed [mm/min] × 1/60 × 1/Position loop gain [1/s]
The standard position loop gain is 33 [1/s].

542
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.1 Automatic tool length measurement

Precautions

(1) Program error (P600) results if G37 is commanded when the automatic tool length
measurement function is not provided.
(2) Program error (P604) results when no axis has been commanded in the G37 block or when
two or more axes have been commanded.
(3) Program error (P605) results when the T code is commanded in the G37 block. If the
low-order digit or two digits is 0, the (4) error will occur.
(4) Program error (P606) results when T code is not commanded prior to the G37 block. When
the low-order digit or two digits is 0, the program error (P606) will occur even if T is
commanded.
(5) Program error (P607) results when the sensor signal was input outside the allowable
measuring range or when the sensor signal was not detected even upon arrival at the end
point. If the sensor signal stays ON during operation 3 in the above example, it will be judged
as a normal measurement even when the (b) region is not present.
(6) When a manual interrupt is applied while the tool is moving at the measuring speed, a return
must be made to the position prior to the interrupt and then operation must be resumed.
(7) The data commanded in G37 or the parameter setting data must meet the following
conditions:
⏐Measurement point – start point⏐ > R command or parameter r >
D command or parameter d
(8) When the D command and parameter d in (7) above are zero, operation will be completed
normally only when the commanded measurement point and sensor signal detection point
coincide. Otherwise, program error (P607) will results.
(9) When the R and D commands as well as parameters r and d in (7) above are all zero,
program error (P607) will result regardless of whether the sensor signal is present or not
after the tool has been positioned at the commanded measurement point.
(10) When the measurement command distance < measurement allowable range, it becomes the
measurement allowable range for all axes.

543
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.1 Automatic tool length measurement

(11) When the measurement command distance < measurement speed movement distance, all
axes move at the measurement speed.
(12) When the measurement allowable range > measurement speed movement distance, the
axis moves in the measurement allowable range at the measurement speed.
(13) Always cancel nose R compensation before commanding G37.
(14) Calculate the tool length offset amount without regard for the nose R value and tool nose
point No., even if the nose R compensation option is attached.
To set the tool nose point No. to 0, subtract the nose R value from the measured tool length
offset amount and set.
When the tool nose point No. (tool nose shape) is 5, 6, 7, or 8, measure the tool length at the
tool tip.

X axis tool length

offset value with
nose R value
subtracted
Tool Tool Measured X axis
nose nose tool length offset
point 0 point 8 amount
Measured X axis
tool length offset
amount

Z axis tool length offset amount with Measured Z axis tool length
nose R value subtracted Tip of tool nose
offset amount
Measured Z axis tool length offset amount

544
 16. Measurement Support Functions
16.2 Skip function

16.2 Skip function; G31

Function and purpose

When the skip signal 1 is input externally during linear interpolation based on the G31 command,
the machine feed is stopped immediately, the remaining distance is discarded and the command
in the following block is executed.

Command format

G31 Xx/Uu Zz/Ww Ff ;

x, z, u, w Axis coordinate value; they are commanded as absolute or
incremental values.
f Feedrate (mm/min)
Linear interpolation can be executed using this function. If the skip signal 1 is input externally
while this command is being executed, the machine will stop, the remaining commands will be
canceled and operation will be executed from the next block.

Detailed description

(1) If Ff is commanded as the feedrate, command speed f will apply; if it not commanded, the
value set in the parameter "#1174 skip_F" will serve as the feedrate. In either case, the F
modal will not be updated.
(2) The machine will not automatically accelerate and decelerate with the G31 block.
(3) Override is invalid with the G31 command, and it is fixed at 100%. Dry run is also invalid.
The stop conditions (feed hold, interlock, override zero and stroke end) are valid. External
deceleration is also valid.
(4) The G31 command is unmodal and so it needs to be commanded each time.
(5) If the skip signal 1 is input during G31 command start, the G31 command will be completed
immediately.
When a skip signal 1 has not been input until the G31 block completion, the G31 command
will also be completed upon completion of the movement commands.
(6) When the G31 command is issued during nose R compensation, program error (P608) will
result.
(7) When there is no F command in the G31 command and the parameter speed is also zero,
program error (P603) will result.
(8) If only the Z axis is commanded when the machine lock is ON or the Z axis cancel switch is
ON, the skip signal will be ignored and execution will continue as far as the end of the
block.

545
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.2 Skip function

Execution of G31

(Example 1) When the next block is an incremental value command

G31 Z1000 F100 ;
G01 U2000 W1000 ;

External signal entered

X
Movement when external
signal is not entered
Z

(Example 2) When the next block is a one axis movement command with absolute value
G31 Z1000 F100 ;
G01 X1000 ;

External signal entered

Movement when external
X signal is not entered

(Example 3) When the next block is a two axes movement command with absolute value
G31 Z1000 F100 ;
G01 X1000 Z2000 ;

External signal entered

X
Movement when external
signal is not entered
Z

546
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.2 Skip function

Detailed description (Readout of skip coordinates)

As the skip signal inputting coordinate positions have been stored in the system variables #5061
(1st axis) ~ #506n (n-th axis), it is possible to use them with user macro.

~
G00 X–100. ;
G31 X–200. F60 ; Skip command
#101 = #5061 Skip signal input coordinate values (workpiece
coordinate system) are readout to #101.
~

Detailed description (G31 coasting)

The amount of coasting from when the skip signal is input during the G31 command until the
machine stops differs according to the parameter “#1174 skip_F” or F command in G31.
The time to start deceleration to a stop after responding to the skip signal is short, so the
machine can be stopped precisely with a small coasting amount. The coasting amount can be
calculated from the following formula.

F F F F
δ0 = 60 × Tp + 60 × ( t1 ± t2 ) = 60 × ( Tp + t1 ) ± 60 × t2
δ1 δ2
δ0 : Coasting amount (mm)
F : G31 skip speed (mm/min)
Tp : Position loop time constant (s) = (position loop gain)-1
t1 : Response delay time (s) = (Time from when skip signal is detected, PC is passed, and
control unit is reached.)
t2 : Response error time 0.001 (s)

When G31 is used for calculation, the value calculated from the section indicated by δ1 in the
above equation can be compensated, however, δ2 results in calculation error.

F Skip signal input

Area inside shaded section

denotes coasting amount δ0.

Time (S)
t1±t2 Tp

Stop pattern with skip signal input

547
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.2 Skip function

The relationship between the coasting amount and speed when Tp is 30ms and t1 is 5ms is
shown in the following figure.

Tp=0.03
0.050 t1=0.005
Coasting amount δ (mm) Max. value
Average value
0.040
Min. value

0.030

0.020

0.010

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
Feedrate F (mm/min)
Relationship between coasting amount and feedrate (example)

548
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.2 Skip function

Detailed description (Skip coordinate readout error mm)

(5) Skip signal input coordinate readout

The coasting amount based on the position loop time constant Tp and cutting feed time
constant Ts is not included in the skip signal input coordinate values.
Therefore, the workpiece coordinate values applying when the skip signal is input can be
read out across the error range in the following formula as the skip signal input coordinate
values. However, coasting based on response delay time t1 results in a measurement error
and so compensation must be provided.

F ε : Readout error (mm)

ε = ± 60 × t2 F : Feedrate (mm/min)
t2 : Response error time 0.001 (s)
Readout error ε (µm)

+1

0
60 Feedrate (mm/min)
-1
Measurement value comes
within shaded section.
Readout error of skip input coordinates

Readout error of skip signal input coordinates

Readout error with a 60mm/min feedrate is as follows:
60
ε = ± 60 × 0.001 = ±0.001 (mm)

Measurement value is within readout error range of ±1 µm.

(5) Readout of other coordinates

The readout coordinate values include the coasting amount. Therefore, when coordinate
values are required with skip signal input, refer to the section on the G31 coasting amount to
compensate the coordinate value. As in the case of (1), the coasting amount based on the
delay error time t2 cannot be calculated, and this generates a measuring error.

549
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.2 Skip function

Examples of compensating for coasting

(5) Compensating for skip signal input coordinates

#110 = Skip feedrate ;

#111 = Response delay time t1 ;

~
G31 X100. F100 ; Skip command
G04 ; Machine stop check
#101 = #5061 ; Skip signal input coordinate readout
#102 = #110∗#111/60 ; Coasting amount based on response delay time
#105 = #101–#102 ; Skip signal input coordinates
~

(5) Compensating for workpiece coordinates

#110 = Skip feedrate ;

#111 = Response delay time t1 ;
#112 = Position loop time constant Tp ;
~

G31 X100. F100 ; Skip command

G04 ; Machine stop check
#101 = #5061 ; Skip signal input coordinate readout
#102 = #110∗#111/60 ; Coasting amount based on response delay time
#103 = #110∗#112/60 ; Coasting amount based on position loop time
constant
#105 = #101–#102–#103 ; Skip signal input coordinates
~

550
 16. Measurement Support Functions
16.3 Multi-stage skip function

16.3 Multi-stage skip function; G31.n, G04

Function and purpose

The setting of combinations of skip signals to be input enables skipping under various conditions.
The actual skip operation is the same as with G31.
The G commands which can specify skipping are G31.1, G31.2, G31.3, and G04, and the
correspondence between the G commands and skip signals can be set by parameters.

Command format

G31.1 Xx Zz αα Ff ;
Xx Zz αα Command format axis coordinate word and target coordinates
Ff Feedrate (mm/min)
Same with G31.2 and G31.3; Ff is not required with G04.
As with the G31 command, this command executes linear interpolation and when the preset skip
signal conditions have been met, the machine is stopped, the remaining commands are canceled,
and the next block is executed.

Detailed description

(5) Feedrate G31.1 set with the parameter corresponds to “#1176 skip1f”, G31.2 corresponds to
“#1178 skip2f”, and G31.3 corresponds to “#1180 skip3f”.
(5) A command is skipped if it meets the specified skip signal condition.
(5) The G31.n and G04 commands work the same as the G31 command for other than (1) and
(2) above.
(5) The ederates corresponding to the G31.1, G31.2, and G31.3 commands can be set by
parameters.
(5) The skip conditions (logical sum of skip signals which have been set) corresponding to the
G31.1, G31.2, G31.3 and G04 commands can be set by parameters.

Parameter Valid skip signal

setting 1 2 3
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
(Skip when signal is input.)

551
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.3 Multi-stage skip function

Operation

(1) The multi-stage skip function enables the following control, thereby improving measurement
accuracy and shortening the time required for measurement.
Parameter settings :
Skip condition Skip speed
G31.1 : 7 20.0mm/min (f1)
G31.2 : 3 5.0mm/min (f2)
G31.3 : 1 1.0mm/min (f3)
Program example
N10 G31.1 X200.0 ;
N20 G31.2 X40.0 ;
N30 G31.3 X1.0 ;

f
(f1) Operation N10

Measurement
distance
Skip speed

(f2) N20

(f3) N30

Input of skip signal 3

Input of skip signal 2
Input of skip signal 1

(Note 1) If skip signal 1 is input before skip signal 2 in the above operation, N20 is skipped
at that point and N30 is also ignored.
(2) If a skip signal with the condition set during G04 (dwell) is input, the remaining dwell time is
canceled and the following block is executed.

552
 16. Measurement Support Functions
16.4 Multi-stage skip function 2

16.4 Multi-stage skip function 2; G31

Function and purpose

During linear interpolation, command operation is skipped if skip signal parameter Pp specified
with a skip command (G31), which indicates external skip signals 1 to 7, is met.
If multi-stage skip commands are issued simultaneously in different systems, both systems
perform skip operation simultaneously if the input skip signals are the same, or they perform skip
operation separately according to the earlier skip signal if the input skip signals are different. The
skip operation is the same as with a normal skip command (G31 without P command).

X1 X1
Skip signal 1 Skip signal 1

System 1
System 1

Z Z

System 2
System 2

Skip signal 1 Skip signal 2

X2 X2

Same skip signals input in both Different skip signals input in

systems 1 and 2 systems 1 and 2

If the skip condition specified by the parameter "#1173 dwlskp" (indicating external skip signals 1
to 7) is met during execution of a dwell command (G04), the remaining dwell time is canceled
and the following block is executed. Similarly, if the skip condition is met during speed dwelling,
the remaining speed is canceled and the following block is executed.

Command format

G31 Xx Zz αα Pp Ff ;
Xx Zz αα Command format axis coordinate word and target coordinates
Pp Skip signal command
Ff Feedrate (mm/min)

553
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.4 Multi-stage skip function 2

Detailed description

(1) The skip is specified by command speed f. Note that the F modal is not updated.
(2) The skip signal is specified by skip signal command p. p can range from 1 to 127. If p is
specified outside the range, program error (P35) occurs.
Skip signal
Valid skip signals
command
P 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~

125
126
127
(Skip when signal is input.)

(3) The specified skip signal command is a logical sum of the skip signals.
(Example) G31 X100. P5 F100 ;

Operation is skipped if skip signal 1 or 3 is input.

554
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.4 Multi-stage skip function 2

(4) If skip signal command Pp is not specified, the skip condition specified by the G31 command
works. If speed command Ff is not specified, the skip speed specified by the G31 command
parameter works.
Table 2 Relations between skip and multi-stage skip
Skip specifications × {
Condition Speed Condition Speed
G31 X100 ;
Program error (P601) Skip 1 Parameter
(Without P and F)
G31 X100 P5 ;
Program error (P602) Command value Parameter
(Without F)
G31 X100 F100 ;
Program error (P601) Skip 1 Command value
(Without P)
G31 X100 P5 F100 ;
Program error (P602) Command value Command value

(Note) "Parameter" in the above table indicates that specified with a skip command (G31).
(5) If skip specification is effective and P is specified as an axis address, skip signal command P
is given priority and axis address P is ignored.
(Example) G31 P500. F100 ;

This is regarded as a skip signal command and

program error (P35) results.

(6) Those items other than (1) to (5) are the same with the ordinary skip function (G31 without
P).

555
 16. Measurement Support Functions
16.5 Speed change skip

16.5 Speed change skip

Function and purpose

When the skip signal is detected during linear interpolation by the skip command (G31), the
feedrate is changed.

Command format

G31 Xx Yy Zz αα Ff F1=f1 ... Fn=fn ;

(n is the skip signal 1 to 8)

Xx Yy Zz αα : Command format axis coordinate word and target coordinates

Ff : Feedrate when starting the cutting feed (mm/min)
Fn : Feedrate after detecting the skip signal (mm/min)
fn=0: Movement stop
fn≠0: Changing the feedrate to fn
F1=Feedrate after inputting the skip signal 1
:
F8=Feedrate after inputting the skip signal 8

Detailed description

(1) When the skip signal for which the feedrate fn≠0 is commanded, the speed is changed to the
command speed corresponding to the skip signal.
(2) When the skip signal for which the feedrate fn=0 is commanded, the movement is stopped.
The acceleration and deceleration time constant at the movement stop does not follow the skip
time constant, but the normal G31 skip.
After the movement is stopped, the remaining movement commands are canceled and the
following block executed.
(3) When the skip signal has not been input until the G31 block completion, the G31 command will
be also completed upon completion of the movement command.
(4) When the skip return is valid, the return operation by the skip signal detection is executed after
the movement is stopped.
(5) Even if the acceleration and deceleration with the inclination constant G1 (#1201 G1_acc) is
valid, the speed change skip will be the operation of the time constant acceleration and
deceleration.
(6) When the feedrate command (Fn=fn) is not specified after detecting the skip signal, the normal
G31 skip operation will be applied.

556
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.5 Speed change skip

(7) If the skip signal is input during the deceleration by the movement command completion, the
speed change will be ignored.

Speed
Skip signal 4

f Skip signal 3

f4
Skip signal 2 (Speed change) : Invalid
f3 Skip signal 1 (Movement stop) : Valid

f2

f1
0 Time

Deceleration section by the movement

command completion

(8) The skip signal for which the feedrate is not commanded in the program is ignored.
(9) The speed change or the movement stop is performed when detecting the rising edge of the
skip signal. Note that if several rising edges are input at 3.5ms intervals or less, they maybe
judged the simultaneous input. When they are judged the simultaneous input, the smaller
value will be valid.

Speed
Skip signal 3 + Skip signal 4

f4 Skip signal 2

f3 Skip signal 1

f2

f1

0 Time

Skip signal 4

Skip signal 3

Skip signal 2

Skip signal 1

Time

557
16. Measurement Support Functions
16.5 Speed change skip

(10) If the G31 block is started with the skip signal input, that signal is considered to rise at the
same time as the block start.
(11) If the skip signals for changing the speed and for stopping the movement are simultaneously
input, the skip signal for stopping the movement will be valid regardless of the size of the
number.
(12) If the skip time constant "#2102 skip_tL" is illegal, the "Y51 PARAMETER ERROR 15" will
occur, and if the "#2103 skip_t1" is illegal, the "Y51 PARAMETER ERROR 16" will occur.
(13) The items other than (1) to (12) are the same with the G31 command.

Example of operation

Example of program
G31 X100. Ff F1=0 F2=f2 F3=f3 F4=f4 ;

Operation

Speed
Skip signal 4

f Skip signal 3

f4 Skip signal 2

f3 Skip signal 1

f2

f1
0 Time

Skip time constant

Position loop time constant
-1
(Position loop gain )

558
 16. Measurement Support Functions
16.6 Programmable current limitation

16.6 Programmable current limitation

Function and purpose

This function allows the current limit value of the servo axis to be changed to a desired value in the
program, and is used for the workpiece stopper, etc.
The commanded current limit value is designated with a ratio of the limit current to the rated
current.

Command format

G10 L14 X dn ;
(n is the skip signal 1 to 8)
L14 : Current limit value setting (+ side/– side)
X : Axis address
dn : Current limit value 1% to 300%

Precautions and restrictions

(1) If the current limit is reached when the current limit is valid, the current limit reached signal is
output.
(2) The following two modes can be used with external signals as the operation after the current
limit is reached.
• Normal mode
The movement command is executed in the current state.
During automatic operation, the movement command is executed to the end, and then the
next block is moved to with the droops still accumulated.
• Interlock mode
The movement command is blocked (internal interlock).
During automatic operation, the operation stops at the corresponding block, and the next
block is not moved to.
During manual operation, the following same direction commands are ignored.
(3) During the current limit, the droop generated by the current limit can be canceled with external
signals.
(Note that the axis must not be moving.)
(4) The setting range of the current limit value is 1% to 300%. Commands that exceed this range
will cause a program error (P35).
(5) If a decimal point is designated with the G10 command, only the integer will be valid.
(Example) G10 L14 X10.123 ; The current limit value will be set to 10%.
(6) For the axis name "C", the current limit value cannot be set from the program (G10 command).
To set from the program, set the axis address with an incremental axis name, or set the axis
name to one other than "C".

559
APPENDIXES
 Appendix 1. Program Parameter Input N No. Correspondence Table

Appendix 1. Program Parameter Input N No. Correspondence Table

(Note 1) The units in the table indicate the minimum setting units for the parameter data.
(Note 2) The setting ranges given in the table are the setting ranges on the screen. Designate
parameters related to the length by doubling the input setting unit.
(Example 1) If the input setting unit in the metric system is "B" (0.001mm), set 30mm in
the parameter.
(Example 2) If the input setting unit in the inch system is "B" (0.0001inch), set 5inch in
the parameter.
(Note 3) The binary type parameters must be converted into by-type data, and commanded with a
decimal data after address D.
(Example 1) Binary data
01010101B = 55H = 85D ....................... Command 85
(Example 2) ASCII code
"M" = 01001101B = 4DH = 77D ............. Command 77
(B indicates Binary, H indicates Hexadecimal, and D indicates Decimal.)

[Machining parameters] Parameter 1.

# Item P A N Data type Setting range (Unit) Remarks

8007 OVERRIDE 11 – 1010 D 0 to 100 (%)

8008 MAX ANGLE 11 – 756 L 0 to 180 (° )
8009 DSC. ZONE 11 – 760 L 0 to 99999.999 (mm)
8010 ABS. MAX. 11 – 776 L 0 to 99.999 (mm)
8011 INC. MAX. 11 – 780 L 0 to 99.999 (mm)

8013 G83 n 11 – 832 L 0 to 99999.999 (mm)

8014 CDZ-VALE 11 – 1012 D 0 to 127 0.1lead
8015 CDZ-ANGLE 11 – 1011 D 0 to 89 (° )
8016 G71 MINIMUM 11 – 788 L 0 to 99.999 (mm)
8017 DELTA-D 11 – 792 L 0 to 99.999 (mm)

8051 G71 THICK 11 – 784 L (mm)

8052 PULL UP 11 – 796 L (mm)
8053 G73 U 11 – 800 L (mm)
8054 W 11 – 804 L (mm)
8055 R 11 – 808 L (time)
8056 G74 RETRACT 11 – 820 L (mm)
8057 G76 LAST-D 11 – 824 (mm)
8058 TIMES 11 – 997 D 0 to 99 (time)
8059 ANGLE 11 – 998 D 0 to 99 (° )

A-1
 Appendix 1. Program Parameter Input N No. Correspondence Table

[Axis parameters] Parameter 1.

# Item P A N Data type Setting range (Unit) Remarks

8202 OT-CHECK OFF 2 No. 897 H2 0 to 1

8204 OT-CHECK-N 2 No. 916 L ±99999.999 (mm)

8205 OT-CHECK-P 2 No. 912 L ±99999.999 (mm)

[Barrier data] Parameter 1.

# Item P A N Data type Setting range (Unit) Remarks
8300 (P0) X 11 – 1128 L ±99999.999 (mm)
8301 (P1) X 11 No. 1136 L ±99999.999 (mm)
Z 11 No. 1160 L ±99999.999 (mm)
8302 (P2) X 11 No. 1140 L ±99999.999 (mm)
Z 11 No. 1164 L ±99999.999 (mm)
8303 (P3) X 11 No. 1144 L ±99999.999 (mm)
Z 11 No. 1168 L ±99999.999 (mm)
8304 (P4) X 11 No. 1148 L ±99999.999 (mm)
Z 11 No. 1172 L ±99999.999 (mm)
8305 (P5) X 11 No. 1152 L ±99999.999 (mm)
Z 11 No. 1176 L ±99999.999 (mm)
8306 (P6) X 11 No. 1156 L ±99999.999 (mm)
Z 11 No. 1180 L ±99999.999 (mm)

[PLC data] Setup parameter 6.

# Item P A N Data type Setting range (Unit) Remarks
#6301 PLC constant 5 – 1 L ±99999999
to to
#6348 48

A-2
 Appendix 1. Program Parameter Input N No. Correspondence Table

[PLC timer] Setup parameter 6.

# Item P A N Data type Setting range (Unit) Remarks
T0 10ms TIMER (T0 to T15) 6 – 0 S 0 to 32767 0.01s
to to
T15 15
T16 100ms TIMER (T16 to T95) 6 – 16 S 0 to 32767 0.1s
to to
T95 95
T96 100ms TIMER (T96 to T103) 6 – 96 S 0 to 32767 0.1s
to (INC.) to
T103 103

[PLC counter] Setup parameter 6.

# Item P A N Data type Setting range (Unit) Remarks
C0 PLC counter 7 – 0 L 0 to 32767
to to
C23 23

[Bit selection] Setup parameter 6.

# Item P A N Data type Setting range (Unit) Remarks
0x00 to 0xFF
6401 Bit selection 8 – 1 D (Hex)
(Note)
to to or 0 to 256 (Dec)
6496 96 H0 to H7 0 to 1

(Note) Convert the 0x00 to 0xFF data into a decimal before using.

A-3
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Appendix 2. Program Error

(The bold characters are the message displayed in the screen.)
These alarms occur during automatic operation‚ and the causes of these alarms are mainly program errors
which occur‚ for instance‚ when mistakes have been made in the preparation of the machining programs or
when programs which conform to the specification have not been prepared.

Error No. Details Remedy

P 10 EXCS. AXIS No. • Divide the alarm block command into two.
The number of axis addresses • Check the specifications.
commanded in the same block exceeds
the specifications.
P 11 AXIS ADR. ERROR • Revise the axis names in the program.
The axis address commanded by the
program and the axis address set by the
parameter do not match.
P 20 DIVISION ERROR • Check the program.
An axis command which cannot be
divided by the command unit has been
issued.
P 29 NOT ACCEPT CMND • Check the program.
The normal line control command
(G40.1, G41.1, G42.1) has been issued
during the modal in which the normal line
control is not acceptable.
P 30 PARITY H • Check the paper tape.
The number of holes per character on the • Check the tape puncher and tape reader.
paper tape is even for EIA code and odd
for ISO code.
P 31 PARITY V • Make the number of characters per block on
The number of characters per block on the paper tape even.
the paper tape is odd. • Set the parameter parity V selection OFF.
P 32 ADDRESS ERROR • Check and revise the program address.
An address not listed in the specifications • Check and correct the parameters values.
has been used. • Check the specifications.
P 33 FORMAT ERROR • Check the program.
The command format in the program is
not correct.
P 34 G-CODE ERROR • Check and correct the G code address in the
A G code not listed in the specifications program.
has been used.
An illegal G code was commanded
during the coordinate rotation command
(G68).
G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when • Check the parameter setting values.
the rotary tool axis No. (#1501 polyax)
was set to “0”.
G51.2 or G50.2 was commanded when
the tool axis was set to the linear axis
(#1017 rot “0”).

A-4
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P 35 CMD-VALUE OVER • Check the program.

The setting range for the addresses has
been exceeded.
P 36 PROGRAM END ERR • Enter the M02 and M30 command at the end
“EOR” has been read during tape and of the program.
memory operation. • Enter the M99 command at the end of the
subprogram.
P 37 PROG. NO. ZERO • The program numbers are designated across
A zero has been specified for program a range from 1 to 99999999.
and sequence numbers. • The sequence numbers are designated
across a range from 1 to 99999.
P 39 NO SPEC ERR • Check the specifications.
• A non-specified G code was specified.
• The high-speed program server operation
specifications are not provided.
P 40 PREREAD BL. ERR • Reconsider the program.
When tool radius compensation is
executed‚ there is an error in the pre-read
block and so the interference check is
disabled.
P 60 OVER CMP. LENG. • Reconsider the axis address command.
The commanded movement distance is
excessive. (Over 231)
P 62 F-CMD. NOTHING • The default movement modal command at
• No feed rate command has been issued. power ON is G01. This causes the machine
• There is no F command in the cylindrical to move without a G01 command if a
interpolation or pole coordinate movement command is issued in the
interpolation immediately after the G95 program, and an alarm results. Use an F
mode is commanded. command to specify the feedrate.
• Specify F with a thread lead command.
P 65 NO G05P3 SPEC • Check the high-speed mode III
specifications.
P 70 ARC ERROR • Check the numerical values of the addresses
• There is an error in the arc start and end that specify the start and end points, arc
points as well as in the arc center. center as well as the radius in the program.
• The difference of the involute curve • Check the “+” and “–” directions of the
through the start point and the end point is address numerical values.
large.
• When arc was commanded, one of the
two axes configuring the arc plane was a
scaling valid axis.

A-5
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P 71 ARC CENTER • Check the numerical values of the addresses

• The arc center is not sought during in the program.
R-specified circular interpolation. • Check whether the start point or end point is
• The curvature center of the involute curve on the inner side of the base circle for
cannot be obtained. involute interpolation. When carrying out tool
radius compensation, check that the start
point and end point after compensation are
not on the inner side of the base circle for
involute interpolation.
• Check whether the start point and end point
are at an even distance from the center of the
base circle for involute interpolation.
P 72 NO HELICAL SPEC • Check the helical specifications.
A helical command has been issued • An Axis 3 command was issued by the
though it is not included in the circular interpolation command. If there is no
specifications. helical specification, the linear axis is moved
to the next block.
P 90 NO THREAD SPEC • Check the specifications.
A thread cutting command has been
issued though it is not included in the
specifications.
P 93 SCREW PITCH ERR • Issue the thread cutting command and then
The screw pitch has not been set set the screw pitch command properly.
correctly when the thread cutting
command is issued.
P100 NO CYLIND SPEC • Check the specifications.
Cylindrical interpolation was commanded
when the cylindrical interpolation
specifications were not provided.
P111 PLANE CHG (CR) • Before issuing the plane selection
Plane selection commands (G17, G18, commands, issue G68 and then G69
and G19) were issued when a coordinate (coordinate rotation cancel).
rotation command (G68) was issued.
P112 PLANE CHG (CC) • Issue the plane selection command after the
• A plane selection command (G17‚ G18‚ tool radius compensation command or nose
G19) has been issued when the tool R compensation command has been
radius compensation command (G41‚ canceled (issue axial movement command
G42) or nose R compensation after the G40 cancel command).
command (G41‚ G42‚ G46) is issued.
• The plane selection command was
issued when nose R compensation is
completed‚ there is no axial movement
command after the G40 command‚ and
the compensation has not been
canceled.

A-6
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P113 ILLEGAL PLANE • Issue arc command on the correctly selected

The arc command axis is not on the plane.
selected plane.
P122 NO AUTO C-OVR • Check the specifications.
An automatic corner override command • Delete the G62 command from the program.
(G62) has been issued though it is not
included in the specifications.
P130 2nd AUX. ADDR • Check and correct the 2nd miscellaneous
The 2nd miscellaneous function address function address in the program.
specified in the program does not match
that set by the parameter.
P131 NO G96 SPEC • Check the specifications.
(No constant peripheral speed) • Change from the constant peripheral speed
The constant peripheral speed command command (G96) to the rotation speed
(G96) was issued despite the fact that command (G97).
such a command does not exist in the
specifications.
P132 SPINDLE S = 0 • Reconsider the program.
No spindle speed command has been
specified.
P133 G96 P-No. ERR • Reconsider the parameter specified for the
An invalid constant peripheral speed constant peripheral speed control axis.
control axis has been specified.
P140 NO T-POS OFST • Check the specifications.
The position compensation command
(G45 to G48) specifications are not
available.
P141 PAT-ROT ERROR • Reconsider the program.
Position compensation was commanded
during the figure rotation or coordinate
rotation command.
P142 T-OFFS G2 ERR • Reconsider the program.
A position compensation invalid arc
command was commanded.
P150 NO C-CMP SPEC • Check the specifications.
• Even though there were no tool radius
compensation specifications, tool
radius compensation commands (G41
and G42) were issued.
• Even though there were no nose R
compensation specifications, nose R
compensation commands (G41, G42,
and G46) were issued.

A-7
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P151 G2‚ 3 CMP. ERR • Issue the linear command (G01) or rapid
A compensation command (G40‚ G41‚ traverse command (G00) in the
G42‚ G43‚ G44‚ G46) has been issued in compensation command block or cancel
the arc mode (G02‚ G03). block.
(Set the modal to linear interpolation.)
P152 I.S.P NOTHING • Reconsider the program.
In interference block processing during
execution of a tool radius compensation
(G41 or G42) or nose R compensation
(G41‚ G42‚ or G46) command‚ the
intersection point after one block is
skipped cannot be determined.
P153 I.F ERROR • Reconsider the program.
An interference error has arisen while the
tool radius compensation command
(G41‚ G42) or nose R compensation
command (G41‚ G42‚ G46) was being
executed.
P155 F-CYC ERR (CC) • The radius compensation mode is
A fixed cycle command has been issued established when a fixed cycle command is
in the radius compensation mode. executed and so the radius compensation
cancel command (G40) should be issued.
P156 BOUND DIRECT • Change the vector to that with which the
At the start of G46 nose R compensation‚ compensation direction is defined.
the compensation direction is undefined • Exchange with a tool having a different tip
if this shift vector is used. point number.
P157 SIDE REVERSED • Change the G command to that which allows
During G46 nose R compensation‚ the inversion of the compensation direction (G00‚
compensation direction is inverted. G28‚ G30‚ G33‚ or G53).
• Exchange with a tool having a different tip
point number.
• Turn ON the #8106 G46 inversion error
avoidance parameter.
P158 ILLEGAL TIP P. • Change the tip point number to a legal one.
During G46 nose R compensation‚ the tip
point is illegal (other than 1 to 8).
P170 NO CORR. No. • Add the compensation number command to
The compensation number (DOO‚ TOO‚ the compensation command block.
HOO) command was not given when the • Check the number of compensation number
radius compensation (G41‚ G42‚ G43‚ sets a correct it to a compensation number
G46) command was issued. command within the permitted number of
Alternatively‚ the compensation number compensation sets.
is larger than the number of sets in the
specifications.

A-8
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P172 G10 L-No. ERR • Check the address L-Number of the G10
(G10 L-number error) command and correct the number.
The L address command is not correct
when the G10 command is issued.
P173 G10 P-No. ERR • First check the number of compensation sets
(G10 compensation error) and then set the address P designation to
When the G10 command is issued‚ a within the permitted number of sets.
compensation number outside the
permitted number of sets in the
specifications has been commanded for
the compensation number command.
P177 LIFE COUNT ACT • The tool life management data cannot be
Registration of tool life management data registered when counting the used data. Turn
with G10 was attempted when the used the used data count valid signal OFF.
data count valid signal was ON.
P178 LIFE DATA OVER • Review the No. of registrations. The
The No. of registration groups‚ total No. maximum No. of registrations is shown
of registered tools or the No. of below.
registrations per group exceeded the System System 1 System 2
specifications range.
No. of groups 80 40/40
No. of tools 80 40/40
Per group 16

P179 GROUP No. ILL. • The group No. cannot be commanded in

• When registering the tool life duplicate. When registering the group data‚
management data with G10‚ the group register it in group units.
No. was commanded in duplicate. • Correct to the correct group No.
• A group No. that was not registered
was designated during the T 99
command.
• An M code command must be issued
as a single command but coexists in
the same block as that of another M
code command.
• The M code commands set in the same
group exist in the same block.
P180 NO BORING CYC. • Check the specifications.
A fixed cycle command was issued • Correct the program.
though there are not fixed cycle (G72 –
G89) specifications.
P181 NO S-CMD (TAP) • Issue the spindle rotation speed command
The spindle rotation speed command has (S) when the hole drilling fixed cycle
not been issued when the hole drilling command G84‚ G74 (G84‚ G88) is given.
fixed cycle command is given.

A-9
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P182 SYN TAP ERROR • Check connection to the main spindle.

Connection to the main spindle unit was • Check that the main spindle encoder exists.
not established.
P183 PTC/THD‚ No. • Specify the pitch data and the number of
The pitch or thread number command threads by F or E command.
has not been issued in the tap cycle of a
hole drilling fixed cycle command.
P184 NO PTC/THD CMD • Check the pitch or the number of threads per
The pitch or the number of threads per inch.
inch is illegal in the tap cycle of the hole
drilling fixed cycle command.
P190 NO CUTTING CYC • Check the specification.
A lathe cutting cycle command was input • Delete the lathe cutting cycle command.
although the lathe cutting cycle was
undefined in the specification.
P191 TAPER LENG ERR • The radius set value in the lathe cycle
In the lathe cutting cycle‚ the specified command must be smaller than the axis shift
length of taper section is illegal. amount.
P192 CHAMFERING ERR • Set a chamfering amount not exceeding the
Chamfering in the thread cutting cycle is cycle.
illegal.
P200 NO MRC CYC SPC • Check the specification.
The fixed cycle for compound lathe I
(G70 to G73) was commanded when the
fixed cycle for compound lathe I
specifications were not provided.
P201 PROG. ERR (MRC) • Delete the following G codes from this
• When called with a fixed cycle for subprogram that is called with the fixed cycle
compound lathe I command, the for compound lathe I commands (G70 to
subprogram contained at least one of the G73): G27‚ G28‚ G29, G30‚ G31‚ G33‚ G34,
following commands: fixed cycle G-code.
• Reference point return command (G27, • Remove G2 and G3 from the first move block
G28, G29, G30) of the finish shape program in fixed cycle for
• Thread cutting (G33, G34) compound lathe I.
• Fixed cycle skip-function (G31)
• The first move block of the finish shape
program in fixed cycle for compound lathe
I contains an arc command.
P202 BLOCK OVR (MRC) • Specify 50 or a less value. The number of
The number of blocks in the shape blocks in the shape program called by the
program of the fixed cycle for compound fixed cycle for compound lathe I commands
lathe I is over 50 or 200 (this differs (G70 to G73) must be decreased below 50 or
according to the model). 200 (this differs according to the model).

A - 10
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P203 CONF. ERR (MRC) • Check the fixed cycle for compound lathe I
The fixed cycle for compound lathe I (G70 to G73) shape program.
(G70 to G73) shape program could not
cut the work normally because it defined
an abnormal shape.
P204 VALUE ERR (MRC) • Check the fixed cycle for compound lathe
A command value of the fixed cycle for (G70 to G76) command value.
compound lathe (G70 to G76) is illegal.
P210 NO PAT CYC SPC • Check the specification.
A fixed cycle for compound lathe II (G74
to G76) command was input although it
was undefined in the specification.
P220 NO SPECIAL CYC • Check the specifications.
No special fixed cycle specifications are
available.
P221 NO HOLE (S_CYC) • Reconsider the program.
A 0 has been specified for the number of
holes in special fixed cycle mode.
P222 G36 ANGLE ERR • Reconsider the program.
A G36 command specifies 0 for angle
intervals.
P223 G12 G13 R ERR • Reconsider the program.
The radius value specified with a G12 or
G13 command is below the
compensation amount.
P224 NO G12‚ G13 SPC • Check the specifications.
There are no circular cutting
specifications.
P230 NESTING OVER • Check the number of subprogram calls and
• A subprogram has been called 4 or more correct the program so that it does not
times in succession from the subprogram. exceed 4 times.
• The program in the IC card contains the • When using the IC card, the IC card and the
M198 command. number of IC card program calls.
• The program in the IC card has been
called more than once (the program in the
IC card can be called only once at a time).
P231 NO N-NUMBER • Specify the sequence numbers in the call
At subprogram call time‚ the sequence block of the subprogram.
number set at return from the • When using an IC card, check the program
subprogram or specified by GOTO‚ was and its No. in the IC card.
not set.
P232 NO PROGRAM No. • Enter the subprogram.
The subprogram has not been found • Check the program number in the IC card.
when the subprogram is called.

A - 11
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P241 NO VARl NUMBER • Check the specifications.

The variable number commanded is • Check the program variable number.
higher than the numbers in the
specifications.
P242 EQL. SYM. MSSG. • Designate the “=” sign in the variable
The “=” sign has not been commanded definition of the program.
when a variable is defined.
P243 VARIABLE ERR. • Correct the program.
An invalid variable has been specified in
the left or right side of an operation
expression.
P252 PAT. & COOD-ROT • Reconsider the program.
A coordinate rotation related command
(G68, G69) was issued during figure
rotation.
P260 NO COOD-RT SPC • Check the specifications.
Even though there were no coordinate
rotation specifications, a coordinate
rotation command was issued.
P270 NO MACRO SPEC • Check the specifications.
A macro specification was commanded
though there are no such command
specifications.
P271 NO MACRO INT. • Check the specifications.
A macro interrupt command has been
issued though it is not included in the
specifications.
P272 MACRO ILL. • Reconsider the program and place the
A statement and a macro statement exist executable statement and macro statement
together in the same block. in separate blocks.
P273 MACRO OVERCALL • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The number of macro call nests the macro calls do not exceed the limit
exceeded the specifications. imposed by the specification.
P275 MACRO ARG. EX. • Reconsider the program.
The number of macro call argument type
II sets has exceeded the limit.
P276 CALL CANCEL • Reconsider the program.
A G67 command was issued though it • The G67 command is the call cancel
was not during the G66 command modal. command and so the G66 command must be
designated first before it is issued.
P277 MACRO ALM MESG • Refer to the operator messages on the DIAG
An alarm command has been issued in screen.
#3000. • Refer to the instruction manual issued by the
machine manufacturer.

A - 12
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P280 EXC. [ ‚ • Reconsider the program and correct it so the

The number of parentheses “[” or “]” number of “[” or “]” does not exceed five.
which can be commanded in a single
block has exceeded five.
P281 [ ‚ ] ILLEGAL • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The number of “[” and “]” parentheses “[” and “]” parentheses are paired up properly.
commanded in a single block does not
match.
P282 CALC. IMPOSS. • Reconsider the program and correct the
The arithmetic formula is incorrect. formula.
P283 DIVIDE BY ZERO • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The denominator of the division is zero. the denominator for division in the formula is
not zero.
P290 IF SNT. ERROR • Reconsider the program.
There is an error in the IF conditional
GOTO statement.
P291 WHILE SNT. ERR • Reconsider the program.
There is an error in the WHILE
conditional DO -END statement.
P292 SETVN SNT. ERR • Reconsider the program.
There is an error in the SETVN • The number of characters in the variable
statement when the variable name name of the SETVN statement must be 7 or
setting was made. less.
P293 DO-END EXCESS • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The number of ’s for DO-END in the the number of ’s in the DO – END statement
WHILE conditional DO – END does not exceed 27.
statement has exceed 27.
P294 DO-END MMC. • Reconsider the program and correct it so that
The DO’s and END’s are not paired off the DO’s and END’s are paired off properly.
properly.
P295 WHILE/GOTO TPE • During tape operation‚ a program which
There is a WHILE or GOTO statement on includes a WHILE or GOTO statement
the tape during tape operation. cannot be executed and so the memory
operation mode is established instead.
P296 NO ADR (MACRO) • Review the program.
A required address has not been
specified in the user macro.
P297 ADR-A ERR. • Review the program.
The user macro does not use address A
as a variable.
P298 PTR OP (MACRO) • Review the program.
User macro G200‚ G201‚ or G202 was
specified during tape or MDI operation.
P300 VER. NAME ERROR • Reconsider the variable names in the
The variable names have not been program and correct them.
commanded properly.

A - 13
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P301 VAR NAME DUPLI • Correct the program so that the name is not
The name of the variable has been duplicated.
duplicated.
P350 NO SCALING SPC • Check the specifications.
The scaling command (G50, G51) when
the scaling specifications were not
available.
P360 NO PROG.MIRR. • Check the specifications.
A mirror image (G50.1 or G51.1)
command has been issued though the
programmable mirror image
specifications are not provided.
P370 NO OPOS MR SPC • Check the specifications.
The facing turret mirror image
specifications are not provided.
P371 MIRR ILLEGAL • Check the program.
Facing turret mirror image was • Check the parameters.
commanded to an axis for which external
mirror image or parameter mirror image
is valid.
Facing turret mirror image validating
mirror image for a rotary axis was
commanded.
P380 NO CORNER R/C • Check the specifications.
A command was issued for corner • Remove the corner chamfering/corner
chamfering/corner rounding though there rounding command from the program.
are no such specifications.
P381 NO ARC R/C SPC • Check the specifications.
Corner chamfering/corner rounding was
specified in the arc interpolation block
although corner chamfering/corner
rounding II is unsupported.
P382 CORNER NO MOVE • Replace the block succeeding the corner
The block next to corner chamfering/ chamfering/corner rounding command by
corner rounding is not a movement G01 command.
command.
P383 CORNER SHORT • Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding
In the corner chamfering/corner rounding less than the movement distance since this
command‚ the movement distance was distance is shorter than the corner chamfering/
shorter than the value in the corner corner rounding.
chamfering/corner rounding command.
P384 CORNER SHORT • Make the corner chamfering/corner rounding
When the corner chamfering/corner less than the movement distance since this
rounding command was input‚ the distance in the following block is shorter than
movement distance in the following block the corner chamfering/corner rounding.
was shorter than the length of the corner
chamfering/corner rounding.

A - 14
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P385 G0 G33 IN CONR • Recheck the program.

A block with corner chamfering/corner
rounding was given during G00 or G33
modal.
P390 NO GEOMETRIC • Check the specifications.
A geometric command was issued
though there are no geometric
specifications.
P391 NO GEOMETRIC 2 • Check the specifications.
There are no geometric IB specifications.
P392 LES AGL (GEOMT) • Correct the geometric angle.
The angular difference between the
geometric line and line is 1° or less.
P393 INC ERR (GEOMT) • Specify this block by an absolute value.
The second geometric block was
specified by an incremental value.
P394 NO G01 (GEOMT) • Specify the G01 command.
The second geometric block contains no
linear command.
P395 NO ADRS (GEOMT) • Recheck the program.
The geometric format is invalid.
P396 PL CHG. (GEOMT) • Execute the plane switching command
A plane switching command was before geometric command processing.
executed during geometric command
processing.
P397 ARC ERR (GEOMT) • Recheck the geometric circular arc command
In geometric IB‚ the circular arc end point and the preceding and following commands.
does not contact or cross the next block
start point.
P398 NO GEOMETRIC 1B • Check the specifications.
Although the geometric IB specifications
are not included‚ a geometric command
is given.
P421 PRAM. IN ERROR • Check the program.
• The specified parameter number or set
data is illegal.
• An illegal G command address was
input in parameter input mode.
• A parameter input command was input
during fixed cycle modal or nose R
compensation.

A - 15
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P430 AXIS NOT RET. • Execute reference point return manually.

• A command was issued to move an • The command was issued to an axis for
axis‚ which has not returned to the which axis removal is validated so invalidate
reference point‚ away from that axis removal.
reference point.
• A command was issued to an axis
removal axis.
P431 NO 2nd REF. SPC • Check the specifications.
A command for second‚ third or fourth
reference point return was issued though
there are no such command
specifications.
P434 COLLATION ERR • Check the program.
One of the axes did not return to the start
position when the origin point collate
command (G27) was executed.
P435 G27/M ERROR • An M code command cannot be issued in a
An M command was issued G27 command block and so the G27
simultaneously in the G27 command command and M code command must be
block. placed in separate blocks.
P436 G29/M ERROR • An M code command cannot be issued in a
An M command was issued G29 command block and so the G29
simultaneously in the G29 command command and M code command must be
block. placed in separate blocks.
P438 NOT USE (G52) • Review the program.
A local coordinate system command was
issued during execution of the G54.1
command.
P450 NO CHUCK BARR. • Check the specification.
The chuck barrier on command (G22)
was specified although the chuck barrier
was undefined in the specification.
P460 TAPE I/O ERROR • Check the power and cable of the connected
An error has arisen in the tape reader or‚ devices.
alternatively‚ in the printer during macro • Check the I/O device parameters.
printing.
P461 FILE I/O ERROR • In memory mode, the programs stored in
A file of the machining program cannot memory may have been destroyed. Output
be read. all of the programs and tool data once and
format them.
• Ensure that the external device (including a
floppy disk drive and IC card) that contains
the file is mounted.
P462 DNC ERROR • L01 DNC ERROR is displayed
A communication error occurred during simultaneously, so remedy the problem
the BTR operation. according to the error No.

A - 16
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P480 NO MILL SPEC • Check the specification.

• Milling was commanded when the milling
specifications were not provided.
• Pole coordinate interpolation was
commanded when the pole coordinate
interpolation specifications were not
provided.
P481 MILL ILL. G • Check the program.
• An illegal G code was used during the
milling mode.
• An illegal G code was used during
cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate
interpolation.
• The G07.1 command was issued during
the tool radius compensation.
P482 MILL ILL. AXIS • Check the machining program, parameters
• A rotary axis was commanded during the and PLC I/F signal.
milling mode.
• Milling was executed even though an
illegal value was set for the milling axis
No.
• Cylindrical interpolation or pole
coordinate interpolation was commanded
during mirror image.
• Cylindrical interpolation or pole
coordinate interpolation was commanded
before the tool compensation was
completed after the T command.
• G07.1 was commanded when cylindrical
interpolation was not possible (there is no
rotary axis, or external mirror image is
ON).
• An axis other than a cylindrical coordinate
system axis was commanded during
cylindrical interpolation.
P484 MILL AXIS RET. • Carry out manual reference point return.
• Movement was commanded to an axis
that had not completed reference point
return during the milling mode.
• Movement was commanded to an axis
that had not completed reference point
return during cylindrical interpolation or
pole coordinate interpolation.

A - 17
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P485 MILL ILL. MODAL • Check the program.

• The milling mode was turned ON during • Before issuing G12.1, issue G40 or G97.
nose R compensation or constant surface • Before issuing G12.1, issue a T command.
speed control. • Before issuing G13.1, issue G40.
• A T command was issued during the • Specify the radius value of a cylinder other
milling mode. than 0, or specify the X axis’s current value
• The mode was switched from milling to other than 0 before issuing G12.1/G16.
cutting during tool compensation.
• Cylindrical interpolation or pole
coordinate interpolation was commanded
during the constant surface speed control
mode (G96).
• The command unacceptable in the
cylindrical interpolation was issued.
• A T command was issued during the
cylindrical interpolation or pole coordinate
interpolation mode.
• A movement command was issued when
the plane was not selected just before or
after the G07.1 command.
• A plane selection command was issued
during the pole coordinate interpolation
mode.
• Cylindrical interpolation or pole
coordinate interpolation was commanded
during tool radius compensation.
• The G16 plane in which the radius value
of a cylinder is 0 was specified.
• A cylindrical interpolation or pole
coordinate interpolation command was
issued during program coordinate rotation
(G68).
P486 MILLING ERROR • Check the program.
• The milling command was issued during
the mirror image (when parameter or
external input is turned ON).
• Pole coordinate interpolation, cylindrical
interpolation or milling interpolation was
commanded during facing turret mirror
image.
• The start command of the cylindrical
interpolation or polar coordinate
interpolation was issued during the
normal line control.

A - 18
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P511 SYNC CODE ERR • Check the program.

• Two or more synchronization M codes
were commanded in the same block.
• The synchronization M code and "!" code
were commanded in the same block.
P600 NO AUTO TLM. • Check the specifications.
An automatic tool length measurement
command (G37) was execute though
there are no such command
specifications.
P601 NO SKIP SPEC. • Check the specifications.
A skip command (G31) was issued
though there are no such command
specifications.
P602 NO MULTI SKIP • Check the specifications.
A multiple skipping command (G31.1‚
G31.2 or G31.3) was issued though there
are no such command specifications.
P603 SKIP SPEED 0 • Specify the skip speed.
The skip speed is 0.
P604 TLM ILL. AXIS • Specify only one axis.
No axis or more than one axis was
specified in the automatic tool length
measurement block.
P605 T-CMD IN BLOCK • Specify this T code before the block.
The T code is in the same block as the
automatic tool length measurement
block.
P606 NO T-CMD BEFOR • Specify this T code before the block.
The T code was not yet specified in
automatic tool length measurement.
P607 TLM ILL. SIGNL • Check the program.
Before the area specified by the D
command or decelerating area
parameter d‚ the measurement position
arrival signal went ON. The signal
remains OFF to the end.
P608 SKIP ERROR (CC) • Specify a radius compensation cancel (G40)
A skip command was specified during command’ or remove the skip command.
radius compensation processing.

A - 19
 Appendix 2. Program Error

Error No. Details Remedy

P610 ILLEGAL PARA. • Check whether #1549 Iv0vR1 to #1553

• The parameter setting is not correct. Iv0vR5 are set in descending order (in order
• G114.1 was commanded when the of large values).
spindle synchronization with PLC I/F • Check whether #1554 Iv0rd2 to #1557 Iv0rd5
command was selected. are set in descending order.
• G113 was commanded when the • Check and correct #1514 expLinax and
spindle-spindle polygon machining option #1515 expRotax.
was OFF and the spindle synchronization • Check the program.
with PLC I/F command was selected. • Check the parameter.
P612 EXP. ERROR • Check the program.
A movement command for exponential
function interpolation was issued during
facing turret mirror image.
P700 CMD-VALUE ILL. • Check the program.
Spindle synchronization was • Check the parameter.
commanded to a spindle that is not
connected serially.
P900 NO TANZ. SPEC • Check the specifications.
A normal line control command (G40.1,
G41.1, G42.1) was issued when the
normal line control specifications were
not provided.
P901 TAN. AXIS G92 • Check the program.
A coordinate system preset command
(G92) was issued to a normal line control
axis during normal line control.
P902 TAN. AXIS LINE • Correct the normal line control axis.
• The normal line control axis was set to a
linear axis.
• The normal line control axis was set to the
linear type rotary axis II axis.
• The normal line control axis has not been
set.
• The normal line control axis was the same
as the plane selection axis.
P903 PLANE CHG (TAN) • Delete the plane selection command (G17,
The plane selection command (G17, G18, G19) from the program for normal line
G18, G19) was issued during normal line control.
control.
P990 PREPRO S/W ERR • Reduce the number of commands that
Combining commands that required require pre-reading or delete such
pre-reading (nose R offset‚ corner commands.
chamfering/corner rounding‚ geometric I‚
geometric IB‚ and fixed cycle for
compound lathe) resulted in eight or
more pre-read blocks.

A - 20
 Revision History

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

BNP-B2181* First edition created.

Aug. 2000 BNP-B2181A The content of "MELDAS64 INSTRUCTION MANUAL (SUPPLEMENT)"

(BNP-B2248) was reflected.

Sept. 2001 BNP-B2181B • The contents revised to correspond to M64AS, M64S, M65S and M66S.
• Miswrite is corrected.
• Design of the cover and the back cover were changed.
• Manual name changed from "MELDAS 64/65 Programming Manual" to
"MELDAS 60/60S Series Programming Manual".
• MODEL, MODEL CODE, and Manual No. were added on the back cover.

Apr. 2002 BNP-B2181C • Revisions to comply with M60S system software version B0
• Miswrite is corrected.

Mar. 2003 BNP-B2181D • Revisions to comply with M60S system software version B3

May 2004 BNP-B2181E • Revisions to comply with M60S system software version C0 and C1
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some
unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.

Duplication Prohibited
This instruction manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole,
without written permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

© 2000 - 2004 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
HEAD OFFICE : MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG., 2-2-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

MODEL M60/60S Series/MAGIC64 (L)

MODEL
CODE 005-234

Manual No. BNP-B2181E(ENG)

Specifications subject to change without notice.
(0405) MEE Printed in Japan on recycled paper.